James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 0:26:25 GMT
December 1984: Libya
The majority of the world’s communist and revolutionary socialist nations had long sent military officers, intelligence personnel and diplomats to the Soviet Union to study and undergo training there. Many of the world’s terrorists had too made the journey. All expenses paid trips weren’t for nothing though on either end. For developing nations inside or entering the Soviet sphere, they received back personnel who had learnt much during their time spread in the world’s leading communist nation. The Soviets proclaimed fraternal friendship and sought the prestige yet they also established personal contacts with those who came to their nation away from the spying eyes of their own countrymen back home. There was time to impress, woo and convert the visitors who came from across the globe.
Colonel Khalifa Belqasim Haftar was one of those who’d spent time inside the Soviet Union. Gaddafi had sent his fellow Libya military officer on that trip, Haftar being one of the original men who’d help depose King Idris back in 1969 alongside him. He was one of Gaddafi’s closest confidants. The KGB had targeted Haftar for one of their long-term manipulation schemes. He gave them information during his time in their country and once he returned to Libya. He did so for many motives, conflicting ones even, but he wasn’t forced to betray neither his country nor his leader. He saw his actions where he liaised with the KGB as only helping both. Gaddafi had appointed Haftar to command the Malta operation and Haftar had done as tasked: taken control of the island on time and perfectly according to the plan. Gifts and platitudes were delivered to Haftar from Gaddafi on behalf of the Libyan people but also (supposedly) the Maltese as well for how he had saved that little country from becoming a warzone by filling it with Libyan troops. At the end of November, Haftar had returned to Libya. Gaddafi tasked him with something else of great importance. That was for Haftar to oversee internal security for the secretive oil shipping to Western Europe via intermediaries. Gaddafi still believed that the Soviets wouldn’t find out though conversely believed too that if they did, they would understand. He wanted to make sure that he had control over the information about this though and so used the ‘trusted’ Haftar. What a mistake this was.
Within days, Haftar let the KGB know what was going on. He did so because he too feared that they would discover this and turn on Libya. By telling them before they found out by themselves, Haftar hoped to control what happened. He had no idea of the reaction in Moscow to the information he passed on. Tankers with Libyan oil supposed going to countries which the Soviet Union was not in a dispute with and trying to blackmail into accepting its own oil but were really bound for use in France and Italy (those who stood defiantly in Moscow’s way) through Swiss and Yugoslavian middlemen. Gaddafi was aiding the enemies of the Soviet Union. He was doing so just to enrich himself and keep his personal regime in power, not for any other reason than could be in any way understood if anyone in Moscow wanted to take the time to consider being reasonable. There was no mood to do that. Vorotnikov could have himself or used Gromyko to tell Gaddafi to stop this. That was what Haftar thought would be done. That wasn’t to be though. The KGB came back to him and offered him much. They knew he was an ambitious man and that he had dreams for himself as one day replacing Gaddafi should anything terrible befall the country’s leader. Haftar was told that something terrible was about to befall Gaddafi and that the Soviet Union would back him – fully – should he make that occur. Do it for Libya, do it for yourself. Haftar hesitated. He kept the KGB waiting for an answer for a week in early December. He spent time alone, with Gaddafi and among other Libyan military officers at the top of the regime. The KGB watchers lost track of him, themselves always trying to dodge Libyan official attention. In Moscow, Vorotnikov demanded to know if Haftar was going to do this. Was he or had he got cold feet? Or had he betrayed the scheme to Gaddafi and threw himself at the mercy of his leader? Would Haftar have to join Gaddafi in the grave which Vorotnikov intended to see the latter in?
Without meeting his handler personally, just passing on a coded message, Haftar launched a coup d’état to topple Gaddafi. Unlike the last time Libya’s regime was toppled, this one fifteen years later, Haftar’s coup was bloody. It started with the death of Abu-Bakr Yunis Jabr, the nation’s defence minister. Jabr was very close to Gaddafi, one of his true right-hand men and closer to the leader than Haftar would ever be. The assassination of Jabr set off an attack on Gaddafi’s powerbase. His headquarters in Tripoli, where he pitched his tents inside the Bab-al Azizia, was then struck by troops loyal to Haftar. These men had been those he had led into battle against Egypt earlier in the year and into Malta. They didn’t understand all that was going on yet did as tasked. Gaddafi wasn’t there in the famous compound. Haftar had been sure that he was yet his information was wrong. Forces and officials loyal to the leader were killed and Tripoli effectively under Haftar’s control though. Then it was the matter of getting Gaddafi.
The KGB could have told Haftar that Gaddafi was in Sirte, a town along the coast between Tripoli and Benghazi which was his tribal home, before he struck at the Bab-al Azizia. They would have ‘helped’ with the coup in other ways too. However, he did things his own way. The information was passed onto him afterwards though that delay – where Haftar had no idea where Gaddafi was and therefore his coup was stalled – did allow for a shaken Gaddafi to pull some strength to him. Loyal forces gathered in Sirte with the country heading towards a civil war. Gaddafi made a mistake though, another fatal one. He could have crushed Haftar by rallying his people to put this all down yet he panicked at the thought that Haftar had too much strength to take on in a direct fight unless more loyalists came to Sirte first. He had no idea either that Haftar was working on behalf of the KGB. If he knew that, he wouldn’t have made all the effort he did to contact Moscow. While he engaged in a desperate attempt to draw support, instead of going on the attack, Haftar gained in strength.
Gaddafi attempted to contact Vorotnikov directly but was rebuffed. Vorotnikov had no ties to the man beforehand and he taken great offense at Gaddafi acting behind his back. Gromyko was tasked to talk with Gaddafi. Delay him, Vorotnikov said, while Haftar twiddles his thumbs instead getting on with killing him. Gaddafi assured the Soviet foreign minister of his loyalty. He said that his country was in this war alongside the Soviet Union fully and he could be counted upon to crush the capitalists and the imperialists before Libya and the Soviet Union could together turn on the Zionists. For the time being, Libya would commit itself greater to the conflict than it already was. Libya’s army and air force would fight everywhere needed. The Islamic Pan-African Legion, Gaddafi’s mercenary army that the Soviets regarded as more of a danger to itself than anyone else should it see battle, was said by Gaddafi to be ready to march through Texas (if sent there) and defeat the Americans in battle. He just needed some help now. Gromyko strung Gaddafi along. He kept him talking for several days, feigning delays of his own. Troops streamed towards Sirte where Gaddafi was in the intervening time. There were loyalists and rebels. With the latter, Haftar – who’d made himself a general; Libya’s first since ’69 – was having trouble convincing more of Libya’s armed forces to his own side. The power of Gaddafi had faded somewhat when it was known that he had run away but he was still Gaddafi, the man who had run Libya for so long. Haftar’s rebels took a long time to get to where the final battle would be and from watching eyes afar, the Soviets considered the correlation of forces when it came to a fight for Sirte. Gaddafi might not win but he might not lose either, thus maybe escaping if possible to fight onwards. For now though, he was in one place.
The afternoon of December 14th, when Gaddafi was talking to Gromyko over a satellite-phone link-up, saw a trio of Soviet aircraft arrive over Sirte after flying from Bulgaria via the Aegean. Libyan air defence was in the hands of Soviet ‘advisers’ or Haftar’s rebels and the flight of these aircraft wasn’t molested. One at a time, the Bears dropped three huge bombs five minutes apart. Huge explosions ripped through Sirte with the rolling fireballs going on for several minutes each time. Above ground it was utter devastation while down in the many bunkers below Sirte, where Gaddafi was trying to run his country from, there were scenes of hell in the close confines. Thermobaric bombs had been used on Sirte, big weapons with the explosive power equivalent of eight tons of TNT each with live-tests of these weapons (which the Soviets aimed to use elsewhere soon) conducted over a real target. Such was the end of Sirte and Gaddafi too.
Haftar’s forces were impacted by the Sirte bombing but their opponents were destroyed. In the days and weeks afterwards, Haftar and his rebels took control of the rest of the nation. Scattered Gaddafi loyalists, men who didn’t believe he was dead, still fought and died for him. Soviet interference was limited, mainly technical, and Haftar showed his worth when it came to getting rid of the last vestiges of the regime. Libyan oil would no longer be going to Western Europe. However, Haftar wasn’t exactly pro-Soviet. He considered himself a Libyan patriot instead. His politics weren’t to their taste. A proud, devious man he was too. Vorotnikov cared little for him and his delays as well as how he had acted in a lonesome manner to take on Gaddafi rather than doing everything under Soviet guidance. Haftar’s future wasn’t one that Moscow would consider to be very long indeed.
December 1984: China
Long before Taiwan’s leader Chiang Ching-kuo had rejected the Soviet offer to bring down the government on the mainland together, Taiwan had been active inside China itself getting ready to do that all by its lonesome. The start of the China War had seen this begin. Taiwan would prepare for the collapse of order, before or after a defeat for the Beijing Government, and once the defeat came, Taiwanese forces would move in to restore that order. The mainland would be retaken, Chiang would fulfil the dreams of his father. When that Soviet approach was made, it hadn’t come as a complete surprise. Back in 1969 the same thing had happened too. China and the Soviet Union had been on the verge of full-scale warfare then, only averted at the last minute though with brutal border clashes having taken place, and the elder Chiang had spoken with the Soviets (at the latter’s behest) about working together at that point before a change in Moscow’s position brought such an idea to an end. This time around, Chiang broke off contact with the Soviets when it came to working together and promised the Americans that he would do no such thing. He specifically omitted any mention promise of Taiwan not trying to do this itself.
It had been Taiwanese agents who had planted a bomb which had nearly killed Hu Yaobang. Chiang was no baby prince inheriting his father’s hard work and wasting himself & his country. He’d been the head of the secret police while his father reigned and done a good job running his nation since taking over. Cunning and with caution employed in everything he did, Chiang was determined that he would be the winner of the China War once it was over, not Moscow. Failing to get rid of Hu had been a disappointment though he did believe that if his agents on the mainland weren’t able to get him when they had another go, the Soviets would do so. He waited on the death of China’s leader and the country’s sure ceasefire with the Soviets where the country would then fall apart ready for Taiwanese forces to move in and the Republic of China to move it’s capital across to the mainland.
To the uninformed outsider, the ability of Taiwan to do this looked impossible. China was huge, Taiwan was tiny. The population difference, the military numbers and everything else seemed to be in China’s favour in a straight-up China-vs.-Taiwan fight. That was all true. However, Soviet (and Mongolian) armies occupied massive portions of China and had destroyed so much of China’s military might. The nation’s internal security had collapsed in so many places due to nuclear strikes and then the resulting fallout – literal and metaphorical – from that. Taiwan’s military forces might have been dwarfed by the armies that China had yet the Soviets had ripped many of those apart and subjected others to nuclear attack. When it came to the Taiwanese armed forces, they maintained strong strike forces including a pair of marine divisions, paratroopers, a lot of deployable armour along with both an army and an air force up to Western standards. This would allow for limited operations on the mainland where Taiwan could punch above its weight as long as those didn’t ultimately entail a fight for the whole nation against everything that China would possibly throw at them. Of course though, China was a nuclear-armed nation whereas Taiwan wasn’t. That cancelled out so many of these already-limited Taiwanese advantages. Until Chinese nuclear weapons were off the table, Chiang’s bigger plans were still impossible.
All along the Chinese coast from south of the radioactive hole in the ground where Shanghai had once been, down as far as Hainan Island, Taiwanese military activity had commenced starting two weeks into the China War. Reconnaissance parties had been active onshore while in the skies and the seas, the Taiwanese had been inside Chinese territory too. There had come clashes with the Chinese, small affairs but with full intensity in them. Chinese forces moved away northwards though and the Taiwanese got bolder where they moved forward to establish a forward presence on Chinese soil ready for later arrivals of bigger forces. Coastal parts of Zhejiang, Fujian and Guangdong provinces – those facing Taiwan – saw a strong Taiwanese military presence where the invaders stepped out of the shadows at times. Hainan and the Leizhou Peninsula was where that was particularly strong. Communications further inland for the Chinese were already extremely difficult down there who faced ambush and explosions with what some believed were Soviet raiders operating far from the frontlines before it became very clear that these weren’t Spetsnaz but Taiwanese commandos. There had already been open air and naval clashes between Chinese and Taiwanese forces over and in the Taiwan Straits during this war yet as December came to a close, all the evidence was there for Hu’s government in Nanchang that Taiwan was in the early stages of an invasion no matter what Chiang had told the Americans last month.
Far away to the north, winter on the North China Plain meant the cold coming down from Siberian across the Mongolian Steppe and into this cradle of Chinese civilisation. Soviet armies were present here, concentrating in force after moving through Inner Mongolia and Manchuria after defeating China’s best armies. There were reinforcements for the China War pouring in though they were still a long way behind. These massing armies were waiting for better weather in a few months time before going south. It was hoped in Moscow that by then the Chinese would have come to their senses yet the concentration of forces was taking place if Hu refused to. These troops took over security duties south of Beijing and the Yellow River’s lower reaches where last month so many other Soviet troops had taken immense casualties holding the region. Chinese guerrilla warfare, organised after a fashion, was intense and was dealt with using brutality. The Soviets used heavy conventional fire power as well as gas. In the middle of the ‘pacification campaign’ there came a nuclear exchange on the frontlines further south. Once again, the Chinese fired first in yet another unauthorised action made by local commanders. A single Chinese nuclear strike detonated by the firing of an artillery shell was answered with half a dozen counterblows on a tactical level. Soldiers from both sides lost their lives but the majority of casualties came among civilians. The Soviets had been of the belief that they had taken care of all Chinese nuclear weapons beyond Hu’s direct control and that he wouldn’t dare fire on them again. They were only half right in that.
The December 10th exchange saw an increase afterwards in Soviet long-range air and Spetsnaz activity outside of their extensive occupation zone. They struck even further afield at Chinese military targets where there was any hint that there might be nuclear weapons there. Chinese skies belonged to Soviet aircraft, a situation which those in North America could only dream of. Their special forces were able to range far afield – leading to that initial belief in Nanchang that it was them active along the southern coastline – though didn’t have as an easy time as the aircraft did. China’s masses might be fleeing in panic in their millions and dying in their millions too, but millions more were armed. Many occasions saw the Spetsnaz raiding teams caught and pinned down by hundreds of armed opponents who gave everything into killing them. Other strikes came against what further armies China was trying to form to head to the frontlines. The Soviets blasted these where they found them and also hit transport nodes ahead of them to slow their progress. However, these were still so many armed men all being marched northwards, more than any Soviet air attacks could stop.
Into Hong Kong and Macau Chinese civilians still fled to ahead of the war approaching them despite the British and Portuguese colonial authorities in each trying to stop them. There were others who went to Taiwan as they took the difficult journey across the water. More refugees made even more perilous journeys into further neighbouring countries from India to Burma to Laos and even to Vietnam. Then there were those boat people too, the ones heading even further afield and still preyed upon by pirates. The welcomes awaiting them were considered better than what they were fleeing from. So many didn’t survive the journey, either close to home or far away. Still, Chinese people left their country. There was no sign of this stopping any time soon, war or no war at home due to the aftereffects of the nuclear strikes which had hit the nation.
Nanchang remained home to Hu’s government. The Soviets had still not made any serious attack against the city as there remained the belief that Hu would ‘see sense’ when it came to the situation his country was in. They didn’t want to kill him because despite all his troubles with rebellious generals and their nuclear weapons, only he was considered the one with the power to take China out of the war and see that achieved. Hu was aware that that was the reason why Nanchang hadn’t joined so many other Chinese cities in nuclear annihilation: it wasn’t a big mystery. All Soviet approaches continued to be rebuffed though. China under his leadership wasn’t going to give in. The belief was that the Soviets would bleed themselves to death soon enough and that the will of the Chinese people would overcome the foreign invaders. Hu told the Americans this belief of his and how the whole of the Chinese people were behind him. He was sure of this, certain that despite all the horrors of the war so far, that soon enough ultimate victory would come. Nuclear fallout, the breakdown of civil order, tens of millions fleeing the nation and even the Taiwanese activities were not going to break Hu on this. He stood firm… and as long as he did, the Soviet Union would continue to send fighting men of its own to China, all soldiers not sent elsewhere in the world.
December 1984: The Western Pacific and Korea
The US Navy’s Pacific Fleet had faced atrocious weather further north off the Soviet Far East and moved southwards in response. Operations under that bitter winter weather were possible yet they were costly where far too many accidents occurred. High-tempo operations by the Pacific Fleet since the start of the war were already taking their toll with further accidents occurring due to tired personnel and also overused equipment. Moving southwards gave the US Navy the time to ease off – not cease – their operations. No longer would they be striking at the Soviet coastline yet they were active still over the Korean Peninsula and increasingly above the edges of China too. The plan was to go back north next year to attack the Soviets again. Plenty of damage had been done up there and there was the real fact that targets were running out. The Chinese nuclear destruction of Vladivostok only added to that. By the Spring, it was hoped that the US Navy would have something new to shoot at when their opponents used the opportunity to bring in new forces ready to be lined up for American attention.
The aircraft carriers USS Kitty Hawk first and then afterwards the USS Ranger made short visits to Yokosuka naval base with each aiming to leave again once January came. Not dry-docked but tied up in sheltered waters, urgent work was done on these two carriers that couldn’t be done while out in the open sea. Other vessels made stops in Yokosuka too while a few more went to either the distant Pearl Harbour or the closer Subic Bay. Two more of the American’s carriers, USS Constellation and USS Enterprise, remained at sea with their battle groups through December. Each of them faced the continued risk of coming under attack like others in the Pacific Fleet had earlier in the war and the Atlantic Fleet’s carriers were still seeing. They stayed mobile and on alert at all times, confident on the face of it that such attacks could be defeated though always moving about in unpredictable manners to avoid those. The Constellation was joined by the Enterprise (free of its Kamchatka mission) which moved in to support the other and the two of them operated in the Tsushima Straits and the East China Sea with aircraft from them ranging north and west. North Korean and Soviet air and naval forces were engaged and there came strikes made over land as well. Soviet encroachment along the Chinese coast took up more and more importance. The carrier’s air wings were diverted from Korean operations to give an increase in focus over China and its waters as the month wore on. The Soviets had airbases on Chinese soil and countered US Navy air operations when possible. Aerial combat in the cold skies went on and if the losers of those survived the clashes in the air, they faced an uncertain fate coming down over land of water anywhere in the region with the Yellow Sea being certainly the most-lethal place to land atop.
The fighting in the East China Sea drew in the forces of other members of the Allies too. The Soviets had some submarines present but no surface forces. It was what they had on land, through occupied portions of China, which America’s allies fought against: plenty of aircraft which ranged far out. Australia and New Zealand sent ships to join those of Japan in either directly supporting the carrier operations or taking part in rear area missions. War still raged in Japan’s skies – having eased off some but not finished – and over in South Korea. Neither of those showed any sign of coming to a stop at any time soon, the fight in the Korean Peninsula especially. With the Soviets operating their aircraft from China too, this put them on the exposed flank of the fight that the Allies had there. This meant that ideas at the top of the US Government, which the US Navy opposed, to detach one or even two Pacific Fleet carriers (the Kitty Hawk and the Ranger) and send them all the way across the Pacific, round the bottom of South America and then up into the North Atlantic didn’t come to fruition. It would be a long journey for them, all the time while out of action, and the fight in East Asia was only getting bigger for the US Navy. The carriers would be staying with the Pacific Fleet; the Atlantic Fleet would just have to make do with what little it had left.
The entry of (relatively) small but capable Soviet forces to the fight in South Korea had brought about serious change there. The Seoul Pocket had been reformed and that Australian-led commonwealth force, alongside South Korean forces, had taken a beating at their hands. The Soviets had eventually come to a stop in their advance, linking up with large numbers of North Korean infantry who’d been unable to do anything without any real fire support and mobility when so far inside South Korea. Before that additional support could benefit the North Koreans on another attack, the Americans and South Koreans attacked them. Tired men fought in terrible weather, striking forwards with all that they had under orders to do so. The time wasn’t right for this but it was something that needed to be done. Much of the South Korean First Army along with the Eighth United States Army – with US Marines attached – were thrown into the fight to the south and east of Seoul.
The Geneva Agreement on the no further use of chemical weapons covered the Korean Peninsula yet the United States didn’t consider White Phosphorus (WP) to be a chemical weapon. It was officially used for marking targets and signalling artillery strikes. The fact that as an incendiary weapon it was lethal to humans was something different. Back during the First Korean War in the early Fifties, North Korean forces had then been attacked with WP and suffered horribly. The sons of those men, sent into South Korea during another ‘liberation’, faced the same. The burns and the choking left thousands maimed and thousands more to die gruesome deaths. WP was employed on multiple occasions ahead of Allied attacks along with napalm and conventional weapons. US Marines used plenty of it, breaking up what were in effect human wave attacks against them by the North Koreans when machine guns and artillery just wouldn’t stop them. WP did though.
For several weeks, the North Koreans were pounded. Allied forces took heavy loses alongside those they fought through. The gains didn’t seem worth it to those on the ground in the fight as their morale plummeted being forced to attack in terrible weather against an enemy which while they could overcome, always seem to have more men to throw into the next line of defences. From afar though, the advance was deemed to be worthwhile. The collapse of the North Koreans was noted as huge holes were torn in their lines which armour poured through to break them up into pockets to be taken on individually. Observations were made of the Soviets too with their pair of motor rifle divisions assigned to the Sixty–Eighth Army Corps. They stayed still while this happened, not intervening. Questions were asked by the Americans and the South Koreans as to what they were doing. Were they waiting to strike in a counterattack? Were they waiting in a defensive role? Were they even aware of the war all around them? No one knew. The Soviets then went back north, going over the River Namhan, an upper tributary of the bigger lower Han River. The withdrawal was done quickly and under air cover. The Allies were taken by surprise at such a thing, wondering why this had been done. Soviet forces don’t withdraw ahead of battle!
They had done so but only to go on the attack several days later. The Sixty–Eighth Corps went southeast along the other side of the Namhan – following its course upstream, not down towards Seoul – and opening up the flank of the Eighth US Army. American and South Korean troops under command scrambled to react, tied up as they were with the North Koreans. Finally, a major engagement took place and the Soviets did come to a stop. Most of a South Korean mechanised division and a portion of the US Army’s 7th Infantry Division fought themselves in a serious fight with the Soviets. They stopped that advance by crossing the river themselves at multiple points down its length ahead of and into the sides of the Soviets, forcing them to stop going forward and fight in a slower battle where the defenders – being the Allies – had the advantage in that. This had been done to the North Koreans before and was now done to the Soviets on the battlefields of South Korea. It had robbed both opponents each time of their momentum in attack and forced them into a fight on ground not of their choosing. It cost many lives though for those striking like this. But it stopped the Soviets and their outflanking advance came to an end. They’d been pretty clever but not enough.
Soviet direct ground intervention wasn’t going to win the war in South Korea unless it was significantly larger than it was: impossible due to the China War still ongoing. They’d hurt Allied forces greatly in both November and December too with what they had sent yet not won the fight here. As to the North Koreans, they were beaten. However, a tremendous amount of South Korean soil was still in enemy hands and behind the lines the horrors of the ‘liberation’ inflicted upon the country continued. As was the case across in China, the war on the Korean Peninsula would keep going while that remained the case and the Allies were still able to fight here. That they did, into 1985.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 0:28:52 GMT
Chapter Nineteen – Settling Scores
January 1985: The two Californias and Arizona
The armies of Democratic Mexico were on the offensive through Baja California. They moved southwards down the peninsula and also eastwards into the Mexicali Valley. The fight was against those serving in the forces of Revolutionary Mexico: rebels and traitors. The going was hard and slow with an opponent who fought back well yet the Tijuana Government’s forces made good progress. They were only able to do this though due to outside support from the Americans and increasingly the Chileans too. On their own, this would have been an impossible task for Democratic Mexico. The fighting on the peninsula ranging southwards was spearheaded by US Marines with the Mexicans in support. The former used their mobility with helicopters and landing craft to leap-frog down the Pacific coastline yet also strike inland through the mountainous spine. The latter were brought in to deal with stubborn and dug-in enemy forces. It was their country after all and if they wanted it back, they would have to fight for it: such was the position of the Americans on this. From the initial entry point of Ensenada secured last month, the 1st Marine Division reached as far south as San Quintin by the end of January. The coastal plain was favourable to the Americans though the mountains just inland remained hard going for the Mexicans fighting alongside them. There came plenty of air support for the Mexicans who fought their fellow countrymen yet it remained them who had to get up-close-and-personal in slugfests through strongholds. On countless occasions, scores were settled when prisoners serving in the army of Revolutionary Mexico – mostly officers though often common soldiers too – were summarily executed because they were seen as traitors. It was an outrage, a violation of the laws of war. It went on though, a lot. General Pinochet had sent Chilean forces to the United States with the aim of seeing them help liberate American soil – a very calculated move on his part – though they ended up fighting in Mexico instead. A mixed brigade-group of marines and paratroopers (with some light armour) aided Democratic Mexico forces in fighting out of the mountains and into the Mexicali Valley. The Chileans didn’t take on easy tasks but were instead right in the thick of the fighting alongside those fighting Mexico’s foreign-backed communists. Once down out of the mountains, the going got easier. Mexicali next to the US border was bypassed at first as the fertile valley was mission goal. It was taken and a link up made with American forces over on the far side who had retaken Yuma last year and moved from there downwards. The Chileans moved towards the Altar Desert and over where more American forces were on Mexican soil; those Mexicans they had fought alongside turned towards Mexicali. A fight began for control of the ruin of that city, one which would go on into February.
The arrival of the Chileans behind them ready to fight was welcomed by the Americans though they were still waiting on an effective resupply to build upon what they had. Portions of the Sixth US Army held onto the shorelines of the Gulf of California and a stretch of road across the desert running back to Yuma, but they remained incapable of doing anything else for the time being. Some fuel and ammunition had come forwards though nowhere near enough. The 5th Armored Brigade – the pre-war OPFOR Group from Fort Irwin – was eager to carry on with the successful war it was having. The way ahead for them was regarded as being open, all the way to deep into inner parts of Sonora if given the chance. That was not to be though. They were ordered to hold where they were for the time being. Above them in Mexico’s skies, there were some aircraft which aviation enthusiasts would have been very interested in when such planes clashed. Flying from MCAS Yuma now that it was free of the extensive Soviet air presence there earlier in the war, the US Air Force had F-5E Tiger light fighters tasked for the Ninth Air Force’s part-detached air division assigned to operations above Mexico alongside some F-4s and F-16s. These were from an aggressor squadron (similar to what the OPFOR Group had been doing) and were good aircraft flown by men who knew what they were doing; other F-5s in US Air Force service were flying in Arizona, Colorado and South Korea with each coming from aggressor units too. On two different occasions when above the Altar Desert and just over the waters at the top of the Gulf of California, the F-5s met French-built fighters. It was Super Mystères the first time, Ouragans on the second occasion. These were aircraft which had served previously in the air arms of Honduras and El Salvador with each of them having been supplied to those now-fallen regimes by the Israelis after they had previously made such good use of them in conflicts in the Middle East. After the fall of each Central American nation, their aircraft had either been destroyed by those who flew them or taken into Nicaraguan service. It was in Nicaraguan colours though flown by pilots from both those nations forced to serve their new masters in Managua that these aircraft showed up in. The Super Mystères fared better then the Ouragans yet each were taken down by the American aggressor pilots whizzing across Mexican skies and out-preforming their opponents. Post-engagement analysis on the part of the Americans questioned the use of such aircraft. The Nicaraguans and Guatemalans both were known to be almost out of Soviet-supplied MiGs but there had hadn’t been the expectation that such aircraft as what were seen would show up. The Soviets were focused elsewhere, even Cuba’s air force was busy in other theatres. This was of great importance for when the fight eventually moved onwards further into the northern parts of Mexico… when the supplies and reinforcements arrived that was.
In Southern California, war devastation was still widespread and crippling for the Americans as they reestablished control over their liberated soil. The huge Los Angeles Basin was one thing but it was further afield than that. The Imperial Valley had been repeatedly fought over and then there had been that pursuit of defeated & fleeing Cubans into Orange County. San Diego County was another site of much ruin. Ground combat, aerial interdiction and the deliberate sabotage (firstly by the Americans then the Cubans too) had wrecked a wide area. On example of the sabotage would be the Northrop Aircraft site at Hawthorne in Orange County, where those F-5s over Mexico were built. There had been a hasty evacuation from there of important equipment and personnel back in October by the Americans where they got out what they could and destroyed much more. The Cubans had then been all over the site – with the GRU too – when the area was occupied yet when the Americans came back, they found that the already partially-destroyed site had been thoroughly destroyed with complete demolitions by the retreating Cubans. The extent of general war damage was highlighted by a stretch of Interstate-8 which ran east-west across the bottom of the Imperial Valley: aka ‘the highway of death’. There were the wrecks of military vehicles as well as civilian cars all across it, burnt out ruins hit from the air over and over again. Cuban supply columns had been struck by B-52s on bomb runs during the push on San Diego and then during the last stages of Cuba’s fight in California, evacuations had been tried down this same road when parts of the earlier wreckage had been pushed aside only to be hit by more American air attacks when A-10s firing their mini-guns turned up. Bodies, in various states of decomposition, littered the vehicle wrecks yet all along the sides too. The whole area was extremely hazardous to human health and it was only one stretch of Southern California’s major roads vying for that title of ‘highway of death’.
American forces inside Southern California were reorganised though January after the fight had moved out of the state elsewhere. The US Marines were already gone but now the parts of the Sixth Army not in Arizona already moved across there. National guardsmen from the US IV Corps shifted eastwards to join the US I Corps. They left behind the 40th Infantry Division – California’s own guardsmen, the men who ‘had run’ from the first fight in L.A. – along with those two incomplete divisions of the Army of the United States who were now never going to be properly formed. Those volunteers and draftees raised in central and northern California who’d been directed into L.A. in a military police role after only a few months in uniform were staying there for the time being. There wasn’t going to be the entry of 23rd and 49th Infantry Division to the US Army’s order of battle as fully-formed divisions. The city of Los Angeles and the whole of Southern California needed their presence for security duties (the police forces had suffered gravely under foreign occupation) but also the big clean-up too.
Guatemala’s First Army – of three weak divisions plus attachments – held on to parts of Arizona still. If it wasn’t for the geographic factor of the Soviets stretching all up the eastern side of the Rocky Mountains nearly cutting the United States in two, they would have been long go defeated even when the whole mess of the Cubans in California had been going on. They should have been torn apart yet remained where they were along southern reaches of the state next to Mexico and then through eastern portions backing onto the mountains behind them. American forces moved in from California and doubled their ground strength as the majority of the Sixth Army was now in Arizona. The Ninth Air Force transferred aircraft across from California too. This movement of already assigned forces with both the Sixth Army and the Ninth Air Force wasn’t followed by any real reinforcement from outside though nor any big resupply either. Especially until the latter came, the Americans could only make limited offensive strikes against the Guatemalans. This was concentrated around the outskirts of Tucson and down near to the Mexican border. Tucson itself remained beyond the American’s grasp though for now. There were a lot of Mexicans there with the Guatemalans: men not well-trained or organised very well yet greatly armed. When they could, the Americans would retake the city but until then they remained fighting around its edges with raids and aggressive patrolling plus air strikes. US aircraft struck at Davis-Monthan AFB and Libby Army Airfield (next to Fort Huachuca) repeatedly, engaging Soviet air units flying from those sites. Far from helpless in the face of air attacks, which the Guatemalans often were, the Soviets struck back. They put together a big air attack late in January which focused upon Phoenix. All around that city, the US Air Force was using the military airbases and the airports for their own air operations which the Soviets went for along with the McDonnel Douglas military helicopter plant at Mesa too. Soviet fighters engaged American interceptors up high while down low there came waves of attack aircraft on strike missions. Aircraft on both sides went down, many of the Soviet ones from ground fire too coming out of Phoenix. The Ninth Air Force would claim a victory though it was a hard won one. The Soviets lost plenty of aircraft and were unable to achieve mission objectives yet they were hardly defeated in the manner than the Americans claimed either. The air battle which saw over two hundred aircraft ultimately involved in clear daylight skies above chilly but sunny Arizona was quite the sight for anyone on the ground to witness.
Flagstaff Airport in east-central Arizona was another centre of American air operations. It was home to two squadrons of A-7D Corsair attack-fighters (national guard units from Arizona) while not that far to the west, the Ninth Air Force had F-16s at Prescott Valley Airport too. The latter were busy with fighter operations and strikes far into the Rockies though did aid the former when they supported the 81st Infantry Brigade spread across eastern Arizona. Out ahead of those national guardsmen on the frontlines were Green Berets as well as Rangers operating inside occupied territory. A wide area was alive with special forces activity alongside the operations undertaken by guerrillas too. Native American tribal lands as well as mountains and forests were dangerous for the Guatemalans. They were safer at the front. The KGB had some people in those dangerous areas and for many of them, January in Arizona was fatal. They were hunted by the Green Berets for kill or capture missions. A big Rangers strike saw Winslow Airport raided, where the Soviets had Sukhoi-17 multirole attack-fighters, with much damage done to the aircraft there. Then there were the guerrillas. They sought targets of opportunity, often Guatemalan patrols or exposed fortified outposts that allowed the occupation to cover such a huge area. American propaganda was painting quite the picture of ongoing guerrilla activities nationwide though didn’t touch upon what was really going on when it came to the brutality shown by guerrillas to those they encountered. This was especially true with alleged collaborators and traitors which they would shoot when captured, even torture at times. There was a lot of settling of scores among locals. Those who hadn’t ‘taken to the hills’ and stayed behind with their families were accused of working with the occupiers. Some had, yet not willingly nor with malice against their fellow Americans. They did so to survive and because they were scared. They were then killed by their former neighbours. Green Beret teams witnessed this on many occasions when working with guerrillas to collect intelligence and also supply them with captured Soviet weaponry. Sometimes they stepped in to intervene and stop this, other times they looked away. The war behind the frontlines when it came to this was as brutal as it was on them.
January 1985: The Rockies
Back in December, five Soviet Army helicopters had been lost to enemy action over the Rocky Mountains west of Denver. During January 1985, that number reached seventeen: a three-fold plus increase. January’s helicopter losses to hostile action (accidents were another disturbing number) included the shooting down of one by an OA-37 Dragonfly light attack-fighter rapid firing its minigun and the downing of another when hit by a pair of RPGs – captured weapons in guerrilla hands – just after take-off. The further fifteen, almost one every other day, were brought crashing to the ground while in flight by the extensive use of man-portable air defence systems. These successful MANPAD hits were a couple of Soviet-manufactured SA-7s fired by the enemy though all the rest were American Redeye and Stinger missiles. There were other missile firings in attempts to down more helicopters with more MANPADs used too: the number of seventeen could have been as high as thirty if they’d all got through. The mountains were full of missile teams who had been brought in to purposely target the helicopters being used to move around & give fire support to the Soviet Airborne present. The 76th Guards Airborne Division needed those helicopters to aid its fight and when they went down, the losses really hurt. Mil-8 Hip assault transports and Mil-24 Hind gunships took the brunt of these attacks against helicopters in-flight. However, both single examples of bigger heavy transport helicopters were taken down as well. Carrying an underslung load of a 2A36 howitzer, a 152mm gun being moved to a new firing position, a Mil-6 Hook helicopter was shot down by a Stinger: the ammunition for that piece of artillery was inside the helicopter and detonated when the Hook crashed. Worse than that was the elimination of an even bigger helicopter, this one a new Mil-26 Halo, which was overloaded with paratroopers carried inside it going into battle. Another Stinger got this one and when the Halo crashed and burnt, just over a hundred men were killed. Attacks by Hind gunships using their mass of carried weapons as well as intelligence-led patrolling on the ground went after the missile teams. The Soviets got themselves American helicopters of their own supporting these men when a couple of UH-1 Hueys were downed and also shot out of the sky was an OV-10 Bronco flying low ready to airdrop another missile team. American helicopters weren’t as prominent in the fight as the Soviet ones were. Instead they were using Broncos and Dragonflys, derided as ‘slow-movers’ by other aircrew in the US Air Force. Tasked for observation & tactical reconnaissance, counter-insurgency and light attack roles, the aircraft supported the fight on the ground at a lower altitude to the ‘fast-movers’ – A-10s and F-4s mainly – higher above them. There was a lot for them to do above the forested mountains through the winter where they were painted in a winter camouflage scheme to remain hidden as best as possible. Such aircraft made use of improvised airstrips all over the place, those protected by the men of the pair of national guard armored cavalry regiments they were supporting as well as Green Beret teams too.
While events in the skies above were important, for those fighting on the ground what they had in front of them in the mountains was of more importance. On each side, the clashes with the other that they had were tough and costly. Neither the Americans nor the Soviets could force any sort of victory through Colorado’s Rocky Mountains. The weather got worse than it had been the month before with the cold and the snow favouring no one. Troops from the two armies fought on with little gain in a series of disjointed, confusing fights. Higher commands of each had come to their senses and realised that neither could win: access to Denver couldn’t be forced open yet neither could it be completely shut off. The forces involved weren’t pulled out though by either the First US Army or the Soviet Twenty–Second Army. The result was that the men left up in the mountains were on their own and without any real purpose but to fight and die just because that was the way things were to be. Guerrilla activity took place around them with Patriot groups and independents in the mountains. Their raids and bombings had purpose to them, that being to kill the occupiers and anyone who was assisting them. Just as was the case down in Arizona, some rather unpleasant events took place and often within view of American special forces teams passing through. Soviet prisoners and also fellow Americans accused of collaboration with the occupier were killed. The guerrillas were hunted by specially brought-in counter-insurgency forces, men who’d helped break resistance in Afghanistan, Iran and Poland in past years as well as recently in parts of Texas. Their actions weren’t of the heavy-handed fashion – artillery strikes and machine-gunning dozens of hostages at a time – employed beforehand but with a more-targeted fashion using informers and technology to do this. Whether they could be successful in this, bringing an end to the mass of guerrilla activity, time would tell there.
In the shadow of the mountains, Denver started the year still under siege. Within weeks though a corridor was opened into the city, one that wasn’t via the air route or the dangerous paths up into the mountains. The whole siege wasn’t lifted, but a major hole was punched into the surrounding forces to the very north and it was widened to a width of four miles across by the end of the month. Boulder was the site of this gap, a town left a ruin when fought over. The Nicaraguans there held back the Americans as long as they could and waited on promised Soviet reinforcement which never came. They could no longer hold on as attacks came from ahead, from behind and from above. A withdrawal was made of what was left of a regiment, one authorised only by the regiment’s acting commanding officer. That major was an experienced man, a good officer with excellent political connections back home too. None of that saved him from a firing squad afterwards. He had withdrawn without higher permission and against orders, opening up Denver to the Americans to link up with their forces inside. The firing squad was formed of his own men under Soviet instruction and once they completed their task, the major’s body was thrown into an unmarked grave. Far away in Managua were the major had those connections with the ruling Sandinistas, they wouldn’t discover this until February and be very unpleased yet unable to do anything about that nor a million other matters that the Nicaraguans had no control over.
Every inch of that opened corridor was exposed to artillery fire. The Soviets couldn’t close it when they made a counterattack with tanks but they aimed to make it near-useless by shelling it. Through Boulder, traffic moved both ways in and out of Denver despite that artillery. What ammunition, fuel, food and medical supplies which could be spared went into Denver. Coming out were wounded American soldiers and some prisoners as well as civilians. The latter moved on foot and were officially barred from making the trip through the military area through no one in uniform was in the mood to try to stop them… many soldiers wished they could join them in fact. The shelling killed civilians on the way out yet those who made it had escaped from the hell which they considered Denver to be. Elsewhere around the city, the siege remained in-place though with other Nicaraguans battling the 82nd Airborne Division and civilian volunteers who defended Denver. The ‘Boulder gap’ was something sought to be repeated elsewhere. With cooperation from those inside, the 4th Infantry Division on the outside attempted to do the same in the Denver suburbs around Aurora. Buckley AFB (unusable) was in America hands outside of the siege lines with Stapleton Airport (partially usable) inside. The Nicaraguans right in between both, dug-in through housing tracks and burnt-out buildings. They wouldn’t be dislodged. Some progress was made in going forward but the Nicaraguans held on: there was a Soviet presence at their local headquarters, the Americans would discover afterwards, forcing the Nicaraguans to not withdraw or do anything but keep fighting. If Aurora could have been opened up, the whole siege could have fallen apart with it. That wasn’t to be. Maybe next month there would be more progress in freeing Denver.
Outside of the city and further eastwards away from Denver, the Soviets and other Nicaraguans not involved in the Denver siege directly held onto a lot of ground through Colorado. They were opposed by a significant Allied force where America’s allies had troops on the ground in number. The Americans themselves had the 174th Infantry Brigade – those soldiers from West Berlin – which formed the US XI Corps with the 4th Infantry Division as the First US Army’s northern force. The Canadians and British were to the south of them. The Canadians had formed a corps command of their own and included men who’d fought last year at Colorado Springs now joined by those who’d taken part in the battles for the upper part of the Alaskan Panhandle. Two Canadian divisions, one of them including a British infantry brigade, had assumed responsibility for a stretch of the frontlines running all the way to the New Mexico state line. It was a wide frontage though stretched over ground which favoured north-south – or south-to-north as the Soviets had done last year – manoeuvre rather than any attack east-west or west-east. The Soviets were constantly improving the defences of their long flank stretching back past Colorado Springs and all the way south against an attack coming with defensive positions including anti-tank guns, minefields and demolitions to create obstacles. The Canadians were looking at going westwards in the coming months as part of a general Allied offensive in the Spring. Reconnaissance efforts saw the Soviet preparations to meet that. It didn’t look like it would be easy for the Canadians to do. Some might have even said it was going to be an impossible task unless some magic trick could be employed. The longer the delay, the longer the Soviets had there to improve what they had.
Not directly attached to either the British 14th Infantry Brigade nor the Canadian I Corps, teams of specialist British officers and NCOs were also in Colorado. They were on an intelligence-gathering mission, looking at the terrain and the enemy. Back in London, there were still discussions ongoing with the national government as to whether the British Army should be sent in number to fight in North America. If they were to, if that decision was to be made to sent tens of thousands rather than just a few thousand to the fight, Colorado was one area being looked at: North Texas, the wider Dallas area, was another location where there was a second team. Matters such as where to locate supply points in the rear were just as important as the ground to be fought over and who was over there. The British Army team was in Colorado for several weeks in the middle of the month. They didn’t like what they saw and their later report wouldn’t give any favour to the idea of this being a place to make the best use of the British Army. The Texan team would paint a better picture. However, no decision on whether make that deployment across the North Atlantic to either had yet to be made back home. Events in Europe as January went on, those made it increasingly unlikely that the British Army could be making the Atlantic crossing too.
January 1985: The Great Plains
Any attempt by Nicaraguan troops with their Second Army to follow their revolt last December in the Texan Panhandle with another one come January was snuffed out fast by Soviet measures to eliminate those who they deemed troublemakers beforehand. Anyone who had complaints that they wished to share about a massacre which didn’t happen were taken care of: a bullet or two would do the job. When the Americans broadcast propaganda messages talking about the killing of thousands of Nicaraguan conscripts sent far from home to a war long beyond their homeland, the Soviets spent much effort into jamming those broadcasts where possible and at other times firing either artillery or tactical missiles at the source of them. They couldn’t afford to have another revolt take place. Until Soviet reinforcements could make the journey all the way to the very top of Texas, deep in the Great Plains, the Nicaraguans were needed to hold the frontlines against the Americans. The KGB was active in this suppression of a second revolt and gave assurances that their measures would work. Not daring to challenge the Chekists on this, the Central Front commander still moved extra forces to the region due to clear signs that the Americans were going to try to take advantage. Soviet forces were moved in too, not those of any of their supposed allies. An anti-tank battalion was dispatched to the area around Plainview with the towed guns & mobile missile-launchers placed in rear-area key points to stop any enemy breakthrough made. Several batteries removed from artillery battalions elsewhere were dispatched to the area where the Nicaraguan Second Army was positioned with the heavy guns there to support those on the frontlines. Air units elsewhere received no order to move and stayed where they were, but were given tasking orders to support the Nicaraguans too. None of this fire support was going to be enough though. Soviet reconnaissance efforts spotted American preparations to make a limited attack and so troops were needed. The only available troops were light ones but they would have to do: the 40th Landing-assault Brigade, the airmobile troops who’d won victory down in Panama back in September, were sent to the region as well to plug the gap in the lines where all those now-dead Nicaraguans had been positioned before.
Texan national guardsmen in tanks and armoured personnel carriers, the 56th Cavalry Brigade, had had to wait before they would move forward again but when given the word come January 5th, they were unleashed. They shot forward, racing towards Plainview when approaching the town from the northwest. Nicaraguan defences were smashed apart and the Texans couldn’t be held. Their attack ignored the area where they had previously opened up a now-filled gap. The arrival of those Soviet troops had been observed: why fight a strong opponent when a weaker one is sitting in front of you? Linking Dimmitt (where the 56th Brigade started their attack from) and Plainview was a good road running alongside a railway line and the course of that was followed. Those Soviet anti-tank units were present and caused some trouble (shells from hidden T-12 anti-tank guns scored some great hits upon M-60A3 tanks) yet as the Americans moved off-road rather than along it directly, these could be dealt with once identified when air support attacked such defences from above. Within two days, Plainview was reached. The Texans got there ahead of a brigade of the 101st Air Assault Infantry Division – part of the US XVIII Corps too – which moved down directly from the north. Nicaraguan troops in Plainview were refused permission to withdraw and stood their ground. They thus died where they stood. Later Soviet attempts to force open what they regarded as the Texan’s open flank came to nought. Their 40th Brigade was unable to get forward effectively with the light troops not being able to pack enough punch. After Plainview, the XVIII Corps was unable to move further forward for now as the attached units didn’t have fuel nor other supplies to go ahead any more: it had only been planned as a limited offensive due to these constraints. They had done enough for now though, smashing apart the right wing of the Second Army for good. There were some Nicaraguans over to the west, on the edges of New Mexico, but their whole previous position in the Texan Panhandle was fatally destroyed. The Soviets withdrew their men to the south in the hope that they could block a drive down to Lubbock come next month if stronger forces didn’t arrive in time yet that couldn’t be guaranteed.
Nicaraguan POWs were meanwhile moved northwards after the battle. They walked northwards towards Amarillo, finally seeing that city which they had previously been tasked to take yet had failed to. Along the way, while under guard from US military police units, the Americans observed outbreaks of violence among the captives. They had previously been searched and weapons removed yet some had hidden knives and other sharp objectives. These were used to kill others. At first glance, the infighting seemed odd. Officers and enlisted men were kept separate and there were no identified political officers among the groups of conscripts where murders occurred. Upon investigation, it was discovered that Hondurans and Salvadorans among the Nicaraguans had been killed by the latter. The men had all been assumed to be Nicaraguans by their captors but they weren’t and there were long-standing nationalistic issues dealt with brutally. The MPs themselves cared little about this and worried only about keeping the men from escaping. Others later on, those in psychological operations roles and propaganda teams, would try to exploit this for the overall war effort where nationalistic divisions could be played upon in a bigger manner.
The fighting over to the west in theory effected the wide flank of the Soviet Twenty–Eighth Army as that hinged upon where the Nicaraguans were upstream along the course of the Red River which separated Texas from Oklahoma. However, the distances were still quite something and the terrain – empty of any major population centres with few east-west communications and full of dry grasslands & barren canyons – didn’t favour as strike from the US XVIII Corps to roll up the Soviets from the side even if they had the strength, which they didn’t, to make such a move. The Twenty–Eighth Army could remain focused on the American forces over in Oklahoma and also those outside the extensive Dallas–Fort Worth area on the edges of the Great Plains. Troops from the Seventh US Army, primarily those from Europe, had brought the Twenty–Eighth Army’s offensive last year to a halt and continued to hold the ground which they had firmly within their grasp. Altus, Davidson, Burkburnett, Gainesville and Sanger were all battles of last year. That series of defeats at those points were all supposed to be in the past. Soviets plans were for the Twenty–Eighth Army to be moved out of the frontlines in the next couple of months and be replaced by the Seventh Tank Army, which would renew the attack once it was fully assembled on Texan soil after the long journey of its equipment and supplies (the men were flown across separately) from overseas. They’d be going into Oklahoma and onwards into Kansas… that was the plan anyway. Before then, the forces already here were to hold their ground and keep the Americans at bay.
The Seventh Army wasn’t going to do as the Soviets wanted them to do and remain inactive ahead of the incoming attack in the Spring. Overcoming the Burkburnett bridgehead across the Red River wasn’t possible but it was made useless as a springboard for any further attacks. Through January, engineering teams covered the Oklahoma side of the river near and far from where the Soviets had their toes over on the northern side with a mass of minefields and anti-tank ditches. There was a lot of thought put into this so that Soviets, when on the attack again, could be channelled into kill-zones and stuck in them where they could be blasted. Away to the southwest, where the Soviets had been stopped from getting behind Dallas–Fort Worth, and the Americans feared that they would again because they didn’t know how exactly the enemy planned to use newly-arriving forces, the same was done here in Texas. There was work done to prepare demolitions to blow lake and river embankments to bring flooding to more stretches of ground to further slow up an attack. The defensive measures were one thing, striking back at the occupiers of American territory on the other side of the static frontlines was to be done as well.
Passing through the positions of the 8th Infantry Division located around Gainesville, the 11th Armored Cavalry Regiment conducted a raid in mid-January. The Blackhorse Cav’ raced forward, smashing through Soviet lines and deep into their rear before looping back around and coming back to American lines afterwards. They spent three days rolling across occupied territory. The regiment was stripped down for this mission, moving with only what was needed and taking with it no extra baggage. The whole thing was pre-planned though with built-in flexibility to allow for unexpected problems. Those cropped up. There were Soviet forces where there weren’t meant to be and then enemy aircraft showed up to first try to cut their line of advance then afterwards hit their retreat too. The purpose of the raid was to tear apart the rear areas of the Twenty–Eighth Army. This was done by going towards supply dumps, vehicle maintenance parks and communication sites. When reached, such places were shot up and Soviet troops who sought to fight were shot down. The Blackhorse Cav’ had to keep moving for the mission to succeed. This meant that they couldn’t take prisoners. Shooting those who surrendered wasn’t done – despite the temptation – and instead they were stripped of weapons and secured in-place while the Americans moved on. That was unless there were ‘special circumstances’ though: field court martials for violating the laws of war occurred among enemy officers suspected of committing war crimes. Many of those tied-up prisoners they left behind were shot afterwards though with some slain by guerrillas who came across them – a rare opportunity to get revenge for injustices suffered, damn the later consequences – and others later by KGB teams who accused the men of cowardice in the face of the enemy. Dragging the fuel and ammunition needed for the mission with them had to be done by those involved. The Blackhorse Cav’ was met by some specially-tasked CH-47 Chinooks on a couple of occasions which flew in some key supplies but air supply like this was infeasible for the whole mission. Guarding their own supplies on the move was taxing and so to was dealing with their own wounded while underway. Pre-mission planning for these tasks saw serious issues crop up in the field. Thankfully it was only a three-day mission: if it had been longer, these matters could have crippled the Blackhorse Cav’. Abandoned vehicles were left behind during their raid and destroyed less they be of any use to the Soviets. Some took battle damage yet others broke down despite all the pre-mission work done to make sure it wouldn’t happen. A couple of helicopters were also left behind. The air squadron attached to the regiment, complete with AH-1F Cobra gunships as well as UH-1 Huey and UH-60 Blackhawks, came along on the raid. They hopped from landing site to landing site, locations with changed all the time. This led to some major issues for the field maintenance of them and the near-impossibility of giving anything more than a patch-up to battle damage. However, having them along on the mission, giving the closest of all close air support was invaluable. Without them providing top cover, the scouting elements of the Blackhorse Cav’ would have missed the enemy many times.
The raid was considered a great success by the US VII Corps and the Seventh Army too. The reports which came back from the field and then reaction observed from a distance when it came to the Soviets showed that this had been worth it. The Blackhorse Cav’ had taken heavy casualties – the regimental commander among them unfortunately – but done what was asked of it in disrupting the Soviets greatly from launching any spoiling attack ahead of the planned late-February American offensives (there hadn’t been that intention but the Americans had assumed they could). From the Soviet point of view, panic had come when the Americans had done as they had for it was feared that the whole VII Corps was going over on the offensive when all the intelligence said that it was unable to. By the time they realised what was going on, that if possible they could catch a unit such as the 11th Cavalry Regiment should they move their forces around, the Americans were heading back to their own lines. Next time they would be ready, that being if there was a next time.
January 1985: The Coastal Plain and the Gulf Coast
General Schwarzkopf found out about the raid by the Blackhorse Cav’ after the event. His V Corps was with the Third US Army; that raid had been conducted by a VII Corps formation under the Seventh US Army. Operational security kept knowledge tightly-controlled with only those who needed to know being told. Aircraft from the Sixteenth US Air Force – broken away from the huge and unwieldy Twelfth Air Force starting New Year’s Day – which usually supported the Third Army were tasked to help get the Blackhorse Cav’ back out from behind enemy lines as part of a big air intervention and this led to Schwarzkopf being informed once it was all over. He would have wanted to have conducted a similar mission with his own troops. The V Corps’ assigned Cav’ element was the 278th Armored Cavalry Regiment (the ‘Third Tennessee’, from the Volunteer State) and those were good soldiers. They were needed where they were though, supporting the 5th & 24th Infantry Divisions on the frontlines where Schwarzkopf’s command held its sliver of East Texas. To be honest, even if they weren’t needed there, Schwarzkopf couldn’t have sent them on a mission like that. They weren’t as well-trained nor as best equipped as the Blackhorse Cav’ was: that was a cold hard truth, something not to be sugar-coated. If such a raid by the V Corps was going to be done, it would have to be by regular troops with more training than the Third Tennessee had ever received before the war and with a unit not as beat-up in war as the 278th Regiment was. To go into Texas properly, to liberate American soil there held by the Soviets and their allies rather than just raid it, was what the V Corps was getting ready for. There was a lot of ‘hurry up and wait’ about it for the men involved, but plans were afoot for the US Army to do just that. Schwarzkopf and his men would be doing just that soon enough.
From Texas Command, word had initially come down that at the end of February there would come the long-awaited big offensive. The time ticked away towards that and through January, Schwarzkopf realised that the timescale was going to slip. He was privately told by his immediate superior at the head of the Third Army that it would be the beginning of March rather than the end of February. Regardless of that delay (still not official), the V Corps would be at the heart of that offensive. Beginning over the Christmas period and through this month, the V Corps received significant resupply and issuing of replacement equipment. It wasn’t enough, nothing was ever enough for Schwarzkopf who wanted more tanks and more heavy guns, though what came through was higher than any of the two other corps – both full national guard units rather than part regular / part reservist like his was – with the Third Army received. Moreover, before the V Corps took part in the offensive, Schwarzkopf was due to see the arrival of newly-raised reinforcements to his command. Both the 14th Armored Cavalry Regiment and the 6th Armored Division would be assigned. They were part of the Army of the United States, formed up from volunteers and conscripts who started their training to turn them from civilians to soldiers at the beginning of October. That process was supposed to have taken a minimum of six months. Schwarzkopf could count. October, November, December, January, February… that was five months, not six. A month – even more as far as the early information about late February had been concerned – had been knocked off that and the ARUS was a lot smaller than at first planned. There had been many, many issues raising those new forces in terms of issuing them equipment and then that time had been knocked off their training. Unlike veterans and reservists, those soldiers were all green the day they reported for basic training. Schwarzkopf would be getting those green soldiers though and taking them to war. Both of those units were moved through January down to Folk Polk in Louisiana from where they’d first been raised up and down the Eastern Seaboard. They came to Louisiana to conduct their final training and were joined by equipment in an ongoing process which aggravated him with how painfully slow it was. He made several visits to Fort Polk and witnessed their training. Some of what he saw he was impressed with, other bits not so much. They would be going to war under Schwarzkopf’s command soon and would be his responsibility. He hoped to take them all the way to the Rio Grande though was painfully aware that many of them wouldn’t make it that far. A soldier and a commanding general, Schwarzkopf would do everything he could to keep them and the rest of his men alive. He’d do damn well all that he could. Whether it would be enough though was something that he could only pray it would be.
***
The two Soviet convoys which had made it across the North Atlantic entered the Caribbean at the end of 1984 and set course for Texas. There were a few ships which broke away for the Caribbean islands under Cuban occupation, ones shot-up and just making it across the ocean, but the rest were heading for Galveston, Freeport, Corpus Christi and Brownsville. The race was on to not just reach those ports along the Gulf of Mexico coastline through South Texas, but successfully unload their cargoes there all before the Americans could stop this from taking place.
The best solution for the United States at this point would have been four – no, eight: two each – tactical nukes. The harbour facilities at each of those locations, already mangled by war damage, could have been once and for all put out of operation even with low-yield blasts used. Civilian casualties would have been ghastly though, to be brutally blunt, acceptable in the grand scheme of things. A nuclear strike was considered. Planning was done and projections made on damage, casualties and fallout. But then planning for nuclear strikes all over the theatre of operations was conducted on a regular basis and arguments were put forth to the politicians at the head of the US Government for both their use and the non-use of such weapons. Glenn wasn’t prepared to order it. American nuclear weapons hadn’t been used on American soil (the Soviets had done enough damage with their own) and the president said that they wouldn’t be used at his direction. He wouldn’t reconsider the matter, he wouldn’t budge on the issue. This was a conventional fight and it would have to be fought without nuclear weapons despite them being used – very effectively – by the opposing sides at the beginning of the war.
Convoy #1 passed around Cuba to the south and went past Jamaica and the Cayman Islands before crossing the Yucatán Channel to enter the Gulf of Mexico. Five to six days sailing time behind, Convoy #2 also headed for South Texas via the Yucatán Channel which separated Cuba from Mexico after crossing the width of the Caribbean. The Americans threw everything at them on the way, everything that they could considering how the Soviets had directed their shipping to stay as far away from danger as much as possible and also protected it. Aircraft flying from Florida had to avoid Soviet and Cuban forces in Cuba and that was no easy task: still they made attack missions in the face of interceptors climbing out of the battered island in the way. American submarines active in the Caribbean faced a major anti-submarine effort from warships, land-based naval air power and Soviet submarines. Likewise, they too went after the two convoys while they were on their way across the Caribbean bound for the Gulf of Mexico. The US Navy lost submarines (a pair of them) like the US Air Force lost aircraft when going after the convoys. However, hits were made on shipping. Some vessels were sunk and others were damaged enough to have to be fast put into harbour either in Cuba or Mexico where cargo could be salvaged less be lost at sea. The rest moved onwards though, pushed onwards when bombs, missiles, torpedoes and minefield came their way. This was all the preamble though, the real drama started along the Gulf Coast.
B-52s – BUFFs: Big Ugly Fat F**kers – launched cruise missiles at the four ports before the ships arrived, during their unloading and afterwards as the cargo was moved off. All those AGM-86 cruise missiles which never got nuclear warheads and SAC had sulked about under the Kennedy Administration showed their usefulness in mass conventional attacks. The B-52s were either over Mexico, after taking the Pacific routing (California > Baja > north-central Mexico), or above the Gulf of Mexico with shorter flights and shooting them off twelve or twenty at a time. FB-111s and even some of the stealth F-117s joined in, getting in closer to hit the targeted port facilities with laser-guided bombs. A good proportion of those cruise missiles and smart bombs were used for taking down air defences though and they didn’t always do their job. Soviet fighters came up as well, taking shots at the bombers and the incoming cruise missiles too.
In earlier B-52 runs, made with solo aircraft over the Gulf of Mexico, the bombers had dropped a different kind of cargo which came into play only when the mass of Soviet shipping arrived. Mk.60 CAPTOR mines had been laid, more smart weapons. The mines sat on the surface off the Texan coastline with onboard computers at work sorting targets that mounted hydrophones detected. When a valid and also valuable target came within range, the CAPTOR turned from a mine into a torpedo-launcher and shot off a Mk.46 torpedo towards it. The CAPTOR was a fine weapon though one which could – if done correctly – be fooled, especially since the Soviets had their hands on several of these weapons for earlier analysis after capturing several examples. The majority of the fired torpedoes ‘got’ their targets. However, not all of those were real as the Soviets made extensive use of decoys due to the known threat.
Galveston first and then Freeport afterwards were hit with special forces attacks. US Navy SEALs struck at Galveston, transported in armed speedboats racing from out of hidden sites on the Louisiana coast. The boats provided fire support with machine guns, grenade launchers and even long-distance flame-throwers while the SEALs made a ‘noisy’ attack on the port. Stealth had been used in their approach; when the struck they put to use maximum violence in blowing things up and hitting ships. At Freeport, the harbour served the Dow Chemical plant in peacetime though since capturing the port (the chemical works had been devastated by American demolitions; what a clean-up that would need) the Soviets had been using it as a landing site for ships from Cuba, bringing in military equipment earlier in the war before Cuba was left empty of all that was there pre-war. A Ranger team had been parachuted inland nearby and made an assault on the landward-facing defences. Cuban and Mexican troops had previously engaged guerrillas and had success against them. The Rangers were something else. These men pressed home a major attack and caused a lot of damage before making their escape, one which was then pursued by Soviet armed helicopters and a Spetsnaz team brought into to hunt them down.
The US Navy’s submarine losses out in the Caribbean hurt them but they still had a few more tasked to carry on the fight against so many surface targets. Avoiding anti-submarine warfare efforts was difficult though not impossible. Once inside the protective screen, the shipping there was just a collection of targets. Both torpedoes and Harpoon missiles – launched at short-range to kill any reaction time – were fired. Another submarine was lost yet the final two of what had been five at the start escaped Soviet counter-efforts and followed the convoys into port, shooting at them close to land as well. Off Brownsville, within sight of the shipping canal from the sea to the smashed-up inland port, a Harpoon struck one of the ships that was carrying ammunition and the ‘lucky’ strike set off a chain reaction of explosions. A series of extraordinary large detonations took place where the targeted ship and another caught up in this were left a total wreck: there was even death and destruction caused to South Padre Island too where Soviet coastal defence troops were killed by falling wreckage that came down like the fires of hell upon them.
The wide-ranging attacks against the Soviet convoys went on for almost three weeks when they were at sea and then in port. When queued up ready to be unloaded of their cargos of tanks, guns, munitions and so much else, the ships were easily identified and immobile. This allowed the Soviets to better defend them as well though. American air power did the majority of the port work yet one of those submarines did fire off its last Harpoons against stationary vessels waiting to reach the quayside at Corpus Christi. The Americans ran reconnaissance missions during and after the strikes had taken place. They counted the ships which had been present when entering the Caribbean and then those that made it to port. They observed the damage done during the unloading process and then to the cargo when it came off them before it could be moved away from the bullseye targets which were the ports themselves. The end results were good. Of course, the nuclear attacks which were refused would have done a better job than all of these repeated conventional attacks. They also wouldn’t have seen all the massive loss of men and equipment that the Americans suffered in striking so hard over and over again, using up ammunition at an alarming rate to get the results that they wanted too. Still, the official summary afterwards would claim that forty per cent of the cargo carried on those ships in the two convoys when they entered the Caribbean and headed for the Gulf Coast either went down at sea or was destroyed on the quayside. Forty per cent was a big number though, naturally, not one hundred per cent which the US Army would have wanted to have seen.
The Soviets had a different number to put on this all.
January 1985: Florida and The Bahamas
The Raid on Mayport was quite something indeed. Soviet naval Spetsnaz undertook a hugely-complicated and dangerous mission to strike at the US Navy base in the Atlantic-facing northeastern corner of the peninsula. They operated far from home: not just the Rodina but their Caribbean bases. The numbers of men involved, the scale of the task and the daring were all similar to earlier strikes made at the very beginning of the war. For the men from the 17th Brigade (home-based in peacetime along the Soviet Black Sea coast) tasked hit to hit Mayport in a company-plus mission, it would be a raid few of them would return from.
Launched from a staging post inside neutral The Bahamas – a neutrality which the Commonwealth nation was clinging on to; one which its traditional allies were happy to see maintained for their own sake –, a ship-to-ship transfer was made near an isolated island during the early hours of the day before the raid. Bahamian military forces (such as they were) missed the transfer of men from one ship with a dubious identity to a hijacked one; so did the Americans who had an armed watch over The Bahamas. That second ship was an American-owned though Bahamian-flagged vessel, one which was plying its trade though the island nation as well far beyond including into Florida despite the ongoing war. The majority of its crew were dead and long-since thrown overboard with the few left alive soon to join them once their usefulness was up… or someone came and rescued them as they hoped they would see. It was on its way to Jacksonville on a scheduled trip, one cleared by the Americans though with innocent purposes meant to be. While sailing from The Bahamas up to the estuary off the St. John’s River, the ship was overflown twice by the Americans. First, there was a P-3 Orion operated by the US Navy and then closer to Florida came Virginia Air National Guard attack-fighters assigned to the Tenth US Air Force, a pair of A-7 Corsairs, which made a lower flyby while bristling with weapons. Radio messages were exchanged including authentication codes to say that there was no duress that the crew was under. Visual inspection was made from above too with the ship recognised for what it was. Due to the arrival time late in the evening, the ship was instructed to wait out at sea. Its destination was the marine terminal on Blount Island, just up the estuary, but that meant passing by the naval anchorages first. No civilian ship of foreign registry was doing that in the darkness no matter what, not after all the hits that the United States had taken in this war. Armed coastguard personnel (since the war started, the US Coastguard was acting as part of the US Navy) came aboard and were satisfied with what they saw: they missed so much, duped and distracted. The inspectors left behind the ship which waited alongside two others to go into the Port of Jacksonville in the morning. It stayed where it was, watched but not watched enough. Over a hundred commandos – who’d been crammed aboard and hidden remarkably well when the Coastguard had been inside – did depart, leaving their mothership in the wee hours of the morning and went into action.
The raid was detected at the last minute. One of the raiders made an error and caused he and a comrade to be spotted by US Navy security troops. The smallest of things was all that it took for the naval base to come alive with defensive fire against intruders coming out of the water wearing scuba gear and carrying satchel charges. There were lots of them, these raiders, spotted all over the place once the firing started. None of them had been ready to strike yet and the plan to blast apart the security command post and the communications station had yet to be realised. When the detection was made, the rest of them men should have withdrawn. They had orders to press home their attack if detected early, if past the point that the planners deemed the ‘point of no return’. The defenders, the security personnel from a wartime raised force, were underrated and their morale thought to be low. In comparison, the dispatched Spetsnaz team was thought by those who sent them to be invincible on the attack against what was regarded as an isolated and ill-defended strategic outpost. Soviet hubris cost the raiders deal. The US Navy would defend their base with rifles, machine guns, grenades and their bare hands. It came to that, where it was hand-to-hand fighting, too.
When it was all said and done with the aborted raid over with, Mayport naval base was lit with fires and there were many bodies everywhere. The former consisted of buildings and a couple of very small vessels (tugboats and a patrol boat which took a RPG hit when firing upon men on the shore): none of the warships in harbour, including the training carrier USS Lexington here after its escape from the Gulf of Mexico, had any real damage done to them. The latter were the majority of the Spetsnaz and plenty of US Navy personnel alongside them. Medical teams moved among them in the darkness, looking for those alive who had their injuries attended to first while others worried about nationality. A couple of the raiders had fled against orders when the attack had gone as wrong as it did and headed back for the submersibles to ride along with underwater back to the ship in the estuary. They got back there to find it underway, moving without running lights and heading out to sea. These men were left behind yet they wouldn’t have had much luck aboard that ship. Running was the worst thing that could have been done by those aboard the ship. They should have abandoned it and made it to one of the identified coastal rally points to link up with any surviving Spetsnaz. The moving ship was just one big fat target for the US Navy to engage and its guilt as clear as day. When the sun came up, a trio of A-4 Skyhawk flying from NAS Jacksonville made a gun and rocket attack upon it to set it alight and stop its progress. The ship burnt, marking itself as a target perfectly for the P-3 which came late to the party but gave the gift of a Harpoon missile dead-on target against a defenceless vessel. That was the end of the Spetsnaz and their mothership though unfortunately the surviving innocent crewmen aboard as well.
Soviet commando action in Florida, staged through the territory of The Bahamas, didn’t drag that small country into the war. It could have, maybe in the opinion of some it should have too. Yet, The Bahamas would stay neutral and its people not know the horrors of the war that was affecting others. The government in Nassau were happy to keep out of the war and the superpowers, those who would make the decision in reality over what The Bahamas wanted, were of mind to do the same. The Americans and the Allies – particularly the British and the Canadians –, wanted neutrality there and so did the Soviets. All were taking advantage of that neutrality and the country entering the war couldn’t help either. If one side or the other based forces there, the other would have to stretch to cover that. Shipping and international financial links were being used by each through the country with the others monitored by espionage efforts operating out of the country. It was in no one’s interests for The Bahamas to go to war.
Days after the Raid on Mayport, the Soviet staging base was attacked by the Royal Bahamas Defence Force (RBDF). A maritime force though with marines – well… sort of marines; armed men operating from ships –, the RBDF had a difficult time striking where they did because they were so weak in terms of equipment and training. Unofficial American assistance was given in everything to do with the arrival of armed men and gunboats at the little island where US intelligence had tracked the passage of that ship from and spotted via satellite overheads a facility. Gunfire was returned and one of the RBDF boats was sunk. Eight of their men would be killed as well before finally return fire ceased. American aircraft – those national guard A-7s – were circling nearby and ready to strike though to do so would be a political decision and what was going on was being monitored from Raven Rock directly. Only with Chuck Robb’s say so would direct American intervention occur and his president had told him that was a last resort if the RBDF failed. They succeed in their mission though, storming that Soviet base. The bodies of two men killed by machine gun fire were found. There was no sign of anyone else and the base had been stripped out of equipment and anything of value beforehand. For the losses taken, the RBDF wouldn’t consider it a success. Their government would though for the action taken from its soil had been answered with firm force used. The Americans too would consider this to be something that needed to be done. Here a small country had stood up for itself and reasserted its sovereignty. If only other countries worldwide would do the same…
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 0:32:25 GMT
January 1985: Sweden
A couple of days before the deadline for Sweden to accede to Soviet demands, the defence attaché at the embassy in Moscow was surreptitiously passed a piece of paper by a foreign ministry official who he’d long known had been trying to ‘work’ him. It contained a typed list of cities and towns across Sweden, noted beside each was a number in kilotons. Hand-written below, scrawled in Swedish, was a plea that this be passed to the diplomat’s prime minister and for him to save ‘poor Sweden’ from this. The GRU and KGB had done better work elsewhere with similar things: a prime example being the fear that they had managed to put into the West Germans of a nuclear attack in wartime, helping to get the country to go neutral. This effort wasn’t very effective. Clumsy, it was called afterwards by the Swedes, and when other intelligence agencies worldwide found out it caused them to consider that maybe there was something going seriously wrong with the Soviet intelligence organs if they thought that approach might work. However, another school of thought on that issue would have to be that maybe it was designed to fail here. The world of espionage can be a world of mirrors and double & triple bluffs. Working it all out, discovering the big secret, would only lead to more.
Regardless of that threat ill-disguised as not what it was, Olaf Palme didn’t back down. The Swedish prime minister wouldn’t do what the Soviets wanted and allow his country to be walked over. He knew where it would all lead and wouldn’t open the door for the Soviets to abuse Swedish neutrality with a view to ultimately stripping his country of its sovereignty and freedoms. At his direction, Swedish diplomats and intelligence officials in several other countries – in Western Europe in particular though also in Canada and Japan; not the United States or Britain though – made their foreign counterparts aware of this. This was what they were dealing with: a country threatening to make nuclear attacks on their cities and saying which ones and what strength of the attack upon each would be. There wasn’t as much shock in reaction to this as would be expected if this had come out of the blue. Yes, it was an outrage, everyone could agree on that, but this was the Soviet Union doing this, a country in the middle of a war of world domination who had attacked other country’s cities already with nuclear weapons and not just threatened to do so. Palme didn’t just have this information passed on for the sake of it. It was part of an ongoing effort being made since the Soviets had made their demands where Palme was trying to gain support from others in his stance of facing down Moscow’s demands. The stance was noted and admired. It was recognised as something that benefitted those countries because a Swedish withdrawal from their stated position would damage many nations in the short- and long-term.
Nonetheless, throughout the war, before Moscow turned its attention to Sweden, Palme hadn’t been making friends with his previous actions and had antagonised many other leaders. Staying out of the war wasn’t the issue. It was how Sweden – at his direction, complete with his public statements – had acted while neutral. Towards the Allies, including little Norway which neighboured Sweden, Palme had been near-hostile to them. He did so to keep Sweden neutral and the Soviets at bay yet both Norwegian and British aircraft had been attacked in Swedish airspace… Swedish interceptors had downed Soviet aircraft too yet that was another issue. American and British intelligence activities were forcefully brought to a stop from taking place on Swedish soil and many intelligence officials covered as diplomats expelled from the country for ‘conduct unbecoming their diplomatic status’. The same was done with Soviet spies/diplomats too and in effect saved many lives – foreign and Swedish – but, as before, it was the manner which it was done which upset the Allies. They naturally thought of their own needs and weren’t that willing to listen to Palme’s lectures on the proud and steadfast history of Swedish neutrality. He went to New York and at the UN, Plame criticised Allied intimidation of other neutral countries into doing their bidding. When he’d spoken after the outbreak of war at how the pre-war behaviour of the countries in the Allies, their military alliances and their apparent ‘aggressive behaviour’, this had guaranteed that while Sweden’s woes come 1985 were their troubles too, there was little sympathy. The valued what the Swedes were doing but Palme was the face of it. He personified Sweden in so many eyes: wise eyes that shouldn’t have been blinded by that. Western European countries not at war were criticised by Palme last year too. He’s spoken out against the breaches of neutrality that they had made, listing event after event. None of his accusation, especially against French actions, were lies and from a legal point of view, if one wanted to pick apart French behaviour as a neutral and not look at it in the bigger scheme of things, then Palme was dead right. France had done all that it had. West Germany, Italy and the Low Countries had all also been subject to what their governments saw as self-righteous grandstanding coming from Stockholm. However, they also noted the Swedish double-standards when it came to their joint actions undertaken with the Danes. Copenhagen had been wooed by Stockholm in an unofficial joint military alliance – Palme denied one existed – between the two of them where the Danes joined with the Swedes in declaring the Baltic Exits and in particular the Øresund a ‘protected military area’. The stretch of water between Zealand and mainland Sweden which connected the Baltic to the North Sea was full of minefields, naval patrols and military aircraft in the skies. The a-joining coastlines were full of troops and mobile defences. Military vessels of any nation apart from Denmark and Sweden were refused access. This benefitted Western Europe like it aided the Allies. There had long been the concern in Paris and Rome that eventually this would all falter and the Soviets would take advantage though that was always tomorrow, not today. They wanted to rub Palme’s smug face right in his double standards when he spoke of what he considered neutrality yet hadn’t rocked the apple cart on the issue.
Sweden was unable to bring any other nation to directly support Sweden ahead of the expiration of the Soviet deadline to open up the Baltic Exits and also Swedish airspace too. There was no real effort made, to push for overt foreign support. Palme tried to keep his country neutral at the same time as trying to win support. The deadline got closer and closer and he made other countries aware of it. They too were concerned and there was talk of acting. None could decide how though and in what manner, not with Sweden’s leader continuing to state neutrality and not willing to explore anything else officially or unofficially. That was no real excuse for some countries though. They should have acted: Swedish neutrality, even with ‘Olaf the Oaf’ – one British newspaper, one subject to government censorship and thus not stopped from doing this when it could have been, deemed him this unflattering name – at the helm, was important to them. That deadline then expired on January 9th 1985 and Sweden found itself at war with its neutrality violently ended.
January 1985: Sweden
Three hours passed after the reaching of the deadline without any Soviet action taken. Three long hours where Sweden’s government and military forces were on edge, waiting for an attack to come. Perhaps the Soviets had been bluffing all along. Perhaps…
…perhaps not.
Without leaving Soviet airspace, let alone going out over the Baltic Sea, a whole regiment of Soviet Air Force Bear bombers from the Strategic Reserve attacked Sweden and its capital. They were above Estonia and Latvia, a long way from Swedish detection. Cruise missiles were launched, old ones and new ones, before the bombers turned away and headed back to their bases. Those missiles flew onwards, heading west towards Sweden. The raced towards Government, military and economic targets in the general area around Stockholm. There were almost eighty of them.
Launch failures, navigation errors and Swedish military action brought that number down to sixty-one which were able to reach their targets. Sixty-one missiles could do a terrible lot of damage though and that they did. Casualties were immense. Swedish civilians bore the brunt of these casualties during the afternoon strike. Air raid sirens had wailed and people had got to cover but the big warheads on so many missiles hitting all over the place took so many lives. Another strike came in the evening, several hours after the first one. The same regiment of bombers fired another massive wave of missiles, these from above the Gulf of Finland with this strike. Once again, the missiles bore-in upon Stockholm. Huge casualties from the second strike were taken and among them this time were many of those from rescuers too. Sweden learnt the horror of war. Their capital was hit with a similar attack to which had been seen elsewhere such as the four British cities of Belfast, Edinburgh, Glasgow and Newcastle though more missiles were fired at Stockholm that at those (in an individual sense). The Soviet Union was Sweden’s neighbour and was able to hit it with ease. Swedish interceptors, Saab-built Drakens and Viggens, got some of those missiles in-flight, especially the older ones which were slow and in effect nothing more than drones, but they were unable to stop the majority. Nor were Sweden’s air defences able to do anything about those bombers. They could do this again at their leisure.
Dawn on January 10th saw the very south of Sweden come under military attack, a different kind to what hit Stockholm. Swedish interceptors engaged incoming Soviet attack aircraft coming north out of East Germany and Poland, taking down some of them yet many more aircraft came behind them: MiGs for fighter cover and Sukhois on strike missions. The naval base at Karlskrona over to the east was hit hard though the focus was on the western side of the Scania region for those aircraft as they raided military targets. The air attacks preceded a fast-moving assault convoy of Soviet naval infantry. The 336th Guards Brigade approached in hovercraft, assault boats and helicopters after coming up from the island of Rugen. There were amphibious ships carrying more of the brigade and a whole armada of warships in support. The weather was terrible – winter in the Baltic was hardly the time to launch a major amphibious assault – but Soviet forces went through it and onto land. The naval infantry started hitting their landing sites. They came ashore and were fast in battle with an alert and waiting Swedish Army. The first assault teams took heavy losses but this was expected. Behind them came the follow-on wave: more men brought in with armoured support and a lot of firepower available to push onwards. Within hours, Malmo was encircled. That city was left alone because the Soviets were pushing northwards. The naval infantry were joined by a brigade of airmobile troops who were flown into Malmo’s outlying airport, one which many Soviet and Swedish soldiers had died fighting over. Through the snow and over the flat terrain found here at the bottom end of Sweden, the Soviets carried on moving. Their opponents fought for their country and fought well. The Swedes didn’t give in easy. The first day saw the best performance from them where they forestalled Soviet advances in many places and conducted organised withdrawals from other points to maintain their order. The Soviets threw in an amphibious tank regiment on the second day though, tanks covered in battel by helicopter gunships with them. These helped open up the way for the drive northwards up along the western shore. Swedish strongpoints established inland were generally held though found themselves outflanked. Past Lund and on towards Helsingborg the Soviets went, taking heavy losses yet driving the Swedes back as they blasted all opposition in their path. It took another two days to get there but once reached, the city was like Malmo bypassed directly as the airmobile troops – with the 35th Guards Brigade; a unit tasked for operations in Western Europe and not Scandinavian-rolled but thrown into this fight – took over the advance and got to Angelholm. Those men were looking out upon the Kattegat, the waters on the far side of the Øresund. There they halted under orders from above and dug-in with landwards-facing defenses alongside the naval infantry and the tanks with them: the Swedish Army hadn’t been beaten, just shoved out of the way. Their mission had been achieved. The waters now at their backs were a fight for the Soviet Navy to have.
The Øresund was forced open using nuclear weapons. Underwater blasts took place where the Soviets attacked the Swedish Navy and its defensive minefields with a couple of dozen tactical nukes. The blasts were low yield and the only sight of them above the surface were the air bubbles which raced up. Torpedoes and depth charges were used to blast open what difficult and time-consuming demining would have had to do. Swedish submarines were targeted too when spotted, denying the little boats a fantastic opportunity to operate in crowded waters where they could have done brilliantly. Above the surface, the naval force which had escorted the landing forced onto the Swedish mainland was joined by more ships who entered the Øresund. They were in sight of Danish defenses over in Jutland which included coastal fortresses (very modern ones with big guns dug into the cliffs) and mobile missile batteries. Danish forces on land didn’t open fire. Danish naval forces withdrew into Fakse Bay & Koge Bay and also closer to Copenhagen itself. The Swedes were left all by themselves, abandoned by a terrified Danish government. Engagements between Soviet and Swedish naval forces, each with air support, saw each side lose ships and aircraft. The Soviets had the numbers and were ‘cheating’ with their underwater nuclear blasts. At one point, the Swedes appeared to have the upper hand in the fight with their mass of small and fast missile- & gun boats but then a lot of Soviet tactical aircraft showed up in daylight and were covered from fighters above keeping Swedish aircraft clear. Plenty of those boats were hit by air attacks, far too many to allow the Swedes any more hope. A withdrawal was made, one which soon became a panicked flight as what was left of the Swedish Navy in the Øresund went fast towards the Kattegat and out of the way. The Soviet Baltic Fleet followed them. There were a few minefields encountered, ones answered again with underwater nuclear blasts – the environmental damage was someone else’s problem –, and they then went towards the Kattegat as well. There would be a different war to fight there, but it wouldn’t be against the Swedes.
The five days of warfare was mainly focused upon Stockholm on the first and then down in Scania in the next four. There were other clashes with aerial battles above the Baltic and around the island of Gotland in addition to a fight between light naval forces off the Aaland Islands. Full-scale war it was where this all occurred yet elsewhere, there was very little. The rest of Sweden was mainly left alone barring a few commando actions along Sweden’s winter-swept frontier with Soviet-influenced Finland and down the immense stretch of Sweden’s Baltic coastline. Sweden waited for something more, a major invasion either overland or a bigger amphibious operation than the limited – yet extremely violent – one in Scania. Neither came. Stockholm smouldered and the hospitals there were full of casualties. Tens of thousands of civilians were caught behind the lines in the occupied strip of Swedish territory while many more were fleeing the south of the country. The underwater nuclear blasts were known about by the government though not shared with the public. Everyone was waiting for what happened next. The Soviets did very little afterwards when it came to attacking Sweden beyond more than what they had. There were a series of air attacks made down in the south against Swedish military forces pushing against the Soviet outposts but no more. What Sweden couldn’t do was hit back against the Soviet Union nor liberate its territory. The Soviets didn’t push to take any more that they had.
Olaf Palme was forced to resign as prime minister by his government colleagues once the intense fighting came to an end. He wanted to stay on yet his fellow ministers forced him out. It was his actions which they saw as having put Sweden in this situation when it came to forcing Sweden into a position like it had ended up in. They formed a national government and had no intention of surrendering but wouldn’t see their country led by Palme any more. Fighting continued down in Scania. Swedish forces surrounded the occupied zone, digging-in just like the foreign occupiers were. Shooting and shelling took place in the following weeks there and in the skies there continued to be clashes too. Nonetheless, the Soviet-Swedish war had stalled into a stalemate. Another conflict had started though, that being the Battle of the Baltic Exits.
British and Norwegian naval and air forces took on the fight against the Soviet Baltic Fleet when it emerged from the Øresund and went across the Kattegat before turning west. The use of tactical nukes by the Soviets down in the south wasn’t matched in the north. They were expected by the Allies yet weren’t brought into play. Here it was just conventional.
Soviet aircraft were flying from Swedish airbases, which was something that earlier Allied plans hadn’t foreseen properly. Angelholm and Ljungbyhed were being used by Air Force and Naval Aviation aircraft along with more distant ones down in East Germany. The ability to have forward-deployed aircraft assisted the Soviets greatly in the effort to fight the way out. They did just that, engaging the Allies who tried to stop them who had their own forward airbases in southern Norway. There were more Soviet ships though a lot of them weren’t as capable as what the Allies could field. The Allies had been fast busy sewing minefields too. The fight was one where the opposing sides few times saw each other. Long nights and short days along with the use of long-range weapons made this happen. Both Danish and Swedish airspace (the latter in the wider Goteborg area; around which saw a city in fear) was violated during this. The battle was itself a series of many engagements all over the place without a fixed defining point that anyone could afterwards point to. As to a victor, that wasn’t easy to identify either.
The Soviet Baltic Fleet got out of the Baltic, fulfilling the whole point of going to war with Sweden. Many of the ships and submarines didn’t get past the Kattegat and the Skagerrak though and out into the North Sea to sail beyond them. Those that did so got out individually or in small groups and turned north to head towards the Norwegian Sea. The intention was for them to replace the Northern Fleet which had been decimated throughout December in fighting across the North Atlantic. Those that would reach ‘safety’ found in the Norwegian Sea were half of those who had made the breakout. The other half had either been sunk or turned back due to damage done to them. They’d gotten their licks in on the way, sinking Allied ships as well including five major Royal Navy warships – plus many smaller vessels and those of the Norwegian Navy too – and damaging others. The weather had helped with the breaking free of the Baltic Exits, so too had all of that air support given. Whether it was all worth it for the Soviets was a different matter. Was it? The war with Sweden wasn’t over and what they had done to that country would have immense geo-political effects continent-wide. Thirteen major warships (just destroyers and frigates, no aircraft carriers or cruisers were with the Baltic Fleet) reached the Norwegian Sea after the Battle of the Baltic Exits ended.
Getting thirteen ships out in open water brought the Soviets so much pain in response.
January 1985: The Mediterranean
It wasn’t just the Soviet Baltic Fleet attempting to break out successfully into the Atlantic that occurred in the New Year. The Black Sea Fleet, now the Mediterranean Fleet, was ordered to smash through Allied defences of the Gibraltar Straits and get out into open water too. Earlier losses in the war, which had come alongside a smashing victory against the US Navy’s Sixth Fleet, had seen Soviet control over the Eastern Med. not extended further. Egyptian intransigence when it came to their growing reluctance to provide unfettered access to the Suez Canal was something soon planned to be dealt with, yet getting into the Atlantic was more important than the Indian Ocean. Mubarak – a difference character indeed from Palme – would have his attitude ‘corrected’ later. For now, it was all about striking west rather than south. American, British, Portuguese and Spanish forces blocking the way were to be fought and overcome. Instructions from Moscow were that now that the Mediterranean Fleet had been reinforced like it had been, the time was now to do this and do it successfully.
Soviet warships moved west across the Med. Malta was the forward staging point and one which was under French and Italian surveillance from afar. When the Mediterranean Fleet began to move, Paris and Rome let the Allies know. They already had their own foreknowledge of what was coming yet the backchannel lines of communication were used to send thanks for the heads-up regardless. Spain was more important in this keeping open of dialogue with Western Europe more than Britain and the United States was, something that was only going to be of more importance as the year went onwards. Allied reconnaissance spotted a force of more than four dozen surface vessels (warships and support ships) with indications that there would be at least ten, maybe as many as fifteen, submarines below the waters. The Mediterranean Fleet wasn’t holding anything back! The focus was on the big ships, the major surface combatants in military parlance. There were five Soviet warships which met this definition: one aircraft carrier, two helicopter carriers, one battle-cruiser and one missile-cruiser.
The first was the Kuybyshev, a carrier built at the Nikolayev shipyard in the Ukraine. She was first to be called the Baku but had received a name change. Pressures of war had forced her to be delivered into service back in December and she had sailed south to Crete first before then heading to Malta. She had aircraft and helicopters aboard her as well as an impressive missile battery. While the Kuybyshev had been to sea before, this really was her maiden cruise. The two helicopter carriers were the Moskva and the Leningrad. Older and not that effective, their peacetime role was more of propaganda than anything else. They were at war now, serving their country and providing escort for the Mediterranean Fleet against submarine attack and warning of any incoming missile attack. The Kirov-class battle-cruiser heading towards the Gibraltar Straits was the Krasny Oktyabr (translation: Red October). Once planned to be called the Kalinin, this ship had been fitting out in the Black Sea at the beginning of the war and should have gone southwards into the Med. soon afterwards. An accidental missile explosion aboard had done immense damage and saw months of major repairs undertaken first: like the Kuybyshev, the Krasny Oktyabr was on her maiden voyage. Finally, there was the Slava. This warship had been with the carrier Kiev overcoming the US Sixth Fleet before the Spanish had sunk the latter vessel and she herself had been torpedoed by an American submarine. The Slava had been in Crete for emergency repairs before the Greek-Turkish War and then towed all the way to Sevastopol for major work to be undertaken before she could return to sea. Patched-up and with her missile battery reloaded, she was going back to war. The other vessels alongside these were a mix of less-capable cruisers (for anti-submarine work or older vessels from the Strategic Reserve), destroyers, frigates, supply ships and a couple of amphibious ships too.
There were aircraft based on the Kuybyshev, jump-jets in the form of Forgers, and these little fighters could also fly from a trio of civilian roll-on/roll-off ships pressed into military service and with the Mediterranean Fleet though were unable to be rearmed or worked upon when aboard them. That wasn’t going to be enough air cover for the mission to open the Gibraltar Straits. Soviet Air Force and Naval Aviation aircraft were flying from Malta and Libya as well but what was really needed was a forward airbase for support of the Mediterranean Fleet. One would have to be taken and that was why there were those amphibious ships carrying half a brigade of Naval Infantry.
When the Soviet armada got going, the first air attacks went in. Flying from Libya, Backfires struck at the Balearic Islands. Airports on Majorca and Minorca – built for tourists like those on Tenerife in the Canary Islands attacked last month – were home to Spanish aircraft and were hit with missiles fired from distance. Strikes at even greater distance were then made towards mainland Spain, hitting military air sites along the eastern side of the country to disrupt air operations. Under this cover, the forward flotilla of ships split into two: one group crossing the Western Med. using the shortest route to take them towards the Gibraltar Straits direct and the second closer to Algerian waters. Allied attacks were made. There were submarines active and the Spanish Navy hoped to repeat the success that had had last year in sinking the Kiev then again now. They achieved a kill on a destroyer and crippled another but that submarine involved was then struck itself and sunk. Another Spanish submarine had more patience and waited for bigger prey, one of the big ships. It failed to get an attack in though and was driven off by strong anti-submarine warfare efforts. A withdrawal was made with the intention to return once Allied air power and given the Soviets some pain. That was being prepared but before then, that second smaller group of ships moving west started to receive more attention than the Soviets wanted it to this early. The Spanish looked at where it was going.
They were making an approach towards the exclave of Melilla. They were not a series of blockade runners foolishly aiming to crash through the Gibraltar Straits and reach the Azores but going elsewhere.
On the other side of the Alboran Sea across from mainland Spain and stretched along the coast of North Africa where it bordered Morocco, Melilla was a sovereign Spanish holding similar to the bigger Ceuta further west. Melilla had an airport too. Spanish Air Force Mirage F-1 fighter-bombers (some of these purchased from an embargoed Iraqi which France had refused to sell to Saddam and had resold to Spain starting in 1982) had their air strike on the bigger flotilla called off and redirected towards the smaller group. They shot southwards through the skies and made attacks on the Soviets. Missiles climbed up to meet them and even a pair of those Forgers flying from a civilian ship: the latter something that came as an unwelcome surprise. SAMs did more damage than any jump-jet could do though and took out several aircraft. The Spanish got their licks in though as they struck several ships on the surface. A naval task force with destroyers and frigates was also on the way and ready to head off a seizure of Melilla too. However, before they could, transport helicopters were flying from Soviet ships and there was already gunfire at Melilla where naval commandos delivered by a submarine were already in action. The assault on Melilla was already underway before the Spanish Navy could stop it. There were Spanish Army troops and also men from the Spanish Legion (a few foreign volunteers but mainly Spaniards themselves) present in the exclave. These men fought against a smaller opponent and fought well. They believed they could repulse the invasion. However, in came some more Backfires and their raid on Melilla was highly-destructive. Soviet Naval Infantry and Spanish soldiers fought on afterwards among the ruin which was Melilla, for control of the airport first but then the harbour when the amphibious ships arrived and started landing more men but also heavy equipment including tanks. Further Spanish air strikes from the mainland came and the second Mirage F-1 raid got right through Soviet defences to put bombs into a pair of the Ropucha-class landing ships. Most of the tanks and men were off them already through and it was only stores left. The Spanish had their own tanks in Melilla, a squadron of up-armoured M-48 Pattons that had 105mm guns. These were used well and a major counterattack cleared the airport area from Soviet infiltration to push them back to the beaches in the south of the exclave. The M-48s destroyed any ‘puny’ PT-76 which crossed their path. Fighting inside the town though was more difficult for those tanks, especially as the gunners in them were surrounded by Spanish civilians everywhere. Above them, Soviet armed helicopters joined with missile teams on the ground in tank-hunting. More and more of the Spanish tanks were knocked out. They had lots of infantry and could hold their ground yet the Spanish constantly had their backs to the wall. That wall was the edge of the exclave, Moroccan territory behind them. Soviet warships firing from offshore joined with the helicopters in moving the attacks to groups of armed men and if there were civilians nearby, so be it. Another Ropucha made it to Melilla – a Spanish submarine urgently tasked to find it failed in that mission – and brought in a lot of heavy guns in the form of mobile artillery and mortars. Very quickly, these were put to use in shelling the trapped soldiers on the ground. From Melilla urgent requests were made for air support to help assist the failing defence. That was being send. It was just a case of those on the ground not seeing what was going on out to sea. But when there were no Spanish aircraft in the skies above them this didn’t do morale any good for men who really didn’t want to be fighting among their own civilians either.
After two days, the Soviets had Melilla. It cost them dear but victory it was. They took the airport, what they came here for, as well as the ruin which was so much of the town. Rapid work was made to get the airport’s runways clear of debris and some of the facilities active. This was done and soon enough the message sent out was for aircraft waiting on Malta to be ferried to Melilla so they could soon begin air operations from here. Such an attack to seize Melilla hadn’t been foreseen by the Spanish. They had in fact spent several months worried that neutral Morocco would take the opportunity of a Spain hurting by war to grab the exclave plus the bigger Ceuta too. Attention had been focused inland, not out to sea. Over in Gibraltar, the British had worried about an attempt to take The Rock just like what had happened down in Melilla. They had filled their colonial possession with fighting men ready to oppose a seaborne and/or airmobile assault while also keeping some ‘surprises’ ready too: Exocet missiles fitted to several trailers – the experimental Excalibur system – and two batteries from a TA regiment of Royal Artillery with those men bringing to Gibraltar with them plenty of shoulder-mounted SAMs to deal with helicopters. The Soviet attack on Melilla was feared to be the opening move of a similar, maybe bigger, move to take Gibraltar as well. It wasn’t to be yet the British Government reacted to Melilla’s fall and the continued approach of the Soviet Mediterranean Fleet with grave concern for Gibraltar plus the whole war when it came to the Battle of the Atlantic.
The relatively small British forces in the region – those on the ground in Gibraltar but also over in Madeira in addition to the warships behind the Straits – were urgently reinforced. That decision was made just as the Soviets were doing what they were to the Swedes and came at the worst possible time for Britain… which was the Soviet intention with twin assaults. It had to be done though. Now, after securing an airhead in Melilla, the real battle to open up access to the Atlantic for the Soviet Mediterranean Fleet was coming. Whether the British or anyone else was ready or not, the second stage was to begin.
January 1985: The Mediterranean
There had been bureaucratic objections yet the opening of the Gibraltar Straits, Operation Orel (translation: Eagle), was to be led by the Soviet Navy. The Soviet Air Force committed significant forces to Orel yet they all answered both operationally and tactically to the wishes of the Navy. The Air Force didn’t like this, holding in contempt their comrades in the Navy, but the orders stood. Once the airhead at Melilla was open, aircraft would begin flying from there. The air unit assigned was a detached squadron from a Guards regiment belonging to the Air Force but the Navy had them doing what they wanted done in support of the Mediterranean Fleet and doing it straight away. Once there were half a dozen fighters there inside the secured Spanish exclave, long before any serious strength could be built-up, the MiG-27 Floggers were flying combat missions. The Floggers were out over the Alboran Sea and making attacks on surface targets, any Allied ships encountered, while also meant to shoot down Allied fighters too. They were rather outnumbered. The Spanish filled the skies with Mirages and got one of the Floggers on the first day and two more the next. With no losses of their own, the Spanish Air Force wiped out half of the Soviet land-based air cover. More aircraft were dispatched to Melilla with the rest of that lead squadron flying from Malta and aiming to get another nine Floggers across on long overwater ferry flights where the MiG-27s used external fuel tanks like the ones before them had. Cruise missiles fired from a quartet of Backfires shot towards mainland Spanish airbases at the same time after the Navy had been made to understand by the Air Force that this had to be done to keep the Spanish off guard if the Navy wanted air cover for their ships. The Spanish did get their fighters up to try to engage those cruise missiles rather than flood the Alboran Sea with Mirages again, yet they also still had a fighter patrol to the south as well already ongoing at the time. Two Mirage-IIIs, high-speed interceptors, came across the middle trio of Floggers inbound for Melilla. Laden with those fuel tanks, the Soviet aircraft were in trouble. They each mounted a pair of air-to-air missiles for self-defence but to use them effectively when out over the water far from Melilla would mean conducting a release of those tanks… and thus the pilots would end up going for a swim. The flight leader took too long to decide what to do and in the meantime the Spanish fired. Short of fuel themselves after a long patrol, the Mirage pilots fired off two missiles each and turned north without pressing home their attack. Two of the Floggers went down leaving the last one all alone to fly onwards to Melilla. The pilot had been left impotent to stop his two comrades from dying and, like his superiors, raged against the Navy for putting him in this situation. There were now ten MiG-27s operating from Melilla when plans had been for fifteen. Ten or even fifteen didn’t compare favourably in any way to the far larger numbers of Allied aircraft across in Spain though, not by a long stretch.
The Spanish held the command role over Allied operations in the Gibraltar Straits as part of a larger position through the Western Med. before the Soviets moved their fleet across the sea towards the Atlantic. Smaller forces of their allies – Britain, Portugal and the United States – answered to their established headquarters though there was a lot of joint effort in this rather than the Spanish telling everyone what to do. Never a part of NATO, the Spanish still worked well with new allies. American contribution came from a trio of submarines (quite a force despite the low number) and a part squadron of P-3 Orions flying from Rota; the Portuguese had a variety of small warships assigned. It was the British who made the significant non-Spanish contribution to the Allied force. They had troops in Gibraltar and Madeira who were joined by extra reinforcements of Royal Marines flown in mid-January to form a provisional force deemed the 2nd Commando Brigade. With their troops, any land incursion on the Iberian Peninsula similar to what occurred at Melilla would be repulsed. There were already Jaguars and Nimrods at Gibraltar and they were now joined by Tornados outfitted for the naval strike role – with anti-ship missiles – who flew to Moron Airbase; these would have been mightily-useful staying back in Britain with another identical-tasked squadron which had to on their own face the Soviet Baltic Fleet. At sea, the Royal Navy had a task group of warships west of Gibraltar. With more time, it could have been heavily reinforced – the newly-finished carrier HMS Ark Royal was at Portsmouth getting finishing touches for wartime early service – but the time was short and so instead only an extra submarine could reach the area instead. The Spanish had the majority of the assigned forces. They had troops all along their mainland coastline and reinforced the already large garrison across at Ceuta with a battalion of paratroopers, a battery of heavy guns and missile teams for both air defence & anti-tank roles. Aircraft weren’t flying from that exclave as there wasn’t an airport or airbase there and the Spanish had to stretch their defences from the Balearic Islands to Gibraltar but there were still plenty of Mirages (both the F-1 attack-fighters and -III interceptors), American-supplied F-4s and Spanish-built F-5s in service. The naval forces of Spain in-place to block Soviet access to the Atlantic were impressive in number. They had an aircraft carrier, SPS Dedalo, once the USS Cabot which had served in the Second World War and now flew Harriers. While old, she was capable of supporting the air operations of those jump-jets and that was what mattered. Destroyers, frigates, patrol boats and submarines aplenty were all in the area, many of those which had seen action late last year off the Canary Islands. The Spanish Navy also had Z.14 HueyCobra helicopter gunships tasked to support their lighter warships and to deal with enemy naval helicopters too who wouldn’t be as well armed.
Once there were Soviet fighter-bombers flying from Melilla, the Mediterranean Feet moved forwards. They’d been generally stationary – as a formation, not individually for the ships moved about – while waiting and been positioned far southeast of Majorca, northeast of Algiers. Being out in open water there put them at the edge of fighter cover from Malta but beyond the reasonable grasp of air attacks coming out of mainland Spain. January 20th saw the Soviets move west once again.
The Alboran Sea was where the Soviets and the Allies clashed, the eastern side of the Gibraltar Straits. Air power opened the action followed by submarines joining in and only afterwards came the limited participation of naval surface forces despite each side having many of those available for combat. The victors wouldn’t be the Soviet Mediterranean Fleet.
Focusing on the big ships, those five major surface combatants, the Allies got four of them. The carrier Kuybyshev never got to use her Forgers effectively nor even bring to bear her arsenal of long-range anti-ship missiles either. A US Navy submarine crippled her with torpedo hits which allowed Allied air power to strike against a sitting duck. That air power was those RAF Tornados who came in low, oh so very low, and smashed Sea Eagle sea-skimming missiles into the Kuybyshev. These missiles were still new in service with the RAF only having made a few firings off Norway last year with Buccaneers doing that. Here in the Med., the Sea Eagle used by Tornados showed its worth. The many hits set the Soviet carrier alight and eliminated damage control efforts to save her after the American torpedo strike. The fires would eventually be put out by onrushing sea water when she sunk. It cost the RAF five Tornados in total – three lost to a huge SAM barrage and two more to close-in rapid-fire anti-aircraft guns – but this was deemed worth it to destroy such a ship whose presence in the Atlantic couldn’t be tolerated.
Another one of those American submarines sunk the helicopter carrier Leningrad. This was the USS Dallas again, the same vessel so active early in the war’s first naval battles in the Eastern Med. which had all that success then but had been unable to stop air attacks destroying most of the Sixth Fleet. Torpedo hits from her sunk the Leningrad. A return to Rota while flying a Jolly Roger would come for the Dallas, before in later weeks from New York the actions of her and her crew would be celebrated by American propaganda. Twice now the Americans had destroyed Leningrad: the city and the ship named after it.
The Moskva was a much harder kill. Mirage F-1s went after that sistership to the Leningrad, fighting through SAMs which took down several on the way in and on the way out too. A pair of the fighter-bombers got through them and the intensive anti-aircraft fire from radar-directed guns to run a string of bombs perfectly down the full length of the ship. Some exploded on impact; more went in through her foredeck bristling with weapons, her superstructure amidships and the rear flight-deck before detonating. The damage done was excellent but wouldn’t kill her. The Spanish had to have another go and that they did. Their F-4s in service were usually tasked for fighter duties but retained attack capabilities. Again when coming at the Moskva, several aircraft were lost but others got through and the F-4s dropped more bombs on the ship. Earlier fires got out of control after the second attack and the helicopter carrier would burn furiously until she was eventually abandoned and left to the seas to take her.
Both the Krasny Oktyabr and the Slava unleashed their barrages of missiles. Shipwrecks and Sandboxs flew against Allied naval forces with lethal results. The battlecruiser and the missile-cruiser afterwards were struck at with attacks that the Allies had hoped to get in first but had to settle for doing afterwards. A Royal Navy submarine failed to get the Slava and was sunk itself; the Krasny Oktyabr fell afoul of the Royal Navy though when it tried to run through the straits. The barrage of missiles had sunk or damaged all of those Allied surface ships and the way ahead was thought clear. From out of Gibraltar came missiles though. These were Exocets based around the Excalibur system which had the whole Gibraltar Straits in range. Two perfect hits were recorded. Burning but still capable of fighting, the Krasny Oktyabr turned towards Gibraltar. The ship had other weapons and the Excalibur battery was being reloaded. From the Kirov-class warship which could be best described as a behemoth, the guns on the ship opened fire as if she was a battleship of old. These were rather accurate: the Soviets gunners only had one twin-barrelled 130mm gun but it was put to good use. RAF and also Spanish aircraft were on their way to intervene and the Excalibur battery (a trailer system which had switched positions) was also finally reloaded. Before any of that could be used, the Krasny Oktyabr was struck by more Exocets. The frigate HMS Boxer fired them from over on the western side of the straits, her targeting aided by one of her helicopters flying dangerously close to the Soviet battle-cruiser but aided by the smoke pouring out of her. One, two, three, four – the Boxer got excellent hits in. Each Exocet, these particular missiles part of a recent French delivery to Britain, neutrality be damned, hit low along the port side just above the waterline. One failed to explode but the other three did. The gunfire from the Krasny Oktyabr ceased. Gibraltar had been hit hard by the accurate shelling though the shock value of that would far outweigh what little real destruction was done. Still afloat though fatally wounded, the Allies weren’t about to leave the Soviet ship alone. It was hit by more Exocets out of Gibraltar and then in came aircraft on attack runs: first Spanish jets then the RAF. Still, after all of this, it remained afloat and refused to die. Royal Marines on The Rock wanted to go out in assault boats and ‘take’ the ship: it was a dozen miles offshore and what a prize it would be. That was a flight of fancy. Imagine the casualties from undertaking a mission like that on the fly… The Royal Navy would have the kill instead. Boxer’s Lynx put two Sea Skua missiles into her before the submarine HMS Conqueror used torpedo after torpedo to put holes in the battle-cruiser. Finally, the Krasny Oktyabr tipped over and sunk. There’d be celebrations, many of them, yet a nuclear disaster of immense magnitude was to occur when her reactor blew up. The environmental clean-up would have ecological and political consequences for many years to come.
These sinkings (apart from the Slava which got away) came at a price though. While hitting the big ships and also sinking many others – three smaller cruisers, seven destroyers and two frigates plus six support ships – the Allies lost aircraft, submarines and also surface ships of their own. There were many missile firings by the Mediterranean Fleet before it was overcome and Soviet naval air power smashed up the Allied navies. This came from distance though, aircraft flying from Malta, because the last of those aircraft in Melilla remained outnumbered and could do very little when the big fight came. Eight of the Allies own major warships would be lost (add the Royal Navy’s losses here to those suffered in the Battle of the Baltic Exits and the losses combined would bring tears to the eye) and another dozen damaged. Unlike the Soviets, wounded Allied ships could retreat to a friendly port and that did help somewhat with saving ships and lives. Nonetheless, the losses were horrendous in terms of ships and sailors.
When the Slava ran back east, along with other ships, this meant that the Mediterranean Fleet hadn’t been finished off. Giving chase though was impossible. The Allied navies couldn’t do it. The Dedalo had been one of those Allied casualties, hit with a wave of missiles from the Krasny Oktyabr (she didn’t sink yet after putting into Rota, she’d never sail again), and that meant that there was no aircraft carrier available. Over in the central parts of the Med., the French and the Italians had their huge gathering of naval power and the airbases on land too. If anyone was going to finish off the Soviet’s Atlantic ambitions finally, put the last of their ships on the bottom of the sea, it would be them. Geo-political events after the attack on Sweden looked likely that that was going to happen too.
January 1985: Britain and Western Europe
Violence hit urban areas of England in the New Year. The worst of it, smaller than in other places but more-deadly (literally), was on Tyneside around the Meadow Well council estate in North Shields. A riot started a few days into January one night following police arresting of stone-throwing youths who targeted police vehicles responding to a break-in of a home which turned into a murder. Some food had been stolen but then things had gotten out of hand with a homeowner killed. Local kids did what they did, joined by young adults including many young men who should really have been in uniform but Britain hadn’t taken to full conscription because it just couldn’t afford it. The police responded with reinforcements and a petrol bomb (where did the fuel for that come from in times of national shortages?) was thrown which engulfed an officer. In a counter-response to that, shots were fired from armed officers against another young man carrying a similar weapon. Some of the mob ran but the rest were enraged and attacked the police with fists, boots and improvised weapons. Suddenly overwhelmed, the police retreated and in the darkness lost contact with a few of their officers. They went back to get them and found bodies: two officers beaten to death. A couple of unlucky youths, who may or may not have been involved in those killings, ended up dead themselves. Tensions were high and the violence the police met was extreme yet this was deliberate and thus inexcusable. Word spread in the wider community and in the following days another half a dozen people lost their lives: three policemen and three more civilians. Eventually, the Army – Home Defence Force (HDF) soldiers – showed up and covered the estate with men and enforced a dusk-to-dawn curfew. A lot of rain and some bitterly cold weather came in with those soldiers and the local troublemakers decided that this was a fight they couldn’t win. Thirteen deaths occurred in total, all over a few loaves of bread and some leftover meat cuts.
Birmingham, Coventry, Liverpool and Manchester each saw similar events though with a far lower death toll where local situations spiralled fast out of control. In Bristol and London, there was rioting as well where parts of these locations were hit with violence which fast took on a racial nature. Fighting the police or each other was one thing though when soldiers turned up, things changed fast despite it being the police who actually shot people rather than the Army who came ready with plentiful weapons. Each time it was all about small matters, usually thefts and robberies of rationed food and sometimes expensive goods to be sold on the black market – which was thriving – to buy more food. However, this violent rioting came alongside further anti-war protests which were taking place. To the authorities, that was what this was all about. Arrests were made of those behind the ongoing marches, events not co-ordinated on a national scale but which were still being seen up and down the nation.
‘No War, No More – We Don’t Want Your F**king War!’
The same chant was heard again and again, through other parts of the nation beyond those places in England where the violence was. There were scuffles with police and sometimes stone-throwing though never petrol bombs, outright murder or even targeted shooting at these events. Even over in Northern Ireland, where English rioters could learn what rioting was really all about, there was nothing on the scale of what happened on Tyneside. It must be said though that there was a particularly nasty incident in South London where an ambush saw a police van disabled, set on fire and the officers inside barricaded within before they forced their way out. They suffered burns but escaped alive: there had been eight of them who came pretty damn close to being killed in such a horrible manner. Organised attacks on food distribution centres by criminals eased up some in the New Year due to a larger military presence with HDF patrols increasing to take the burden off the police. Again, the sight of full-armed men in combat gear put off those people who branched out to smaller robberies instead, much of that setting off the rioting in urban areas in a knock-on effect. Food-wise, rations were increased in January when the government took the step of releasing part of their barrier stocks – a risky move; the Soviets could increase their scaled-back attacks on shipping – in a move to head off nationwide anger of what ‘little’ people received. Extras in the form of treats (more tea, sugar, chocolate) came too, all given by a government playing a Late Santa but whom so many people now wouldn’t have minded seeing strung up. That risk was taken with releasing some conserved stocks to the ration list because there had come some extra shipping that had arrived. Part came from distant overseas countries yet some more came from closer to Britain’s shores.
France shipped over ‘foreign aid’ with freight aircraft and also ships crossing the Channel. None of this had to be paid for and Britain really needed what was sent. There was food but also came munitions too. Crates of ammunition specific to military weapons in British service were sent as part of this aid package. What Britain wanted as well was oil – for ships and aircraft – but that France was unable to provide. All that food and ammunition was still very much welcome though. Whether any outside country, one specifically, wanted to complain was up to them: the shipments were still made regardless of France’s neutrality and Britain’s status as a wartime belligerent nation.
Warships would have been something that Britain would have liked to have France give them as aid too. France didn’t have them to supply. It was just something on Britain’s wish list if someone else wanted to play a Late Santa too. December and then January saw many losses occur and the wartime tally reach the halfway mark late in the month when it came to losses and major damage being done to the Royal Navy in terms of hulls. All those ships sunk or burnt out and dragged back to port added up. Shipyards were busy patching up many of those damaged or salvaging bits and pieces from the ones beyond repair so the figure of available ships was due to rise again… unless the Soviets struck hard again. The knowledge that the Soviet Navy was nearly a gutted shell, in a worst state than the Royal Navy, was a consolation but they still had many submarines left untouched. Submarines could sink a British ship just like barrages of missiles from their surface vessels could. On the matter of Soviet submarines, there was one of them which arrived in British waters in the middle of the month. It was a nuclear-powered attack model, one trying to slip through the North Channel between Scotland and Ulster to get into the Irish Sea. With torpedoes and missiles, or laying mines, even delivering commando frogmen, it could have caused a world of hurt. Instead, the Royal Air Force used a Nimrod to drop depth charges atop it. The submarine had been closing in towards the Clyde Estuary at the time and there had been the fear that it could be on its way to strike at Faslane or Holy Loch: the bases from where the Polaris and Trident strategic submarines of the Royal Navy and US Navy operated from. An emergency meeting in London took place while the hunt was on for the submarine after it was first detected and lost where the War Cabinet discussed using nuclear weapons (the Soviets had just done so in the Baltic Exits) to blow up this enemy vessel. Low-yield underwater blasts could have occurred. There was talk of a line being crossed, one drawn on a map. Arguments commenced over the potential act of using nuclear weapons on ‘British soil’ – it was British waters to be honest – but before then the submarine was detected elsewhere and attacked from above with conventional blasts. It surfaced and four crewmen popped out. They, and the RAF aircraft above, expected the submarine to sink. It did no such thing. The submarine floated, taken by the tides towards land. The sailors in the water were rescued by helicopter, only done because there was one nearby and the still-afloat submarine was present. They were in a bad way: not just being in the freezing water but suffering from radiation poisoning. There had been a nuclear accident aboard. In London, the politicians had a collective panic attack. It could break up on the shoreline off Belfast or the Clyde Estuary and give UK soil a nuclear disaster to deal with! Another discussion was held on the possibility of using nukes to stop a nuclear disaster… because that made sense, didn’t it? Then the decision was taken out of their hands. That Nimrod, still circling and awaiting orders, heard explosions underwater and then a huge air bubble reached the surface. That was the end of the submarine which went down in (relatively) open water. Its reactor didn’t explode and it appeared that it had been intentionally sunk by what crewmen were left aboard. There remained many questions and an effort would be made to find out the exact sequence of events plus look at that reactor, but the worst hadn’t happened. Many thanks were given to higher deities.
Over on the Continent, in an unofficial capacity, there were British representatives in Maastricht when a treaty was signed there between several Western European nations forming the European Defensive Alliance. The alliance was referred to in London as the ‘EDA’ or the ‘Maastricht Bloc’. It was a sort-of new NATO formed from eight nations. France, Italy, West Germany, the Netherlands, Belgium and Luxembourg were the core nations who’d been discussing this for a while – and arguing over its meaning – and before they signed their agreement in the Dutch town, the leaders of those nations were joined by the Danish prime minister and the new Swedish foreign minister. Denmark and more-importantly Sweden were part of the EDA. The former had just been threatened with war by the Soviet Union and weeks before backed away from a fight while the latter had foreign troops on its soil who’d fought their way in causing huge casualties. Both were now part of a pan-European defensive alliance. To add to the geo-political shockwave this caused, the very next day saw the arrival of EDA (mainly French with smaller contributions from others) forces inside of the two Scandinavian countries. They came to defend Danish soil and also to stop any more of Sweden being occupied.
The Italian government was a big player in the EDA though it remained French-led as the country pushed for superpower status. Mitterrand acted for French interests first and then those of Western Europe in doing all of this. The West Germans went along with him and so did the Low Countries, effectively bullied into that joint action for what this one man wanted. He spoke of collective defence and the need for them all to protect each other yet he really was dragging them to eventual war. Denmark was quite the step to take but Sweden was even more so. The entry into Sweden of French forces put them right in the firing line of the stalemated Soviet-Swedish conflict. They were positioned in southern Sweden outside of the immediate frontlines yet the distances from Soviets forces still exchanging fire with the Swedes and where the French turned up wasn’t that far. Their 11th Airborne Division (some West Germans came along for the trip: paratroopers and mountain troops) arrived in the Gothenburg area by air with Swedish assistance then given to transferring in French combat aircraft through the last days of January. The 6th Light Armored Division was already rolling into Denmark – across from West Germany – joined by a mixed Italian brigade including Belgians and Dutch, while the French 9th Marine Infantry Division (light armour rather than marines) began a sea transfer from northern France also heading for Gothenburg. This would mean going through the North Sea and then the outer Baltic Exits, the latter of which those dozen-plus Soviet ships from their Baltic Fleet had recently fought their way through. The French secured from London information on certain parts of the Skagerrak to avoid, areas where the Royal Navy had just mined.
French entry of military forces into Sweden, as well as the moves by more forces into Denmark, made the EDA not just a piece of paper full of empty threats. Those two countries on the Baltic were now firmly part of a French-led military alliance ready for war with the Soviet Union. From Paris, the Soviets were forcefully informed that no more Swedish soil was to be occupied and there then came the demand that Soviet forces leave… though no direct deadline was given on that, something Bonn had secured from Paris. Through West Germany and down into the Med., there were other forward deployments which while not on the scale of Scandinavia still mattered a great deal. Mitterrand was giving the Soviets an answer to all that they had done to France and its interests. They had done all they had – including still holding his daughter as a hostage – but he was settling scores with them now. The alliance formed in Maastricht and the military deployments made brought war between Western Europe and the Soviets right to the brink.
Your move, Tovarich Vorotnikov.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 0:34:01 GMT
January 1985: The Middle East
What exactly happened in terms of the sequence of events and the motivations behind the fall of Gaddafi in Libya wasn’t widely known. General Haftar (the former colonel had the correct emblems of rank on his uniform; he was proud of them) was now in charge and Gaddafi was dead. The Soviets were pleased at this because they’d been behind this directly. That was what the other Arab regimes lead by strongmen spread from the Atlantic shores of Morocco in the west, to Syria in the north, to Egypt in the south and Iraq in the east knew. Allies and opponents of the Gaddafi-led Libya and the Soviets were unaware of how this had all occurred. They were more concerned about how it affected them. The views in the capitals of the many countries differed on specifics yet the general consensus was that the Soviets had used one of Gaddafi’s key military officers to topple him in a violent coup d’état when Gaddafi had been one of their closest allies. For the supposed allies of Moscow, this didn’t bode well for their own futures: if it could be done to Gaddafi, it could be done to them too if their actions displeased Vorotnikov. Arab regimes unfriendly to Moscow were also alarmed. They were no friends of Gaddafi but without him there they feared a wave of regional instability spreading from Libya in addition to making them consider that this was how the Soviets treated supposed friends so how would they treat those against them? With the latter – Egypt, Saudi Arabia, Tunisia and the Gulf Arab Monarchies foremost among these –, none were at war with the Soviets yet their anti-Moscow position was something that had been pushed against with force used. The Soviet’s allies, Iraq, Syria and Yemen had been long doing as they were told but had strove to maintain their independence. Their leaders didn’t want to lose that… and also their lives too.
Reaction came to the partially-understood toppling of Gaddafi. In Iraq, Saddam arranged for the deaths to occur of a trio of his leading generals. They had ‘accidents’, low-key affairs rather than anything dramatic, to forestall any challenge to Saddam from men he regarded as too close to Soviet influence. Assad moved several Syrian senior officers he viewed with suspicion to less-important positions and had his secret police watch them intensely with a view to giving them Iraqi-style accidents at any moment. In Yemen, gifts were given to high-ranking generals and further promises made on that note to keep people who had Moscow ties sweet. Egypt and Libya were still technically at war though there had been no outbreaks of fighting since last summer. Sadat was long dead and buried, killed by Palestinian proxies of Gaddafi, and Mubarak remained wary of another assassination on Egyptian soil: that being himself. He was always on the move and surrounded by loyal people. Once the news came from Libya that Gaddafi was dead and killed due to Soviet wishes, Mubarak instructed his massed military forces on the border to allow for passage to be made of defectors and any former regime figures. They would be allowed into Egypt yet kept under guard. Such people could be useful for the future, even if their association with the deceased Gaddafi would otherwise make them distasteful. Other Libyans already in Egypt, long-standing opponents of Gaddafi, wouldn’t be allowed to murder their fellow countrymen as they might wish to but would instead ‘talk’ with them to see if any could be useful for the joint aims of Egypt and a future Cairo-aligned Libya. Saudi Arabia was home to many Egyptian troops, those facing both Iraq and Yemen in an ongoing stand-off. Providing for them was taxing for Saudi and had become mightily costly in terms of a financial drain since the flow of oil from the country to the West had been cut off by war. The Saudis were looking for an opening for some time and they found one in the fallout elsewhere in the Middle East following Gaddafi’s fall. With Egyptian backing, Saudi diplomatic efforts commenced to start to woo Soviet allies. Assad and Saddam both received visits from Saudi princes (Yemen was ignored) who whispered dire warnings in their ears over the Soviets deposing them if they didn’t do exactly as demanded yet they could still face hostile action even if they did. Did they want to end up like Gaddafi had done? There was another way for them and their futures. Break away from Moscow’s orbit. Do it carefully, naturally, but think about your own futures should you stay with them. Find away to get out of the mess you have got yourself in was the message… though none of these secret diplomatic missions came with the promise of overt Saudi or Egyptian military support to them.
Assad and Saddam each listened. There was no harm in listening, was there?
There was one democratic country in the region, one not led by a strongman or an autocratic royal family. Israel, certainly not an Arab nation, was the only democracy there. While neutral throughout the conflict, Israel remained part of America’s orbit. Quite rightly, the thinking in Tel Aviv since the beginning of the war began for others was that once the Soviets were done with the United States, Israel would be next on their list. Such an independent and strong country with a system of government like Israel’s, surrounded by hostile Arab countries which the Soviets would get to do their dirty work for them, had no future in a Soviet dominated world. Imaginations of Arab armies settling scores for decades of Israeli behaviour were had in Tel Aviv. Those weren’t pleasant. Neither would be the alternative to that because if it came to it, if those Arab armies came, supported by the Soviets, it would be the Sampson Option that would occur.
Many things that went wrong in the Middle East in terms of disasters and wars were blamed on Israel. If someone died, the Zionists had done it. If a plane crashed, Mossad was responsible. If hunger or disease occurred, it was the work of Israel. This was widespread. Arab countries blamed Israel for a lot of things, a convenient scapegoat for their own failings: an enemy to keep their own people in check. Over the past several months, many things that had happened through the region had been the work of Israel. Imagine that! All the things that Israel was accused of doing, all of those alleged actions, were now coming true. Israeli involvement was to blame for a series of accidents with shipping which occurred in the Suez Canal which the Egyptians responded to by slowing the passage of shipping due to the need for an increase in security (they knew those accidents weren’t what they appeared to be) with the result being an angry Moscow. Killings and disappearances in Lebanon were the work of local proxies which Israel put to work, all to give the Syrians and headache there and stop them from fully aiding the Soviets with their grand Mediterranean plans. Syrian interference in Jordan at the behest of Moscow was too forestalled by Israeli actions. There was also Israeli interference in Iranian-Iraqi relations where they caused several firefights on the border between those two nations: Moscow sided with its clients in Tehran to the fury of Baghdad. This all cost Israel dear. Mossad was tasked to do a lot, asked again and again to strike here and there. They lost men, including some of their own dead or captured rather than expendable local proxies. Rescue attempts had to be made to get Israelis out of foreign hands: Mossad would let such people be lost for good without trying.
What occurred with both Turkey first and the Libya caught Israel off-guard. Turkey cosied up to the Soviets, granting them access to the Turkish Straits with free reign for their shipping. The secular generals in Ankara, who Israel had believed they could count upon to remain opposed to Moscow, changed tack. Mossad was providing intelligence on what the Saudis were up to (if they knew, the KGB was sure to as well) with Iraq and Syria but this flew in the face of a Turkish about-turn when it came to their relations with the Soviets. Libya was far more important though. The new regime there was better understood by Israel in how it had come about and Haftar being pushed to do what he did. However, how it all developed with Haftar acting on his own when motivated by Soviet support all occurred so fast. Israel didn’t like this. They feared just what the Arab regimes did: that Moscow would find someone in the countries of their allies to topple governments even on their own or with overt Soviet support. That would bring closer to reality Israel’s doomsday fears. Israel could come under attack – treated as a sure thing in Tel Aviv; not a possibility – earlier than thought, without Soviet victory elsewhere in the world. That whole pre-considered sequence of events which Israel had foreseen, a road-to-war scenario, was shattered.
What to do, what to do? Israel was feeling itself pushed into a corner. They couldn’t allow another Soviet-aligned country to become the vassal state (Iran like) which they believed that Libya was soon to be whether Haftar wanted it to be or not. Their interests now were the same as those of Egypt and Saudi Arabia. Any overt alliance with Cairo and Riyadh wouldn’t do: Israel wouldn’t have any serious internal political fallout but it would bring down those regimes from within to be an ally of Israel. However, things could be done behind the scenes. Israel decided to make their own diplomatic moves to establish ties with Arab neighbours of theirs who shared the same geo-political objectives. Things were about to get even more ‘interesting’ in the Middle East than they long had been.
January 1985: China
Through the western reaches of China, the expansive Sinkiang region, Soviet military control was total. The province which bordered Mongolia and Soviet Central Asia had been overrun by the Soviet Thirty–Second Army and their pacification efforts were complete. The latter had taken some time to finish but after all the blood was spilt and all of the destruction caused, no longer would any organised armed resistance come from either the ethnic Uighurs nor the Han Chinese after so many of them were dead and the rest having witnessed this occur. Maybe in the future, in the coming months, the flame of resistance might be relit, but not for now. The Thirty–Second Army was moving on though, leaving Sinkiang behind. They had been joined by the wartime-raised Forty–First Army and re-tasked away from occupation duties for further offensive missions. Those would take place to the south. Moscow wanted the two field armies to go into Tibet. Lhasa and the Indian frontier of the Himalayas were the ultimate objectives for this offensive. To say the distances and the challenge of going that far were gargantuan would be a terrific understatement. There they were being sent though by those who made the decisions and wouldn’t have to go with them.
Other Soviet armies were now in China too. Soviet forces already formed and newly-raised field armies completed their deployment into China through January. Damage from the nuclear strikes inside China, Mongolia and the Soviet Union delayed the planned passage of them but they were arriving in force. Many of these men were conscripts doing their state-mandated military service yet there were large numbers of reservists among the men from this second-wave of Soviet troops arriving in China. Without an official country-wide announcement, reservists from across the Soviet Union on a wider scale than seen before had been called up for service during November, spent December in training and moved across Eurasia in January to reach the North China Plain south of Beijing. Not every possible reservist that the Soviets would call upon had returned to uniform, but the majority of those who did were now in China rather than sent elsewhere to fight the other wars their nation was fighting. An economic reaction to the missing hundreds of thousands of soldiers had yet to come within the Soviet Union when so many men went off to war though that would be certain if they were away from home for long. Moscow didn’t plan for them to be gone for a significant amount of time.
The arriving troops were preparing to begin advancing alongside forces already inside China starting next month. The weather would improve – not be brilliant but better than it was now – and the Soviets would march on the Yangtze River and beyond. The war would afterwards thus come to a close when the Chinese finally saw sense and gave in. It was all so simple, all believed to be a solution to the China War. Of course, before then it had been attacking China from afar which would bend China to the Soviet Union’s will, then it was invading Manchuria before it was taking Beijing and then afterwards going over the Yellow River. No, this time, this was supposed to work. An offensive to get to the Yangtze (as well as the march into Tibet) was to finally get Moscow the result it desired.
At a Defence Council meeting just before the end of the month, called when the Western Europeans formed their military alliance and put troops into Sweden, a voice of opposition was raised to the wisdom of this. It came from Gromyko. The Soviet Foreign Minister spoke carefully but plainly. China wasn’t going to fold, Hu wasn’t going to give in. No one supported him openly. Vorotnikov listened but assured him and the others that that wouldn’t occur. Of course the Chinese would give in. Of course they would.
Flying from Andersen AFB on Guam, B-52s based there had been busy flying missions over the Asian mainland since the beginning of the war. They were assigned a semi-strategic role in this though at the same time had to remain prepared to undertake nuclear strikes as well. The 43rd Bomb Wing had been joined by the 319th Bomb Wing in attacking both on the Korean Peninsula and Vietnam too. North Korea had been hit with cruise missiles and the B-52s had conducted bomb-runs south of the DMZ too, each time staging through Okinawa. The now-finished Vietnam missions – with that country playing no more role in this war along with Soviet forces there – had been undertaken with cruise missiles against land targets and the B-52s firing massed waves of Harpoon anti-ship missiles as well when staging through the Philippines: no B-52s had been directly above Vietnam because memories of a previous conflict were still fresh. The Thirteenth US Air Force had coordinated these missions and F-4s flying from Clark AFB near Manila had been involved in earlier actions offshore from Vietnam before half of the 3rd Tactical Fighter Wing had been reassigned to Korea. In January, the Thirteenth Air Force moved the last of those tactical aircraft out of the Philippines and to Okinawa. The B-52s were now no longer going to be making strikes to support the Second Korean War and instead would join the transferred F-4s – plus F-15 fighters already there – in focusing solely on China. US air power was being directed to intervene in the China War.
Soviet forces in Shandong received the first of this attention. Three airbases which they were using plus the port of Qingdao (better known in the West as Tsingtao) were hit with missile strikes. The F-4s came in the next day, going overland, and also went for Qingdao as well where they attacked the sheltered port area as a follow-up to the B-52 strikes. There was a lot of shipping gathered there in the form of Chinese vessels that the Soviets had assembled. The movement of troops into Shandong pointed to an effort to use the ships to transport those troops somewhere. These were civilian vessels and not specialised amphibious assault ships but that was what it looked like. Rockets, bombs and guns were used to attack them. Soviet interference came. Their fighters were engaged by F-15s but some broke low to go after the F-4s. Into the skies as well came SAMs and anti-aircraft fire. Where the B-52s hadn’t been risked, these smaller aircraft had been and they were hit when over China. Five aircraft were lost that morning to Soviet MiGs and SAMs during the first tactical strikes, a large number which if repeated in another strike was wholly unsustainable. US intelligence scrambled to get images of the area afterwards to see what they had missed in terms of air defences the first time. Only now did they spot all of those SAM batteries, only after the commitment of a full squadron of tactical strike aircraft. Uncomfortable reminders of air losses with another past war on the Asian mainland came. A temporary block was put on more strikes like this though both the B-52s firing cruise missiles and F-15s on offshore fighter missions – working with the US Navy – would continue for now. Those voices who had warned that this would happen, the prophets of doom on the United States playing an active role in the China War, had had their warnings confirmed. Large portions of the United States itself remained occupied by foreign forces and there was a war raging on the Korean Peninsula: getting involved in China couldn’t and shouldn’t be done.
Taiwan continued to be another participant in the China War. Its involvement was undeclared officially yet there was no doubt that it was happening. Everyone could see it. The Chinese government in Nanchang, the Americans and the Soviets were all aware. Taiwan wasn’t going to begin a campaign to ‘retake the mainland’ but it was stealing scraps from the table. Offshore islands which China had once control of near to ones near to others held by Taiwan were taken unopposed by Taiwanese forces after the Chinese left them. The biggest of those, the huge island of Hainan, remained in Chinese hands yet if the Taiwanese had their way, it would soon be theirs too. The contested Parcel Islands down in the South China Sea – also claimed by Vietnam –came under Taiwanese control. Taiwanese naval patrols were underway at the top of the South China Sea as well, in the waters off the British and Portuguese colonial possessions of Hong Kong and Macau respectively. They engaged ‘pirates’: real ones but also Chinese naval ships whose crews had abandoned their country and were fighting for themselves. Taiwan then made itself a nuclear power.
Everything else it was doing now had a nod-and-wink approval from the United States, with the Chinese screaming of American betrayal, but not this. In the spate of a few months, the Americans had gone from threatening Taiwan to supporting its actions. This was different though: the United States would have put a stop to what occurred at sea if they knew. In secret, Taiwanese special forces took over a ship in one of their supposed anti-pirate operations. It had come from Ningbo with a destination being Shantou and loaded with five nuclear weapons, all to be hidden down in southern China. Overland and air routes were impossible and it was thought that a safer transit would be made by sea especially if the ship in question acted innocuously. A Taiwanese spy alerted his handlers though and it was assaulted by well-trained and capable men who removed the weapons – two artillery shells and three free-fall bombs – before scuttling that ship with the dead crew aboard. It was hoped that Nanchang would never find out exactly what happened, thinking that the ship had been attacked and sunk. Taiwan wanted those nuclear weapons for future purposes. The last thing they would ever want to do would be to use them against mainland China to respond to a strike on Taiwan. The Taiwanese couldn’t imagine that ever happening, it was unthinkable.
Despite what the Taiwanese did offshore in dealing with ships, some of them contained refugees heading for Hong Kong and Macau, there was still a flood of the needy towards each. The Portuguese were overwhelmed. They lost control of law and order in their territory. The city was hit by violence, looting and fire. Thousands of the people who called the colony home, as well as thousands more who had fled here for their own safety, lost their lives. Half the world away, Lisbon could do nothing to stop this. Such a thing wasn’t going to be allowed to happen in Hong Kong. The colonial authorities had begged London for assistance yet been sent none. They were told to make do with what they had and stop the masses of refugees from entering Hong Kong illegally where their presence would ‘be a threat to public order’. There were tens of thousands of refugees who’d come overland and by boats already. These were causing all of the problems feared already. In addition, there was at least two hundred and fifty thousand more Chinese outside of Hong Kong, in the immediate vicinity and trying to get inside. Hong Kong was the promised land where there was no war, no hunger, no disease and safety for them & their families.
The 26th Gurkha Brigade was responsible for the defence of Hong Kong. There were two battalions of Gurkhas, a battalion from the Royal Green Jackets and the men of the Royal Hong Kong Regiment. A division or a corps, not a brigade, was really needed for this task. The British only had these men though and it was they who had to stop the flow of people. They did the very best that they could. Blockages were made to stop people entering Hong Kong and physical lines of troops deployed. Gaps appeared everywhere though. Desperate people will always get through. The only way that the British could have stopped the flow of people properly would be to shoot them. Those who made it to Hong Kong couldn’t be thrown back out – how could that be realistically done? – and more followed them. London demanded that the flow of people be stopped. It couldn’t. Things slowly started to fall apart in Hong Kong. It wasn’t fast like it had been in Macau yet was still occurring. Violence took place daily and there was mass looting. Those refugees who behaved, the overwhelming majority of them who didn’t lash out, were a massive strain on the colony in terms of food, shelter and medical attention. Help us, Hong Kong demanded. We can’t, London replied. To those looking at this with neutral and objective eyes, who could see where this was going, Hong Kong was eventually going to end up the way of Macau.
January 1985: The Korean Peninsula
Allied forces in South Korea once again cut the connections from invading forces south of the Han to their positions north of that river. From out of the Seoul Pocket, fighting a slow-moving and brutal battle, American and South Korean troops succeeded in cutting off North Korean and Soviet troops out ahead. They were then reinforced and the area of liberated territory widened when Commonwealth troops – the bashed-about Australians along with a recent increase in numbers of Malaysians – joined in. The Australians and Malaysians ended up with forward positions facing northwards and to the east; positioned southwards were the American and South Korean. These fighting men were tired and due for a break after doing what they had but orders came to push onwards, going even further south and retaking further occupied soil as well. They came up against North Korean troops whose positions looked formidable yet were brittle. First the 3rd Marine Division and then the South Korean 9th Infantry Division (the famous White Horse) overcame enemy resistance as they struck and broke through significantly. Their pace picked up as they advanced and all North Koreans before them broke. There came less and less return fire and a mass of surrendering prisoners. Two more South Korean divisions along with an armoured brigade, joined by the US Army’s 25th Infantry Division, entered the fight and broadened the frontage. Huge areas of previously-occupied land was retaken. Nowhere could the North Koreans hold on and they were barely even fighting any more. Away to the north, the other Allied troops facing further North Koreans dug in between the Han and the DMZ were facing strong and spirited opposition, but there was none of that to the south. Only when the Allied attack reached the Soviets and their two-division corps did the wildly-successful offensive come to a halt when they came into contact with those opponents. Once stopped, the Allies now had to deal with the staggering number of prisoners which they took in sixteen days of going forward. There were nearly one hundred and eighty thousand of them, the majority of whom needed urgent medical care too. The Korean People’s Army (KPA) had just fallen apart so completely and rapidly. Why?
It was a combination of many factors. Firstly, the KPA had been fighting south of the DMZ since mid-September and there had been no let-up at all. Conditions for the men enforced by officers and political commissars were almost barbaric. These men ate scraps, suffered ridiculously harsh punishments for the smallest things and were generally in sorry state. Victories which they won brought them nothing but another fight to have straight afterwards. Morale was non-existent. That would have long ago killed any other army but not the KPA due to the men who were frightened of their own regime, for themselves but also their families back home, more than any enemy they might face. The cessation of ammunition supplies was another key factor which broke the North Koreans. The first time that there had been a cutting of connections running back north, the interruption had been short and supplies already forward were used before the Soviets arrived to tear through Allied lines. Following behind their tanks came trucks laden with bullets and shells for the KPA. This second time that the Allies cut them off was worse than the first though and occurred when ammunition levels were at rock bottom. Instructions came that those cut-off troops were to fight with their bare hands if necessary and then seize from overcome enemies their weapons and ammunition. This was utterly stupid and wholly impossible. The KPA ran out of bullets and thus couldn’t return fire against the attacking Allies. Those who sent the orders for the men to fight with their bare hands weren’t the ones who would have to run into machine gun fire without having any covering support, were they? Thirdly, the final factor in the sudden KPA collapse was a rumour. It started within the North Korean lines themselves, one stamped hard upon by political officers with executions made. The rumour reached South Korean ears though and the ANSP (the successor to the Korean CIA; who’d long held a larger role than the now-defunct American CIA when it came to South Korean military affairs) decided to make use of it. They helped re-spread the story that Kim Il-sung was dead, killed at American hands. This meant that the certainly that the fighting men had that the regime would punish them for any surrender and also seek revenge upon their families too was gone. Kim was supposedly dead and back home there would be no deadly retribution for any failure to continue fighting when they couldn’t anyway.
It was a perfect storm. What began as a small Allied offensive became that rout of the KPA. There were still other groups of North Koreans south of the Han, already in isolated groups and not part of the collapsed force but they were ultimately doomed as well. The Soviets remained also yet they too were well and truly cut off. Their own ammunition was soon to run out but before then fuel, the lack of to be exact, looked likely to be the cause of their downfall. The KPA had long become a majority dismounted force but the Soviet Sixty–Eighth Army Corps had all of their tanks, their infantry fighting vehicles and self-propelled guns. They needed fuel or were fast going to be static pillboxes ready to be picked off by accurate fire. What really would have helped speed up the process of destroying both the last of the North Koreans and the Soviets too would have been significant air attacks. Those B-52s re-tasked from missions above the Korean Peninsula to the air strikes made against China would have been perfect for this. Combined Forces Korea had had no say over that decision and there was a mood of (an unsaid) ‘I told you so’ with that. They still missed those bombers though. Tactical air strikes just couldn’t make up for the tonnage that waves of bombers would bring to play. That B-52s were elsewhere though and there was still a war to fight. Reaching the Soviets was all that the Allied forces could do for now, at least until next month, and so they consiliated their positions around them and the smaller groups of North Koreans. An attempt was made by the Soviets to link up with one of those KPA pockets. A pair of battalions of T-64s from the 277th Motorised Rifle Division’s tank regiment – using up their fuel at an alarming rate – pushed forward in a major attack. This was deemed by the Allies to be an attempt to not retake territory or save those North Koreans but instead grab them to use as bullet-soakers around them when faced with overwhelming numbers of Allied forces closing in. It was a good attack, one which might have worked. However, North Korean communications were intercepted as they spoke internally over the radio where units were warned of the approach of the Soviets. South Korean tanks but also anti-tank units, guns and dismounted missile teams, got in the way and the attack ground to a halt short of its objectives. There was an anticipation that the Sixty–Eighth Corps would try again but they didn’t. They were now conserving their fuel. More fool them. Allied troops were moved to surround them, ready to move in at a later point.
The war south of the Han was won. The Allies had secured a victory. It was only now about convincing the Soviets and the last of the North Koreans that they had lost. Part of that included spreading more rumours among the KPA, this time with the Korean CIA doing all the work themselves to get this started. The newest story was that the ‘new regime’ in Pyongyang had made peace with the Allies. Similar attempts weren’t tried with any serious effort made for the fighting which continued north of the Han. The Australians and Malaysians – there were troops from New Zealand, the Philippines and Singapore too with them yet far fewer in number – joined with larger numbers of South Koreans in fighting there. The central mountain spine which ran down the Korean Peninsula saw crossings made over it of further South Koreans from the eastern side of South Korea during January. Over there, the KPA attack in the war’s first days had stalled and never gotten very far with no major successes occurring in going south like they did in better terrain to the west. The South Koreans had continually been sending smaller numbers of men for many months from their eastern defences to the west though still retaining large numbers of troops over there. Now, most of them were moving over the mountains and down to the western side of the country. The Americans had long wanted them to do it earlier, trying to bring them under central control of the Combined Forces Korea headquarters but the South Koreans had resisted this and kept them independent. They hadn’t kept them there when they were needed to the west because they were stupid. They were waiting for a time such as this when they wouldn’t be whittled away in small fights but could be used all at once. Making the transfer in the bad weather of the New Year was done too because the intention was for the North Koreans – aided by Soviet reconnaissance efforts – to not realise until it was far too late.
A bigger battle, nearer to the DMZ, to the northeast of Seoul was coming. The South Koreans were going to settle many scores with the KPA occupiers who had a hold of their territory there. Everything that they knew about the horrors of that occupation was true and they planned to put that right soon enough. Before then, troops moved forward and into position. Ammunition and fuel, what their opponents would kill for, what they had been told to kill for, was with them and while not plentiful, there was judged enough to do what needed to be done. That was to clear all South Korean territory south of the DMZ of the enemy. They’d move to do that in February and wouldn’t stop until every last occupier was dead or prisoner: allowing them to get back over the DMZ wasn’t an option.
[End of Part VII]
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 0:35:45 GMT
Interlude – Colorado Bound #2
Early February 1984: Putin
For the second time, Captain Putin was taken prisoner by Americans. He hands were bound with his wrists in plastic ties behind his back and a hood had been thrown over his head. This time it wasn’t American guerrillas but instead it seemed their special forces, one of their A Teams from the Green Berets. He’d been deceived and was their prisoner. Around him others were dead. He personally had been punched in the face, had a rifle barrel pushed hard against his temple and threatened in Spanish with having his man bits removed. He was alive though. He was also, it seemed from what he could hear, about to take a helicopter ride.
Putin silently cursed his own error for falling for the trick that he had… but it wasn’t his fault!
The attack by American aircraft which had targeted Florence in early November had killed dozens of Soviets and Cubans alike though not Putin. He’d emerged without a scratch on him let alone any serious injury like those who weren’t killed. In the hours afterwards, without proper medical attention, most of the wounded lost their lives. Putin hadn’t stuck around to witness that. KGB activities were transferred to Canon City and from there he had carried on with his duties. There remained guerrillas to track down and interrogate for further information on others. He’d made a lot of progress, identifying those involved in information-gathering rather than shootings and bombings directly. The Cubans were focusing on some active terror groups, one band of wildly-successfully young fascists in particular, though he wasn’t involved in that. He was glad that he missed out. The GRU had sent in a Spetsnaz team, elite hunters of partisans who’d apparently done some excellent work down in the Texas Hill Country beforehand. They were caught in an ambush and killed almost to a man. That was apparently the work of some teenagers if what he heard was to be believed. Putin had nothing to do with it and remained happily uninvolved. He met with Colonel Bella afterwards and sensed how relived that Cuban officer was that he had too been left behind. Bella had told him that eventually they would get those young fascists – the Wolverines – at a later date but Putin had doubted that he would. Regardless, Fremont County was then left behind by Putin as come December, he’d been reassigned to a new task. It wasn’t an enjoyable one.
Based in Salida, KGB operations in the San Isabel National Forest and then Pike National Forest beyond expanded on the western side of Colorado. Denver and Colorado Springs were over to the east; here out in the wilderness, the Soviet Airborne were fighting the Americans and the KGB undertook its Operation Tsiklon. Putin’s input on whether ‘Cyclone’ was a good idea or not didn’t matter. The orders came down that this was to be done. Arms were to be supplied to guerrillas: such was Tsiklon. It was madness. Even when it was explained to Putin, he still knew it was utterly insane. Who came up with such an idea? Anyone who had ever spent any time in America, would tell you it was crazy. Even those who hadn’t been here and made the decisions from afar, they would know the scale of partisan resistance which was being faced. Yet the instructions were to supply arms to ‘certain’ groups of guerrillas, those who were identified as showing a strong sense of separatism and a willingness to fight against their government. Their immediate interests didn’t have to align with those of the Soviet Union, just their overall desire to fight their own government. Whether or not they chose to use these weapons as well as against Soviet military forces didn’t matter as long as their politics were opposed to the United States Government itself. One of Putin’s first thoughts – those beyond wondering whether those back at the Lubyanka had gone completely insane – was to ponder on how the Soviet Army or Soviet Airborne soldiers themselves would react when they discovered this. Taking part in Tsiklon could see him shot by his fellow countrymen, accidentally of course. His orders weren’t ones which he could question. He was to follow instructions on this regardless. Putin would work with others to identify those who could be supplied with stocks of captured American weapons (they weren’t getting Soviets arms) to use to fight their own countrymen. A dependency would be sought from such groups where they relied upon the KGB for information, material aid and safe passage. Informers among the groups would be cultivated as well for long-term benefit.
They’d sent Putin because he had experience of dealing with American informers already. He was told that he’d shown how this could be done due to his previous actions in Albuquerque, Florence and Canon City when it came to finding informers and making use of them properly. Putin reflected upon the favourable reports he had written and submitted to his superiors. Perhaps if he hadn’t been so willing to claim credit for things beyond his control, oftentimes lucky and explainable pure chance turns of events, then maybe he wouldn’t have been tasked for the mission? Maybe if he hadn’t lied as part of a process to gain a future promotion he wouldn’t be in this mess? No, he discounted such an idea. He had done what was necessary. It wasn’t his fault he was sent up into the inner reaches of the Rocky Mountains.
Putin’s ability to speak English remained limited yet his Spanish was a lot better. The many long years working through Latin America he had spent there speaking that had seen him sent to the United States as soon as the war began. The sniping he’d witnessed near El Paso around Fort Bliss had been his first taste of the war in America, an unhappy welcome indeed. There were ‘indigenous groups of Hispanics’ who had a ‘burning desire for freedom’, so he’d been told, through the American West. Putin had quickly discovered that those supposedly oppressed people of Hispanic origin had no wish to be liberated, especially in the form that it had come. Others were deluding themselves, he had refused to. Delusion like that got other men killed. A grip on the reality of it all kept him alive. Anyway, his Spanish was rarely used. With many Americans who clearly spoke that language, when faced with the Soviets and the KGB, he discovered how fast the common approach was of ‘me, senor: I no speak Spanish’. It had been like that in New Mexico and was the same in Colorado, more so up here inside the Rockies. Putin had to retain the services of English-speaking translators again and again. He had no trust in any American collaborator for those purposes, only fellow KGB non-commissioned officers who had a grasp of that language. Putin knew a few curses in Spanish and he’d use them himself against suspected Spanish-speakers to gain a reaction from those who pretended that they couldn’t understand him at first. Their responses to what he suggested was the profession of their mothers or their own personal bedroom tastes, delivered in a language which they feigned total ignorance, gave them away every time.
None of the guerrillas he managed to make contact with through the winter claimed to speak Spanish. Most of them surely did have at least a passing knowledge of that language yet all pretended that they didn’t. To not be able to properly interact with these people limited what Putin was able to do. His reports up the chain-of-command said differently, but… well, that that was only going to get him deeper into things didn’t even enter his thought train. What was that smug attitude about not deceiving himself? Nonetheless, there were some Americans who were caught – the ones not killed straight away by armed soldiers – brought before him who professed an interest in fighting against their own government. These were people who would fight anyone in fact. They were natural rebels of any authority, those with obscure and disturbing political views. Anyone sensible would take them outside, tie them to a post, and shoot them to save the world a lot of grief. Such a thing wasn’t done like it should be though. These people were released and given safe passage. There was work to be done with them, an ongoing process where their actions would be useful in the immediate- & long-term. However, a few, just a couple, were shot though. Putin managed to see through the lies of some and discover their attempts at double-dealing. They had that liaison with a post and a bullet to the back of the neck, a fate delivered by one of his NCOs rather than himself. Putin had no wish to dirty his uniform with the blood of liars. Of the released ones, further contact was made by radio once they were back out in the wilderness. Some made contact only once, maybe twice, and then weren’t heard from again. One of them tried to get Putin to come and meet him up in the forests because there was supposedly someone who wanted to talk to him. Discussing it with his superior, telling the major he was reporting to his suspicions, Putin didn’t go. The Soviet Air Force made an appearance at the place and time that Putin ‘agreed’ to meet the contact who he believed had turned on him. From up above, bombs fell from a fighter-bomber. He told himself that he had done the right thing there. Anyone who wanted to talk should return to Salida and not try to drag him up into the wilderness.
The memory of that was still in his mind on February 4th when Putin did just that though: leave the safety of the KGB post inside the secure compound that Soviet Airborne troops had made the Colorado town and go into the San Isabel Forest to meet someone. He had told himself that this was different. It was a whole different set of circumstances. He’d assured himself that he knew what he was doing, that this was a situation which he was in control of. There was someone who he wanted to see and talk to at once and also to talk to the prisoner whom the ‘friendly’ guerrilla had his hands on. No one had been present to look Putin in the face and ask him if he was an idiot for doing something like this. He went up into the forest supposedly safe and protected by others with him, all men under his command and well-armed. He’d told himself that he knew what he was doing. He was smarter than anyone else. He’d come out of this fine and he was already mentally writing the glowing report of his ‘success’ on the way to the meet.
They ran into an ambush.
Gunfire erupted once they were on the ground. Putin made a dash back to the helicopter, aiming to get there before it lifted off without him. He was lucky that he wasn’t quick enough. An RPG smashed into the cabin before he got there and there was an almighty explosion. He was thrown backwards and knocked unconscious. He was out for some time, the length of that something he didn’t know. When he came around, he was physically attacked and taken prisoner. The men who had him and two more of his party who remained alive with him spoke English so he couldn’t understand everything but Putin got the general gist of it. They were returning to base complete with prisoners… the KGB officer they’d been after among them.
They took Putin to a place called Aspen. The officer in charge of his kidnappers took off Putin’s hood when they arrived and told him that name. Putin gave no reaction. He knew what Aspen, a resort for wealthy Americans, was but that wasn’t the point: the American was trying to engage with him, get him to start talking. He couldn’t see any other reason for being told that. Further to being told where he was, when driven away from the airport and then into a hotel building, the American spoke to him further. He introduced himself as Captain McChrystal. Putin didn’t know if that name was real or not, but did it really matter? This McChrystal character seemed to know all about him including biographical details in addition to what he’d been doing with Tsiklon. He really had been betrayed. Still, Putin gave him nothing in returning.
The hotel wasn’t a base of operations for these Green Berets but a holding site for detainees. Putin could see that at once by how it looked from the outside and then that was confirmed with all of the security measures inside. He was handed over to those here when released from McChrystal’s custody. His fellow captain wished him well and told him, in Spanish, to ‘enjoy your stay in Aspen’. Putin lost his cool. He turned to the man who’d captured him and said his first words since then.
“When the Rodina wins this war, I’ll make sure we meet again.”
McChrystal burst out laughing. Walking away among his underlings who giggled alongside him as they disappeared from view, a retort came:
“Enjoy hell, buddy.”
It wasn’t the American military whom Putin was now with but their spooks, the NISS had a special room waiting for him in this building in Aspen. He would have many more words to say once in there. He’d talk, everyone talks either soon enough when faced with a real threat or when they couldn’t take the implications of that threat being brought to life.
Despite his initial defiance, Putin took the easy option. Within minutes, once faced with the consequences of not spilling his guts, he did so. He told them everything that they wanted to know… everything. At the snow-covered, picturesque resort in the mountains where high-value prisoners ended up throughout the later stages of the war, there was a lot of talking done. It beat the other options, the ones which Putin had in detail explained to him, by a long shot.
Putin had listened to what exactly the hell McCrystal promised was here and taken the easy option. He would see the end of the war though not his captor again.
Early February 1984: Bella
The Cuban 2nd Airborne Brigade wasn’t going home. There was to be no early return to the island from where they came, back down in the Caribbean. Cuba wasn’t the destination for the men led by Colonel Bella, no matter how much he and the rest of them wished it to be. They were leaving Fremont County though. No longer would this little piece of Colorado, where they had been for more than four months now, be where those fighting men who remained after countless fights would have to stay. They were moving on. Bella would take them south and down into eastern New Mexico. A recently-arrived group of reinforcements – almost five hundred men – were waiting at a place called Holbrook. Adding those men to his own, his orders were for the brigade to form two battalions (in the place of the one, broken down from three originally, which it currently had) and take part in Nicaraguan-led anti-guerrilla operations throughout a portion of Arizona which backed onto the lower reaches of the Rockies. The 2nd Brigade had experience of fighting guerrillas, Bella’s orders had said, and was to do so again in a new area.
There would be no snow down in Arizona. There would be no big battles on the ground nearby either which would bring enemy air attention. It wouldn’t be a rear-area posting, a nice and comfy location to put his feet up while getting fat, but it wouldn’t be the mountainous hell of Colorado either. Bella had sent a trusted man down there already and received a fast dispatch – carefully-written because it was sure to be intercepted & read – back on the conditions of allies, the terrain, the fight and the men who were to join with his brigade. None of that was favourable (especially the quality of the men sent as reinforcements: new young conscripts they were) yet it wasn’t so bad either. Holbrook it would be regardless of anything Bella thought but he was pleased to know that it didn’t look like a place where death was certain for him and his men.
February 5th was the last day here in Colorado for Bella. The majority of his men were already gone, sent by trucks for the journey south. He and the rest were waiting on a pair of aircraft meant to come in later today and take them out. The flight down to Arizona would be done overnight with a stopover made somewhere in New Mexico. Before leaving, there were a few final things to do. Bella had already had several meetings with officers from the Soviet 76th Guards Airborne Division though there was one more to be had. That formation of Soviet Airborne was extending its operational area backwards from its previous fighting zone further to the west and north. It was apparently a ‘retrograde manoeuvre’. That was another term for a retreat, a withdrawal in the face of the enemy. They weren’t calling it that but that was what it was. His orders to go to Arizona had come before the Soviet Airborne pulled back from their deepest penetration into the Rockies west of what was called the Front Range of the mountains away from the Interstate-25 corridor which ran from Denver to Colorado Springs to Pueblo then further south. Regardless, they were pulling back as he was pulling out. It was a good time to be leaving it seemed… Some administrative matters were tidied up and there was the passing on of last-minute intelligence on enemy activities to oversee as well. Afterwards, he went to the Soviet airbase at what once was Fremont County Airport: it was twice its peacetime size and a huge military encampment. There were MiGs flying daily from there which were involved in the fighting up in the mountains though also with the failing Denver siege. His personal helicopter was there and Bella got in the little Mil-2 light transport. There was something he wanted to see and it would be best observed from above.
Between Canon City and Florence, there was a cluster of prisons. They belonged to both the state and federal US authorities where many prisoners were held. In the war’s first days, under DGI orders, the guards at each of them were instructed to lock the prisoners in their cells and ‘report’ to Bella’s men. That had been done. The guards had been lined up and shot. They were certainly going to be counterrevolutionaries so were killed before they became trouble. As to the prisoners, apparently a few had escaped from their confines: the idiot KGB man Putin had had that run in with two escapees last year. The rest, oh so many of them, had remained in their cells. Thirst, hunger and disease had taken their lives. If they hadn’t all been dealt with so effectively, shooting them would have been more difficult than it had been with their guards and the ones which fled in the chaos would have caused plenty of trouble. Since those events back in September, the rotting corpses of the prisoners had been inside those prisons. In the months afterwards, the smell of mass death had been picked up by the wind on many occasions. Bella had asked permission to do something about it all but been refused. However, he now had those orders. Someone back in Havana was getting nervous and wanting things cleaned up. A hand-written order passed through Cuban military links, not down the Soviet-controlled electronic lines, had told him to deal with the prisons as well as other matters like the mass graves all throughout Fremont County. Things were to be hidden less they be later uncovered. Bella believed that his country was fearing an American reaction to physical evidence of things done, acts the Americans would declare war crimes. Rather than let the Americans find out, all evidence was to be destroyed so no one in Havana was bound to what happened here by any physical evidence. The prisons were to be burnt to the ground with all evidence inside them disposed of in that manner.
The Polish-built helicopter climbed high into the empty sky. The pilot worried over American fighters showing up and cautiously asked Bella how long he wanted to stay airborne or at this altitude. There were still things that could be seen from lower down, colonel. Bella hushed him. He watched the fires raging. He was transfixed at the funeral pyres which lit the darkening sky.
Goodbye Colorado, Bella said silently to himself, goodbye.
Winter was coming to an end though the days were still short. It was dark before Bella knew it. His helicopter was no longer his once he was back at the airport. The Soviets were now asking questions, demanding to know what was going on with all of those fires. Maybe it is the work of guerrillas, Bella told them, and that was why he took his helicopter up to have a look. The major he spoke to, one of their military policemen from their Commandant’s Service, didn’t seem very convinced. Bella was sure that when down in Arizona, the KGB would send someone to ask questions about what happened during the Cuban’s last few hours in Colorado but that was then. This was now. He had followed his orders from Havana on the matter which they considered to be of great importance. It was done now.
Into Fremont County’s airport came two turboprop transport aircraft. One after the other, the Fokker-27s made perfect landings. These were aircraft built in the Netherlands to civilian specifications (military-grade ones were also manufactured) and supplied to a Caribbean airline, which one in particular Bella didn’t know. They were flying for Cuba now, taking the place of Soviet-built transports lost in the fighting. Once they taxied to the staging area, Bella had to wait for permission to move his men to them. This was a Soviet airbase and they were in control here. Finally, the permission came. Checks were made before the men boarded. Bella had several of his trusted officers give the men – staff personnel mostly apart from the last two platoons of riflemen – a once over looking for anything that they shouldn’t be taking aboard the aircraft for ‘safety reasons’. Some items were recovered which actually posed no threat to the transports in-flight but which the men shouldn’t have had. Bella hadn’t wanted to have anything found, he wanted to have had fully trustworthy men. That wasn’t the case though. Some of the men had been looting. They had jewellery, cash (American currency) and small electronic items. Their names were taken and punishment would come later. The collected items were to be disposed of by Bella himself but before then the activity attracted Soviet attention. One of those military police officers came over and demanded to know what was going on. Looters would be punished and the punishment he was talking of would be a firing squad. Bella outranked him and told him to shut his mouth. The Soviet officer could have chosen to fight but instead he had his subordinates grab the sack full of loot. Bella watched him take it with no objection, glad to see the back of the sure-to-be black-marketeer. That loot was his problem now and Bella hoped he got caught trying to sell it.
The aircraft were getting ready to go. Bella had the rest of the men board. He was the case of them still on the ground. He took another look around, his last sight of Colorado.
He was leaving here alive. Off to fight somewhere else, yes, and not going home to his family, but he was out of here with his life. There were so many others who wouldn’t be. Bella thought nothing of those whom he had fought, nothing at all. It was his men who’d died here who he concerned himself with. From the first day on the ground until yesterday, each of those days had seen at least one of his men lose their lives. Every day! Not today though. No more would the 2nd Brigade take casualties in Colorado.
Pretending to cough, he made the sign of the cross for all of his men who’d had their lives snuffed out here. It was dark: no one saw him and no one would know. His faith, learnt as a child and hidden in adulthood, remained strong. He asked for no absolution for all that he had done. He was a soldier and soldiers obeyed orders. It was the souls of his men he was concerned with, not his own. Then it was aboard the aircraft he went.
First in, last out. Colonel Bella left Colorado.
Early February 1984: de la Billière
The British Army wasn’t Colorado bound. Brigadier de la Billière had been informed – unofficially but as good as officially – that despite the recent visit by what was in effect an inspection team to examine the ground ahead of that, no deployment would be taking place. DLB had been assigned last month to aid them during their time in Colorado. He was free of his duties with the 2nd Canadian Infantry Division – they had one of their own as an assistant commanding general now – yet still inside the United States with the Canadian I Corps which included its British Army component. With those specialist intelligence and logistics officers, DLB had crisscrossed the expanses of eastern Colorado. There were Americans as well as him because they knew this ground better than him but he knew the British Army: what it could do and what it couldn’t do too. His opinion had been that this wouldn’t have been the best place to send a mass of heavy forces. That set aside the extremely long lines of communication stretching right across North American and then over an ocean which was a war zone. Colorado just wasn’t the right place to play to the strengths of the British Army and would be a waste.
They weren’t coming though. DLB had been told that the situation back in Europe was getting more strained. The moment that he’d heard that the Soviets had gone into Sweden, he expected that the French and the others would end up getting involved. They’d put their own troops in. Any day now, he anticipated that there’d be a fight which would start. The deployment details of who was where with what strength weren’t known to him yet that really didn’t matter. You couldn’t put two hostile armies together – three in fact when including the Swedes – in a war zone and not expect to see someone start shooting. Whether it be an accident or on purpose, shots would be exchanged and full-scale conflict would emerge. Once it did, Western Europe would be at war fighting the same people that his country was: they’d need the British Army in support or would have their backs to the Rhine, maybe even the English Channel, soon enough. This was all his opinion. Yet it was a considered view of the situation.
Would he rather be sent back home like the inspection team had been? DLB had asked himself that. Even without Sweden and then West Germany likely to blow up any day, there had long been the war raging in Norway. There was a big conventional fight there yet also plenty of special forces action. DLB had in recent years held the post of Director SAS. His experience and rank could have seen him sent there to oversee SAS and SBS operations though they had sent him to Canada when Ottawa had pleaded for help in the war’s early days. When the certain general European war erupted, Britain’s special forces would be very much involved in that. He didn’t have the exact details but as far as he could gather, 22 SAS had been tripled in size due to the war while both TA regiments were double their peacetime strength as well… it was probably the same with the SBS too. Furthermore, specialist artillery spotters & signallers from elements of the Royal Artillery were part of the big special forces fight in Norway which was going to expand into new theatres along with companies of Paras and Gurkhas in support. To take part in that would be something he would have liked to be involved with. He was missing out in taking the war to the Soviets there when being here across in America instead.
Nonetheless, there were special forces teams active in Colorado. The Americans had thrown in many men, a lot more since Christmas than they had before. Their operations were taking place generally west of Denver and the High Plains, over in the Rockies. DLB had a supervisory role through his liaison posting – not direct command though – of a smaller joint British and Canadian effort to the east. The Canadian I Corps included a part-squadron (company-sized) of SAS, men who’d fought in the Alaskan Panhandle and then into Colorado. Good men they were, just not so many of them to do that much over the wide area of ground which was their operational area. In addition, the Canadians had their ‘Rangers’. These weren’t the Canadian Rangers, that peacetime volunteer force which patrolled the Canadian Arctic, but instead what were officially deemed to be ‘Special Patrol Teams’ (SPTs). They called themselves Rangers though and everyone else did too. There were several hundred of them who’d come down to Colorado and who were gaining more experience every day. DLB had spent much time with them and done his best to see them not ill-used. They needed more time than they had been given before sent off to war yet here they were. What these Rangers were able to do despite handicaps was remarkable considering all that.
This morning, February 6th, DLB went with one of the Ranger teams – along with a four-man SAS team – to an aircraft crash site on the edge of the Corps’ operational area. An enemy transport aircraft had been brought down late yesterday when struck by fighters (another had blown up in mid-air) and when the wreckage was overflown by a curious American A-7 pilot, he’d seen men on the ground who’d survived a hard landing. With no bombs left after making an attack run ahead of spotted the downed aircraft, the US Air Force pilot had radioed it in. One of the Ranger’s senior officers had requested permission to go have a look-see. That was granted.
Going via two helicopters which hugged the ground flying into and above no-man’s land, the British-Canadian special forces team put down near the town of Boone. It was a small locality, once a Gold Rush boom town. That was a long time ago. Recently, Boone had been on the frontlines where American and Nicaraguan forces had clashed and it had been briefly fought over. One side or the other had blasted it to bits when trying to kill soldiers of the other inside. DLB hoped that the civilians who’d called it home had got out in time. The Americans troops involved in that fight last year were elsewhere now and it was in theory the responsibility of the Canadian forces. They had troops with the recently-arrived 1st Infantry Division – which included the British 14th Infantry Brigade – nowhere near it though. The Nicaraguans had withdrawn deeper into the Arkansas River valley and closer to Pueblo. Control of the town belonged to no one at the minute.
DLB still made sure that it was avoided though. The helicopters landed far away because he anticipated they’d be spotters there. The wreckage was close to Boone but he wanted it approached on foot.
The SBS led the way with the Rangers following. DLB stayed back with the command group yet carried his rifle and got as close to the front as he reasonably should. Going forward, charging into battle like a twenty year-old, was not for him any more but more than that, he knew that if captured by the enemy, his head could be picked apart for what was inside it. The professionals were out front and he stayed back to let them do their job without having to worry about him and thus endangering themselves.
Right where it was meant to be, the smashed-up and burnt-out remains of a Fokker-27 was located. The smell of an extinguished fire was in the air, one which had be fed by jet fuel. DLB smelt that early on when the wind blew it towards him and those with him. It wasn’t nice. Neither was the sight of the first body which he came across. Before or during the crash, bodies had been thrown clear of this aircraft. The first set of remains were one of those who’d hit the hard ground hard. The SAS reported encountering survivors. DLB heard a gunshot and the report came that one of them had raised a rifle. The fool. The Canadians too ran into someone else who took a shot at them, wounding one of theirs. They exchanged fire and killed two men. Cubans, came the contact report, possibly paratroopers.
Other Cubans didn’t want to fight. There were injured men in number. Around the fuselage of the plane, there were the survivors. Some had light wounds, others were too badly hurt to live for very long. DLB hadn’t brought his men here on a rescue mission yet what little could be done for those in need was. Initial enemy resistance had been just those first shots before someone in charge had ordered that stopped. That senior man was brought to DLB.
The Cuban gave him a salute.
DLB returned it only as a courtesy.
“Colonel Ernesto Felipe Bella Ruiz.” The Cuban had his arm in an improvised sling and his face was red with dried blood. “I am your prisoner.”
“That you are. Peter de la Billière: Brigadier, British Army.”
“English?” This Bella character was a bit surprised.
“Yes… British.” DLB moved past that. “How many men do you have, Colonel?”
“We had eighteen. Your Englishmen just…”
DLB corrected him: “Most of my men are Canadian.”
“You Englishmen, Canadians – anyone else from your Empire here too? – just killed three. So, I have fifteen men plus myself.”
“You’ll be treated well, Colonel Ruiz.”
“Colonel Bella.” Now Bella corrected him. DLB had made the mistake surrounding his Hispanic name, getting it the wrong way around.
“Colonel Bella.” DLB repeated that. “Your men will be treated well. We will do the best we can for them.”
“Thank you.”
“It is my duty: the laws of war, Colonel.”
“Of course.”
“Where were you going? Why the strange aircraft?” There would be many questions for this Bella now he was a prisoner yet he was talking now and DLB let him carry on as he engaged him like he did.
“It is a long story…”
“…so tell me…”
DLB would listen to what Bella had to say for the rest of the day. He’d go with the prisoner back to their base camp at Kit Carson before handing him over to proper custody. Bella would keep talking then too. What secrets he would give would be few but he would have a lot else to say: telling a story about some teenager guerrillas to listening American ears too, a story which bemused DLB for how they were enthralled by it. Kids running around in the mountains with guns and blowing things up! How stupid was that!
He though moved on. Bella was just one prisoner who was someone else’s responsibility. He had other things to do. In the following days, there was news. The siege of Denver had been finally and completely broken. More than that, Allied forces in Colorado were going over on the attack. If the British Army as a whole had been Colorado bound, they would have been far too late. The war proper was resuming here without them. DLB would be part of that, with the SAS and the Rangers who were Canadian SPTs, as they fought onwards. Onwards to wherever that took them, be it Colorado Springs, Pueblo, Albuquerque or El Paso.
[End of Interlude]
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:12:18 GMT
[Part VIII]
Chapter Twenty – Intelligence
February 1985: South Texas
The figure of thirty-five per cent destruction done to the contents of the Soviet convoys which had arrived in Texas last month had come from the Americans. Their intelligence-gathering had analysed which ships had been sunk during conflict in the North Atlantic and then the Caribbean as well as the damage done by bombing those ships when they were in South Texan ports unloading. That was the number presented to President Glenn. It came as a fixed figure though before presented to him, there had been wide variations on this before it was settled upon. One number was as low as ten per cent; another was as high as fifty per cent.
The Soviets had their own figure on the losses of equipment sent which didn’t arrive to be used for the war in North America. That was twenty-five per cent. This was an aggregate though. It consisted of several factors which all had to be taken into account. For example, of the tanks loaded onto those ships when they left the Kola Peninsula, only eleven per cent were lost. At the same time though, when it came to medical supplies to save the lives of soldiers fighting a war far away from the Rodina, close to half never got past the ports used on the Gulf of Mexico coast. Those variants went on and on. Another example would be the dispatched artillery where the losses of heavy towed guns had been low (relatively) but the loss of ammunition for those guns was high. Heavy engineering vehicles went down aboard sunken ships at an alarming rate yet there was plenty of spare tracks & pieces of replacement equipment for the vehicles which did get through as the losses among those were slight. Therefore, the number which the Soviets had, and also how the Americans made their own estimate, wasn’t about specific pieces of equipment nor stacks of supplies, but more than that what capability was lost. With what had reached Texas, twenty-five per cent less capability for both combat and support operations than sent could be achieved by what got through.
Early in the war, the Soviets had shipped over their initial armies from Cuba and seen American attacks occur where there were ships lost making the far shorter trip. Heavy losses had incurred among the cargo which was sent then in comparison to the number of actual vessels lost. The ships had been fast loaded and sent across to Texas. When certain ones of them were hit, the cargo they carried was all of certain items – tanks or artillery shells or mine-clearing equipment – and therefore plenty of that was lost at sea. What hadn’t been done was ‘smart loading’ of the ships. This was supposed to have occurred and would have seen ships with mixed cargoes: a lost ship would go down with tanks, artillery shells and mine-clearing equipment, not just when loaded with one of those types of cargo. Overall, when others arrived in Texas, the missing stocks of one of those would be lower. October’s events had hit hard and forced a weaker breakout from South Texas in the Central & Eastern parts of that state to occur. In particular, the 23rd Tank Division had ended up as a dismounted infantry unit while there were missing artillery brigades. Equipment had been stripped from some units to complete others because of incompetence over in Cuba. This wasn’t supposed to have happened again with the two big convoys sent from the Kola back in December to reach Texas in January.
Well, it had. There had been a repeat of ‘stupid loading’. The Soviet command in San Antonio discovered that smart loading had been cancelled when it was decided that more could be sent aboard ships if they were loaded the stupid way. There had been a belief that few ships would be sunk and this wouldn’t matter overall. Only when the ships arrived and the contents of them individually, not what was in the convoys as a whole, was discovered, did the end-users of the cargo realise what had happened. Ships had been sunk aplenty and much military material had been put on the ocean floor. Plenty of important stores did reach their destination yet there was a lot of non-important material as well… non-important to the combat arms officers anyway. They wanted more tanks. More guns. More assault bridge-layers. More missile launchers. More bullets, rockets and shells. More, more, more! They saw how it could have been delivered if that smart loading had been employed.
Waiting in Texas ahead of the convoys were tens of thousands of soldiers. The men who would form two Soviet field armies (complete with small attachments from Eastern European countries) had been flown to North America. Once the ships arrived and the unloading began, and American air attacks took place, the men were matted-up with their equipment. Decisions were made at the highest levels on the ground in Texas as to what to do with faced with the losses to cargo en route which had occurred. General Lobov – theatre commander in North America – had to get permission from Moscow up as far as the Defence Council for what he was forced to do with his reinforcing armies. Only with their permission could he field just one of them as a whole and break up the other to support his already-existing three. They didn’t like seeing this done: neither did Lobov. That was the way things had to be though. Blame would fall upon those who did the stupid loading in the Kola and the wrath of the Defence Council wouldn’t be pretty.
The Seventh Tank Army was moved through February northwards across Central Texas but stopped far short of the Red River and the Great Plains beyond. It would fulfil its planned exploitation role alone now rather than alongside the Eleventh Guards Army. That latter field army was broken apart to help complete the equipment ranks of the former and also adds bits and pieces all over the place to the Twenty-Second Army in Colorado, the Eighth Tank Army in East Texas and – most-importantly – the Twenty–Eighth Army in North Texas. The Twenty–Eighth Army was to be followed by the Seventh Tank Army, fighting what the Soviets considered the best of America’s troops along the Red River and in Oklahoma once again, so was given the best of what was available. The limits on what the Soviet reinforcements coming from the convoys brought were even more than just the masses of equipment and supplies which didn’t get throw. There were all of those extra men which arrived and they were a burden alongside their arrival as a bonus for the war effort. The men, the ones who’d recently flown in and the ones already in North America, needed feeding and they needed medical care – general as well as critical – to be given to them. The missing cargoes on the ships included the stocks to do this too. Living off the land while fighting a modern war was impossible when it came to feeding men and the health of the men was another issue which couldn’t be ignored. Soldiers got injured in battle yet they also were ill due to other causes. Treating them was becoming more and more difficult for the Soviets. Texas was full of the wounded and the ill. There had been some air evacuation flights going back home yet those were few and far between. What the Soviets had been waiting for was ships to send those who needed to go home on. There were now ships in the South Texan ports, those which had survived Allied attacks while on the way here. These were loaded through February and preparations began to send them home. Marked as hospital ships, they were still armed though – basic weapons but weapons nonetheless – despite international rules against doing such things. This was a decision made in Moscow where ships full of wounded would be protected on their way home. They were going to sail for home in March, going back across the North Atlantic. For one thing, American intelligence efforts missed the fact that these were hospital ships. That should be noted: they didn’t know before they would go and do what they and their allies did to them when later at sea. Secondly, the ships were armed and entering a war zone. The results were going to be predictable.
Lobov was told by the Defence Council that there would be no further significant reinforcement ‘for the foreseeable future’. The details weren’t given to him but he knew of the gauntlet that the convoys coming to Texas had run. There wasn’t going to be another convoy effort made for some time. Moscow issued orders that the war was to be won with what he had available and won soon too. The original war plan drawn up last year, long before he replaced the shot man who had been first in command, had called for a victory to be gained this Spring. That plans were still to be followed. He had fewer forces and so many expectations and the whole overall worldwide order had gone awry, but the plan was still the plan. Much of the American’s best forces had bene defeated last year and the rest of them, old ones and newer forces, were to be overcome through March and April. The fight would be on the Great Plains, this side of the Mississippi River. Oklahoma then Kansas were to be advanced through and Nebraska reached. On the eastern flank, Louisiana and Arkansas were to be sideshows there compared to the main effort going north. Over to the west, holding New Mexico and Colorado, plus keeping the Americans at bay in Arizona and where they had penetration Mexico, was all to continue. Lobov was made to understand that going north was his key priority though. The Defence Council, looking at the maps from far away, demanded that the Platte River be reached: that being the waterway which ran west-east across Nebraska.
They expected nothing less than Lobov to have his tanks reach there, leaving a defeated American Army in their wake. No excuses would be heard as to why that couldn’t be done either now nor in the coming months.
To aid Lobov, he received a courier direct to him. Only he was allowed to see the contents of the message (the courier left him alone) and, as if he was the character in a spy novel, he was instructed to destroy the message afterwards. What he was sent was what he was assured was gold-plated intelligence. The Americans were going to launch a general offensive in the eastern theatre – the north and west were different matters yet smaller affairs – beginning March 7th. Lobov was to strike first, going on the attack four days earlier. The Soviet offensive would gobble up preparing American formations, especially their forward supply units pushed ahead before their heavy units would attack, and this would only add to the ‘already certain’ Soviet victory.
The countdown to March 3rd was on. Victory or (don’t say it aloud!) defeat was coming.
February 1985: New York
Warren Christopher had been the Deputy Attorney General for the last two years during the Johnson Administration before he’d then gone back to private law when Nixon entered the White House. Following Ted Kennedy’s election, Christopher had been considered for a return to government, serving as Walter Mondale’s deputy at the State Department. That hadn’t worked out. The views of the incoming president on certain matters of world affairs had been at odds with his and Christopher remained out of government. He had become a critic of the foreign policy followed by the Kennedy Administration when it came to relations with allies and foes alike. His name was linked to many of the think-tank reports and newspaper opinion pieces which attacked the policies followed during those three and a half years. John Glenn and he had come to know each other though as vice president, a loyal one, Glenn had remained publicly distant from Christopher’s expressed views. There had been harsher critics, ones far less polite than Christopher had been, yet Kennedy had made it clear that such a man wasn’t welcome anywhere near his administration. It had been personal like that with many people and the thirty-ninth president. September 17th had come and in the resulting fallout, Glenn had reformed the US Government with much-needed replacements for the many dead. Christopher had been asked by the new president to take a non-executive role with the new administration, one working directly for Glenn. This was to head up the new Office of Intelligence and Security and this took an oversight role above the newly-created National Intelligence and Security Service. NISS had a Congressional mandate but Christopher’s office didn’t. Glenn wanted to create a Cabinet-level department for intelligence & security. This wouldn’t just be responsible for NISS though that would be the main focus. Congress was currently blocking any form of a Department for Intelligence and Security (other names such as National Security had been floated too) for various reasons. There were concerns over the powers which it would have and how those would be enforced with claims that they would violate the Constitution and the Bill of Rights. Christopher himself was called a ‘dove’: certain members of Congress wanted a ‘hawk’ and saw Glenn’s determination to put Christopher in that position as a challenge to them which they met. There were concerns now among some that the president had gone too far when NISS was created – erm… it was them really, not him – in merging so many formerly-independent agencies into one so quickly. It was to some an American KGB! Hyperbole aside, Congress had serious issues with then going further. To hand that all over to Christopher, or anyone else for that matter, in a Cabinet role was something Congress wasn’t so sure about.
NISS remained in limbo with neither the president nor Congress having complete control over it. It was still a new organisation though packed with long-term veterans from the Intelligence Community. Their fiefdoms had been broken up and many, many toes stepped on. They were blamed for the surprise attack which brought about the war yet their own feelings were that Kennedy had been to blame, not them. Or, if the CIA, the DIA, the NSA and the NRO were to get any blame, then it was upon the former heads of those organisations and plenty of people who were dead after the nuclear attacks. There were seven primary components of NISS (excluding the administrative and support parts) which formed their own divisions within the super-agency. The Foreign Intelligence Division fulfilled many of the roles which the CIA once had; the Defence Intelligence Division covered DIA tasks; the Communications Division undertook NSA duties; the Reconnaissance Division replaced the NRO; the Protection Division included the Secret Service’s executive guard role; the Counter-Intelligence Division undertook many former FBI tasks acting against spies; the Domestic Security Division had the duty which no former organisation in the United States had and that was to guard against the actions of American people themselves striking at the heart of the nation.
The stink kicked up by the CIA on one hand and the NSA on the other at being subsumed like they were was massive. The DIA and NRO found themselves quickly in leading roles within NISS and were generally happy. The Secret Service was a shadow of its former self and couldn’t object to what occurred. When the FBI lost its counter-intelligence duties, they had tried very hard to stop this yet hadn’t fought almost to the very end like the CIA’s remaining structure had tried to in an effort at martyrdom. The role of Domestic Security was something else entirely from all of this drama elsewhere. It was the assigned role of this part of the United States’ unified intelligence network which had upset many in Congress: if this had been peacetime and there was more of this in the public arena, the backlash would have been quite something too. Domestic Security was designed to focus upon anti-terrorism as its main undertaking. When the war started and nuclear attacks came, the country had been hit elsewhere by countless terror attacks from coast-to-coast. Plenty of those murderers were now dead, many shot ‘while resisting arrest’ too. This wasn’t going to be allowed to happen ever again. Given FBI-like powers in handling terror matters yet with stronger backing, NISS agents on Domestic Security tasks would stop any more terror attacks ever again and do so with a no-holds barred approach. Terrorism wasn’t just foreign nationals though. There was home-grown terrorism too which had already felt the long arm of NISS agents in the past few months. There had been separatists and secessionists who betrayed their country at a time like this with accusations (not all, but many, true) that they had been working with the Soviet KGB even if some of them weren’t aware of it. Congress feared that in the future, after the war, NISS would be able to step on the right to bear arms and for personal freedoms, all in the name of fighting terrorism. Some of their actions already had pressed the wrong buttons with senators and congressmen.
Voices in Congress called Christopher a dove. A dove he wasn’t. He was pragmatic and thoughtful. Glenn had tasked him to oversee NISS and defeat ongoing and future threats to the nation. That he had done. If Congress was fully aware of some of the actions undertaken by NISS so far, especially since 1985 began, they’d be calling him a hawk. Their fears of Domestic Security expansion in the future by knowing some of the things done behind closed doors now would have set them right off. Conversely, the deeming of him as a dove still held water though. NISS was in DIA hands and Christopher and his semi-independent Office of Intelligence and Security had oversight but not direct control over all that NISS did. Christopher wouldn’t have agreed directly to all that was being done. This was why there needed to be proper oversight and legislation. Congress argued with the president on this matter and meanwhile NISS did what it did.
High Value Prisoners (HVPs) – a recent capture of a KGB captain in the Rockies an example of them – were taken to ‘black sites’ across the nation; one was soon to be established on occupied Mexican soil over in Baja California too. Captured personnel from the KGB, the GRU and Cuban & Latin American nations were deemed as HVPs because they weren’t legitimate military POWs. The methods used to interrogate them and the conditions which they were held in didn’t meet POW standards. Their names weren’t on lists held by the Red Cross or the Soviet Interest Section that the Swiss Embassy represented to be passed on back to families abroad. Some very bad things were being done to these detainees with threats of the same made to others to get them to cooperate. Worse treatment was being given elsewhere to American captives in enemy hands, but that didn’t excuse the excesses of Aspen and elsewhere, did it?
NISS was involved in many other aspects of the shadow war going on behind the frontlines. They had an ongoing espionage effort to get inside the inner workings of the governments of Revolutionary Mexico and Nicaragua. There had been some success with another spying effort made in El Paso with the Peace Committee which remained there and this including ‘snatching’ back several American nationals held prisoner there for KGB means. Domestic counter-intelligence efforts had taken apart several Soviet spy rings in the United States which were pre-war established but burnt by KGB overuse due to the pressure of war. Military intelligence efforts closer to the battlefields had been roughly-handed by Soviet counterefforts yet they were bringing back useful information of a strategic nature and there was an ongoing, top-secret deception programme (named Mechanic) which was believed to be soon to pay off big time. Major electronic eavesdropping operations were ongoing to do what America had always done well in conflicts and seize the mantle there to crack enemy communications and exploit them properly, not just react to what was intercepted in a hasty manner. Foreign Intelligence had seen work done abroad where former CIA operatives now working under NISS were trying to get back into the worldwide intelligence war which America’s embattled allies had been fighting without them for many months.
Robert Gates had managed, despite everything including resignations & dismissals aplenty, to keep a core part of the CIA functioning. That nuclear blast above Langley when the war started, Soviet killing of CIA assets overseas and Congress trying even more than any Soviet nuclear warhead to obliterate the organisation he worked for hadn’t completely destroyed it. Glenn had been talked around by a few senators – survivors of the nuclear strike on Washington and new ones alike; those who had many years of public office dealing with the CIA too – into intervening through Christopher to keeping Gates there and the CIA active. It had a new name, answered to NISS and lost some responsibilities, but it was still there. The now Foreign Intelligence Division of NISS was the CIA in new clothes. Back on their feet, they had been busy. Firstly, they had conducted those valuable overseas intelligence-gathering operations as well as working with allies (the wartime Allies but also traditional partners like the Israelis and even the French) to push back against the Soviets where possible. Israel still maintained total control over the flow of information from their man at the Lubyanka in Moscow who worked in the top-tier of the KGB – the man who sent that very late, and too late, warning of war – yet Gates’ people had access to what he said once Mossad passed that on. Gates wanted to have his people have more of a role there but Israeli said no. At this time that couldn’t be forced yet the future was the future. The number-three man at the KGB gave them details of a Secret Service man who had provided exact location details on Kennedy before the deceased president, but also the KGB’s spy too, ended up on the wrong end of several nuclear blasts. This was confirmed and opened up other matters which Foreign Intelligence shared with Counter-Intelligence (their old FBI contacts and they had a long-standing relationship even if it was tempestuous one) in rolling up what was to be called the Walker Spy Ring. This was a Soviet espionage effort which it turned out had done some real damage to the US Navy throughout the war. It was all about communications, not where ships were, but tracking intercepted signals and understanding how they were encoded, and had done the Soviets very well as they were able to deliver real-time information. Tens of thousands of American sailors had died not because the Soviet Navy could crack US Navy codes but understand how they worked and forgo the complication of decryption for immediate results. That was put to an end. Funnelling false information down the line would be done by NISS though, the US Navy changed everything to do with their communications and that was more important for them as it was their ships being lost and sailors killed.
Then there was Peppermint and Workman, the two defectors that the DIA and CIA respectively had received. Both Soviets in American custody claimed the other was a liar while the respective organisations which had taken them in fought the other over the legitimacy of theirs. NISS’s director had favoured Peppermint; Gates had got Christopher’s ear with what Workman had to say. That second defector, the one which Gates’ people had, had been able to aid with the taking apart of the Walker Spy Ring by giving information on one of the people on the fringes of that conspiracy which helped shore the whole investigation up. Peppermint, that supposed goldmine of information, had nothing: he’d never heard of this massive intelligence-gathering effort. He should have. He was supposed to be that high-up in the GRU and the whole thing, where the work of spies was made available to the military for real-time applications, should have involved him before he defected. When the US Navy made dramatic changes in fleet communications, there was a near instant effect that they reported back when it came to the Soviet Navy suddenly having a lot of failure in tracking to attack its vessels. From them, they let both Christopher and the Director of NISS know the value of intelligence gained… Gates made sure everyone understood that Workman had delivered while Peppermint was still talking of geo-political events and ‘what they all mean behind the scenes’. Workman had delivered and Peppermint was either the false defector that the CIA had said he was or a charlatan of the first order if one wanted to be charitable. The defenders of Peppermint had their ranks thinned by those walking back of what they had previously said about how wonderful he was. One of senior DIA people who’d beforehand soaked up all the praise which had come from the defection of Peppermint and who now retracted his support – he said with a straight face that he’d always had his doubts – was in-the-know when it came to that ongoing Mechanic military deception operation. This general, a self-serving and generally quite obnoxious fellow, did his country a great service without realising it by not discussing anything about Mechanic with Peppermint. If he had, events in the coming months would have turned out very differently.
February 1985: The American West
Mexicans remained fighting Mexicans throughout Baja California. The second stage of the Mexican Civil War was in full swing as the engagements between Democratic Mexico and Revolutionary Mexico continued. This fight was also joined by outsiders too with Guatemalans fighting alongside the army of Tirado López while the Tijuana Government was aided by Americans & Chileans. The Battle of Mexicali was a Mexican-only affair though. Possession of the ruin of that once bustling small city was won by Democratic Mexico. They rooted-out the last of the enemy – traitors to Mexico to a man it was declared and to be treated as such – and seized control of Mexicali. There wasn’t much left to have control of though. It really was a ruin, and there were dangerous chemical remnants along with many dead bodies inside. Almost every building inside had taken war damage with the majority of them either down or ready to collapse. The aerial bombing and shelling, then being fought over, had seen Mexicali targeted by an extraordinary number of weapons including chemical munitions. In the final stages of the fight, buildings were brought down upon defenders leading to much choking dust in the air from this. The bodies came from months of war which Mexicali had seen: they consisted of soldiers and civilians. Tijuana sent instructions to pull most of their troops out afterwards, leaving a token force there, because they feared for the health of their remaining soldiers. On the very northern edge of the town, the US-Mexico ran. US national guardsmen shot at some and detained other Mexicans who crossed over during that final battle and it was discovered afterwards that among the dead were soldiers serving Democratic Mexico too. It was one hell of a fight and desertions ran high as those pushed into it didn’t want to stay if they could find a way out no matter which government they served. The Americans sent an official expression of regret for the deaths of Tijuana’s men though didn’t acknowledge any blame. Despite the terseness of that message, it was a sign of relations far improved than how they had been months before: New York and Tijuana were at least talking now.
On-the-ground relations between the troops of Democratic Mexico and those of the United States and Chile down in the Baja California peninsula itself were far better than where they were at the top next to the border. Tijuana had its men fighting alongside those from overseas who engaged both Revolutionary Mexico and Guatemalans spread across the peninsula. Complicated command arrangements saw the Mexicans pointed at where to go by the Americans and then left to get on with it yet given heavy fire support which was tied-in. It was their territory after all which was being fought over and they were sent into the hard fights. Tijuana’s troops were taking too long though. The US Marines intervened in several fights themselves, distracting them from their own missions, to push back enemy resistance. Chilean troops were pushing down the eastern side of the peninsula – beside the Gulf of California – and were making good progress though through the central mountain spine and along tougher bits of the western coast, the Americans were slowed down. They wanted to get on with this and fully overrun Baja California. The whole peninsula would then be used as a base of operations against the Mexican mainland. From Western Command, new orders came down to the 1st Marine Division (through the two intervening mid-level headquarters) to tackle the task of taking the whole peninsula. By the end of February, this was achieved as Baja California fell into American hands. Democratic Mexico troops remained fighting at the frontlines as they kept on moving south yet the US Marines leapfrogged ahead. Amphibious and airmobile operations secured control of La Paz, Cabo and San Lucas. There had been an earlier reluctance to do this, to strike out so far ahead, but with enemy troops all at the front and the rear areas near devoid of them, they way ahead was open. Soviet naval forces off the coast were non-existent and the air threat was judged to be ‘minimal’. US Air Force units supporting both the US Marines and the Mexicans aided in covering the assaults launched by the 1st Marines which the Chileans joined in too with during the latter stages. They had more men recently arriving for the fight and rather sending them to San Diego then overland southwards, they arrived directly by ship into La Paz. Chilean and US Navy ships pushed in force into the Gulf of California from the bottom and shut off access to it. All up the stretch of waterway there were all those Mexican ports which had assisted last year with the invasion going into the United States. Wartime bombing had limited their usefulness, but now that the Americans had control over Baja California – there was fighting still inland through the middle ongoing – those ports were now out of commission for any Soviet, Cuban or Nicaraguan ship. The US Navy shut of access and that was backed up by land-based air support. Fighting inland along the peninsula for Tijuana’s troops to take Rosarito and other big towns would tie them up for a while but the Americans were behind the army of their opponents and had now thoroughly cut them off. Baja California should within a few weeks, by the end of March for certain, be fully cleared of the enemy.
While American troops were fighting to liberate parts of Mexico for Tijuana, there remained all of that American soil under occupation. This had become a political issue with Congress and was a cause of much anger. There was a strategic implication to gobbling up parts of the Pacific coastline of Mexico, to outflank enemy forces inland and better defeat them when the time came, yet understanding that was one thing while seeing foreign troops in your own soil doing all they were was another. Arizona’s representatives in Congress had been especially vocal on this matter. That had paid off. Those politicians got what they wanted and February saw the Sixth US Army and Ninth US Air Force launch an offensive in Arizona.
Operation Fire Lance was a limited affair when it came to far bigger things being planned elsewhere for March with other forces, though for Western Command it was their biggest operation to date. The trickle of supplies coming to the American West had been carefully marshalled and there were free-up forces from previous victories. That aside, there were never going to be enough men nor munitions & fuel to do all that was desired and scour the whole of Arizona for every single occupying soldier. Fire Lance would bring mixed results by the time it was over. A victory was won yet the results of that were uncomfortable for many.
To liberate Tucson, the 32nd Infantry Division went the long way around. They had previously been halted outside the city to the northwest, where the highway connecting Tucson to Phoenix ran. Guatemalan defenders were dug-in well covering that approach and barring further western access too. To the north there were mountains and the wilderness. The national guardsmen went around the latter, moving through no-man’s land and cross-country. They travelled light and fast, looping clockwise to get behind Tucson and then reaching its southwestern edges. That gave them access to both the international airport and Davis-Monthan AFB, each of those much used by the Soviet Air Force and joined too by East German air units. It was an East German aircraft on a reconnaissance patrol which spotted the mass of incoming M-60 tanks and M-113 armoured personnel carriers but the pilot report wasn’t believed. It had to be checked out. Command failures saw the ignoring of silence from Guatemalan outposts too with the belief that sudden & coordinated guerrilla captivity had pulled off the impossible and silenced all of them at once. It was US Army Rangers not guerrillas which hit those. As to the pilot report, Soviet aircraft went out themselves and faced strong US Air Force activity. Finally, one Su-17M3R pilot did get an accurate look at what was coming and confirmed the incoming storm of American armour about to hit Tucson from behind. It was too late to react. Within hours, the 32nd Infantry began reaching its objectives. They retook each of those important air sites – the airport was easier to take than the airbase – and also cut Interstate-10 running east and Interstate-19 running south. It was brilliant, it was just what was planned. What wasn’t foreseen was the Guatemalan immediate reaction. They fell back into Tucson instead of trying to fight their way out of the trap they were forced into. Tucson remained full of American civilians who’d been trapped there since the war’s early days and suffered under an occupation which was now only going to continue. Western Command had put into the Fire Lance orders for the 32nd Infantry’s attack to give the Guatemalans a way out, somewhere that they thought they could escape from and be destroyed while doing so, but things moved very fast on the ground in the heat of battle and that never happened. The Guatemalans weren’t in the mood to cooperate with American plans either. They fled into their secure, smaller defensive position: that being Tucson itself. The Soviets got most of their aircraft out – flying them to Mexico with haste and blowing up those which they couldn’t – though left behind many ground personnel who fought as infantry. The national guardsmen took them apart and only wished that the Guatemalans had stood their ground like that or tried to run south rather than retreating like they did. If the Americans wanted Tucson back, they’d either have to somehow get the tens of thousands of Guatemalans inside to surrender or take the city in a set-piece assault. The latter would run the risk of seeing another Mexicali.
Fire Lance had a second part to it. The Sixth Army kept its US IV Corps with more national guardsmen in the Altar Desert (on Mexican soil) yet moved the rest of the I Corps – which the 32nd Infantry belonged to as well – through the southern reaches of Arizona just north of the border. Both the 9th Infantry Division and the 5th Armored Brigade crossed the Tohono O’odham Indian Reservation. This generally-empty area of ground was part of the Sonoran Desert and more no-man’s land apart from a few Guatemalan and Mexican outposts. Cobra helicopter gunships shot those up ahead of the onrush of American troops who advanced east. They were heading in the direction of Tucson at first glance though that city wasn’t their aim. Fire Lance called for the I Corps’ regular units to support the national guardsmen coming from the east in attacking the Guatemalans when they were supposed to retreat from Tucson and head south down I-19 back towards Mexico. The Guatemalans didn’t do that but the I Corps still moved to the other side of that reservation and the highway which ran lateral ahead of them. They still had the fuel and especially the ammunition for a fight. Going into Tucson couldn’t be done so they moved southwards. I-19 was followed as enemy convoys on that highway and military outposts down it all taken apart in one-sided fights. The skies were initially free of enemy aircraft after all of the disruption around Tucson but the Soviet Fourth Air Army had other bases and more aircraft. They soon sent many aircraft (MiG-21s, -23s and -27s) on attack and fighter missions which the Ninth Air Force countered with F-4s and F-16s. The air engagements were aplenty and there was little real interference to the operations of the I Corps as they then went after more of the Fourth Air Army’s bases. Nogales Airport was reached, home to that regiment of MiG-27s. When that was taken by the 9th Infantry, they also moved against the two Nogales’: the American town north of the border and the Mexican town south of that which shared the same name. The US Nogales fell but the Mexican Nogales – back from the border set among difficult terrain – was well-defended by many Revolutionary Mexicans who were dug-in and supported by heavy guns. The Americans couldn’t take it without getting into a bigger fight than they had come for. Their mission was to liberate Arizona too, not more bits of Mexico. The 5th Brigade was released to go further west while the 9th Infantry secured the border yet did take ground either side of the line. By the end of the month, still under good air cover, the Americans overran two more Soviet airbases on American soil when they smashed into first Libby Army Airfield (aka Sierra Vista Airport, which was next to Fort Huachuca) and then Bisbee Airport as well.
The Soviets had flight operations at Douglas Airport, even further ahead, which they too evacuated like they did before Libby and Bisbee were occupied but the 5th Brigade didn’t go that far. They stayed in the Sierra Vista area with forward positions as far west as Bisbee for the time being. This was done because they’d gone so far in a short amount of time and outrun their supply lines. Both flanks were long and exposed, especially the southern one facing Mexico. The I Corps was ordered to consolidate what it had and wait for more supplies to come forward. While they did so, the Soviet struck at Bisbee. This time it wasn’t aircraft but a regiment of tanks supported by low-flying Mil-24 helicopters. Those Hinds were on anti-tank missions and beneath American radar cover; a few missilemen with SAMs acting against them claimed kills but more evaded an incomplete air defence network. The 5th Brigade was caught unawares and only had one mixed battalion of infantry & tanks forward. The Americans were outnumbered three-to-one and not in position to defend what they had. Bisbee was evacuated from – the captured airport / airbase seeing hasty demolitions – and the Americans regrouped in number in the mountains between there and Sierra Vista. They still held a large amount of liberated territory and much of it was good defensive ground yet Bisbee had been too far out ahead. Concern was raised afterwards that there had been too much overconfidence when it came to how far they had gone. Intelligence summaries on the enemy had been weak and reconnaissance limited after victory had been ‘secured’. Guatemalan and Mexican troops had been overcome with ease and Soviet Air Force ground personnel had posed no challenge. Their tanks though, when the Soviets moved large numbers of them forward with speed, remained a very different opponent. The Americans who got out of Bisbee in time were lucky to have done so and withdrew with their tail between their legs.
The fight for Arizona wasn’t over. Fire Lance came to an end with successes made. Nonetheless, those remaining issues of the enemy holding American soil and not beaten – Tucson foremost among them but that smaller Soviet presence as well – remained to be solved.
February 1985: The Rockies, Denver and eastern Colorado
From a starting point of one, then two and ending up with four, the Soviet Air Force had sent air armies to the fight in North America. These were taken from across the western parts of the Soviet Union though with components from all over the place including units based in Eastern Europe too. Their peacetime deployment structure was changed dramatically upon arrival on the other side of the world yet also during the ongoing war. The Fourteenth & Twenty–Four Air Armies were in Texas, the Fourth Air Army was stationed across Arizona (until driven out during February) and the Twenty–Sixth Air Army was based through Colorado and New Mexico. Captured American airbases – for their air force, army, navy, marines – were made use of as well as civilian airports large and small. There was additional dispersion to some highway-strips and also improvised airstrips were created. Soviet military aircraft were designed for ‘rough field’ operations and while this didn’t mean that they could fly from just anywhere, there was the ability to make use of a lot of places that the Americans wouldn’t fly from. At the bases which they used, the Soviet air armies spent a lot of effort expanding them to suit their needs. Runways were lengthened, taxiways added and new structures erected. Defensive positions were constructed in and around them. Deception efforts were made to hide some activity while also set up dummy sites as well. Use was made of slave labour (POWs and civilians who were ‘volunteered’) to do all of this heavy work though the Soviets did bring in much equipment or used captured gear as well rather than solely rely upon unreliable hands. This was especially apparent where early on in the war, American POWs caused them a lot of trouble when put to work at sites which needed urgent expansion. Civilian construction vehicles as well as Soviet armoured engineer vehicles could do far more work than men with pickaxes and shovels; moreover, a vehicle wouldn’t try to attack its masters with the tools it had been given… or steal explosives to create a massive bomb blast.
The air armies operated on the army–division–regiment–squadron internal structure. Such a level of downwards command worked well for the Soviets. They incorporated additions of regiments flown by their allies into their divisions for ease of command. However, there were two Soviet air services who had elements sent to North America. The Soviet Air Force – the VVS – was joined by selective PVO regiments, from the Soviet Air Defence Forces, which included both interceptors and missile units too. Integration of these within the air armies didn’t happen at the PVO’s behest no matter what the VVS wanted to see there: they answered instead to the Soviet Army-led Front commands which controlled field armies and air armies. This was more than just an administrative matter. The VVS and the PVO had very different ways of doing things in the air and on the ground. There was an overlap in types of aircraft fielded though different variants were used. Inter-service rivalry was intense, enough to be a serious detriment to the war effort. The PVO really didn’t want to see its units sent overseas when their primary mission was defence of the Soviet homeland. The VVS didn’t want them in North America unless they could directly command them and integrate them as they had done with Eastern Europeans and Latin Americans. Such a split carried on though regardless. It was all about politics back home and wasn’t going to change. Meanwhile, the Soviet Air Force carried on with the war which it had to fight. The winter had seen even more extensive work down at the airbases which they operated from across occupied territory due to both the upcoming planned Spring offensive and also the reinforcements which they themselves received. The Fourteenth & Twenty–Sixth Air Armies were the main beneficiaries of that reinforcement. There had been plans to send more units that what came yet the situation in Europe halved that number. What was sent though were some particular VVS units recently either stood up as new at home or having transitioned to new aircraft / air defence missiles before they came across to North America. Many more Sukhoi-25 attack-fighters, designed for low-altitude battlefield roles, arrived and so did S-300 SAMs to counter American strike aircraft. Then there were the Sukhoi-27s. These Flankers were really needed. Concerns had been expressed back home that ‘wunderwaffe’ like these fighters weren’t ready to enter a war zone and needed more testing – the PVO had their Flankers in service before the VVS and sent some to Florida; in December, those had come off badly in clashes with American F-15s – yet these were dispatched to the war against the United States. There was a war to win and these aircraft were seen as war-winners.
Attached to the Twenty–Sixth Air Army were five aviation divisions. These were involved in three different conflicts though with overlap between each fight and the assigned air units. Denver and eastern Colorado were one fight, the second was flying from New Mexico against the Americans in the Texan High Plains and the third was in the Rocky Mountains. The 105th Mixed Aviation Division had that latter task. There were MiG-23 fighters and MiG-27 attack-fighters. Sukhoi-24 tactical bombers were flying in number and were joined by Su-25s too. Back in January, a regiment of Su-27s turned up. Much of the 105th Division was based inside the San Luis Valley within south-central Colorado. The valley was set among the mountains all around it. Two big Soviet airbases had been established inside (along with dispersed strips) with others outside away to the east outside the Rockies. The Soviet Air Force had put a lot of effort into establishing themselves here with the intention of staying. Paratroopers with the 76th Guards Airborne Division were fighting through the Rockies along with Spetsnaz some distance from the San Luis Valley so it was deemed a secure region especially since the flat terrain gave little cover for guerrillas. The airbases were defended close-in and far outside by missiles and also ground personnel on security duty. The surrounding mountains did give cover for approaching American aircraft on attack missions yet those same mountains were also full of radars and missiles too.
At the beginning of February, the 76th Guards, began falling back under higher orders. As they did so, there came the order that the 105th Division was to pull out of the San Luis Valley.
The Soviet Air Force objected strongly. Its bases at Alamosa and Monte Vista – huge expansions upon small civilian airports – were of great importance. Just outside the valley, over at La Veta on the edges of the High Plains, the new airbase there where the Flankers were flying from would be too close to the planned new frontlines to be of any viable use now. The whole 105th Division would need to relocate causing disruption to the Twenty–Sixth Air Army’s war. They demanded to know why did the 76th Guards needed to withdraw that far back. Couldn’t they hold back the Americans north of the valley and wasn’t it just a lone national guard regiment that a whole division of Soviet Airborne was facing? The orders stood though. A withdrawal orders for the paratroopers stood as the whole Soviet position in Colorado was shifting. Those airbases were to be abandoned and the infrastructure for the 105th Division needed to be removed where possible and destroyed where not. A timescale was given for this to be done. It was a timescale interrupted by uncooperative American actions.
The 116th Armored Cavalry Regiment broke through around Salida and pushed away the retreating Soviet paratroopers out of the lowland there up into the mountains above. They didn’t chase them but instead did as feared – just earlier than Soviet projections – and kept on going south. Highway-285 took the men from Idaho and Oregon into the San Luis Valley. American aircraft supported the tanks and infantry carriers as they drove through the excellent tank country which was the valley. At the spa resort of Mineral Hot Springs, there was a ‘fork’ in the road network. This was a good place to stop an attack, especially as beyond it two roads going south through the valley could be used afterwards. The bottleneck wasn’t defended though. The anti-tank unit which had meant to have been here saw its orders reversed as the 76th Guards chose not to see them lost for no good cause. The two platoons of gunners and missilemen wouldn’t have held for long and they were needed elsewhere. Such a decision doomed the 105th Division as the breathing room they were meant to have to evacuate in time didn’t come. Highway-17 was used like -285 was as an avenue of attack to charge directly at Alamosa and Monte Vista directly.
The 116th Cav’ crashed into Alamosa first, then Monte Vista next. Soviet personnel at each put up a fight. They stood no chance though. Each airbase was a hive of ongoing activity as forces pulled out from elsewhere were converging on both sites as air operations were being wound down too ahead of withdrawal. Communications with the 76th Guards headquarters were with the 105th Division but there was a delay – an accident, not something deliberate – in telling them about the American breakthrough. By the time that message was sent, battles were being fought at the airbases. The Americans on the ground and in the air did much damage and killed many enemies. There was an effort to spare some of what they found at the airbases but defending troops were everywhere. More firepower was unleashed in response to overcome this. American lives were valued more than capturing aircraft sitting on the ground.
The Americans would move on afterwards once they eliminated the last resistance at each airbase. Control over the whole valley was established when the 116th Cav’ went as far south as the Conejos area. They met resistance from the eastern flank where the Soviets blocked access to their approaches though inside the valley they were busy rounding up prisoners from occupation forces rather than any more serious fighting. In the skies above them, only after the losses of Alamosa and Monte Vista, did the 105th Division finally managed to get some significant air power to play a role. It was too late though. Those Flankers from outside the valley came over the mountains and met with both F-15s and F-16s in battle. Here they did well, holding their own in the sky. Just as the Soviet Air Force feared though their operating base was too exposed. The La Veta airbase was back from the La Veta Pass over the Rockies keeping it safe from ground attack but not from the air. The US Air Force used Leach Airport – inside the San Luis Valley and one of those dispersal sites for the 105th Division which hadn’t been fought over but abandoned successfully – to base a detachment of A-10s at. The ‘Hogs’ went over the mountains at low-level and popped up above La Veta. Their 30mm Gatling guns (with seven barrels: a fearsome weapon when used correctly) and waves of short-range rockets did terrible damage when making three attacks over four nights, each time getting past Soviet defences designed to stop them. Half a dozen of those Flankers, put inside partially finished protective shelters, were lost along with everything else done. La Veta would too have to be abandoned. What was left of the 105th Division would afterwards be broken up, attached to the other aviation divisions which were involved in the wider fight for the rest of Colorado including Denver.
***
February was when the Siege of Denver was once and for all broken open. That earlier gap in the encirclement north of the city wasn’t directly expanded upon but instead, attacks elsewhere to the south smashed apart Nicaraguan defenders. The Soviets couldn’t get to their aid in time. They ended up withdrawing their own troops first to Centennial on the edges of the city and the Castle Rock far outside. This left the Nicaraguans back closer to Denver all on their own. Instructions came for them to hold pending a return of Soviet forces. That was a lie: they were left to fight so the Soviets could establish stronger blocking positions in central Colorado. The Nicaraguans did what was demanded of them and held on until the very end. Almost two weeks of fighting took place before they were finally overcome. It was a very bloody final fight for them and saw Patriot forces – Denver militia groups – heavily-involved as the US 82nd Airborne Division left them too finish off a beaten opponent.
The siege would be declared over officially by February 11th though it was only by the 22nd that the last of the Nicaraguans around its outskirts of the city were eventually overcome. This news was spread wide and far across North America, then afterwards across the world as well.
Now the frontlines had moved southwards. The Castle Rock position blocked an American drive down the Interstate-25 corridor towards Colorado Springs. The Soviet Air Force had that area (plus further south towards Pueblo) littered with airbases for more of its air units and if lost, that would probably be worse than what occurred over in the San Luis Valley. Up at Castle Rock, the Soviet Twenty–Second Army was told to hold on. Their 66th Motorised Rifle Brigade and 120th Guards Motorised Rifle Division had taken terrible losses in the fights around Denver yet were in a position to stop the Americans with their US XI Corps from coming further south for the time being. The flanks were of concern though. The 76th Guards were over in the Rockies to the west and repositioning well though the Americans were applying a lot of pressure. To the east, over better terrain stretching southwards, that was where there was a lot of worry. More Nicaraguans who were joined with Revolutionary Mexico troops under their command holding a huge frontage. The Soviets had a brigade of their airmobile troops – men using light armoured vehicles as well as trucks – with them though the Canadians there increased in number and capability through February. Some British troops were among them too, other men who’d fought in Alaska earlier in the war and come south. Furthermore, Soviet intelligence-gathering spotted more reinforcements. Arriving in Colorado to come under the command of the Canadian I Corps was a division of the Army of the United States, one of those new-built formations raised at Fort Riley in Kansas and in its final stages of training now. What was identified as the 37th Infantry Division was going to be ready to strike soon enough. ABC forces (Americans, British and Canadians) were judged to be in the position to go through the NMS troops (Nicaraguan, Mexican and Soviet) with ease when they choose to. It looked likely they would get behind the Twenty–Second Army and cut them off by seizing Colorado Springs or Pueblo soon enough unless somehow stopped.
Permission for the withdrawals made in the Rockies and then from Denver had come from the highest levels. Moscow wasn’t in the mood to authorise retreats across occupied American soil. The propaganda value of doing so for the United States was one thing but so too was the planned upcoming major March offensives. Neither of those were benefitted by pulling back. They’d seen sense on those other withdrawals but not withdrawing all the way to Colorado Springs, maybe Pueblo, by their troops at Castle Rock. This wasn’t acceptable in Moscow’s eyes. Reinforcements were promised (from the broken up Eleventh Guards Army) but before then something was done of a strategic nature to put a stop to the flank threat.
Last-minute American intercepts of communications pointed to something about to happen in Colorado. There were worries than another gas attack, possibly even a tactical nuclear strike, was incoming. Soviet movements were alarming. Warning was sent to the highest-levels and this included the president where he went through (yet another) emergency evacuation, something he was grudgingly very used to by now. Things happened very fast though, before there could be a runaway reaction. Over Colorado, a pair of Tu-22Ms appeared. They’d flown from the occupied Dyess AFB down in Texas and each carried just the one bomb. Others of these type had been field tested by the Soviets just before Christmas down in Libya. Now they were used as part of the Soviet conventional arsenal. The Soviets were unaware of American interception of communications (which they couldn’t crack) informing their men to seek cover. There was no understanding of the risk they were running in seeing things get far out of hand. All they wanted to do was to put two extremely powerful bombs into action.
The towns of Limon and then Kit Carson were each hit by thermobaric bombs. Larger than what hit Sirte in Libya, these two bombs did as much damage as what occurred there and thoroughly destroy each target here in the United States. The equivalent of twelve tons of TNT but taking a longer-lasting and far hotter explosion than a conventional weapon was the yield of these bombs. Limon and Kit Carson were obliterated by what hit them. However, neither was knocked out for no reason. There were few American civilians at each and they weren’t a primary target either. Why these attacks came here were to destroy the Canadian military presence at Limon and the British around Kit Carson. The pair of towns were at crossroads in eastern Colorado and behind the frontlines. Here there were significant rear-area forces supporting the forward troops. Supply, communications, vehicle maintenance, medical and transportation units were concentrated. As intelligence information that the Soviets also had correctly said, the Canadian I Corps was right on the edge of a major attack. Hitting dispersed troops at the frontlines would have taken more bombs and not been as effective, the Soviets decided, but smashing apart these two support nodes would be. Covered by Flankers who had been moved to Pueblo Airport, and who engaged RAF Phantoms successfully, those bombers got in and out without taking any loses. Casualties were anticipated to be extensive among Allied troops at the targeted sites. As to the incoming major attack to cut their rear, the Soviets didn’t get hit by one afterwards. They waited on their own reinforcements and held onto what they had in Colorado, confident that eliminating the enemy military presence around Limon and Kit Carson had been enough. Time would tell on that.
February 1985: The Texan High Plains
Up on the Texan High Plains, where Amarillo and Lubbock were, Nicaraguan forces there began February in a bad way and just about holding back the Americans. Within a week, the Nicaraguan Second Army would be no more. The Soviets couldn’t stop the annihilation of their supposed allies. The Americans would get as far south as Lubbock and win themselves a victory on the scale of Denver yet one with far less outside attention. The loss of the Nicaraguans would fade into the background though.
The US XVIII Corps moved down from Plainview and towards Lubbock early in the month. The city itself wasn’t their goal but rather the transportation infrastructure around it with the road, rail and air connections. Soviet orders pushed the Nicaraguans to make another stand while they rearranged their own forces to bring the Americans to a final stop closer to Lubbock yet there was too much faith put in the Nicaraguans. First the 56th Cavalry Brigade cut through them and then the 101st Air Assault Infantry Division followed those Texans out front. The Nicaraguans were broken up into little pieces very quickly and even at that stage, there was Soviet belief that they would be able to delay the Americans when making individual fights, hopefully managing to shut the door behind the Americans. That wasn’t to be. Nicaraguan units folded easily when cut off. The Americans would be slowed somewhat, but only by the sheer amount of POWs they would have to deal with. Infighting among the different nationalities involved within the Second Army – only about sixty per cent of the men were Nicaraguans; the rest Hondurans and Salvadorans – occurred once again when they surrendered. There had been an American propaganda effort ahead of the fight to sew division yet this only became out in the open once there had come those surrenders. Military police units were forced to back away and let the enemy kill each other. This was for their own safety, their reports higher up the chain of command said, though down on the ground the view was very different. It was a case of sitting back and watching the enemy kill each other with glee at a lower level of command.
Soviet paratroopers from the 106th Guards Airborne Division were around Lubbock and they were joined by Bulgarian paratroopers as well. These men came here light and without any heavy forces in immediate support. A regiment of Soviet tanks had been supposed to join them yet they had been sent to avert disaster in Arizona: it was a long trip for them across to south-eastern Arizona but they got there in the end. Those sent to Lubbock didn’t give a damn about Arizona. Their only concern was the approaching enemy and reconnaissance aircraft spotting a further incoming American heavy force to join with the 56th Brigade. Intelligence identified it as one of the two brigades serving with the 1st Infantry Division. This left only a tiny American force to the north, facing what few Nicaraguans were left between Amarillo and New Mexico, yet that couldn’t be exploited at all at this time. To replace those missing Soviet tanks, there had been a Bulgarian brigade meant to come to Lubbock. The Soviets rated them and the paratroopers already in Lubbock as good troops, very good in fact, though they would rather have had their own men here when faced with oncoming Americans. The paratroopers would have to hold on until the Bulgarians got to them.
American aircraft and helicopters struck ahead of their advancing troops though didn’t have an easy time of it. There was a lot of defensive fire directed towards them and the Soviets – joined by Cuban aircraft too – fought them in the skies. Neither side could control the skies nor make a decisive input to the ground fight. Meanwhile, the XVIII Corps advanced onwards and reached the Soviets outside of Lubbock before the Bulgarians showed up. They had won the race… yet the Bulgarians weren’t that far off, just a day away. Lubbock’s airport, which was a major transport hub for the Soviets and where they had flown in all those men to fight here, was fought over with the 56th Brigade seizing it at first yet then hit with a fierce Soviet counterattack. It was to the airport where the Bulgarian 9th Tank Brigade went and they forced the Texans to withdraw. There was a belief that those men from the 1st Infantry would be present as well yet the intelligence here was faulty. The Americans were playing radio games with much deception used in what they were up to. More than that, they were splitting their forces and that wasn’t what the Soviets believed they would do. The detached heavy brigade showed up to the west where the Bulgarians had their paratroopers, over at Reese AFB. Unlike the Soviet Airborne who had their many BMD light armoured vehicles, the Bulgarian 68th Parachute Reconnaissance Regiment had no armoured vehicles: they were often called the ‘Balkan Spetsnaz’ because that accurately summed them up. Sniping, raiding, patrolling… that was what they would good for and their deployment was on the flank meant to secure it. The Americans threw tanks, armoured infantry and artillery at them in a full-scale assault though to grab the airbase. The Soviets tried to reach them in time because they weren’t about to abandon them like they had done to the Nicaraguans, yet they wouldn’t extricate themselves nor the 9th Tank Brigade from the bigger fight when the 101st Air Assault showed up behind the 56th Brigade. Reese fell into American hands and the Bulgarians there were either killed or scattered.
There was no let up in the American attack. The XVIII Corps kept on going. From the airbase, they made an advance going around Lubbock anti-clockwise. From the airport, they moved forward in a clockwise direction. They were gobbling up Lubbock from the outside and aiming to shut the door behind those inside. This would trap the Soviets and the Bulgarians. The time to make a decision for the Soviets on what to do was alarmingly short. In theory, the Nicaraguan Second Army was the higher headquarters for the Texan High Plains though with the Nicaraguans lost, the Soviet Airborne divisional commander took charge of his men, the Bulgarian tankers and a mixed assortment of various smaller support units in the service of many nations. Withdraw now, came the order, with utmost haste. A KGB colonel attempted to avert this with the reasoning that there had been no higher permission. He was ignored and told that he would be left behind if he chose to be. The man elected to retreat with the withdrawing troops though this would be far from the end of the matter. The fastest way out of Lubbock would be to go southeast and towards the high ground there: the winding course of the Yellow House Canyon would provide an excellent buffer against the stronger American forces moving clockwise. Such a thing would open up the way for the Americans to go further south though, deep into West Texas. The 106th Guards’ commander knew he’d be in trouble for the retreat he ordered but it would be worse if he did that. Going southwest and running away was just that; moving south and making a stand over better terrain there would be (in his eyes) a valid military action. Therefore, it was to the south they went. The Bulgarians covered the rear and, while hasty, the retreat was done with much success. Few men were left behind. A lot of equipment, stores and infrastructure was left intact though, all for the Americans to use. The Soviets and Bulgarians established their blocking positions and brought the Americans to a halt almost a dozen miles south of Lubbock. They’d got away from a doomed fight. That KGB colonel among them reported the unauthorised action and pointed to what had been left in Lubbock. He smiled when he discovered that the Soviet Airborne general was to be executed for ‘cowardice in the face of the enemy’ yet that smirk disappeared when he himself was arrested, faced court-martial and was taken to be shot (a process which took ten minutes in total) because he too was deemed a coward. Why did he go along with the retreat and not stay behind to ensure the destruction of all of that that was left behind? He never got the chance to answer that question.
The XVIII Corps couldn’t go no further than the Soviet’s newly-established positions, a line stretching east-west past Lubbock. The ground chosen for those was anchored among high ground either side and the middle was full of some further difficult patches of terrain which was of good use to a defender. With time, once fire support was brought up and a major assault could commence, this would be taken on. Not for now though. The 56th Brigade’s commander wanted to keep on going but the initial engagements his men met when reaching the defensive line made the corps commander realise that this was impossible. The Bulgarians fought Texan national guardsmen once again and this time the Soviets got some aircraft into play to make a difference. While it was late, it did its job. A pause was ordered. More than thought possible had been done already and the XVIII Corps was overstretched. He feared that the Soviets would suddenly get more reinforcements and come back north while his men were spread out all over the place. This was no time to be foolish and lose his corps.
Inside Lubbock, the treasure trove that the Soviets were angry that was left behind wasn’t considered such by the Americans. Yes, they got hold of a lot of stores and equipment and there had been no major demolitions done but it was hardly anything to get really excited about. An intelligence leak said that the KGB had shot the paratroopers’ commander for what he left behind. There was a hunt on for that ‘what’ was because nothing jumped out at the Americans as being worth a great deal. The stocks of ammunition and weaponry encountered weren’t too much. Other stores were looked upon with disdain. They fed their soldiers this? This was their medical equipment? This was their vehicle maintenance set-up? Reese AFB had been taken near intact though the airport was smashed to pieces after being directly fought over. Much of the road and rail links around Lubbock were damaged from American air attacks before the battle and almost nothing had been done to repair that bomb damage. Prisoners were taken from the men who didn’t get out but none of them could be considered valuable to anyone. The fuss that the Soviets made was confusing because they had managed to get the majority of their forces out. In American eyes, losing their men would have been far worse than what they got their hands upon.
Winning a victory like they had and liberating American soil was what the Americans regarded as a prize. There were civilians in Lubbock who were freed though not too many of them. So many of the small city’s population had left long ago before it was lost and those who had stayed behind – for various reasons – had seen the Nicaraguans ‘pacify’ them. After Lubbock, the XVIII Corps received the orders to hold onto what they had (as the corps’ commander had already done) and wait pending his own reinforcement. Elements of the Army of the United States were being attached to the XVIII Corps, new units coming to an end of their training and being equipped. There were artillery, aviation, engineering and support units aplenty. Of combat troops, the XVIII Corps received a new division. This was the 11th Air Assault Infantry. When it came time to go south again, these new volunteer recruits and conscripts would see their first taste of battle when the war moved to West Texas.
February 1985: Texas
Much of Texas still remained occupied by foreign troops while American forces remained not that far away but not in a position yet to move forward and liberate the rest of the Lone Star State. Within those occupied areas, the Soviets directed the overall occupation effort though had their allies undertake the majority of the tasks that this entailed. Revolutionary Mexico provided much of the manpower for that, with the belief that once the war was over, after the United States was defeated, Texas – and a lot more of what would become former American territory – would be ‘rightfully returned’ to them. Moscow had pointedly made no such promise on that matter but had given a nod-and-a-wink that this would occur. Cuba, Guatemala, Nicaragua, Panama, Bulgaria, Czechoslovakia, East Germany and Hungary – eight more Latin American and Eastern European countries – all too had personnel spread through Texas on non-combat tasks as well. Still, the Mexicans and the Soviets were the face of the occupation for Texans caught up on the wrong sides of the frontlines.
This wasn’t an occupation which met any international standards of how an occupying power should treat a native population, not in any fashion at all. Daily outrages continued to occur and these were gross violations of human rights committed against non-combatants. This was organised in places, unorganised in others. Texans were considered the enemy by the occupiers. There was no real effort to win them over in any way to if not agree with the occupation then accept it. The activities of the occupiers continually drove resistance. Armed attacks by guerrillas carried on – though at a lower level than before – and there too was much passive resistance as well. Over in El Paso, right in the far west of Texas, there remained in-place there that Peace Committee which consisted of American ‘notables’. They weren’t involved in what was going on with the occupation though. El Paso was all for foreign relations. The KGB controlled access to them from overseas media and government officials: no undertaking was made to have them used to try to influence things through occupied areas. There was a trickle of civilians which left the occupied areas with people getting out and reaching freedom. The vast majority were stuck though, trapped where they were and suffering. The actions of the occupiers were seeing these numbers reduced at quite a pace due to a growing number of fatalities. There had been shootings before and there would continue to be so yet the deaths occurring came due to the occupation. There was no food. There was no medical care available. Disease ran rampant through urban areas due to overcrowding of civilians pushed out of the countryside and into them. Austin, Houston and San Antonio had all seen many civilians initially leave them ahead of the invading troops though other people had stayed inside them. From El Paso along with large towns in the Lower Rio Grande Valley, far fewer people had managed to get away before all major exits routes for them were shut off and the frontlines of war had moved far away. In the cities and big towns, their populations had risen as over the winter months as those who lived outside of them had been forced to move to each. With the people all gathered up, they were deemed easier to control. This worked on a general pattern because there were fewer people outside across the countryside who could cause the occupiers trouble as they did what they wanted with Texas. However, the intensity of what guerrilla activity then did occur away from the concentrations of people was fierce with many of those left behind believing that everyone else had been herded off to be killed and they themselves had no choice but to fight. The ramming of their urban areas with people saw so many of them fall ill with the resulting deaths that came. Starvation took the weakest first but it would get everyone eventually.
Unless stopped, this harshest of all occupation measures undertaken – a recent development – would kill millions of innocents. It wasn’t a deliberate state policy of the Soviet Union to see this done… Tirado López remembered what happened to Mexico City and his view on what should be done in Texas was different. However, while no one in Moscow had signed-off on this officially, it was known about. The KGB didn’t stop the Mexicans from doing what they did. The Soviet Armed Forces knew full well too what was going on. Neither organisation was full of idiots who weren’t aware what was very soon going to happen. There was thus a lot of ‘hand-washing’ going on. Soviet senior people were making sure that their hands weren’t dirtied by involvement in what they were making sure that the Mexicans were doing all by themselves. The immediate benefit for them and their own wartime activities by that confining of people was plentiful. There was an anticipation that in victory or defeat, everything would come crashing down on the Mexicans when the scale of what was occurring was uncovered but, in the meantime, they’d washed their hands of the whole thing.
Soviet military officers were pleased to see the easier time they had moving those reinforcements which had made it across the Atlantic now through Texas. American air activity was still a major hinderance and there were increasing activities of inserted Green Berets, but with large-scale civilian interference gone, this became easier. Roads were used for moving equipment and supplies but also Texan railroads. The Soviets had brought over Railway Troops, specialist engineering forces to not just repair existing rail links but expand them too. This was a seriously challenging task for them to do because the rail network in Texas was nothing like it was back home or even in Europe – Americans liked their air and road travel rather than railways – but it was done regardless of all of those difficulties thrown in their way by way of lack of infrastructure and terrain. Convoys on the roads and the few railroads travelled away from South Texas and throughout the rest of the Lone Star State. They went west, north and east.
The Seventh Tank Army was the largest of those reinforcements on the move. At the beginning of February, the field army’s headquarters was situated in Corpus Christi. By the end of the month, that location had shifted to Seymour. This put the mass of tanks which formed a strike force that the Soviets had shifted north to win the war (almost) within sight of the Red River and Oklahoma beyond. They were almost ready to see combat.
Over in Oklahoma, through the north-eastern parts of Texas and down its very eastern edges along the state line with Louisiana, the United States had their unbeaten armies in-place. These too were being joined by reinforcements as the newly-raised Army of the United States arrived. These new troops were far smaller in number than at first planned yet there were still many more men in training elsewhere and only waiting on equipment and war-stocks which would all eventually come. The Third and Seventh US Armies absorbed those newly-arriving troops through February. Welcome too were the supply convoys which rolled in. Factories in the Mid-West especially yet also through the rest of the country had been busy turning out ammunition and so many more ‘consumables’ for military use.
Late February had earlier been pencilled-in as the time for a combined offensive to begin. That had been cancelled because the ARUS wasn’t ready. There were many voices who had demanded that an attack to liberate go ahead regardless. The new troops could catch up with existing forces which, it was assumed, would suddenly be able to do the impossible and tear threw Soviet and Soviet-allied forces to reach the Rio Grande. Chuck Robb – fully established in his role as Defence Secretary since replacing Bentsen – had refused to see this done, fully supported by the Joint Chiefs. It would fail miserable, President Glenn was told, and result in the immediate deaths of tens of thousands of American troops on the attack and see millions die when Soviet occupation continued for what could be another year. All that could be averted if there was a wait of just a few more weeks.
Therefore, a wait it was.
During that time, the Americans strengthened themselves with more than just numbers. They shuffled forces about and readied themselves for their offensive. That increase in strength also meant sending forward reconnaissance to gain a better intelligence picture of what faced them ahead. They already knew about the Soviet convoys and while overestimating the losses taken to the cargoes, they noted how the Soviets were making good with what they had brought across to the fight in North America. This led them to uncover two important issues. The first was that the Seventh US Army would have crashed head-on into the Soviet Seventh Tank Army and not gone lancing straight down through Central Texas on a successful cavalry ride as many had truly believed that could occur with apparent ease. Robb and the Joint Chiefs were vindicated on that matter of waiting.
Of more importance was the cities and the ghettos being formed in them. The term ‘ghettos’ came not from what certain areas of American cities were called where there was poverty and social strife. No, that wasn’t the case with what was seen in Texas. In a NISS report delivered to the President and the National Security Council, the comparison was made to the ghettos that the Nazis had formed in Poland during the early stages of World War Two. The evidence pointed (rightly) to Revolutionary Mexican forces being responsible for herding all those civilians together yet there was no misunderstanding over the fact that they wouldn’t have done this on their own without Soviet say-so. A conclusion was presented to Glenn upon what the Mexicans were up to.
They were going to deliberately murder all of those people in an act of genocide ahead of a later repopulation of Texas. Glenn asked for evidence of this. If true, he would act against this but the scale of his action foreseen demanded more proof than what was available. NISS was instructed to find that proof. NISS went out to find it.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:15:07 GMT
February 1985: The North Atlantic
The Allied navies had been humiliated by Soviet naval activities in the North Atlantic since the war had begun. Again and again, the navies of the United States, Britain and other Allied nations – true naval powers – had taken major losses due to enemy activity. They had done significant damage back to the Soviet Navy yet the North Atlantic was a contested stretch of water. The Allies were on both sides of the ocean where they had naval & air bases aplenty and also many island possessions with military facilities too. This was their ocean! The Soviets had managed to make control over the North Atlantic something that they could fight for though, over an extended period of time too. They had taken several islands to use as naval air bases – Iceland, the Azores and island nations at the eastern end of the Caribbean – for their missile-bombers and flooded the ocean with many submarines as well. On top of that, they had had a lot of ‘luck’. The US Navy had lost three aircraft carriers sunk in the North Atlantic; the Royal Navy had lost one of their own too. In addition to these, dozens upon dozens of major warships had been sunk as well. That was a lot of luck… very little of which was actually were examples where fortune favoured the Soviet Navy, especially their naval air arm flying from those island bases. NISS had broken open that Soviet spy ring and uncovered the scale of it in terms of how advanced it was and how the Soviets had been able to make use of intelligence gathered for real-time attacks. The GRU knew how the US Navy constructed its naval codes and the technology behind that. The specifics of communications changed daily – a necessary security measure – but it was how those codes were made and the precise methods of transmissions that the Soviet Navy was thus making use of. They weren’t able to pinpoint exact American naval movements and uncover all that they were saying, but they got enough information for it to be mightily useful. When NISS put this to the US Navy, there was initial suspicion. No one likes to be told that their trusted technology is being used against them and that due to that, so many deaths had occurred. NISS provided the proof though. The US Navy did want to know more and would have preferred to run a test, but this was wartime. They weren’t in a position to take their time in reaction. The president and the defence secretary had become involved and demanded that action be taken. The US Navy subsequently had changed its communication set-up early in January. There had been immediate results apparent where the Soviets instantly seemed to run out of ‘luck’. Their submarines weren’t showing up to attack American warships. From out of their island airbases, the Americans watched the Soviets behave very different where they were soon searching with reconnaissance aircraft on a wider scale for surface contacts rather than in a narrow area.
When informed of this neither the British, Canadians, Portuguese nor Spanish were impressed that the US Navy had been played for fools for so long and by extension they had taken the significant naval losses that they had too because the Americans had been so thoroughly penetrated by Soviet espionage. US Navy communications had allowed the Soviets to identity activities of its allies yet also stripped the North Atlantic of American naval power (when ships were sunk) that gave the Soviets a freer shot at them. Asked what the Americans were going to do with their own traitors, would they be shot, neither NISS nor US Navy could confirm that the ultimate punishment for traitors would be given to such people. There was talk of turning this ‘Walker’ spy ring against the Soviets. Part jokingly, part seriously, a Royal Navy admiral requested that instead such people he turned over to him… there was a yardarm or two which could do with some ‘decorations’.
February saw the Allied navies aim to take back their ocean. What had occurred with robbing the Soviets of one of their advantages was only part of the reason why they were able to achieve all that they were. They played to their own strengths when on the attack now that there was less time on the defensive and that was key. Operations were properly planned and executed well. Some luck came in too, real luck.
The US Navy linked up their two remaining operational carriers (a third was undertaking major post-combat repairs) and sent them towards Iceland. USS Nimitz and USS Saratoga, each hit hard earlier in the war by Soviet missile attacks and now patched-up, went after enemy aviation forces flying from that island’s south-western corner. They made a careful approach, following weather systems and in complete radio silence too, and then filled the skies with aircraft. Fighters and strike aircraft conducted a major attack over Iceland, being given a lot of help to do that in the form of the US Air Force. Ten B-52s came towards Iceland from the north after flying above Greenland and launched waves of ground-attack cruise missiles from far away. The B-52s turned for home, never in danger, while the missiles zeroed-in against the Soviet airbases at Keflavik and Reykjavik. US Navy aircraft showed up less than fifteen minutes after those missiles struck home. The Tomcats had few airborne fighters to engage and the US Navy would have loved to have used the others for ground attack if they had been able to. Alas, the Tomcats could only circle around while providing top cover for the Corsairs and Intruders, plus some new Hornets, which then went in low to do more than just shut the runways like the cruise missiles had done. They went after aircraft sitting on the ground: the Backfires, Bears and Blinders. Defensive SAMs were fired and took down several aircraft but others got their bombs through to their targets. Soviet naval air power on Iceland wasn’t wiped out by the time the American aircraft left, but it had taken terrible losses.
A joint effort by Allied navies, led by the Royal Navy, supported an RAF attack against Lajes Field in the Azores similar to the strike against Iceland. Tornados laden with bombs flew from mainland Portugal with tanker support and conducted a low-level surprise attack to hit more Soviet naval aircraft flying from there. Operation Talisman cost the RAF six aircraft – two to SAMs, one to anti-aircraft gunfire, two to enemy fighters and one to ‘terrain’ (i.e. the ocean) – but they would claim two dozen aircraft destroyed on the ground. Canadian and Portuguese ships and submarines joined with the Royal Navy in conducting operations around the Azores in the days following Talisman, when the Soviets were still hurting and unable to conduct major flight operations as the runways had been targeted like the aircraft parks. This was risky but the payoff would be high. Minefields were laid, commandoes were inserted and local shipping being used by the Soviets was attacked. A Canadian destroyer shelled Lajes Field from a distance and came under attack from an armed helicopter: it shot down its attacker though left the area trailing smoke after a missile had smashed into its superstructure. The Soviets picked themselves up and begun to conduct operations once much Talisman-inflicted damage had been done yet they soon found themselves very much on the backfoot due to all that had been done when the Allied navies had been allowed free-reign around the islands. The Portuguese had put a lot of special forces troops in on reconnaissance tasks (they’d use radios to broadcast aircraft departures) and would later seek to raid Lajes Field too. The mines laid were going to cause the Soviets many problems as well. They had had two minesweepers here, both of which had just been sunk. The majority of the Allied ships involved got away afterwards along with all of the assigned submarines. There were naval engagements far from the Azores but linked to the conflict there ongoing as well where several blockade runners were caught after being identified as what they were. The Royal Navy discovered a cargo ship which was supposedly Columbian was in fact a Soviet vessel loaded with weapons for what missile-bombers were left. The ship was taken under tow to Madeira. The Spanish came across another ship also flying a Columbia flag and coming up the South Atlantic bound for the Azores. A boarding party moved in and was met with sustained and accurate gunfire. That was too bad for those aboard the blockade runner as this was a warship from a vengeful nation they had engaged. The Spanish put that ship and its military wares on the bottom of the ocean… along with the crew too who due to a ‘submarine scare’, the Spanish didn’t stay around to save. There was a third ship (Turkish-flagged) which was missed, one carrying aviation fuel, and the Allies would have loved to have got that one too yet they’d done enough by getting the other two. Moreover, when that ship would dock, it would be entering mined waters.
Smaller engagements took place across the North Atlantic throughout the month. The weather wasn’t great but it wasn’t anywhere near as bad as it had been during the depths of winter. There was some success for the Soviet Navy yet those were limited and isolated occurrences. Everywhere else, the Allied navies were in the ascendency. They were attacking all over the place. Surface and air engagements took place while at the same time there were submarine clashes too. US Navy submarines pushed into strength into the Norwegian Sea. Four of them went forward and while a Soviet aircraft got one of them, the other three had a ‘happy hunt’. American submarines were busy on the other side of the ocean as well.
What the US Navy was calling the West Indies Exits were the multiple channels between islands of the Caribbean and the edges of the North Atlantic. These stretched from the Florida Straits to the water between Grenada and Trinidad. Soviet shipping – theirs and that they were using – passed through the West Indies Exits many times, going both ways. Attacks against this shipping had been undertaken and there had been varying levels of accomplishment. The further away from Florida, the more of a chance of success that ships had to get through safely though there was always a time issue involved. Going further east meant a longer voyage. In addition, there was often deception and even daring used by the shipping to get through where they pretended their passage was innocent or raced through with speed. The Americans were now aiming to shut the West Indies Exits for good. They were transferring more aircraft to Puerto Rico but before then submarines arrived. It wasn’t a wolf pack where many would operate together, coordinating actions. However, there were a lot of them and they were assigned operational areas alongside others while intelligence was shared from above.
Coming from South Texas, passing Cuba to the south and then around the divided island of Hispaniola came a Soviet convoy of ships. These had been some of those which had made it to North America during their winter voyage. The Americans watched them heading home. They were riding high in the water and thus without cargo carried. Nonetheless, sinking them was still important even if they weren’t carrying anything: they wouldn’t be making another journey loaded with tanks if sunk, would they? The Mona Passage was first thought to be the one of the Exits chosen but the ships went even further east and through the Virgin Islands. Both American and British owned islands of that chain were in Cuban hands. The ships passed by the islands, going this way and that way, and towards the open ocean beyond. This took the US Navy by surprise and they had to admire the daring. That wouldn’t mean much though. Their submarines and then afterwards US Air Force Phantoms from Puerto Rico turned up. Eight Soviet ships were sunk and three were beached on the sands of several islands, each of the latter targeted for more air strikes. Two ships got away after running further east. The US Navy celebrated such kills: eleven for no losses of their own, not even an aircraft lost to plentiful if woeful anti-aircraft fire from a couple of those ships. Later, much later, intelligence intercepts would discover that those ships had in fact been carrying cargo. It was human cargo. Those were hospital ships, heading home loaded with wounded men who weren’t lucky enough to have been evacuated by air. The Americans were justified in what they had done because the ships had been armed and they hadn’t known of the cargo (which mattered for nought when ships were carrying weapons anyway) and thus wouldn’t apologise for what they did. Hundreds upon hundreds of helpless men, all carrying war-wounds, drowned or burnt to death in the waters around the Virgin Islands. This was saw tragedies every day and this was only one of many. It was one which didn’t have to take place though.
February 1985: The Western Mediterranean
Spanish sovereign soil remained occupied by foreign troops. The Soviets had a complete hold of Melilla despite the terrible naval defeat they had suffered when trying to break out from the Mediterranean into the North Atlantic with their ships last month. The majority of what forces they had left, had withdrawn back to Malta yet at Melilla they had a few ships, some aircraft and over a thousand troops. Madrid was determined that that occupation shouldn’t go on for one day longer than it had to. Melilla was tiny and, to be brutally honest, mattered for nought to anyone else, not even the Soviets anymore. It mattered to the Spanish government though. British and Portuguese assistance was requested to help them retake Melilla though only with supporting needs: the Spanish would do the bulk of the fighting. That they did, landing there to retake their possession on Valentine’s Day.
It was a three-day fight. The three days would see fantastic levels of destruction done to Melilla where the port town was near-levelled in places. A lot of history was blown apart by explosives and there were many fires which gutted the remains of blown up buildings too. The Soviets fought with stubborn determination and gave everything that they had. The naval infantry who were in Melilla had been told to hold on and fight for as long as they could. There was no ‘fight to the last man’ order sent to them, but rather to give a good account of themselves for the honour of their service and their country. It was an outpost far away and doomed to fall to a determined attack, a fact recognised by the Naval Infantry higher command who sent out those reasonable orders. The orders weren’t received though. Electronic jamming of communications left the defenders with only their original orders to take and hold Melilla. When the Spanish attacked, and it was fast clear that this was a doomed fight, the senior Naval Infantry officer hinted at a surrender due to ‘unfavourable tactical circumstances’ yet the ranking KGB political officer with him informed his uniformed comrade that to surrender would be something that he would pay for in the end and there was the ‘good chance’ that reinforcement was only moments away. That KGB major also had what he considered an ace up his sleeve in the form of all of those POWs taken when Melilla was seized: he planned to use them to negotiate a way out for himself. Again, there was no higher orders which had been received to do this or not, it was all done by men on the ground out on their own.
Spanish marines arrived after a sustained number of air attacks had been made and the last Soviet MiGs wiped out. Naval gunfire supported them in establishing a bridgehead. Moving away from the shoreline was difficult though, one which cost the Spanish dear. The Soviets hadn’t been here for very long but they too had taken many casualties upon landing from Melilla’s first defenders. They knew how to make a landing force pay because they’d painfully learnt that lesson themselves. The Spanish had to claw their way forward from off the beaches and then began to fight house-to-house inland. There were civilians everywhere. Spanish marines held their fire again and again, losing tactical advantage repeatedly to the defenders, rather than shoot down women and children running around in panic as explosions and gunfire ripped through Melilla. Back in Madrid, the politicians there had had a very foolish idea that there would be very few civilian deaths when such people were caught between two opposing armies in such a very small piece of land. British and Portuguese military liaisons had told them this would happen. Moreover, there had been the Battle of Tenerife late last year when another Spanish island full of civilians was fought over and many of them were killed too. It wasn’t as if Madrid wasn’t aware what had occurred in Tenerife was likely to happen in Melilla. Still, they sent their marines in with the determination to take back what was theirs.
Day One saw the beachhead established. Day Two saw the Spanish push through the port area and strike deep inland, reaching the western side of the exclave and thus cutting the Soviets in two pieces. Day Three saw the southern portion attacked first before the north was attacked later that day. It was a continuous fight, one with no let up. Tired fighting men on both sides were dragged into a brutal fight where death and injury was all about them. Battle-hardened and highly-regarded troops the Soviet Naval Infantry and Spanish Marines each were. Neither was prepared to lose. One side had to though and that was the Naval Infantry. The Spanish had to beat them completely and utterly before finally their commander surrendered the very last of his men who were holding a ridiculously small perimeter and who’d just been hit with very accurate naval shelling as well as low-level bomb runs. He gave up, having one of his men wave an improvised white flag. Damn the consequences, he said, though that was a rash statement: he spent his captivity in Spain as a POW dreading the day peace came and he was sent home. As to the KGB major, he tried to play his ace card when making a move to bargain with Spanish prisoners used as hostages to get aboard a ship and head for Malta. The utter stupidity of thinking this had any chance of success revealed his own desperation. In the short time he’d been in Melilla, in-charge when his superior was killed early on, the major had ordered many atrocities committed. He didn’t delude himself into thinking he’d get away with them if he stayed. He sought a way out, even if it was going to be extraordinarily difficult to pull off. A Spanish sniper spotted him by chance and took a shot, blowing the top of the major’s head clean off. It was a random chance engagement and not planned. The target appeared and the sniper realised he had a officer in KGB uniform in his sights, one giving orders like he was in charge. Boom: the bullet whizzed towards the target and caused all of that mess that it did when the major had his head blown apart. The hostages, and other POWs, would all soon be freed from captivity.
One avenue of possible escape for the dead KGB man might have been to cross into Morocco. Since the first invasion of Melilla, neutral Morocco had surrounded the landward-facing side of the exclave with troops. There were more of them near Ceuta yet also around Moroccan ports facing the Mediterranean too. Where the regiment outside Melilla was, there remained gaps that lone Soviets or maybe small groups of the could have slipped through. Some did: not many but more than a few. The Moroccans detained them quietly with the intention of holding them for crossing into their soil while fighting as a belligerent in a war which Morocco was neutral in. The Spanish saw those troops there and elsewhere and had made plans to take action against Morocco should it step into Spanish territory no matter what excuse it might cook up. These were detailed war plans where Rabat and Tangiers would be bombed and then Spain would land troops on Moroccan soil to retake what was theirs from behind. They made their allies aware of this planning. From Lisbon, London and New York, there were warnings sent to Morocco about doing anything like that. Even Paris joined in with Mitterrand telling King Hassan that France wouldn’t intervene to support Morocco if it struck against the Allies and thus by extension sided with the Soviets. From Rabat there came nothing but protestations of innocence. Morocco was only moving troops to defend itself! Once Melilla was back in Spanish hands, Spain moved in more troops to both its possessions on the very northern tips of the African continent despite the Soviets being far away. By then though, as February came to a close, Morocco was no longer neutral and instead a country at war. They weren’t at war with Spain nor the Allies but rather fighting directly alongside France against someone else.
Before Melilla fell, and while knowing the men there were lost, the Soviets launched an air strike from Malta using Blinder bombers which launched cruise missiles against the Spanish mainland. A trio of missiles were targeted upon Barcelona and another two were shot towards the San Roque oil refinery. The latter was located on the Mediterranean side of the Spanish coast not far from Gibraltar. It was currently inactive due to the war and its exposed position. The missile hits here did little real damage though it would have been a different story if it had been in operation. The attack was nothing but one made out of spite as far as Madrid could see, as was the case with Barcelona too. The targets for the missiles which headed towards Spain’s second city appeared to be just the general urban area instead of any military base outside. The aim seemed to be to kill civilians and cause destruction to a city instead of hitting anything of a military value. One of those three missiles was hit by gunfire from a Spanish fighter which got behind it but the other two got through air defences and blew up inside the heart of Barcelona where they killed dozens and brought down a couple of buildings.
Warning came of the incoming attack to the Spanish from the French Navy.
There was direct communication, made over open radio channels, where the French related flight information on the Tu-22 bombers which its orbiting carrier-based fighters had detected. The Spanish were unfortunately only able to get their own defences into action too late and only hit one of five missiles were missing each bomber as well. The French, and the Italians too, had those bombers in their (metaphorical) gun-sights as they went from Malta to their launch points and then back again. If they had permission, those bombers could have been engaged. No permission had come though.
A few days later, it would have been a different story indeed. The French and the Italians had assembled a large fleet-in-being through the Western Med. and been long ready to use it. The time eventually came for them to do that and Malta was at the top of the list as to where all of those ships would be going. The fleet would move forward in the month’s last days and go into action with an offensive mission undertaken come the very beginning of March. This would occur because the situation on the ground far away in southern Sweden blew up with Western Europe entering the war on February 27th.
February 1985: Europe
Coming across the North Atlantic early in February to visit the European countries of the Allies was a high-level American diplomatic and political delegation. They started their visit in Britain before moving on first to Ireland, next to Norway, afterwards to Spain and finally to Portugal. This was no jolly. Serious business was done. Vice President Baker and Defence Secretary Robb had recently been to the Atlantic-facing countries of Europe involved in this war individually for flying visits though the February delegation sought to spend some time in each nation. There remained no indication of how long the war would last and whether it would continue in its current form or take a dramatic turn in their favour or against them. Much diplomacy was being undertaken along with significant economic work too. Heading up the American party which arrived at RAF Lyneham – on two aircraft, not one – were the Secretaries of State & Treasury. Adlai Stevenson III and Hugh Carey were both men appointed to their high-level positions back in September following the nuclear assassinations of their predecessors Mondale and Bayh at Andrews AFB. Behind closed doors, several senior European politicians thought little of both men and had more faith in President Glenn, Baker and Robb rather than these two. The British Government didn’t have much time for Carey’s pre-war behaviour (when he was New York Governor) in supporting Kennedy’s actions taken towards Northern Ireland. Meanwhile, there was concern in London, as well as in Madrid too, when it came to the lack of diplomatic skills in the part of Stevenson in convincing further countries to join the war on the Allied side alongside his hard-line approach towards many neutrals where they were either threatened or alienated by American actions: the gas attack late last year on West African countries had been a particular source of objection. Those opinions were kept private though. These were Glenn’s appointees and the Americans were VIP guests. They were treated correctly throughout their visit, starting back on the flight-line at Lyneham.
A plethora of junior officials, staff & advisers and security personnel travelled with the pair of Cabinet secretaries but there were also elected politicians which came too. Three senators and two congressmen made the journey: among them one of Massachusetts’ members of the Senate and a member of the House of Representatives from Arizona. John Kerry and John McCain would both each later serve as presidents of their country (their terms separated by another president in between) though that was many long years off. For now, each remained members of the reformed Congress with important committee roles within. They came with the VIPs and travelled extensively within each country which they visited as official guests. Previous violence across Britain in recent months had cooled off somewhat and no major riots where deaths were seen occurred during February yet their trip itinerary took them nowhere near such places where there had been all that violence before anyway. Kerry and McCain both saw the ruins of Whitehall; they also witnessed the British Army exercising on the Salisbury Plain. There were meetings, briefings and tours given. Neither man though was at a meeting which took place at Chequers in Buckinghamshire which Stevenson (Carey wasn’t there either) attended along with much of the British War Cabinet.
The Secretary of State was informed of something called Operation Purloin. He was assured that it was nothing more than a contingency, something that a reasonable and responsible government would plan for just to be sure. He directly and firmly told them that Purloin wouldn’t fly with Glenn nor any part of the US Government. One of his advisers would whisper to him that instead of Purloin, the British should have named it ‘Perfidious Albion’. What was Purloin? Purloin was just a plan to bring about the involvement of Western Europe and their mutual defence organisation – the EDA – in the wider war. This could be done by the RAF and the Royal Navy making attacks against Soviet forces who were occupying that small strip of land in mainland Sweden. These attacks would very likely ignite the whole situation there leading to the Soviets lashing out everywhere against everyone despite it being known that it was British action. Once they did so, Western Europe would be at war. It was stressed to Stevenson that this was just a contingency but he didn’t believe that. They told him that it was being considered to be put into action only if Britain was further imperilled than it already was and the EDA looked certain to remain neutral in this war. Stevenson was certain this was being floated as an idea where Britain was seeking American support for them to do it soon, not later. He told his hosts that this wouldn’t fly. Moreover, he also assured them that it was highly likely that the situation on the ground in Sweden was about to explode any time soon regardless. At the end of the Chequers meeting, it was again said to Stevenson that Purloin was only a contingency – that was repeated and repeated – so he repeated himself too: his country just wouldn’t stand for that. It was just wrong and couldn’t be done. Sweden will explode at any moment, he said again.
He was correct on that. Stevenson, Carey, Kerry and McCain would all be in Portugal by then, far away from where a whole new chapter of the Third World War began.
No official ceasefire nor any sort of progress towards a diplomatic settlement had occurred in Sweden. The heaviest of fighting had quickly come to an end once Soviet forces had driven an occupation zone along the eastern shoreline of the Øresund and dug-in. They continued to exchange shots with the Swedes on the ground and there remained clashes both at sea and in the skies. However, the advance to gobble up Swedish soil had ceased and so too had major attacks against the rest of the country. From out of Malmo, the Soviets didn’t interfere when the International Red Cross arranged for the departure of several convoys of injured children from that city’s hospitals. No games were played, and the fleet of vehicles and ambulances went right across Soviet-occupied territory unmolested. A later similar evacuation of children from hospitals occurred from out of Helsingborg too: again, one which the Soviets allowed to take place without causing any problems for political gain. The occupation over what little Swedish territory was in their hands wasn’t that harsh. Yes, it was enforced with violence yet still very much restrained compared to Soviet actions elsewhere in the world. Moscow declared that it had a security zone inside Sweden and stated that the two countries weren’t at war. The Soviets were satisfied that they had humbled and beaten a defiant Sweden and their overall aim to open up the Baltic Exits had been achieved where they had got their fleet out into open waters… though little use that did them in the end after the British and Norwegians had done all they then had.
Moscow was taken completely by surprise when Western Europe formed the EDA with their Maastricht Treaty and then went and brought Denmark and Sweden into that alliance. They were still reeling from the shock of such a diplomatic turn of events, and trying to figure out their intelligence failure to foresee that, when the news came that the EDA put military units into both Scandinavian countries. French and Italian forces moved into Denmark; France and West Germany put others into Sweden. None of that was supposed to happen. But it did and it blew all Soviet plans for Scandinavia right out of the water.
Across southern Sweden, the Swedes moved their mobilised armed forces into position to surround what they saw as a Soviet bridgehead for a further, full-scale invasion. The Baltic island of Gotland, the wider Stockholm area and the Finnish border were all full of more Swedish forces too. There were lots of them and they wouldn’t be underestimated when fighting on their home soil. This time they wouldn’t be taken by surprise. As to the EDA, they moved troops and aircraft into mainland Sweden some distance away from where the Soviets were but into clearly an offensive position. Centred on Gothenburg, the French and West Germans spread themselves out through south-western Sweden and were supported by more of their forces over in Denmark. Without actively doing so, they had reclosed the Baltic Exits just by their presence on both sides of it. They also had warships and submarines in there while the Danes were supported by them in remining certain stretches of water, areas previously cleared by those underwater nuclear detonations.
Throughout all of this, the Soviet leadership was undecided on how to act in respond. They were distracted by other events elsewhere yet the EDA action in the Baltic Exits was a slap in the face which remained stinging. War with Western Europe – France, Italy, West Germany and the Low Countries – hadn’t been sought. Despite all the setbacks, there had been the belief that Paris and its allies would come to their senses… just like the Americans and the Chinese eventually would too. All would understand that there was one superpower in this world and they all must accede to its will. Demands from Moscow, reasonable requests in fact, would be met with acceptance. That was how it was supposed to be. In a straight-up war, one without nuclear weapons, there was a confident prediction in Moscow that their tanks would overrun Western Europe if it came to that. The fight would be hard and the opponents no walkover, but this could be done. Such a thing wasn’t wanted though for political and economic reasons. A war like that would destroy all that the Soviet Union wanted to harness: the economic power of Western Europe. It would too unite all those countries which Moscow was intending to soon play off against each other once again, all to be Moscow’s favourite. The course of action which the Soviet leadership agreed was unacceptable was to do nothing in response. That was all that they could decide though, not how to respond. Retreating from Sweden, even with there being no longer a reason to be there, was now politically impossible. It put their military forces, who were engaged in daily low-level engagements with the Swedes, at risk of accidental conflict with those of the EDA. In Scandinavia, like on the North German Plain, Moscow was certain that its armed forces would win a conflict yet it would mean going all out there as well. That too wasn’t wanted. The resource sink that was the fight in North America, to say nothing of the China War, was a drain of unimaginable proportions. Both of those fights were seeing massive loss of life occur but also an expanse of treasure lost too. The Soviet Union always had the men to fight. It was the matter of everything else that those conflicts cost. To add Scandinavia and the rest of Western Europe to the list of wars to fight just wasn’t a choice that Moscow wanted to make.
The decision to not accept what the EDA had done but at the same time not make a response was uncharacteristic for the Soviet Union. The paralysis over failing to take action here was something not done elsewhere. It caused alarm among outsiders, those who feared the unknown. What were the Soviets up to? What were they getting ready to do that was taking them so long to prepare for? This worry was among many.
In southern Sweden, there remained shooting incidents. There were plenty of those. Swedish and Soviet forces engaged the other and lives were lost. The Swedes held their own yet there was an understanding that the Soviets were being remarkably restrained. Neither side backed away from any fight if shot at first and on a tactical level, those lower down the command chain fought like tigers when they had to. The decisions and indecisions of higher-ups wasn’t for them to ponder over.
EDA troops were far away from the fight and their naval vessels were some distance back too. Their aircraft were a different matter. French Mirages and Luftwaffe F-4s were flying from Swedish airbases, the same stations from which the Swedes put Drakens and Viggens into the sky. The West Germans were under strict ROE (rules of engagement) and the French were too but theirs were a little more relaxed in certain circumstances. The first clash in the skies between EDA and Soviet forces came on February 23rd. Firing from distance, a Mirage-2000 shot down a Soviet MiG-23 which had just attacked a pair of Swedish fighters. Full knowledge of the exact circumstances took some time to be established, especially for the Soviets to understand that a French aircraft had shot down one of theirs instead of Swedish fighters being responsible. Moscow was at once informed about this with the expectation that they would immediately issue an order for a counterstrike. Instead, there came an order for increased readiness and a relaxation in self-defence rules. The commanding Soviet Air Force general interpreted these instructions at his own discretion (which he was certainly not meant to) and the next time French aircraft were deemed to be presenting a danger, they were attacked. A pair of MiG-25s put down another Mirage-2000 when it really wasn’t in a threatening position. This shooting incident occurred on the 25th. The next day saw several more aerial engagements. French and Soviet aircraft shot at each other and there was the drawing in of Swedish and West German aircraft into this. When flying at high speed over a small area, lines in the sky that the other side had decided – without informing you – are their red lines are kind of impossible to see. February 26th saw the French lose another two aircraft (a Mirage F-1 and a Jaguar) while three Soviet MiGs went down. The West Germans had a F-4 blown apart in mid-air too.
The EDA and the Soviets were bringing down each other’s aircraft seemingly at will over Sweden. Exact details on individual events were hard to come by for politicians, men who demanded full knowledge of what was going on. They were told versions of events which weren’t true, even if the intent was there to tell the truth. Decisions were made. In Moscow, there finally came a decision on how to act against what Western Europe had done by moving into Scandinavia: they would be pushed out with full force used. This didn’t include a wider European war. The Soviet leadership remained convinced it was in control of events and so sought a limited conflict. As they had done to the Swedes, they would punish the EDA and eliminate them as a threat over Sweden and the Baltic Exits too. Soviet tanks weren’t about to go over the Iron Curtain and into West Germany. Moscow was going to fight a conflict – not a war – with one arm tied behind its back, all to stop things spiralling towards an end game they didn’t want. These decisions once again brought open remarks within the Defence Council as to the wisdom of this and even the suggestion that this wasn’t going to all go to plan. It was forced through by Vorotnikov though.
Soviet intelligence failings continued. They completely missed Paris and Rome taking a decision of their own, one which they browbeat Bonn into as well. The EDA was going to strike itself – not just act in self-defence – through Scandinavia but also extend military action to the Mediterranean as well. West Germany was expected to face an invasion only if things got out of hand. If that occurred, it would be one opposed on the border, the western side of that and not over on the eastern side as there had been talk of trying to achieve. Bonn wouldn’t allow for a pre-emptive attack into East Germany and they were fully supported by Brussels and The Hague here. The Dutch and the Belgians, plus the Danes as well, had all had their arms twisted like the West Germans to get them into this at the behest of a rather-driven Mitterrand.
In the early hours of the 27th, the EDA struck first. They were three hours ahead of the Soviets in attacking the other without a declaration of war. It was a conventional fight.
Over Sweden, French and Swedish aircraft attacked the Soviet-held airbases at Angelholm and Ljungbyhed where the Soviets were getting ready to launch their own air attacks from. West German fighters weren’t involved in any offensive action though.
On and above the Øresund, Danish and Italian air and naval forces went into action against the Soviets. They struck at them when the Soviets were moving forward ready to go into action too, just in a few hours time, but not yet.
Malta was bombed by Italian Tornados flying from Sicily joined by French Navy aircraft flying from the aircraft carrier Clemenceau. The joint French-Italian fleet in the Mediterranean headed straight for Malta on the back of that with Italian marines with them. Soviet forces here were taken by surprise as well.
Right down the centre of the divided Germany, between East and West, no border crossings were made. Above West Germany, the Luftwaffe was joined in flying defensive-only missions by the French, the Dutch and the Belgians. The Soviets, East Germans and Czechoslovaks put fighters into the sky above East Germany. Here the dividing lines were more pronounced than those above Sweden yet there were crossings of those made soon enough and missiles fired at other aircraft. Responses were made to the actions of others, real and imagined. In Moscow and Paris, neither side had intended for conflict to come here to Germany. There had been the belief that war would be fought elsewhere, away from where massed armies and air forces weren’t lined up against each other. Troops below them were readied to go into action as they all waiting for higher orders to do just that.
Millions of civilians across Europe were all in the firing line. Two nuclear-armed powers were at war with each aiming to fight a limited conflict. Panic hit in Western Europe especially though the governments in Eastern Europe (who sought to keep control of information) were gravely concerned too. Their leaders deluded themselves that this would stay localised. It really wasn’t going to.
February 1985: Europe
The first two days of the Euro-Soviet War were those which would be considered to be the most tense in a strategic sense. It was anticipated – with grave fear – that the conflict would go nuclear or if not then see the use of masses of chemical weapons against civilian targets. Both sides had such weapons in their arsenal. The Soviets had more, much more, yet EDA arsenals of weapons of mass destruction were nothing to scoff at especially since many of theirs were forward-deployed. The conflict didn’t go nuclear and nor were chemical weapons used in those first, crazy few days. What did occur was a lot of military action which took place across Europe. The limited conflict each side source went completely out of control. Neither Vorotnikov nor Mitterrand could stop the expansion of the fighting despite efforts to do so.
Citizens of the eight EDA countries (Belgium, Denmark, France, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Sweden and West Germany) woke up on the morning of February 27th to discover that their country was at war. It could be argued that those in Sweden went to sleep the night before with their country at war already though this new conflict was very different from how it had been before. Across Western Europe, despite announcements of no need to panic from their governments, there was a lot of that. There were many suicides which took place while others took the time to commit acts of criminality. The end of the world was nigh and so it was seen by many to go out on their terms or enjoy themselves before they were obliterated in nuclear fire. Millions of people wanted to leave their homes. Those who lived in cities, near military bases or close to the Iron Curtain regarded themselves as right in the way of the coming war and would rather not be there. Far more people only prepared to leave their homes than actually did but the numbers of people on the move were quite staggering. Governments had put measures in-place to stop this because it was long anticipated at the outset of conflict yet many of those restrictions on travel, which went alongside official statements to stay put, were woefully inadequate. Down through West Germany, north to south near to the Inner-German Border, there were government-enforced evacuations which did take place. The Bonn Government ordered some people to leave their homes and provided what they considered enough assistance to do so. Once again, this wasn’t enough. Those not being evacuated, who’d been told to stay put, witnessed others leaving and made efforts to flee as well. Hardly any of them had any idea where they were going. They just wanted to be far from here when the Soviet Army came west, almost certainly preceded by the use of nuclear and chemical weapons. Into West Germany, nor even into Denmark or through Austria & Yugoslavia towards Italy, the Soviets didn’t invade in those first few days though. Everyone was waiting for them to do so. The EDA had its military forces in position ready to repulse invading forces – quite a task – and they continued to wait for the Soviet Army to start moving.
Eastern European nations with the Warsaw Pact – Bulgaria, Czechoslovakia, East Germany, Hungary, Poland and Romania – all had no say in what the Soviets had done in the wider war with the Allies before the stand-off situation with the EDA exploded like it did. Moscow did what it wanted and demanded full, unconditional support from its allies. Romania had refused to act in any offensive manner against the Americans, the Chinese, the British and anyone else since September last year. The country wasn’t officially at war and internationally, other countries didn’t consider Romania to be at war in an unofficial manner either. Romania honoured its Warsaw Pact treaty commitments only in the form of being ready to defend its neighbours against external attack. With Poland, the country had been under occupation by its Warsaw Pact allies since last June. Czechoslovak and East German troops remained inside the country alongside Soviet forces. The Polish had very little sovereignty and a fully-disarmed military. The Warsaw Government did and said everything its Moscow masters told it to do. The four other nations took a position in between the independence of Romania and the subservience of Poland. Each maintained their sovereignty and had played an active role in the wider war while keen for their participation to remain limited. There was a troop commitment made to the fight in North America but, thankfully, none for the China War. Closer to home, there had been central command organisation with the Soviets at the top where the Warsaw Pact was a combined war machine ready to fight in Europe too though with a belief that if war hadn’t yet come, it never would. The tensions with France and Western Europe had kept on increasing though, along with a similar issue with Sweden. Unable to do anything to stop the Soviet Union from following the course of action it had chosen, the Eastern European countries had stayed out. They were looking at the bigger picture beyond the specifics of why Moscow was in dispute with their neighbours. War with Western Europe looked even more and more likely, and it was one that they feared being dragged into. Neither Bulgaria nor East Germany, the two countries with regimes closest to Moscow, wished to see that occur. Czechoslovakia and Hungary were just as concerned. Saying no to the Soviets, like the Romanians did, was only an option for Romania. The others couldn’t… unless they wanted to see what happened to Poland occur on their soil. None of these countries were impotent. They had partially-mobilised military forces and their own intelligence services. The latter all played second fiddle to the GRU and the KGB but couldn’t be written off as unimportant. East German espionage penetration of West Germany was especially strong and the Czechoslovaks had their own spies playing a role in that country as well. The Stasi and the StB each detected the large French nuclear deployment into West Germany come the beginning of 1985. They passed this information on to the Soviets. There came an acknowledgement of that: Moscow knew this anyway but the point was that East Berlin and Prague wanted the Soviets to understand their concern. Nothing the Soviets did showed any concern. They were all helpless across Eastern Europe. This was the situation that they were in before the EDA pre-emptive attack and after it too. Moscow would take the decisions that they had to follow. What else could they do?
Sweden, Denmark and Malta were the opening theatres of initial conflict between the EDA and the Soviets. Soon, the skies above the divided Germanies became another scene of fighting. The EDA had caught the Soviets completely off-guard and at the worst possible time. They were ready to go on the attack themselves in Scandinavia and moving their own forces into position. More damage was done than if they had been not out in open. Soviet air and naval forces were caught exposed. They took casualties accordingly. Down in the Central Med., the attack on Malta hurt the Libyans there more than the Soviets though they did take their own losses. The Soviet situation was better because Malta was a fortified forward position and Soviet forces weren’t moving forward ready to attack. Nonetheless, the joint French-Italian action hurt them.
Southern Sweden was where the Euro-Soviet War started and where in its first few days it was a furious series of engagements. French opening air attacks were followed by a Swedish ground attack a couple of hours later. The Swedes ran into interlocking defensive positions formed by the light troops who’d invaded last month and were still here. French and Swedish air power didn’t do that much to those: they had more effect upon Soviet air facilities. The Soviets held on. They fell back in a few places but these were only tactical withdrawals and none of those threatened their overall position holding onto occupied territory. The EDA attacks saw the Soviets do what they hadn’t done and enter both Malmo and Helsingborg though, those small cities on the coast where their troops had stayed outside of beforehand. They moved in to secure their rear against the shores of the Øresund. Inside each, they fought Swedes and also other French naval commandos inserted ahead of the outbreak of fighting. Swedish bravery and French élan could only do so much. The two cities fell. Soviet forces were surrounded by effective hostages in each and they moved many of their supporting forces into the urban areas. The air battles in the sky were favoring the EDA but there was no bombing of those cities. Pushing forward and wiping out the Soviets within days had never been a realistic EDA option but they had believed that they could weaken the Soviets more than they did at the start of the conflict. There was still the possibility of the Soviets being reinforced from their forces over in East Germany too. If that was to be stopped, and those long on Swedish soil wiped out, the Second Battle of the Baltic Exits needed to be won by the EDA.
French naval and Italian air forces joined with the Danes in fighting through the Baltic Exits. Belgian paratroopers and also some warships of theirs were on the way to join in within days. Denmark did most of the fighting though. Copenhagen had been quietly evacuated by the Danish Government where they removed themselves though not the civilian population. All around that city, war came. EDA efforts to scour the Øresund of Soviet forces weren’t enough and Copenhagen was in the center of that fighting where the Soviets fought back. They were overcome yet not until the end of the second day. Before then, their smaller naval vessels and well as aircraft flying up from East Germany battled with the Danes and the other EDA forces. Copenhagen’s airport was a big target for Soviet air strikes and it was also targeted by land-based missiles coming north too. Danish airbases from where their aircraft and those of the EDA were flying from were elsewhere yet Copenhagen was a fixation for the Soviets… to the detriment of the wider fight. Once the Soviets were either destroyed or pushed back away to the south, there remained a hostile coast to the east where they were in Sweden. There was no shared belief in the view taken by the Swedes and the French that once the Soviets were pushed away from Denmark this fight was over. The Danes remained greatly concerned that there was going to be a turnaround come early March and the Soviets would be back. The country reeled from the attacks around Copenhagen and then, late on the 28th, Soviet aircraft and missiles made further appearances above and into Denmark with Zealand and other islands attacked. From Bornholm, there was soon silence. That island, out away to the east, went ‘dark’ in terms of military and civilian communications. The Soviets were active there and had either taken it all at once or were in the process of doing so once they had cut if off. Denmark’s war was only going to continue.
The Battle for Malta had begun with air attacks. The Italians had bombed the island, hitting Soviet and Libyan forces there, and then that joint naval force came towards the island from the west. A second naval force, this one almost all Italian in composition, approached from the east though. The Italians moved down the Ionian Sea as well (between Italy and Greece) and this second flotilla contained amphibious ships loaded with marines. Italy had some elements of its armed forces away in both Denmark and West Germany though the majority were at home. They had more light troops from their army ready to support their marines due to having significant forces in the south of their country along with all of those in the Alps facing the Austrian & Yugoslavian frontiers. Before any amphibious landing could take place, planned for between five to seven days after the start of the war, Malta was attacked from the air first and so were Soviet and Libyan naval forces in nearby waters. There wasn’t much left of the Soviet Mediterranean Fleet. All of the big ships which had survived were near to Crete. The EDA aimed to isolate Malta and take it fast, liberating the people and removing the threat to Italy’s southern shores while also seeing control of the Med. taken by such a move. They were playing big here. Soviet cooperation with this plan wasn’t going to come though. Flying from Crete (the Greeks hadn’t agreed to any offensive action from their soil but they had let the Soviets in already), they sent aircraft on attack missions towards mainland Italy rather than to directly defend Malta. Airbases in southern Italy were hit hard by bombs and missiles. The Italians did well to counter many strikes but others got through. By the second day, the Soviets were no longer flying these only over international waters like they did at first. Their aircraft went through Greek airspace to get around Italian air patrols over the Ionian Sea. Soon enough, they’d be flying above Albania too as the war here expanded. Malta was set to be invaded as planned but the conflict was becoming larger in scope.
Only the French remained with troops in West Berlin. They had assisted the Americans and British in leaving last year but kept their own forces in-place. The city was undefendable. West Germany had been forced to understand that in the event of war with the Soviets, it would be lost. In private, Bonn had resigned itself to the coming loss the moment that the Euro-Soviet War started. As to the French troops there, they received a coded message ahead of the EDA attack on the Soviets to surrender rather than fight. Nothing else could be done. This was more than just an issue of a pointless loss of life should they had fought, which they would have should they have had their communications cut, but part of the internal politics of the EDA alliance. West Germany didn’t want to see the million plus civilians there caught up in the fighting between French and Soviet forces. As expected, within hours of the start of eth conflict, Soviet and East German forces moved forward into the city in a well-rehearsed result. They unleashed plentiful firepower despite no proper French resistance. There were some instances of the French returning fire but the general order to surrender, and surrender properly too, with full honours, was followed. West Berlin was gobbled up. French troops were marched away and more Soviets and East Germans moved in. These weren’t fighting soldiers but secret policemen and security troops. The political impact in West Germany of losing the city wouldn’t be as limited as the Bonn Government had hoped it would be. Those were West Germans over there and they had been abandoned without a shot fired – such was the narrative – by neither the French nor their own government.
The skies over East Germany and West Germany were a battlefield. Aerial combat led to attack missions against round targets from where aircraft flew. The Soviets fired conventionally-armed missiles from hidden ground locations as well. Blow-and-counterblow fast became all-out air attacks. Shooting incidents on the border occurred between those two nations as well as along the Czechoslovak-West German frontier took place too. Patrols met other patrols and infiltration parties. Permission was sought for reinforcements to hot spots and before then both air and artillery support. All over the place there were these clashes. Aircraft and helicopters joined in as well. Behind the borders, the armies of the two opposing blocs moved around troops. Neither went straight into attack positions ready for an invasion either way yet intelligence reports on this – where one side interpreted the movements of another with their own opinion formed – pointed to this being likely. Plans were thus made accordingly to stop that expected invasion… plans which on both sides had counter-invasion options and the use of weapons of mass destruction. These actions would only occur upon direct higher authorisation but meanwhile, those fighting did their best to try to prepare for them. Politicians and leaders far away were going to make those decisions, not the men who’d do the fighting where such invasions or strategic weapons strikes took place. The EDA already had their regular forces in West Germany in-place and they pushed forward pre-alerted reserves before the end of the month into that country too. As to the Warsaw Pact, Eastern European mobilisation occurred in full and there was also the rolling forward of a mass of Soviet forces from both Poland and the western part of the Soviet Union to join their forward forces.
The Euro-Soviet War began as a separate conflict from the wider Third World War. Upon starting, it was viewed like the China War was: something distinctly different from the war that the Allies were fighting with the Soviet-led Socialist Forces. That was never going to last. It was taking place very near to where the Allies and the Soviets had already clashed and where each had military forces in forward positions. There was a lot of diplomatic activity going on. EDA and Allied governments were on one side of that diplomacy while on the other the Soviets were engaged in a heavy-fisted approach towards countries such as Finland and Yugoslavia to get them on their side too. Among all of this, into France and the Low Countries ahead of any diplomatic arrangement and a formal alliance, British military officers arrived at Den Helder, Rotterdam, Antwerp, Ostend, Calais, Le Havre and Cherbourg. These were logistics people who weren’t visiting these ports on a sight-seeing tour. They were preceding the arrival of the incoming British Second Army.
February 1985: China
The Soviet nuclear targeting plot in China, the two waves of city-busting attacks, had been examined carefully by outsiders – the Americans especially – to provide ‘meaning’ to all of it. There was a reason why some cities were targeted and others weren’t. The second wave of strikes took the greatest interest, those made in retaliation to the Chinese obliteration of Vladivostok. The half a dozen cities hit in November 1984 had clearly been selected beforehand for geo-political reasons whereas those four wiped off the face of the earth in October appeared to have been hit on impulse. There were those that the Americans regarded as which should have been on the November firing plot and were left off. Nanchang could be excused because that was where the Chinese government under Hu had moved to but Nanjing (a historic Chinese capital) and others spread southwards away from the radioactive ruin of Shanghai down the coast opposite Taiwan had all be pointedly left alone. There had been that attempt to get Taiwan onside by the Soviets and that explained much of that. A further belief that the Americans had was that Moscow wished to see a post-war China have both a population and industrial base for its own exploitation in the victory they were chasing. Such reading of the situation by the Americans was entirely correct. These were Soviet intentions. In Moscow they still had that aim to see a surviving China once the war was over, one under Soviet tutelage. The defiance had to be finished off first though.
Nanjing sat alongside the Yangtze River and past that waterway were Nanchang and the Coastal Provinces. Soviet armies moved in that direction starting mid-February. The Chinese had the last of their large organised forces in the way and the mission orders ran for those to be defeated. It was to be the biggest battle of the war, one for the history books in terms of huge forces involved and the ferocity of the fight. The Battle of the Yangtze River it would be deemed afterwards.
It would be a battle which those history book would show the Soviets as the victors. They took Nanjing, went over the Yangtze and carried onwards as the month came to a close. The PLA was incapable of stopping them. They bled the Soviets greatly but this wasn’t enough to stop that steamroller which couldn’t be stopped. A trio of large pockets of cut-off Chinese troopers were formed south of the river, each with tens of thousands of PLA men caught inside them. One of the pockets was forced back towards the East China Sea and in the direction of what once was Shanghai; the other two couldn’t move and stayed where they were in the countryside. Soviet follow-on forces moved against them and began using chemical weapons in-number to further weaken what was left of them. The intention was to take each apart next month when that weakening had taken effect.
Soviet forward spearheads pushed through the huge gaps ripped open once south of the Yangtze. Hangzhou first before Ningbo and Wenzhou were out ahead along with the sea as the Soviets moved southeast towards Zhejiang Province. Other Soviet armies sent their lead units into the southern parts of Anhui: a province which the Yangtze ran through the middle of. These drove in a southwestern direction now and Nanchang was beyond them. That city sat behind the Poyang Lake – a formidable obstacle – and was a long way off but within reach beforehand of Soviet air strikes ahead of the tanks following. With his armies driving on Nanchang, and the last of the PLA’s heavier forces defeated, Vorotnikov waited for Hu to begin the process of arranging for talks to commence. China was beaten. There was no hope left for Hu now but to allow for diplomacy. There was division within the upper levels of leadership in Moscow yet none in Vorotnikov’s mind. The China War was now finally won. It had to be.
Britain had secured support from both Brunei and Singapore to help with the Hong Kong refugee crisis. The two smaller nations agreed to provide aid to stop the British colonial possession from ending up like Macau. Their assistance would come with a price to be paid later, a price which differed between each yet generally covered trade access and military support in the post-war world. Britain looked likely to come out worse off from each agreement. If the situation hadn’t been so urgent then London would never have agreed. It was though and so the deals had been struck. No one else could help. The United States was in no position to do so and neither were more traditional allies such as Australia and New Zealand either. Abandoning Hong Kong and letting it possibly fall under Taiwanese influence – they took over Hainan before the end of the month, now overtly gobbling up bits of China – was not to be done. Thus, these two other countries were turned to. Singapore was going to provide the manpower while Brunei provided support, especially immediate financial support.
Singapore had troops in South Korea and those were some of its best units in terms of training & equipment. More stayed at home, those of a lesser calibre. A brigade-sized force went to Hong Kong. They were flown there on commercial airliners in the colours of Cathay Pacific & Singapore Airlines (the smaller Royal Brunei Airlines aided in this) and arrived with light weapons. These were soldiers and thus came equipped for a fight. Overall, civilian refugees fleeing from China and seeking safety in Hong Kong in overwhelming numbers were helpless yet among them there were armed people as well: many defectors from the PLA. To come without weapons would have been foolish, especially since British forces in Hong Kong had already many times engaged armed opponents inside and on the edges of the territory. Medical and engineering personnel arrived too. What refugees were already inside needed to be attended to alongside the effort to patrol the frontier. Brunei funding was used to secure purchases of food and medical supplies to further support the needy inside Hong Kong: those who lived there and those who had arrived. It was money from the Sultan of Brunei which also paid all of the associated costs with the military deployment too. Nothing came cheap. This was certainly apparent when other nations realised that they were in a position to make a profit from Britain’s plight when it came to Hong Kong.
Singaporean troops were soon alongside the British 26th Gurkha Brigade providing the ‘defence’ of Hong Kong. The New Territories in the north and the long land border there with the Chinese mainland needed particular attention. However, the security and future of Hong Kong was under threat from all other directions as well where boats and at times even light aircraft had been making landings depositing people. It was a huge task to not just patrol the frontiers (the coastline was extensive) but inland as well. In all honestly, to stop every single entry made, five – maybe ten – times as many men from Singapore might have been needed. What came was a start though, enough to take the pressure off. The British understood that some refugees were going to get through. What they didn’t want to see was a horde of them pour in, all in urgent need and all taking what they wanted to try to ease their plight but instead bringing everything down around them. There was sympathy for such people who wanted to flee from their war-torn nation… but the wellbeing of the colony and those who lived here came first. Now, with outside support having finally arrived, even from another country rather than Britain itself, there was some hope in Hong Kong that they wouldn’t go the way of Macau. Millions of people in China remained on the move and a lot were still outside Hong Kong though. The whole situation wasn’t resolved. It was just a case of a stopgap measure and an easing of pressure. To rectify the whole situation, something else would have to be done. What that was, no one in neither Hong Kong nor London knew.
February 1985: Korea
The Second Korean War had seen the utter horrors of modern war inflicted up both of the divided Koreas. This had included the use of nuclear and chemical weapons, again both sides of the DMZ inside the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea and the Republic of Korea too. The armies of each country had fought the other as well as those of their respective allies. Civilian casualties had occurred across the peninsula with those caught up in the conventional fighting as well as the attacks made using weapons of mass destruction. Refugees had fled internally in great numbers though few, very few, had escaped overseas. The regime in North Korea managed to maintain its extraordinary tight grip over the lives of its people and ran an effective total war despite everything thrown at them. In the South, the government was forced into a total war situation too and this saw quite a severe turn to authoritarianism domestically just to survive. Each side sought a victory: total victory to justify total war. By the end of February, one was looking likely to see that occur while the other was staring complete defeat right in the face.
Far inside South Korea, the Soviets who turned up late and almost won the war were overcome and defeated. Their corps had long been cut off and they fast run out of everything to carry on the fight that they had to make on all sides. Rescue didn’t come, only continuing Allied attacks. They were especially exposed from above after running out of SAMs and also the majority of their anti-aircraft artillery. Aircraft lined-up above them to make attack runs in perfect order. There were huge American B-52s doing this as well as Australian F-111s, but also far smaller aircraft such as South Korean F-5s and Filipino OV-10s. North Korean forces had already received such attacks when they ran out of air cover though they had been quick to dig-in where they were and better protect themselves from above than the Soviets were. There was no time for the Soviets to learn, not in the middle of what they faced. The Allies were well-practised at this now. Following the worst of the air attacks, South Korean troops moved against the Soviets. They had a tough fight and it took time, yet they emerged victorious in the end. Thousands of prisoners were taken and marched away into captivity. These men would need to be cared for – given the basics as per international law – and treated far better than the South Koreans had treated their fellow Koreans from the KPA who’d they taken in the past and would take elsewhere through February. The Americans were intrigued by this and inquired as to why their allies would do so. They discovered that while certainly not official policy, the South Koreans treated the Soviets better because they hadn’t been responsible for all of the horrors of occupation inflicted upon civilians. The Soviets hadn’t been here for too long and spent every moment fighting. Foreigners they might be – instead of fellow Koreans – but they hadn’t done all that the soldiers of the KPA had.
North Korean pockets of resistance, cut off forces like the Soviets were, remained spread down the western side of South Korean. There were many of these, all full of KPA soldiers who were done for. The South Koreans moved against these, crushing which were considered the weakest first. Those which sat on or aside transport routes were targeted the most. They had to dig the enemy out of its positions and this required a lot of explosives used. Engineers were busy. Many KPA soldiers were buried alive and crushed to death. Calls were made for men to surrender. Shots rang out in response. Therefore, more blasts occurred to eliminate that resistance where it was. Some of the enemy did emerge finally with hands raised. Often, there came the deaths of these men where either their own side or vengeful South Koreans killed such people. Orders from above told the South Korean Army to take and make use of men who surrendered, to get them to persuade others to surrender yet these were ignored by men on the ground when they finally had the enemy at their mercy. ‘Shot while trying to escape’ became the reason for the deaths of many KPA POWs.
Five large pockets of resistance emerged left by the end of the month with all of the smaller ones finished off. The South Koreans began to ready themselves to overcome these starting next month. They had the troops to do it with the country fully-mobilised – teenage boys and old men among them – and the will to do it. These two would be South Korean-only fights. Their allies were elsewhere, closer to the DMZ along with more South Korean forces.
In north-western South Korea, between the Han and the DMZ, a joint offensive took place. All sovereign South Korean soil there was moved against to be liberated too. It was quite the task. US Army forces and US Marines, joined by Commonwealth troops plus those from the Philippines too, undertook a combined offensive through occupied territory where they broke open KPA defences and then struck deep inside, going as far as the DMZ and reaching North Korean territory. The shattered pieces were then attacked. Gaps were left open for KPA retreats to be made so these could be pounced upon. This wasn’t something that often worked out but when it did, it really achieved much more when attacking the enemy on the move than when they were dug-in. Elsewhere, it was more of what had been seen to the south: the most-stubborn enemy which held on when facing an absolute battering with firepower of all forms unleashed against them.
South Korean and American troops went into the DMZ. They found the strip of land occupied by KPA forces and engaged them everywhere that they found them. Movement was made across the area in a west-to-east direction. Crossings over into North Korea proper did occur though orders from above instructed those in the DMZ to focus upon securing a barrier against KPA movement either north-to-south or south-to-north rather than beginning an invasion of North Korea all on their own. Intelligence teams were busy during the time spent in the DMZ. Among their many tasks, they studied the tunnels beneath them from above which had been used as invasion routes during the invasion. Along those, the KPA had driven tanks as well as marched columns of men. Each was quite the feat of engineering. They were atop of them when the ground beneath their feet shook. Down inside those many tunnels, blasts occurred where KPA engineers blew them less they be used as invasion routes this time going north. Examination afterwards would find that inside several of them at the time of their demolition were KPA forces making a withdrawal rather than any attacking South Korean forces. As to such an idea of an underground invasion, the Allies found that laughable. Should they be going north, they would be going overland. There would be no secrecy in their approach!
By the time February came to a close, not all of that previously-occupied South Korean soil which was sought to be liberated was retaken. There remained areas where the KPA held on. None of those were going to last for much longer though and all were cut-off either up close or from behind where the DMZ was in Allied hands. As it was further south, only by next month would all of this be finished. However, many of the men currently here in the very northern reaches of South Korea wouldn’t be taken part in that.
Recall orders came for the 3rd Marine Division and two of the three US Army divisions (the 7th and 25th Infantry) as well. The 2nd Infantry Division would be staying in South Korea. Everyone else was being sent back to the United States. The Americans needed their men to fight now for their own soil.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:18:13 GMT
Chapter Twenty–One – March
March 1985: The Alaskan Panhandle
The headquarters for the re-established 5th Marine Division had been set up at Camp Pendleton in California on October 1st 1984. A week later, it was transferred to Camp Smith in Hawaii. Southern California had become a war zone and while there remained initial entry training of new Marine Riflemen at the Marine Depot in San Diego, the 5th Marines needed real training to be undertaken away from the boot camp. At that point, when Los Angeles was at first under threat and then actually occupied, the Barstow area in the Mojave Desert was considered too to be too near to the frontlines. NAS Barbers Point in Hawaii had suffered from a nuclear attack in the war’s opening minutes yet elsewhere in the Fiftieth State, there was little wartime disruption. Space was available too to train the new division properly and so the 5th Marine left the mainland United States. There was always an intention to return though.
The war had seen the US Marines as a whole suffer a torrid time, especially early on. Reserves with the 4th Marine Division had been lost during the fighting in Texas when their division was taken apart in a thorough and devastating defeat. The 1st Marine Division had only just survived the Siege of San Diego but had had to retreat all the way there before they could finally achieve the first of (what would be later) many victories. The 2nd Marine Division had stayed in Florida and guarded the beaches there yet done nothing much in the eyes of outsiders. Across in South Korea, the 3rd Marine Division had fought battle after battle and took horrendous losses. There had been concern among some that the US Marines might end up being subsumed by the US Army due to wartime needs. Maintaining a separate service came with costs that could be saved during a war for national survival. The US Marines were fighting on land too, each time under US Army command, and not conducting amphibious landings. It would have been easier to fold them into the US Army. Such a thing would have been unthinkable before the war. The mythology of the US Marines along with their place in American military history was a matter of national culture. Moreover, Congress had been full of retired US Marines as well as long-term supporters who’d never let that happen… those were people who’d been killed though. The esprit de corps of those US Marines who kept fighting when all others would have folded, and then the victories which they begun to win, finally cut out all talk of a merger. They would remain a separate service.
The Cubans hadn’t been in Southern California for that long though the still-forming 5th Marines hadn’t returned to the mainland. They were established across Hawaii and everything was set up there for the division to be made ready for battle. Four regiments were formed up – the 13th (artillery), the 21st, the 27th and the 29th – along with all of the necessary supporting components. Men were never a problem when it came to getting enough of them; equipment and stores was an issue. This was especially true when it came to high-tech, big ticket items like tanks and new aircraft yet also it was lower down with ammunition stocks as well for the rifles and heavy guns. Morale remained good though, exceptionally high. The 5th Marines received recruits from Hawaii, American island possessions in the Pacific and also those from the mainland west of the Rockies. In peacetime, that dividing line for recruits to the US Marines ran down the Mississippi River yet with the progress of how the war was going on the mainland, that had shifted. Parris Island in South Carolina was where the new 6th Marine Division and a recreated 4th Marine Division too were both being formed-up and they took all of those other men who didn’t come to San Diego first before soon being flown out to Hawaii. New recruits arrived en masse in Hawaii and since October, thirty-one thousand had come. Not all were assigned directly to the 5th Marines as others joined supporting units and there were also those who were assigned as replacements for the dead & injured in South Korea. There were men who didn’t make the cut, those who were unsuitable for service as a US Marine, but the rest were turned into Leathernecks ready to be sent off to war.
Late February had seen the 5th Marines depart Hawaii aboard an amphibious task group. Some of those ships had helped put the 1st Marines into Mexico in previous months; others from that earlier mission were at that point on their way to the Korean Peninsula to help on the transfer of the 3rd Marines out of Asia. Escorted close-in by US Navy warships, and covered at a distance by the battle group around the carrier USS Enterprise, a course was first set for Vancouver Island. During the first days of March, extra equipment and supplies were transferred from Canada to the 5th Marines and the naval task group which had brought them closer to home. The ships moved onwards, now going north. The US Marines ‘hit the beach’ on March 10th.
Of beaches, there weren’t any to conduct an assault over up in the Alaskan Panhandle. That phrase was used by the Marine Riflemen and their officers to describe their landings over windswept, wild and rocky terrain that they found among the islands surrounded by fast-flowing channels of water. Landing ships and helicopters were used to make two simultaneous assaults into occupied territory. Soviet forces here on American soil had been left to wither on the vine over the winter after being turned back from their attempted invasion of Canada last year. They had held on, suffering in horrible conditions and without little outside support. Canadian military activity inland was restricted by the terrain there – the lack of communications links especially – but each time they had met with the Soviets, they had come away victorious. US Air Force F-4s (mainly Reserve and Air National Guard units), flying from several Canadian sites along the Pacific coast, had made many air strikes as well as fighter sweeps and given the occupiers no let up. Combined Joint Task Force Pacific NW included the Canadians, those aircraft, US Army Green Berets and now the US Marines.
Regimental Landing Team 27 landed around Sitka on Baranof Island. The port town and its airport faced the open ocean. US Marines were fast all over it and engaging Soviet forces they found there. Troops from a regiment of the 81st Guards Motorised Rifle Division were based here along with an aviation regiment of Sukhoi-17 fighter-bombers. They were in dire straits before RLT 27 arrived to rock their world. Within a day, most of the organised resistance from the Soviets was overcome. The port and airport were in American hands. A night-time counterattack by dismounted Soviet riflemen surprised the US Marines only by the foolishness of it. It was driven back and the Americans fought through the night and into the next morning as they chased down hidden survivors and eliminated the last of the Soviets as a fighting force. The battle honour ‘Sitka’ would join those of Iwo Jima and Vietnam. After the fighting was done, prisoners were marched to waiting ships ready to take them down to Vancouver. RLT 27 had no time to guard such POWs nor care for the ill-nourished and unwell men they found here. Sitka – known to history as New Archangel when owned by the Russian Empire; discussions had been made in Moscow of seeing it revert to that name when it, like all of Alaska, was ‘returned’ to the Soviet Union – was only a staging post for later operations for them when acting as part of the whole of the 5th Marines.
Across at Ketchikan, RLT 21 made their landing. Their target was another combined port and airport though one which might as well have been inland. Ketchikan was set far back from open water and nowhere near as exposed as Sitka. Force Recon Marines had been preceded by Navy SEALs in making sure that they way ahead was open for the mass of landing craft and helicopters which inserted the 21st Marine Regiment. Soviet forces here consisted of what was – on paper anyway – the best Soviet troops in the Alaskan Panhandle: the 345th Guards Parachute Regiment. This unit of Soviet Airborne had taken part in the initial invasion and marched all the way deep into Canada and nearly reached Whitehorse before the British and Canadians threw them back to where they came. They had escaped from the very top of the Alaskan Panhandle and been assigned to Ketchikan in the south. Promised reinforcement, even transfer back home, had never come. Allied intelligence summaries on the regiment had overestimated its remaining fighting capabilities. These ‘elite’ troops were no longer that. RLT 21 arrived ready for a major fight; RLT 29 was standing by right behind them. Air attacks were made in support and there was a lot of naval gunfire. The US Marines stormed in, hyped up to fight an opponent they were told would defend Ketchikan like tigers. Baby seals, the Marine Riflemen would call them afterwards: not tigers. Ketchikan was easier than Sitka. It was gobbled up and POWs taken in large numbers. RTL 21’s medical teams were overwhelmed not with combat casualties but attending to ill Soviet paratroopers. These men were full of disease and ‘looking like concentration camp victims’ in the words of the commanding American officer. The winter had really taken its toll on these men but so too was the fact that they’d long been abandoned.
Two easy fights had taken place where the 5th Marines arrived in the Alaskan Panhandle. They had seized both Sitka on the coast and Ketchikan ‘inland’ with ease and opened up the way in. There were further Soviet forces further ahead with Juneau having a large concentration of them but also more at places such as Petersburg and Wrangell. There was more of that motor rifle division (its tank regiment was in China though) and also what was left of an airmobile brigade as well. Supporting troops were all over the place where they were involved in internal lines of communication: something rather significant in such a region where there was a serious lack of roads for land connections.
The rest of the 5th Marines moved ashore. The two seized entrance points were joined by smaller sites where there had been no enemy forces present and RLT 29 was used to take control. Prince of Wales Island (a huge piece of land) saw the biggest supporting presence where the US Marines secured their rear base area. Civilians welcomed them though told tales of the horrors which they had suffered under occupation. Men of military age were missing – most marched off by the Soviets from their homes; others had joined resistance groups – yet so too were many young women: the fate of the latter was of grave concern. There was a dearth of food and medicine, plus fuel, and the US Marines found themselves involved in providing immediate humanitarian aid to the remaining population. This had been anticipated though not in scale. Canadian assistance was offered and grabbed at in this. Like POWs ahead of them, civilians were soon shipped out towards Canada where they too would have their lives saved. Staying where they were, even with the US Marines here, would have seen many eventually lose their lives.
For the rest of the month, the 5th Marines prepared to move onwards. They were going to go straight for Juneau it was decided. The mission orders had been for Petersburg and Wrangell to be focused on first before the bigger state capital yet this had changed. Enemy weakness but also worries over the fate of the people there led this. Juneau would be seeing the US Marines arrive early next month.
March 1985: Arizona
A platoon of US Army special forces troops from the 51st Ranger Regiment escorted two NISS officers (both formerly with the DIA) to the edges of Tucson along with a ‘guest’ of the spooks. The man wasn’t a prisoner, the Rangers had been told, but a guest. The Rangers had a different view of the man. He was an enemy, someone they would have had no hesitation in shooting given the chance. That wasn’t to be though. They protected him as he reached the Arizona city under foreign occupation and also kept the lives of the two spooks safe as well. Minefields, snipers and guerrillas were all a danger. Once the city limits and the Guatemalan outposts were within sight, that guest continued onwards all alone. He was off to join his camaradas (comrades).
“I hope his camaradas shoot him.” One of the Rangers spoke aloud his thoughts.
“If they do, Corporal,” the officer replied, “we’ll have to go in there and fight them all.”
“Then we get to shoot them all, don’t we, Sir?”
The Rangers lieutenant choose not to reply and watched the Guatemalan general walk into Tucson.
The next morning, Guatemalan soldiers who’d been trapped inside Tucson marched out of there and headed southwards. They kept their weapons with them and moved in good order down Interstate-19 towards Mexico. No vehicles were in the columns of men nor heavy weapons, just soldiers with rifles and man-portable equipment. American soldiers – those Rangers among them – kept the Guatemalans under close observation as they left United States soil. There were many, many men who lined the route who wished to shoot at these Guatemalans. The fact that they were getting to leave alive, or without being defeated and undergoing captivity, rankled countless numbers among the watchers. There were aircraft in the sky above and several aircrews visually lined-up attack paths for bombing and strafing runs. The stretch of the Sonoran Desert between Tucson and Mexico wasn’t favourable ground for guerrillas yet there were some of them there still, mostly recent arrivals to this region. Several of them did get shots off towards the Guatemalan columns and there came counterfire in return. Green Beret teams were extremely reluctant to fire directly upon fellow Americans who’d shot at the enemy and when they moved towards those groups to get them to stop, there were difficult scenes. What they wanted was for the Guatemalans to hurry up and get gone and that could only be done by the firing against them to stop. Guerrillas were disarmed – only temporarily they were told – and there were incidents of fisticuffs but Americans didn’t shoot Americans here.
It took two days for the Guatemalans to all reach Nogales and get over the border. In many ways, what the Guatemalans achieved was remarkable. It was a long walk and they kept their order during it with no rebellions, no mutinies and very few men making a run for it into the desert… a decision which the few who did regretted when guerrillas who still had their guns went after them. Then they were out, off American soil. Seventeen thousand, three hundred and sixteen men made it over the border according to the official count by NISS: a huge number of the enemy all who had avoided a final fight, and certain defeat, in Tucson and went on to fight another day elsewhere. Behind them in Arizona they left behind all of their heavy equipment, their wounded and also a scattering of other nationalities who hadn’t come with them. The national guardsmen with the 32nd Infantry Division moved into Tucson afterwards to seize that equipment, remove the wounded and fight anyone who wanted to stay & contest American control of the city: some Cubans and Mexicans plus Soviet Air Force personnel. A real fight for the city against those Guatemalans would have been very bloody for all of those involved – the occupiers, the liberators and civilians there – yet many American soldiers expressed regret that they hadn’t won a ‘real’ fight here. Questions were asked aplenty up the chain of command from junior ranks as to why the Guatemalans had been allowed to get away, in the fashion they had too. No answers were given. It was a secret not to be revealed beyond those at the top of the military command chain and among spooks. There were other enemy for the Americans to fight anyway, elsewhere in Arizona and beyond.
As to the Guatemalans, that former captive general officer who’d been set lose into Tucson to talk with his camaradas took them into Mexico to fight. The revolution had been betrayed, he had told his comrades, all for an imperialist foreign war launched by Moscow and Havana. Going south, they would fight Nicaraguans, Cubans, Mexicans and Soviets… even other Guatemalans. They were going to attempt to fight their way home. Getting out of Arizona was the easy bit behind them. On foot, without heavy weapons, and facing a journey of quite the scale lay ahead. NISS had pulled off a significant intelligence coup in doing what they had with those Guatemalans though as to giving them any more aid beyond seeing them to and over the border, such a thing wouldn’t be on the cards. Maybe it should have been given yet simmering anger won over playing it smart long-term on that issue.
Other bloody, drawn-out fights took place across Arizona through March. Those Guatemalans defectors setting off to cause trouble elsewhere weren’t the only occupying forces.
To the southeast of Tucson, the US I Corps set about finished off what had begun last month: eliminating enemy resistance to the liberation of the south-eastern corner of Arizona. A late-arriving Soviet tank regiment had stopped this in February though they were, for all intents and purposes, on their own. Scattered groups of LACom troops (including some other Guatemalans) and Mexicans couldn’t stop what the I Corps threw into the battle to clear this part of Arizona and get as far as the New Mexico state line. Around Bisbee, the Soviet tanks were caught in a cauldron where they were surrounded on all sides in a moving battle and under fierce attack from above. Air cover for them was absent: last month the Soviet Air Force had been driven out of Arizona and remained flying in Mexican rather than American skies now. The 9th Infantry Division won the Battle of Bisbee and then went onto Douglas. There were troops from Revolutionary Mexico attempting to block passage over the border in Douglas. They stood their ground and died. The 9th Infantry went onwards once victorious and into Agua Prieta to seize that Mexican town. The 5th Armored Brigade avoided those border clashes and followed the course of Interstate-10 as it ran eastwards. Blocking points established by Guatemalans and Nicaraguans were run over in a furry of violence. Bowie and San Simon were larger fights, each taking time for the 5th Brigade to overcome the resistance around each town and further open up the road. I Corps headquarters came under pressure from above to hurry their attacking unit along and reach New Mexico before the end of the month. The 5th Brigade was given extra air support from air units previously tasked to the 9th Infantry after it had completed its mission. Large numbers of F-4s and F-16s poured in on precision strike missions while A-7s and A-10s flew at lower level in a more tactical role. The skies being clear of enemy fighter interference allowed them to do their worse. New Mexico wasn’t just reached: it was entered. Dug-in Soviet heavy forces set among high ground either side of the interstate eventually brought the 5th Brigade to a stop about half a dozen miles inside. Liberating New Mexico and getting to El Paso would be for next month. For now, a huge chunk of Arizona had been retaken and the enemy beaten everywhere it was met.
Cuban troops flying down from Colorado had joined Guatemalan forces through eastern and north-eastern Arizona. Their unit identification and mission (the latter only in general terms) had been gained from the prisoner who was the commanding officer after he was taken following an air accident when leaving Colorado. The majority of his men might have got there when he didn’t, but it would have been best for them to have stayed further north. American special forces and air power did most of the work through March yet there were forward attacks made from the 81st Infantry Brigade too. Those national guardsmen got to Winslow when striking out from Flagstaff but that was as far as they could go. Ahead of them went raiding teams on the ground and air power, lots of each. Fuel-air explosives – similar to the thermobarics recently used by the Soviets in Colorado – were employed extensively in those air attacks and the Cubans took the full brunt of them… and the Americans went after them with napalm too. These weapons killed and injured many yet also terrified many more. That was the intent: to get the enemy to witness their use against others and flee rather than have to be next in-line. The Cubans only had a few desertions and mutinies. The Guatemalans were crippled by these occurrences. None of them wanted to be hit like that. Officers were shot, men ran and order fell apart. Green Berets joined with guerrillas – relationships had been built over the winter – in ambushes against patrols and snatching prisoners. The Guatemalan situation gave fresh impetus to their activities. They moved from the shadows and into the open. Small towns were entered and liberated for good. Stretches of road were secured and held rather than just struck by hit-and-run attacks. Sometimes their activities went tragically wrong where they miscalculated though at other times they punched far above their weight. Enemy counter-guerrilla activities were haphazard rather than organised as they were before. All around the occupiers, their enemies were holding ground. They themselves were cut off. It took some time to realise this but once they understood the results of the Bisbee fight and the drive down Interstate-10 to reach New Mexico by the US Army, it became clearer. American intelligence activities to get them to surrender occurred (no efforts were made similar to Tucson to organise a rebel-led defection) and these had success. The Cubans at first resisted these, offers to give in and receive good treatment as POWs which Guatemalans accepted, but soon part of the brigade once led by a colonel named Bella when in Colorado had surrendered in Arizona. The rest of the men then began to withdraw from forward positions. They pulled back away to the very northeast and deep into the Painted Desert. Attacks against those who carried on fighting continued from above and on the ground. This wasn’t over but a conclusion was in-sight for them: that would be a future either as dead or as POWs. Meanwhile, the areas which they left behind, more and more of Arizona, returned to American control. Almost all of it was now clear of a long and brutal occupation.
March 1985: Sonora
From the moment that Congress had been re-established, within days of the war starting, there had been open talk of what would happen with Mexico once the war was won. This optimism that victory would come and Mexico would be at the mercy of the United States with that eventuality flummoxed outsiders. In America’s darkest days late last year, when the Soviet-led war overrun significant parts of the nation and the country was still reeling from the nuclear attack, those discussions about how to effectively deal with Mexico post-war continued unabated. It was from Mexican soil where the war had come – the first troops and the first missiles – and it was there where America’s politicians sought revenge. They had the support of the overwhelming majority of the American people in this. Yes, the Soviet Union, Cuba and the others were all in for it too, big time, but Mexico held a ‘special’ place in this planned retribution. December 1984 had seen US Marines land on Mexican soil when they went into Baja California. This accelerated the movement to give Mexico what it was deemed to have deserved. Congress was instrumental in making sure that Herzog Flores and what was left of the pre-war Monterrey Government received nothing from the United States and too had their presence felt in stopping the Tijuana Council (which represented Democratic Mexico and received recognition) becoming only a co-belligerent in this war, not a member of the Allies. They weren’t happy to discover US Marines and Democratic Mexico troops fighting side-by-side and applied pressure on Glenn to see that stop despite the military necessity of that. Secretary of Defence Robb was summoned before the Senate Armed Services Committee and given a roasting by them; the House Committee wasn’t to be outdone on this either when they uncovered the details of much cooperation on the ground going on south of the border in Baja California. Glenn pushed back and Robb explained to Congress – putting it very bluntly – that Mexican soldiers were dying for Mexican soil which therefore didn’t mean that American fighting men had to, but this only eased the issue a little. The Tijuana Government didn’t have much favour in Congress and there was much cutting of specifics of aid to them due to Congress having the budgetary powers there. A weak post-war Mexico was what Congress wanted, a country wholly dependent upon the United States and as broken as could be. This was spoken of openly. Stevenson returned from Europe and the Secretary of State tried to weigh in on this and calm matters when it came to these attacks being made against Tijuana. Congress hauled him too before their committees and put him in his place on this. Some of that reflected the perceived failure of Stevenson in his role by Congress and thus was personal, yet the Mexico issue was something that many senators and representatives were driven by. They foresaw a future for Mexico and would implement that. That future for certain members – who declared this to all who would listen – was for Mexico to be broken apart as a nation, even with parts of it annexed to the United States. Others weren’t ready to see that happen yet the attention was on those who had the most dramatic things to say. Earlier comments from selected members of Congress where there was anger that the United States had its soldiers and marines fighting in Mexico rather than on home soil had become less and less after victories had been won in both countries: something which was quite the about-turn but politicians will always be politicians. American troops on Mexican soil would be there to stay for good, the proclamations from Congress came, and the occupied parts would never be given back whether they were officially part of a united Mexico, a fractured Mexico or former Mexico.
March 1985 saw US forces inside Mexico move into the state of Sonora. Baja California was already in American hands (though Democratic Mexico troops were the overwhelming body of men in-place) and now it was into Sonora they went. This put them south of Arizona and also in a position for further later moves across to the east… where the Rio Grande was and thus behind Soviet forces on the other side of Texas. Going that far was something considered for the future and would take a huge effort to do. Meanwhile, Sonora was being fought over. The western parts were entered in a two-pronged approach where the Sixth US Army moved forward in the early stages of the grand strategic outflanking manoeuvre which had so impressed Glenn, Baker, Robb and the rest of the top of the US Government who all signed off on this.
The US IV Corps moved across the Altar Desert – between Arizona and the Gulf of California – with their first objective being Heroica Caborca. That town was a major centre of communications with roads linking it across north-western Mexico. It had been a base of operations for the war when it was being fought in California last year and recently in Arizona. The Soviets had recently transferred aircraft from there which they had removed from Arizona too. Controlling it would give the Sixth Army the perfect position to go much further. Cuban, Nicaraguan and Revolutionary Mexico troops stood in the way. The fight was tougher than the Americans believed it would be, especially when it came to the level of Soviet air support and how fiercely those Mexicans fought there. Both the 38th & 47th Infantry Division – a lot of national guardsmen – were used in the wider battle that raged close to but also far from the town to win control of it. Victory did come after a time, just behind schedule. The Cubans managed to get away after making a fighting withdrawal whereas other defenders certainly didn’t. Those Cubans didn’t march away clean though. The IV Corps pursued them and chased them down, not letting them get away to establish blocking positions. A week’s worth of small-scale fighting took place before finally the Cubans could be brought to battle once again. This occurred at a crossroads, around a smaller town. The Battle of Santa Ana was one won by the 38th Infantry. The Cubans fought and died here. It was a last stand for men who hadn’t intended to make a last stand yet the Americans trapped them, pounded them with the heaviest of attacks and were done with them when they decided that they were. An earlier attempt to make a surrender didn’t work out when the IV Corps refused – on Sixth Army orders – to accept the terms of that surrender offered. The Cubans wanted free passage away, leaving their weapons behind, and promises of good treatment. Good treatment for POWs (though that would be what the United States decided it to be) would come but for the Cubans to be allowed to escape, even unarmed, was a no-no. They were blasted to bits and then taken apart before a final, unconditional surrender was made by the last of them. Santa Ana gave the Americans control now over where the east-to-west Highway 2 and the north-to-south Highway 15 converged. The fight won in southern Arizona by other Sixth Army elements was over by that point and those Guatemalans from Tucson were marching into Mexico after defecting to cause trouble already. Regardless, holding Santa Ana made sure that what occurred to the north couldn’t be changed by a sudden reversal originating from Mexico. Victory to the north meant that the IV Corps could focus on the south. They started moving forward, heading towards the city of Hermosillo. This was halted due to the events of March 25th in Mexico. When the IV Corps resumed marching forward again at the very end of the month and into April, it wouldn’t be towards where that city had once been.
The 1st Marine Division was also halted late in March when inside Sonora due to events on that day when millions died in Mexico. They too were marching on Hermosillo at the same time, aiming to take on and engage enemy forces around it rather than to occupy such a crowded urban area. Weeks beforehand, these US Marines who’d fought throughout the war seemingly non-stop in California and then in Baja California had arrived at the port town of Guaymas to the south of the city ahead. Guaymas was on the Gulf of California. There had been a focus on that port during last summer before the war when air strikes against ships going towards it, but not Guaymas itself, had been conducted during the on-off pre-war air campaign over Mexico. Guaymas had then been of vital importance for the invasion back in September with ships coming up from Latin America arriving there and unloading much vital war cargo. Air strikes had hit it including a strong B-52 raid before its importance to the war had been lost when war had come to Baja California and the Gulf of California had been closed by the US Navy. It was somewhere the Americans expected a big fight for and they hadn’t planned initially to send men there in a full-on assault. However, intelligence had pointed to a munity of the garrison there where the Revolutionary Mexico regime in the city had been targeted by a variety of counterrevolutionaries. Troops fought each other and the defences were weakened. Guaymas wasn’t that far away and the US Marines were instructed to go. The 1st Marines turned up in force. They made an easy landing yet fast discovered that while the Mexicans they encountered hated each other, they united once again to fight the invading Americans. They had been committed to the fight though and so threw everything at it. Victory came, a bloody one. Afterwards, before they could move on, there were moves made to bring Democratic Mexico troops over from Baja California to garrison their rear base when they moved onwards. That had been done back to the west. This was something that didn’t happen with Guaymas though due to events far away with Congress and its desires for Mexico’s future. Part of the 1st Marines, fighting men, had been left back at the town while they waited on more Americans – not Mexicans – to arrive. As to the rest of the 1st Marines, the division marched on towards Hermosillo after quite the delay inflicted due to politics. If the US Marines had been in or close to Hermosillo, it wouldn’t have been bathed in nuclear fire like it was.
March 1985: New Mexico
Answering to Rockies Command, the First US Army had its combat forces spread from Colorado down into the north-western part of Texas called the High Plains. The Area of Operations (AO) covered New Mexico too. Not part of the AO was West Texas. To those viewing the fighting across the western side of Texas from the outside, this might not have meant anything. However, in military affairs the boundaries of AOs were rather important. It stopped friendly fire incidents and made sure that focus could be maintained on the mission instead of getting side-tracked. The First Army had had its AO changed before and this wasn’t really anything difficult to do. However, it was unchanged from February into March. Two-thirds of the First Army was fighting in Colorado – the US XI Corps and the I Canadian Corps – and other third, the US XVIII Corps, was fighting in the High Plains and had been advancing southwards towards West Texas. This meant that the XVIII Corps was liberating occupied territory, yes, but also moving away from the main fight that the rest of the First Army was. They’d reached the edge of the AO after taking Lubbock. Air support from the Seventeenth US Air Force (under the Rockies Command too) was stretched to support them and so were the long supply links. The already long flank of the XVIII Corps facing New Mexico was getting even longer the further south that they went; it was the same on the other flank and made the forward movement all neck and no shoulders with the resulting strong possibility of them soon being cut off and lost. More than any of that, as the XVIII Corps drove on towards West Texas, they had no influence over the fight that everyone else with the First Army was fighting. The rest of Texas was in the AO of Texas Command – with its own two armies and two numbered air forces – and the First Army wanted to move the fight into New Mexico. It was there that the XI Corps and the Canadians were wanted to advance into from the north once they were done in Colorado. To do that effectively, the XVIII Corps needed to head west.
Roswell was where the XVIII Corps moved towards at the beginning of March. This took the enemy by the surprise. Soviet light forces stretched south of Lubbock were anticipating a head-on attack against them and had established fortified positions. The Texan national guardsmen with the 56th Cavalry Brigade stayed behind to keep them fixed in-place while everyone else entered New Mexico starting with an assault against that famous New Mexico town. The international airport to the south of there, once an airbase belonged to Strategic Air Command before being closed in the late Sixties, was the entry point. Back last October, Nicaraguan forces had taken it from the XVIII Corps when they had first been in New Mexico. Those Nicaraguans were all gone. Soviet aircraft (reconnaissance and electronic warfare jets) flew from there and there was a garrison of Revolutionary Mexico troops. A combat jump was made into Roswell and this was undertaken by the newly-arrived reinforcements added to the XVIII Corps in the form of the 11th ‘Angels’ Airborne Division. This was an Army of the United States formation, full of wartime recruits and conscripts as well as veteran personnel transferred from elsewhere to make the division not so green. The 11th Airborne consisted of four combat brigades, each based around a historic regiment, and incorporated forces which should have been with the 17th Air Assault Infantry Division. Fully-forming that latter division alongside the former had been too much for the Americans to achieve in the short time period available and so they had been merged into one (a large one at that) before deploying to combat zones. This was the 11th Airborne’s first taste of war.
Paratroopers jumped from aircraft shouting ‘Currahee!’ as they went into battle: the re-established 506th Parachute Infantry Regiment went into battle. Roswell was a tough fight for a green unit but it was one that they won. Another brigade, this one with men from the 511th Regiment (also with World War Two heritage), joined them on the ground after being airlifted rather than jumping as trained into the captured airport and fighting with them. The rest of the XVIII Corps was behind them but those veteran units were the follow-up force rather than sent in ahead. Once the airhead was taken, everyone else moved forward. There was the rest of the 11th Airborne which came via trucks, the 101st Air Assault Infantry Division (the Screaming Eagles) which also moved by road, a brigade of the 1st Infantry Division with armour and all of the corps assets. Better progress was made with the 101st Air Assault who fought at Hobbs and then Carlsbad – where they’d retreated from last year with their tail between their legs – on the left flank than the fight on the right flank. Around Cannon AFB, from where Cuban aircraft had already departed in haste, Nicaraguan defenders halted the American attack for some time. The 1st Infantry’s first brigade required a lot of fire support to pin them down and move around them to engulf these men. The delay allowed the mass destruction of facilities at Cannon… a place which had seen so much deliberate American destruction when they first abandoned the facility. However, once Cannon was taken and the Nicaraguans beaten with an advance following, the whole of the XVIII Corps was deep inside New Mexico and along both banks of the Pecos River thus denying it as a defensive position for the enemy. The rest of the 1st Infantry (another pre-war brigade plus a new one transferred from an aborted ARUS division) joined up with its semi-detached brigade after leaving Amarillo too.
Three divisions, all on the back of victories won, moved forward through mid-March. Their orders were to reach the next major river, the Rio Grande, as it cut through the middle of New Mexico. Interstate-25 ran from El Paso north into Colorado alongside that waterway. Enemy forces in Colorado would thus be completely cut off by reaching the river. Naturally, the First US Army expected the Soviet Twenty–Second Guards Army to respond once they realised what was going on. The Americans believed they were ready to counter that response.
The Soviet trans-Atlantic convoys which had crossed the North Atlantic at the end of last year had brought over two complete field armies to be built on American soil for offensive operations in March. Naval losses meant that only one was fully formed, and sent to the fight in Texas to get into Oklahoma and the Great Plains, while the other had what pieces were available broken away and dispatched as reinforcements to many battlefields. The Twenty–Second Army received a Soviet motor rifle division – which the Americans aimed to trap in Colorado – and also an East German brigade. The latter was dispatched to North America as a full division but what equipment was issued in-theatre was only enough to form an ad hoc brigade… part of what was missing was on the bottom of the ocean, part was taken by the Soviets. Those East Germans were sent to El Paso after the Soviets had already moved long ahead. American reconnaissance missed them here. Texas Command should have spotted them in the eyes of Rockies Command and informed them because it was in the former’s AO. Rockies Command should have been responsible, Texas Command would later say, because that enemy unit was assigned to those who they were fighting. This screw-up would lead to later recriminations with court martials aplenty. Before then, those East Germans marched away from El Paso. A Seventeenth Air Force reconnaissance flight spotted them once they were in New Mexico. The tanks, armoured vehicles and artillery along with the infantry were quickly at Alamogordo. This position in the White Sands put them ahead of where the 101st Air Assault Infantry was due to go. It was a problem, but one which the First Army headquarters told the XVIII Corps was manageable.
‘Manageable’ was quite the turn of phrase.
The Screaming Eagles did what they had done back late last year and held onto the Sacramento Mountains where the Lincoln National Forest and the Mescalero Apache Indian Reservation was located. This time they wouldn’t be driven out by either frontal attacks now or flank actions as was the case in late 1984. They did their job and managed. It was up to the 1st Infantry Division to do theirs. They came at the East Germans from the north, entering the White Sands well-supported from above. Crashing into the first East German positions, the commander of the lead brigade reported to his divisional commander that they’d gone through them like a ‘knife through hot butter’. The second brigade was called upon though to overcome the enemy completely. It wasn’t the regular, veteran soldiers brought forward but instead those new soldiers; the veterans were kept ready to exploit the expected victory afterwards. The East Germans recovered well… so well that it was fast apparent that they weren’t recovering but in fact only getting started. These were good soldiers. They were up against bad odds yet if this was to be their end, then the end it would be. They wouldn’t be managed. American intelligence summaries comfortably assumed that these East Germans would not fight well so far from home for a cause which they had no part of. That was a foolish error. East Germany and its armed forces there in Europe, with all that was going across the other side of the ocean, was something different from its troops which had been in North America waiting to go into battle for some months now. These men were cut off from contact with home due to Soviet ‘security’ over communications. Their morale was fine and they knew nothing of what else was going on.
The ARUS brigade was led by officers contemptuously deemed ‘ninety-day wonders’ by other regular US Army officers who’d been through West Point, The Citadel, Virginia Military Institute and other such elite training facilities. These civilians fast turned into officers leading new soldiers were said to be not up to the job. At Roswell, the ninety-day wonders with the 11th Airborne had done good. Around the crossroads town of Tularosa – north of the bigger Alamogordo – the East Germans took on the inexperienced officers and men with the 1st Infantry. It wasn’t pretty. No big, dramatic flanking manoeuvres or modern cavalry charges across open terrain with a stunning victory. Instead, it was a horrible fight where men fought up close and personal. The East Germans took everything thrown at them and gave it all back. Very soon it became apparent that the brigade of Americans should have been pulled out. There was the belief that this was going to soon be over though… any moment now. Immense casualties were taken on both sides as they fought a static battle with no one looking likely to emerge victorious anytime soon without many more deaths and injuries. The Americans blinked. A withdrawal was ordered as the gutted brigade was pulled out. The East Germans refused to relent even then. They could have taken the opportunity to withdraw, to flee southwards. They did no such thing and instead pursued the retreating Americans. The whole of the 1st Infantry, both further combat brigades joining in, eventually had to be brought into the fight to counterattack and then surround the enemy. Tremendous fire support was then used against the now trapped East Germans who’d lost their chance to get away. They were blasted apart and finally there came a surrender arranged. It was a different affair than where other foreign troops on American soil had surrendered to the US Army. The East Germans, despite being communist forces, were allowed to keep some – maybe a little – honour in surrender. Rockies Command dispatched a media team with personnel not from the civilian field but psychology warfare troops. They made a recording of the event and conducted interviews with some of the POWs. This didn’t eventually end up on American television screens. The video tapes were requested by the British Government to be used elsewhere… complete with selected editing too, naturally.
Finally, after a significant delay, the XVIII Corps moved onwards. The 1st Infantry needed to recover – ‘ninety-day wonders sitting on their backsides’ came the remarks despite the whole division being fought out – but the two other divisions were still more than combat-capable. The Screaming Eagles took the lead this time with the Angels following them. Helicopters assigned to the 101st Air Assault Infantry brought US Army soldiers to the Rio Grande. The landing was made around Truth or Consequences, a town with an unusual name. Nearby was Elephant Butte Reservoir and the radar station which had been one of the very first places hit by Soviet Spetsnaz to open the war: the missile radars there had been facing south and were knocked out to limit detection of those SS-20s which hit the North Dakota ICBM fields. Of importance now was a Soviet built airstrip at Truth or Consequences that was used as refuelling & transit point. A Red Horse airfield combat engineer team sent by the Seventeenth Air Force was all over this very fast to clear and improve it for American use.
When the 11th Airborne arrived, its two untested brigades – built around the 509th & 517th Regiments – were sent into battle. These were more airmobile troops and flown in on flight after flight of C-130 transports which made rapid turnarounds at Truth or Consequences. They were sent northwards, past the reservoir’s dam which the Screaming Eagles held securely against any attack, and along the course of Interstate-25 which in this part of New Mexico ran along the western side of the Rio Grande. More ninety-day wonders and the green troops they commanded got their first taste of battle. They fought small, sporadic engagements against Soviet, Cuban and Nicaraguan light units through the last week of March. This blooded them. It gave them their first experience of fighting and they were lucky that their opposition was scattered enemy from transport, engineering, and communications units. After Truth or Consequences had been taken, the American presence there cut a hole in the links going north. All of these soldiers involved in keeping the fight going in Colorado were told that while they were in New Mexico, they were still soldiers. They had to fight until others – real soldiers – turned up. They had guns and training but weren’t organised to mount any real resistance to American soldiers learning their trade. American numbers, training and organisation won out.
The XVIII Corps’ position on the Rio Grande deep in New Mexico put them atop the main supply route for the Soviets. Smaller links had already been lost when they moved into New Mexico from Texas. The Twenty–Second Army was cut off. In addition, it was also engaged in a major fight itself up in Colorado. Regardless of what was going on up there, the Soviets would have to move against the Truth or Consequences position and the pair of American divisions there fast despite the distance or otherwise die in-place. Come next month, those soldiers with the 11th Airborne who lost their greenness recently would value the combat lesson they learnt.
March 1985: Colorado
Army of the United States troops were fighting in Colorado through March too. The 37th Infantry Division had been dispatched to fight with the US XI Corps south of recently-freed Denver. The Canadians had brought down a newly-raised division for their corps as well. In addition, the reinforcing fighting men were joined by many supporting forces. The First United States Army had a third of its strength down in New Mexico but the rest were tasked through the month to advance through Colorado. The fight was over a far smaller area than what was seen down in New Mexico. The Americans and Canadians (the latter with that smaller British contingent) moved to engage the Soviet Twenty–Second Guards Army in central Colorado. Castle Rock at the top, Colorado Springs in the middle and Pueblo at the bottom lay along the Interstate-25 corridor. Immediately away to the west lay the Front Range of the Rockies, which the Soviets were now only just holding onto rather than pushing past there as before. They were in trouble before the March attack. Earlier defeats and a shrinking area of control hadn’t been offset by what was sent to apparently improve their tactical situation this far inside the United States. A reinforcing division of troops, Soviets not those from unreliable allies, had arrived and so too had stocks of supplies. The latter though were what was left from convoys which had made it through air strikes, guerrilla attacks and pilferage on their way. It would be argued that the reinforcements of men and thus the need to keep them supplied in the fight, made the situation worse rather than better too. American communications intercepts had caught a ‘no withdrawal’ order which had come to them with an ultimate origin point as being Moscow. The Soviet leadership was watching the fight in Colorado with keen interest. The Allies gave them something more to maintain their interest.
The XI Corps began their march southwards starting at Castle Rock. Soviet forces here were those who had escaped destruction when the Denver Siege was lifted – unlike those Nicaraguans which they left behind – had established good positions though they were never going to be that effective. Military doctrine for all Soviet military forces prioritised offensive action over defensive. Any defence was only ever meant to be temporary, never long-term. A lot had been learnt by the Soviet Army when in North America yet truly fighting a defensive battle wasn’t on that list. Every time, in every region of fighting, when they had been forced back on the defensive, they had often fought well yet soon enough went right over on the counterattack at the earliest available opportunity. Sometimes that had done them well, other times no good at all. With Castle Rock, it was to be a case of the latter. Riding out the first American assault by the 4th Infantry Division, the Soviets went on the counterattack. The 120th Guards Motorised Rifle Division was a shadow of its former self but was ordered forwards once it was decided that the Americans had been ‘stopped’. That they hadn’t though. Soviet tanks and armoured infantry rushed forwards and did a lot of damage. The 4th Infantry was taken aback at the ferociously of the assault and reeled from it. They shouldn’t have: they’d fought the 120th Guards on and off for several months now. Sloppiness kicked in at the wrong time when the belief was that the Soviets would withdraw rather than hold let alone counterattack. However, the Soviets threw everything that they had at the 4th Infantry far too fast and shot forward too far. The Americans closed in around them on the counter. The 120th Guards was spaced far apart and couldn’t hold the ground it had taken. Orders for tactical withdrawals were made, back to the start-lines. The Americans followed them. This first fight outside Castle Rock had seen the frontlines return to where they were before it started. All that had been achieved by both sides was to see many of their men left dead and injured along with massive disruption caused to their combat units. Each had also shot through a tremendous amount of ammunition. It couldn’t be said that the Americans had that to spare, but it didn’t put them in the terrible state afterwards the Soviets found themselves in due to their equal high expenditure. The Americans had more available than their opponents.
When the Americans came at Castle Rock again, the Soviets were forced to limit their rate of fire when on the defensive. The 174th Infantry Brigade – the former Berlin Brigade which had achieved so much here in Colorado – was another long-term opponent of the 120th Guards. They made the next attack and broke through. It took a lot of artillery fire, massed rocket attacks and air strikes to do this and these were met with limited counter-battery and anti-aircraft fire. Before the Americans realised, the Soviets were starting to move backwards and that began with their fire support and air-defence assets. So much for the ‘no withdrawal’ order from Moscow. Pursuing was difficult but not impossible. The 4th Infantry returned to the fight and the larger numbers of Americans were all over the 120th Guards. They took bites out of it during the retreat which lasted several days as the Soviets fell back down the course of the interstate up which they had long ago come. The XI Corps followed them. If they could have got behind them then they would have but there was a Soviet brigade on the flank which shielded early approaches by the ARUS unit, the 37th Infantry, to the east.
Stopping the Americans from taking Colorado Springs was a mission assigned to the 59th Guards. This motorised rifle division had arrived last month and this was its first taste of battle. The 120th Guards passed through their positions and left the fight to this newly-arrived unit. They got a baptism of fire just as the 37th Infantry did. The fight was north of the occupied city, around Monument and the site of the USAF Academy. Green troops on either side engaged the other. The Americans fast got the upper hand. While the 59th Guards was a pre-war standing unit, it hadn’t seen any action before and so its ‘experience’ meant for little. The Americans were able to call on more fire support, with the ammunition for that too. In the middle of this fight, right at the wrong time for the Soviets, the expected chop from Moscow came in regard to the field army commander. He had explicitly disobeyed orders. He was removed from command, arrested and taken away. His fate would be no surprise: a firing squad. The deputy took over, a man determined not to follow the fate of the man he replaced. A counterattack was at once ordered. The Twenty–Second Army would march on Denver once again.
As expected, this was a disaster. Thankfully for the Soviets, it went so wrong so fast that it didn’t see the immediate destruction of the whole army come. Much of the 59th Guards was lost – what a short and ‘exciting’ time in the war they had had – and there was too a mass of casualties inflicted. The 37th Infantry had a bad time of it though emerged the victor. They had halted the Soviets in their tracks. The whole of the Colorado Springs area, around which the Soviets had been busy with major engineering tasks for wartime uses, was in range of heavy artillery units and on the edge of enemy air defences. The Seventeenth Air Force had been playing an active role since Castle Rock but now sent in even more aircraft. Target after target was hit with bombs and short-range missiles by aircraft which could dash in and out of Colorado Springs on the attack. They took some losses, though not on the scale they should have done had the Soviets had the ammunition to engage them properly. This couldn’t go on. The Soviets couldn’t stay here and take this for as long as the Americans wanted to do it. Options were becoming very limited though. While Colorado Springs was being fought over, the Canadians and British marched up through the valley of the Arkansas River and on Pueblo. There were three complete divisions with the I Canadian Corps and while not ‘heavy’, neither could they be considered ‘light’. Soviet light forces were sent up against them though: just an airmobile brigade who were rapidly chewed up. Should the Canadians get to Pueblo, which it looked very likely that they would, the rest of the Twenty–Second Army was cut off. Worse – if there could be anything worse – was what happened in New Mexico when the Americans put troops on the Rio Grande.
Moscow discussed reversing its orders on ‘no withdrawal’ without willing to admit they had erred in killing that general who had kept them an army to consider pulling back. The Defence Council met with several marshals and senior generals as they discussed the many options that they considered there were available. Only one option was presented to them, even from the worst of the boot-lickers who would usually try their best to give the politicians what the wanted. A withdrawal was all that could be done. With the greatest of haste, the Twenty–Second Army needed to retreat from Colorado and fall back into New Mexico. Part of the field army, along with what few Nicaraguan and Revolutionary Mexico troops there were at El Paso, needed to launch a two-prong assault towards Truth or Consequences at the same time. During the pull-out from Colorado, Soviet units would have to be sacrificed as rear-guard elements. The Defence Council had yet to take that final decision when the Mexico Massacre occurred… they were also heavily side-tracked by the ongoing battles in Oklahoma (the fight in North America which they saw the most important one) in addition to the Euro-Soviet War as well. Those events and the fallout from them distracted them. In the meantime, the 37th Infantry and the 174th Brigade attacked again outside Colorado Springs. Afraid to withdraw his men, the acting army commander did nothing while the rest of the 59th Guards was wiped out. Instructions from Moscow came afterwards and these included what role the 59th Guards were to fulfil: the return message that they were already destroyed didn’t please them. Not was Moscow impressed when they learnt that the Canadians had gotten their lead units to the very edges of Pueblo already. A second general would be shot, this man who’d followed his orders precisely without deviating from them at all. Talk about unfair…
As March came to an end, the Twenty–Second Army withdrew from Colorado. They made a run for it but did manage to get away with some semblance of order. A lot of what should have been done during the withdrawal didn’t happen though and so the Americans would overrun facilities which weren’t destroyed and capture war-stocks in many places. The 82nd Airborne Division, the defenders of Denver, arrived in helicopters at Petersen AFB, Fort Carson and the smoke-filled NORAD headquarters inside Cheyenne Mountain. They had their blaze of glory in taking such places and fighting the few men left behind with general ease. What the First Army failed to do was to surround and finish off a far smaller opponent when they should have. For the Soviets to pull out so fast was a surprise yet the Americans didn’t take enough advantage. The Canadians complained that they weren’t given enough support in taking Pueblo to cut off the Soviets but the First Army’s response was to ask what more they needed than a trio of divisions to do that: wasn’t their only opposition just a light brigade? It wasn't the fairest of criticisms. The Canadians hadn’t rammed home their numerical advantage because they hadn't been keen to take huge unnecessary losses in a foolish head-on assault when a careful approach would get a better – if slower – result overall. Yet, at the same time, there were specifics reasons than that why. During the last fighting around Pueblo, the Soviets had thrown in a regiment of their paratroopers armed with a lot of man-portable weapons, supported by a regiment of Sukhoi-25 attack-fighters as well: all at the crucial time to hold the Canadians back. Moreover, last month’s massive thermobaric air strike on the Canadians might not have killed thousands of them but they had taken hundreds of casualties still and had much of their supporting infrastructure blown apart. The effects were still being felt from that. The internal squabble went on while from above the First Army leadership came under fire from their own higher headquarters. Rockies Command had expected to eliminate the Soviets or if not completely destroy them, then shut the door behind them to do that next month. But the Soviets fled ahead of that.
The missed opportunity was significant and would have its affects. However, it wasn’t a disaster. The Americans had done immense damage to their opponents and what escaped wasn’t likely to be making any sort of return northwards. The Soviets were beaten. There remained that cut in their line of retreat much further south too, down in New Mexico. The troubles with the Canadians, which occurred where relations were excellent beforehand, were an unpleasant surprise though. The two allies had failed to cooperate correctly at the right moment – the 82nd Airborne could have been sent to Pueblo the Canadian commander believed – and this mattered. It would be something that needed urgent attention to correct for future operations. Those further operations would take place when the First Army followed the Soviets down into New Mexico.
March 1985: North Texas
When revealed many long years later, Operation Mechanic would be judged by historians to be quite the feat. The United States had managed to undertake a successful strategic intelligence deception to dupe the Soviet Army to a significant degree. They played Soviet beliefs back on themselves and let their opponents do the vast majority of the work for them too. Mechanic was really an exercise in Soviet self-deception when it came down to it. A lot of luck occurred with this. The plotters and schemers with NISS couldn’t have factored in just how much both the GRU and the KGB would fall for what was presented to them and then compete with each other not to disprove what was presented before them but instead try to outdo each other in proving it was true. In normal circumstances, the two organisations were at each other’s throats to do away with the other. One of them could have – maybe should have – shot down the whole thing to the detriment of their real enemy. They did no such thing though. Each of them promoted the certainty that Americans were due to launch a major offensive where and when all the information uncovered pointed to this occurring.
Mechanic was just a trick though, a big fat lie. The GRU and the KGB hadn’t uncovered preparations for an incoming American attack. Yet, with the belief that they had, the Soviets moved to act on that. It made perfect sense to do so. They ‘knew’ when the Americans would strike and therefore would strike first. Information gained, all of which was confirmed through several sources, all pointed to a fantastic opportunity. It wasn’t one which could be missed. To catch the Americans unprepared for an attack against them, when they were in the final stages of getting ready for their own, was what Mechanic led the Soviets to attempt. There was no consideration at all that they had been fooled and were about to fall for a trap of a magnitude that they couldn’t even imagine.
Before the Mechanic deception was fully played out, there had already been the intention of the Soviets to go over on the offensive in March regardless. This apparent intelligence success which they had only accelerated the timescale for the attack. Newly-arrived forces with the Seventh Tank Army were moved into position facing Oklahoma as they based themselves on the Texan side of the Red River. Part of the already in-place Twenty–Eighth Army was moved aside to join the rest of that field army to launch a supporting attack into north-eastern Texas. Supplies were rushed forward while fire support was assembled. All of this extraordinary activity was covered from observation as the Soviet made use of their usual camouflage, both physical and electronic. They took all measures to ensure that the surprise they were going to spring upon the Americans wouldn’t be spotted beforehand. It had all worked in the past and there was a certainty that it would do so again. Masses of tanks, guns and infantry were hidden away, all so that when they went into action, their appearance would come as a surprise to the Americans.
The whole offensive operation was planned out in great detail. The Soviets marshalled their forces for the opening attack, the follow-up breakthrough units and then those tasked for the exploitation role far beyond the initial battlefield. Objectives were set for advancing units to reach at set times. That time-scaling was done using structural ‘norms’: doctrine taught in Soviet military academies was followed in exact detail. Criticism of how the war had been previously fought had come and it was a reverting to the basics now. Beyond the attacking units, this was done with everything else too from the supporting artillery to engineers to signalling troops to supply units. Everything was plotted out perfectly. Officers who were considered reliable – that would mean whatever those who set that wanted to see – were put into the important positions and others were shunted aside. Excuses made for earlier failures on the battlefields of North America, where it was pointed out that lessons had been learnt from what had gone wrong before, were treated as just that: excuses. The war would be conducted the right way from now onwards when the Soviet Army returned to the offensive.
Ahead of that offensive, the Soviets shaped the battlefields which they would fight over. They sent out reconnaissance units. Some of these stayed silent while others were tasked to be noisy. American positions in defence yet also the readiness for their own offensive were all confirmed. There were attacks launched to deceive the Americans as to what the Soviets were up to, making it look – in Soviet eyes – as if they were only getting ready to defend themselves. Communications jamming was done on an on-off basis to test new systems of their own and to get a feel for some of the modernised equipment that the Americans were using. Bridges in the rear were looked at ready to be grabbed for Soviet use and cut American withdrawal routes. It was anticipated that the Americans would withdraw, would once again give ground like they had done before rather than stand and die, and so plans were made after information gained as to how to stop them doing that. That didn’t only include bridges over minor rivers through closer bits of Oklahoma and north-eastern Texas, but further downstream reaches of the Red River and then far beyond to the Canadian River in central Oklahoma. A couple of the noisy reconnaissance missions blew up smaller ones ahead of the attack to force the Americans to make greater use of others and thus keep them open with no intention of demolishing them: all ready to be taken by the Soviets. This was a major operation where the battlefield was expected to be huge in scale where it would stretch into Kansas and Arkansas within weeks of it getting going. American supply dumps far in the rear were observed with the intention to bomb some of them but seize others: a lot of American weaponry was anticipated to be taken and used against them. Soviet pre-attack strikes focused to hitting some of those where munitions which they couldn’t use, not those where there was usable weaponry.
Everything that could be done ahead of that offensive was. The Soviets would conduct this attack near alone and were assisted in only minor roles by forces of their allies. Successes on the battlefield like had been achieved in the China War, doing the same thing here as was done there, was certain to be achieved in this because it was being done right.
First light on March 3rd saw the Soviets march their armies forward as the offensive began.
The Americans were waiting for them in an ambush which the Soviets had no idea was there.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:20:19 GMT
March 1985: Oklahoma
The Soviet war machine returned to Oklahoma. Last year’s failures were not meant to repeated.
Following precise instructions from the Northern Front HQ, the Seventh Tank Army did as it was meant to do and followed exact doctrine in attack. To open the offensive, a massive artillery barrage commenced. Howitzers, heavy mortars, rockets and tactical missiles flew over the Red River and into Oklahoma. The barrage wasn’t quite what it should have been due to constraints upon ammunition and also the actual numbers of weaponry, but it was still quite something. It began at first light and went on for the next couple of hours. The first crash of so many guns, followed by all of those explosions, preceded lower levels of gunfire. From general targeting, the artillery barrage moved to specific targets. When counter-battery fire came, Soviet guns turned their attention towards them as well. The cover of the ongoing barrage was used by the first men going forward. Engineers, escorted by teams of riflemen, went over the river. They entered the minefields that the Americans had laid over the winter months. These had been examined from afar and now they were looked at up close. Clearing these completely was out of the question: all that was needed was to be routes to opened through them. The engineers called in artillery strikes on sections of the minefields. Specialist ammunition was used, fired at the buried mines and exploding atop the soil rather than in the skies above. Explosion after explosion occurred as the minefields were attacked. Those engineers came under fire themselves. Occasionally they were shot at by hidden snipers – men riding out that barrage of artillery – though they were also targeted by American artillery who knew what they were up to.
Most of the first morning was spent with the minefields. The Americans had buried a lot of munitions yet it was also discovered a lot of dummies too. Until each was dealt with, there was no way of knowing which was which. The counter-battery fire and the attacks on the engineers took time away too. However, the Soviets remained on schedule where they brought in armoured engineering vehicles to help clear the mines which they wanted removed. They opened up the gaps which they planned to on a general pattern – changing things only slightly – and then across came the first armoured units. Scout cars and supporting detachments of tanks moved across. Two motorised rifle divisions each provided these units, opening up multiple avenues of advance forward. The guns back in Texas changed their pattern of fire. They began to support the scout units as they got into fights across in Oklahoma. The Americans were known to have the 2nd Armored Cavalry Regiment in-place and a second, newly-raised Cav’ unit was anticipated to also be present as well. Soviet intelligence on this was correct. Engagements between reconnaissance and screening forces took place all over the place. Air support from each side interfered in that with aircraft managing to break free of the fighter battles higher above and getting down low. Missiles and anti-aircraft shells reached out to strike at them and keep them away from a battle fought by others.
Soviet scouts found openings. They faced heavy losses – as expected – yet there were passages through found beyond the extensive minefields. There were areas where the American screening units were weak, where there was a way through only if the scouts could be reinforced. Reinforcements rushed forward, facing off against air and artillery strikes trying to interfere with their progress. Mixed groups of tanks and infantry carriers, along with self-propelled guns, went into Oklahoma. Some got to the scouts in time but others didn’t reach them: those left on their own out ahead fought to the bitter end and died accordingly. Information coming from the front flowed into the Seventh Tank Army’s headquarters. This was a moving column of armoured vehicles, one which had already been attacked by an American aircraft. Bunkers were for those who wanted to die yet being on the move wasn’t always safe despite that mobility. The news which came to the army commander was that things were still going to plan. There had been hiccups all over the place yet penetrations into hostile territory had been made at multiple points. It was up to him to chose which to reinforce. Where were the main breakthroughs to be made now that the scouts were out ahead and supported? There was little time to choose. There was no perfect choice either. He selected several points, each which differed only a little from the pre-attack plan. Orders were sent for further reinforcements to start heading to them. Four separate regiments from the pair of divisions (half each) were now committed with two of those routes soon to end up as the main attack and the other abandoned: it depended upon the American reaction. Meanwhile, other news came in. There was all that success yet some strange occurrences going on as well. From afar, certain areas of the American-held areas looked one way get up close, things were different. They’d been using a lot of deception in where their forward units were meant to be and also hidden many physical defences as well. This was odd. More than that, reconnaissance images came back of those forward supply units that the Americans were meant to have moved into place ahead of their own attack which this offensive pre-empted. The plan was to overrun those and take their contents while the Americans ran away. Those supply units, pushed forward ahead of what would now be an aborted US Army attack, should be packing up and moving now that the Soviets were entering Oklahoma. They weren’t though. They were staying where they were. The general commanding the field army didn’t know what to make of that. Perhaps the Americans were in a panic and orders to those had yet to be sent? Perhaps all of the Soviet electronic jamming had seen America orders to do that not get through? Perhaps the Americans were going to run as fast as they could with their combat units and write off those supply units rather than risk losing what there was of their army’s fighting strength?
That night saw the Soviets consolidate their forward positions. The four major avenues of initial advance, down one of which first the rest of the motorised rifle division committed would go, then a tank division, maybe even the Seventh Tank Army’s third tank division too, would march forward were reinforced with men and widened as well as lengthened. There was fighting all around each of them. One of the four was immediately written off. What the Soviets discovered was the 12th Armored Cavalry Regiment – its higher command so far unidentified – smashed apart one of the breakthroughs. There wasn’t a proper American victory, but the avenue of advance was looking useless afterwards. Rather that trying to reverse the situation, the decision was taken to not reinforce failure there. Getting more men struck where others were being taken apart wasn’t worth it, not in the dark with all the incoming overnight American air strikes. There was a lot of that. Soviets fighters unofficially gave up the fight above the battlefield during the latter part of the night because there were so many US Air Force aircraft in the skies and there was a lot of anti-aircraft fire too. This wasn’t the Americans: it was the Soviet Army who was firing at any aircraft above but also beyond the battlefields. Despite all of this, the situation was still positive. Good news had been reported back and all was apparently set for victory to come the next day when the breakthroughs were expanded upon and the advance really got going.
The Americans had other ideas.
Even with the knowledge of what was coming, the Seventh US Army had one hell of a day. Both the US II Corps to the west and in the east the new US XII Corps took many losses. The Cav’ units along with dismounted scouting teams were right in the way of the Soviet’s heaviest offensive of the war. A lot of luck was involved in smashing up one of those small Soviet breakthroughs and there wasn’t even a full awareness that this had been done. Darkness, communication problems and also the general fog of war didn’t give a full understanding. The men at the frontlines were screaming for help. They were out there on their own though. Their mission was to keep the Soviets back and keep a track of them. Several full divisions of American armour and mechanised infantry kept out of that fight and in their hidden positions. They were supposed to be further back, dozens of miles away the intelligence deception against the Soviets was meant to show, and certainly not as close as they were to the frontlines. The Soviets expected them to begin moving in the morning. That they would… just not running away north.
The II Corps attacked first. The 4th Armored & 6th Infantry Divisions (different designations yet near identical copies of each other after winter internal reformations) moved in from the western side of Oklahoma against the forward Soviet positions. They were guided into battle by the 2nd Cav’. The Soviets in their way were the two lead regiments of the 9th Motorised Rifle Division. A third regiment of riflemen, along with a tank regiment trailing behind them, was moving across the Red River via the many pontoon bridges which crossed that waterway. One American division drove at the 9th Division’s lead units, the other at the bridges. The Americans seemingly came out of nowhere. They appeared from out of the ground! Soviet reconnaissance had missed them entirely in-places or otherwise identified them as supply units, even physical blocking features. The fools.
Within hours, after observing the Soviet reaction to the first move, the second attack came. The XII Corps was twice the size. It consisted of all newly-raised Army of the United States units in the form of two armored & two infantry divisions plus the 12th Cav’ on the frontlines. The 43rd & 48th Infantry went into the attack at once – one after the lead units of a Soviet motorised rifle division; the other towards the bridgeheads – leaving the 5th & 27th Armored behind for now. Like the II Corps, the XII Corps too appeared to the Soviets to have appeared like magic. Magic it wasn’t, just deception.
Focusing on their own fight, where they had just started to begin pushing forward on the basis of their breakthroughs, the Seventh Tank Army came under the attack which it faced seemingly from out of the blue. Panic hit from regimental HQ’s to those of divisions and up to the field army’s command column. Confirmation was sought of what was going on with all these reports of American divisions pouring forward. This caused delays. The Americans took advantage of those delays. First the 9th Division and then the 1st Guards Motorised Rifle Division went silent. Their headquarters were off the air and not answering radio messages. More were sent and couriers urgently dispatched as well. The Seventh Tank Army could seek all the information from dead men that it wanted: those headquarters were off the air because while the dispersed transmitters were functioning for each division, the divisional command posts had each been taken out. The link between the individual regiments in the field, which they needed to coordinate, was gone. That was more important that the general over in Texas knowing or not knowing what was happen.
Alone, the Soviet regiments were prey for the Americans. The II Corps and the XII Corps ripped six of the eight apart and came mightily close to getting the other two. Soviet troops fought well despite this being the first time in battle for all of them. They still had their tanks and their heavy guns to fire against them attacking them. However, without coordination, and the Americans extending their control of the night-time skies into daytime too, they were doomed. The 9th Division ceased to exist; the 1st Guards Division lost half of its men. The American’s 48th Infantry couldn’t finish the job that morning nor that afternoon either and in the end they had to rely upon the now-veteran 43rd Infantry to join them in engaging the last Soviet organised units north of the Red River. Men from both also stumbled into uncleared parts of the minefields laid by their fellow countrymen too. These were untested men until the early hours and this was one hell of a fight for them. They won though, overcoming the last of the 1st Guards Division. They beat what was considered to be a premiere Soviet Army unit. Yet the cost was a ruined US Army division too, one which really could have done with another month – even two – of training for these men.
The rest of the Seventh Tank Army was south of the river. There were three tank divisions there: more than nine hundred tanks, almost eight hundred infantry vehicles and thousands of soldiers. They all remained in Texas rather than crossing into Oklahoma. The bridgeheads were in Americans hands. On the opposite side of the river, non-combat units with those two destroyed motorised rifle divisions in addition to army-level assets, were massacred by the Americans once the fighting men were knocked out. The tank divisions remained in-place though. The XII Corps had the 5 & 27th Armored Division, plus the 28th Infantry from the II Corps as well if needed, all were waiting for them to come over. These units weren’t tied up in that small-scale but deadly fighting which went on. The rest of the Seventh Tank Army stayed where it was though.
Before the Soviets had come marching into Oklahoma, on course of victory they had believed, the Americans had been plotting their downfall and there had been consideration into waiting to launch their ambush until the Seventh Tank Army had sent its tank divisions across. Their movement could have been tracked and the right moment come. Knocking out one, two, even three of them would have been fantastic. However… what if an error was made? What if the Soviets managed to avoid the ambush at the river and broke free? How far could they have got before being stopped, if at all? The risk hadn’t been taken. It had been decided to eliminate the motorised rifle divisions which the Soviets would send in first and leave the tank divisions stuck on the other side of the Red River. The cost of error could have been a loss further on the scale that the US Army had just struck against the Soviet Army. Where they sat over in Texas, they were soon under American air attack. The fighting north of the river came to a close and air power shifted south. Control of the air had come to the Americans. They hadn’t expected that such a thing would occur so soon and almost out of the blue, but it had. They had more aircraft available and Soviet losses during their first day in Oklahoma had been severe. Wild Weasel teams went after SAM launchers – the Soviets seemed to have an endless (it wasn’t) supply of them – but they were running out of fighters. The weeks following the fight in Oklahoma saw the tank divisions come under air attack after air attack. They were moved backwards to lessen the damage done while they were inactive. This brought them out of what cover they had. The Americans lined up their aircraft in the sky above Oklahoma and sent them south into Texas on bomb & missile runs. The US Army could have done worse damage on the battlefield – or maybe they wouldn’t have if things had gone wrong – but the US Air Force now had their turn to cause epic amounts of destruction especially when the supply of ground-based air defences was shown to have a limit to it too.
Those Soviets tanks would never see Oklahoma.
The fallout from the defeat, where certain victory suddenly became a horrendous and humiliating loss, came. The field army commander and most of his staff were for the chop. Upwards this went too with the Northern Front HQ seeing men removed from command, arrested and then shot. The Soviet Air Force had its commanders culled in addition. As to the GRU and the KGB – from where all of that assurance of victory came due to their supposed intelligence coup – those responsible initially got away with it. They managed to point to the ‘failings’ of those in the military. Getting away with this for now was different from getting away with it forever though. The fate of many of those who had allowed themselves to be duped occurred due to what happened when the supporting attack into unoccupied eastern parts of Texas – conducted by the Twenty–Eighth Army – came apart even worse than what was seen in Oklahoma. Defeat for the Soviet Army occurred in the Sooner State; utter annihilation was witnessed in the Lone Star State.
March 1985: North & East Texas
The Twenty–Eighth Army undertook their supporting attack to coincide with the main attack elsewhere. They advanced eastwards across North Texas, crashing into national guardsmen positioned south of Dallas–Fort Worth. The aim was to get a tank force deep into the Americans rear and turn either north or south once clear – it depended upon how events transpired – to crush American defenders then caught been those who broke free and those at the frontlines. The 4th Guards Tank Division (often known as the Kantemir Division) had been brought to reinforce the Twenty–Eighth Army and undertake that breakthrough role while elsewhere, the rest of the field army made a general attack. Tanks with the Kantemir Division achieved that breakthrough… and went to their doom.
The 30th Infantry Division – with national guardsmen from across North Carolina, South Carolina and Virginia – couldn’t stop the penetration which came when the Soviets conducted a similar offensive which they had done in Oklahoma only through on a smaller scale in Texas. A motorised rifle division broke the way open, crashing through part of the armored cavalry regiment out front, and the mass of tanks followed. This occurred near the small town of Chalk Mountain, which lay between Stephenville to the west and the Brazos River behind. The 30th Infantry withdrew once its lines were torn open. It fell back northwards rather than be wholly crushed asunder. Beside them, the 31st Armored Division (the other division with the US VI Corps) conducted localised counterattacks coming up from the north and made the effort to close the gap and smoother the Soviets. It was too late though. The Soviets moved forwards. Their tanks raced towards the river ahead. Rear-area American troops were in the way during the mad dash forward. Soldiers with them were suddenly riflemen when they usually drove trucks, cleared rubble and provided fuel & stores. They fought as best as they could with some doing well yet others not very good at all. The Soviet infantry vehicles and self-propelled guns with the tanks helped to blast apart these men and also cause fantastic amounts of destruction. The fighting units of the 30th Infantry had saved themselves, yet they would have trouble fighting again for some time without all which they lost in terms of support elements. At the river, the Soviets ‘bounced’ it. The waterway wasn’t defended nor was it particularly wide. American troops blew up certain pre-wired sections of pontoon bridges but there were others who didn’t get the word in time and saw their bridges taken. Armoured bridging units came with the Kantemir Division as well for they had that river in-sight before they set off. The advance continued. The towns of Cleburne and then Alvarado were overrun. These lay along the course of the Highway-67 and there were American supply units concentrated around it. American aircraft poured in and the Soviets tried their best to defend against these attacks. Their progress was slowed by them though. There had been a hope that by sticking to and near this road, when there were all those lightly-armed troops about, the Americans would ease off with heavy air attacks in fear of friendly fire losses. That had happened elsewhere earlier in the war. It wasn’t the case here. Nonetheless, Interstate-35, which ran lateral across the line of advance, was reached. That was crossed over and the Soviets had cut the links between the Third United States Army’s US VIII Corps further north and the rest of the VI Corps by breaking through this far.
Midlothian was the next small town along. Getting to there was something that the Kantemir Division was left unable to do. Their advance as far as Alvarado had taken all day (the motor rifle troops spend six hours of the morning opening up the gap) and night came. The Americans put more aircraft in the sky, all of which zoomed towards the Soviet tanks and the rest of the division. There was confusion as to which way the attack was to go in the dark when navigation errors occurred (road signs were long ago taken down) and the lead units got lost. Through the night, while the Soviets tried to get their bearings and fight off the onslaught from above, tired men fought onwards. The tanks were no longer lancing forward and the infantry was doing a lot of the work with small groups of Americans – infantrymen protecting men carrying man-portable missiles – were encountered. Dawn came on the second day and so did American tanks. The 1st Armored Division (the Old Ironsides) moved in. They belonged to the Seventh US Army’s VII Corps and this wasn’t their operational area by far, but they had been transferred late yesterday to the Third Army due to this emergency and only a screen attack being conducted against the rest of their corps. Once there was light in the sky, when the Soviets were going to get going again but still without an idea as to whether to make that flanking turn yet, the Old Ironsides arrived. A huge fight commenced. The strength of the American attack quickly made the commander of the Kantemir Division realise he wasn’t fighting scattered light national guardsmen any more. He turned his division away from the attack, giving ground and pulling back while sacrificing small detachments as rear-guards, while now moving south. The intention was to turn back around again, going clockwise, and come at the Americans when he was ready. This was always going to be complicated but made worse by being dreamed up on-the-fly and attempted to be conducted when there was already confusion as well as enemy control of the skies. US Air Force jets and also Cav’ helicopters attached to the Old Ironsides gave timely and accurate reports on what the Soviets were up to. The Americans thus had the upper hand and made use of that. The Old Ironsides moved to cut this off and orders went for the 31st Armored Division to assist too. The aim was to trap the Soviets between the two of them and take the Kantemir Division apart.
In the Texan countryside between Burleson and Mansfield – Fort Worth was less than ten miles away – the Kantemir Division got caught in that trap. Aid came to them in the form of what was left of the 207th Motorised Rifle Division, who had made that breakthrough the day before, and they partially linked up with the tank division out front. The American national guardsmen failed to stop them again yet the Soviet link-up was tenuous and again under unfriendly skies. As the Soviets tried to keep the pair of divisions together, fighting side-by-side, two-on-two against the Americans, the way back home was closed shut when the Brazos River crossings were lost. What supplies of ammunition and fuel which had come forward already was all that there was going to be. That night and into the next day, the Soviets fought on. Now they were trying to escape rather than conduct a sweeping, war-changing offensive operation. The Americans wouldn’t let them go. A brigade of light national guardsmen from Arkansas – veterans of many fights and having spent time in the rear re-rolled for anti-tank tasks – was brought into join the battle and replaced part of the 31st Armored in fixing the Soviets while the Old Ironsides did much of the work. Darkness on the third day brought an end to the 207th Division. Still the Kantemir Division fought and into the early hours of the fourth day. Their fight now was almost static after their fuel was gone and eventually the bullets ran out too. Hope was held onto that relief would come, that the Twenty–Eighth Army would send someone to save them. No one was coming though. Rather than surrender and face the consequences, the Kantemir Division’s commander shot himself. He was a political general, someone who had been a real rising star. He didn’t want to witness his men marching off into captivity nor the fate of his own in the future. His deputy chose to give in instead of doing that. With him, the four thousand remaining men gave in and became POWs.
The failure of the Twenty–Eighth Army to save both the Kantemir Division and the 207th Division, and do much else too with their wide-ranging frontline limited attacks, led the Americans to make a general attack several days later. The VII Corps was transferred to the Third Army and subsumed elements of the VI Corps, plus its Area of Operations (AO), when doing so.
All down the eastern side of Texas, from the Red River in the north to the Gulf of Mexico in the south, the Americans went over on the offensive.
The VII Corps pushed west and struck deep through North Texas. By the end of the month, they had forced the Twenty–Eighth Army back as far as Jacksboro and Stephenville. Defeat was inflicted upon the Soviets in all instances where they stood where two more of their already-weakened divisions were overcome along with many supporting assets. Complete collapse was averted only by withdrawing with haste and losing countless rear-guard units. Yet the Twenty–Eighth Army was finished. The VIII Corps took less ground when attacking the Cubans in Central Texas yet the national guardsmen did close to within a dozen miles of Austin. The 42nd Infantry Division – New Yorkers – were unlucky not to get that far and only missed out through no fault of their own in that effort. Along the Gulf Coast, in the wider area between Houston and the Louisiana state line, greater progress was made than occurred elsewhere.
General Schwarzkopf’s V Corps had waited and waited for this opportunity. Chomping on his cigar and out among his men was the image he put on for the visiting media teams (all of whom were under tight control) but ‘Stormin’ Norman’ as history would know him spent the majority of the past several months with his planning & operations staffs ready for the day the V Corps was allowed to finally attack. Reinforcements with two important Army of the United States units had come – no one else in the Third Army received any combat ARUS formations – and been integrated with his veteran men. Instructed to liberate Houston and as much of the Gulf Coast as possible, Stormin’ Norman had somewhere else in his sights too: San Antonio. The 14th Cav’ led the way. Helicopter gunships escorted fast-moving columns of scouts and tanks which burst through positions of the Soviet Eighth Tank Army (once a proud unit; now nothing what it was before) and lanced forward. The 5th & 24th Infantry Divisions followed them with the 6th Armored Division behind. Advancing through East Texas north of Houston at first, the V Corps swung to the southwest and then around behind the city rather than entering the VIII Corps’ AO area away to the west. Soviet, Cuban, Revolutionary Mexico troops were all in the way at certain points of the advance. None stopped the attack. Air support came – though not enough as far as Stormin’ Norman was concerned – but the majority of the action was on the ground. For six days the V Corps ran wild. Interstate-10, which linked San Antonio and Houston, ran across the line of advance towards the Gulf of Mexico and this became an ad hoc defensive line for Soviet forces trying to stop the US Army. Around that emergency position, the V Corps was held up for a day but by first light the following morning, they were moving again. Stormin’ Norman couldn’t get an advance going towards San Antonio. He was unable to spread out his forces that far and needed to concentrate them in the end. He’d go after that city next month. For the rest of March, he fought the enemy where it was located behind Houston. Third Army HQ wanted all organised hostile units defeated first and foremost. V Corps did just that and in the process reached the Gulf of Mexico. The Houston Pocket was thus formed but Stormin’ Norman broke that rather than see a siege develop. News coming from Mexico of what happened there meanwhile was alarming in terms of fighting close to a city but that didn’t turn out to be as concerning (for his men; not those caught up in the Mexico Massacre) as first thought due to the one-sidedness of what happened down there. Full focus was on Houston and enemy troops around it anyway. They were crushed and not allowed to dig-in. National guardsmen from Georgia and Louisiana – attached to his two infantry divisions – each moved into the city at the end of the fight. They found out why the Mexico Massacre happened by seeing what they did in Houston. Discipline held with 48th & 256th Brigades here: they could have easily lined-up and shot-down many, many captives.
However, outside the city, there was a breaking of discipline with the 6th Armored when men with that division heard some (true) rumours and acted on this. In a war crime which certainly didn’t rival Houston but nonetheless was still an outrage, ten dozen plus Revolutionary Mexico captives were shot when in captivity and with no capacity to resist. Millions died in Mexico’s cities; over a hundred POWs died outside and American city. It was all the same though where people were killed when they shouldn’t have been. When he found out, Stormin’ Norman was remarkably unimpressed. He had the men responsible detained and commanders relived when they made excuses about enraged men acting out. This wasn’t the heat of battle where such things will always happen but something very different indeed. Other officers were ordered to give testimony against their comrades to military police investigators with the corps commander making sure that happened. Unpleasantness aside, Houston was gobbled up along with a big chunk of the coastline stretching southwest away from there. 14th Cav’ forward elements were within fifty miles of San Antonio and eighty miles from Corpus Christi by the end of the month. Propaganda from New York was all about the Oklahoma victory and ‘sights’ from the Houston urban area, yet the troops under Stormin’ Norman were not that far from the Mexico border and their commander would argue that he had won a far greater victory than had been seen up in Oklahoma.
March 1985:
The Congressional leadership from the House and the Senate was, like the very top of the US Government, aware that there remained regular communications with the Soviets over the Hot-Line. Neither the majority of Congress nor the American public had any idea that this was ongoing though. It was done only because it was absolutely necessary. There had already been an exchange between the two countries of nuclear weapons and there had been the use of such weapons by each against other countries since then. In New York and Moscow, no one wanted to see Washington and Leningrad repeated again. If it had been revealed, the expected outrage in Congress that Glenn and the others believed would occur would be something along the lines of ‘you are sending them poetry once an hour while they are occupying our country and killing our people: send a nuke down the connection and blow them all to hell!’… or something like that. Emotion would get the better of common sense. Keeping this quiet was done instead. There was the belief that it would never be revealed too.
Poetry was sent down the Hot-Line back-and-forth between the two countries at war. Every other hour, one side would send the other extracts of the works of Shakespeare, Twain, Chekov and Dostoevsky. This was a test to make sure that the communication system was in working order. Using teletype machines, connected by both a fixed trans-Atlantic link and also via satellites, these had been sent before the war and continued to be during it. Messages were sent in native languages and translated at each end. There was no direct voice link on the Hot-Line – fiction be damned – though, of course, when not using this link, phone-calls could still be made via other links. Moreover, through intermediaries in neutral countries, both governments had exchanged other messages about further matters too. The Hot-Line was for nuclear issues though and both kept it that way. Text communications over the Hot-Line had been made on September 17th last year. These were used since on the occasion of American nuclear attacks made on the Korean Peninsula, Soviet strikes with thermonuclear weapons in China and also following an accidental non-nuclear explosion above an ICBM field in Siberia. The messages were terse and formal. Very little information was exchanged and things were left until the very last moment with the nuclear attacks and in the case of the partial-launch & airborne blast (two hundred feet up) in Siberia there came a message within the hour: only after the Soviet leadership knew what had occurred and, in fact, before the Americans were even aware.
Pre-war, the Hot-Line connected terminals at the Pentagon and the Kremlin. Since then, despite each building still standing, there were more terminals for incoming & outgoing messages installed. Their installation and where these were located was a secret from the other side. This information wasn’t shared with the other for fear it could be targeted. Why hide this? The countries were at war and they weren’t about to share any secrets with the other unless there was no other choice at all. Both the Americans and the Soviets each had terminals installed for the Hot-Line at airborne and ground stations. While airborne aboard an EC-135R (there were several new ‘R’ models; all recently-converted former tankers after all but one EC-135G Looking Glass aircraft were lost on the war’s first day when on the ground), Glenn sent Vorotnikov a message over the Hot-Line on the morning of March 25th.
The gist of it was this:
American nuclear strikes are about to take place in Mexico.
These will be of a strategic nature.
They are not targeted upon any Soviet forces: efforts have been made to deliberately avoid this eventuality.
The United States is taking this action because it is necessary and reserves the right to do so again at a time of its choosing.
The missiles will soon be in the air.
Vorotnikov received the message by the time those missiles from American ICBM fields were flying. He and the members of the Defence Council were at once moved to safety. This wasn’t a process which could be done in an instant. Long before he could be truly said to be safe, those missiles had already hit their targets. Once those were confirmed, the Soviet leadership knew what this was all about. They had been discussing this issue concerning Mexico themselves and it had been put to them of the danger that the leadership of Revolutionary Mexico had led them into. Now the fears of some members had been shown to be true. Information flowed in for many hours afterwards about those strikes and it was realised that there would no longer be an issue with independent actions taken by the leader of that erstwhile ally of theirs. In addition, whomever replaced him would have far fewer people to rule over. As had been in the case of their North Korean ‘allies’ too, Soviet nuclear weapons weren’t fired at the United States in retaliation. Among everything else which came in response worldwide to the Mexico Massacre, this was something noted among many other countries who were supposed to be allied to the Soviet Union too. It would be a defining moment for several.
March 1985: Mexico
Guadalajara was the de facto capital of the People’s Democratic Republic of Mexico. This Mexican city which lay west of where the Mexico City – still the de jure capital remained – had once stood and was the centre of power for the regime led by Tirado López. History had been rewritten when it came to the Second Mexican Revolution and Guadalajara had a significant role in that. The city was honoured as the birthplace of that revolution and the whole revolution itself was officially written around that. The specifics of the economic collapse, the falling apart of law-&-order, the civil war and foreign outside intervention had a different history now. With the latter, that foreign intervention was significantly downplayed when it came to Tirado López and his initial emergence. It was no longer referenced to any significant degree. It had all been about Mexicans themselves, the history said, rather than the efforts undertaken by Nicaragua, Cuba and the Soviet Union to bring about all what happened. American intervention against the communists was overplayed and the lengthy civil war was blamed on them. Moreover, the war which Revolutionary Mexico was currently fighting was the sole fault of the United States too, all leading back to where they had acted against the Mexican people for centuries and then launched a nuclear attack upon Mexico City.
The regime made Guadalajara a model city for the revolution. This was for show at home and to the watching world too. Extreme measures had been taken to do that. The social and economic changes in the city from how it was before the revolution and now during wartime were striking. There had been ‘redistributions’ of wealth, people and power. The number of people who had called Guadalajara home had dropped early in the revolution yet grown significantly after a time. Across the Mexican countryside, people had left – of their own free will or encouraged to do so – to go to cities such as this one. There was work in the cities. There was food. There was order. It had been a bad choice for many. Revolutionary cadres from the regime’s internal security force had been trained up and organised by foreigners to be used to keep the regime in power. They were doing a very good job. The last flames of resistance to the new order had long ago been extinguished. Only in parts of the countryside was there active opposition to the regime and that was patchy at best. Elsewhere, informers yet also the very real threat of a violent death kept people in line. They were fed lies, intimidated and had their emotions whipped against the gringos. On the domestic front, the regime of Tirado López was effective and wasn’t going to be toppled by any internal force.
Guadalajara was a city at war like the rest of the country. American air attacks had been made against it. The frequency and intensity of these had increased since the New Year. From afar, missiles had been fired and there had also been a couple of overhead raids when FB-111s flown by the US Air Force had conducted low-level strikes. Regime targets – government buildings – had been hit and so too had military facilities around Guadalajara. Communications links and the power supply had too been bombed. This all helped the regime and their propaganda. When the power was out, when food rations were cut once again and all of their promises made for this bright new future which Mexico had yet to come, that could all be blamed on the war and here was the proof of that. That future which the promises made from Guadalajara said was one which would only come when the war ended. Full employment, full stomachs and a full restoration of all ‘rightful’ Mexican territory (that north of the Rio Grande) would come then. Meanwhile, the many sacrifices had to be made. The city was devoid of military-aged men not in uniform. They were all off fighting for their nation… or dead somewhere with their families being unaware of their fate. That war was a war being won: half of the United States was apparently occupied and the hated country to the north about to collapse any day now. The people had a leader which was fighting for them though to make that all come about. A personality cult around Tirado López had started slow but exploded in recent months. He was the hero which Mexico needed, the propaganda ran, and the only man who could give them what they needed. It was said that he personally had fired the first shots of the revolution and commanded it single-handedly to the victory which had come. Tirado López had authored the country’s constitution, one of the most progressive and liberal in the world (in theory) which gave so much to Mexico’s people – its women and minorities had legally-assured fantastic rights – and would deliver them their dignity. Foreign interest from around the world came to Guadalajara to see this despite the country being at war. The city was home to a dozen plus embassies and almost two dozen more unofficial representations (trade missions, cultural offices etc.) and there were visitors to the city to see this Revolutionary Mexico which was here and apparently thriving.
Guadalajara was thriving… right up to the very second it was eliminated in nuclear fire at ten o’clock in the morning of March 25th 1985. Six other Mexican cities, all full of civilians, suffered the same fate.
There had come intelligence information to the US Government back in February about the activities of Revolutionary Mexico inside Texas and New Mexico when it came to how they were treating civilians. Many, many outrages had occurred beforehand on American soil with the troops of all of those foreign armies killing civilians in anti-guerrilla operations, unorganised massacres and such like. There hadn’t been a deliberate and organised targeting of civilians who posed no danger nor interfered with military operations though. There hadn’t been the time to do that nor the motivation by the Soviets, the Cubans nor the others. They had a war to fight and the United States retained its nuclear arsenal. Revolutionary Mexico had its troops sent north controlled fully by the Soviet high command. They used such men with abandon to undertake suicide missions on the attack and in defence. A lot of them were gassed when chemical weapons were used as well, many caught up by Soviet nerve agents when the wind went the wrong way too. Throughout the rear, Revolutionary Mexico troops were used extensively as well. The Soviets relied on them for security duties as well as physical labour. It freed them up to concentrate on the fighting they were doing at the far end of an extraordinarily long supply chain. There wasn’t meant to be an independence shown by Tirado López’s regime when it came to his troops operating on American soil yet this had gradually occurred. Revolutionary Mexico was remarkably adept at getting away with many things it did while their busy allies looked the other way. It was always a slow, steady process. First there were all of those ‘Mexican traitors’ shot when caught – all refugees who’d fled the civil war and thought they had found safety in the United States – and then came the organised looting came done on an industrial scale. Any American civilians in the way were mistreated: they were beaten, robbed, raped and killed. The killings especially targeted Hispanic-Americans where they were often declared to be more of those ‘Mexican traitors’ despite it being very clear they weren’t. Complaints had been made against this behaviour from Soviet military officers yet also Cubans, Guatemalans and Nicaraguans. Very few of these people were the cartoon character villains in current American propaganda. They objected to what they saw on a personal level yet also because it only fueled the resistance. They did many horrible things themselves but this was different. The complaints weren’t listened to from above. The KGB was instrumental in making sure that Revolutionary Mexico did what it did. They had their reasons for this and none of those were for the long-term future good of Mexico. It helped to have ‘real’ bad guys around.
Tirado López had been in San Antonio back in January. When inside the city, despite all of the security around his visit, his party had been shot at with bullets killing a couple of his flunkies. He took this rather personally. Instructions were given upon his return to Guadalajara that the security situation in both Texas and New Mexico was to be corrected. Once the war was over, the intention was that those two states would join Revolutionary Mexico as new and fully-integrated parts of that nation. The KGB had assured him of that whereas from Moscow and Havana there had been neither denials nor confirmation of such a future. Tirado López believed he would get both though, hopefully more from a collapsed United States too. There could be no resistance allowed there. As was the case back in his own country, resistance was dealt with by bringing people into the cities and out of the countryside. They would be easier to control once together. On this, that ignored that he had been shot at when inside a city yet such contradictions in his logic weren’t something that anyone in his regime dared to politely point out to him. American civilians were herded into the cities and big towns. The security situation in rural areas, which his army was responsible for, improved with this. Success came in that. Tirado López had the intention of then doing something with all of those people, the millions of American civilians in Albuquerque, Austin, Brownsville, El Paso, Houston, Laredo, San Antonio, Santa Fe and others. What that was, he hadn’t gotten around to deciding yet. One thing it wasn’t was an organised slaughter of them nor purposely starving them to death. The Americans saw these civilians being penned in the urban areas though. They witnessed the people dying from hunger and disease. From looking at aerial pictures and from the debriefing of Green Beret teams deep in occupied territory, all that came was the sight of the people dying with many more soon to follow. President Glenn had asked for proof that Revolutionary Mexico actually intended to kill these people.
Then he received it. NISS intercepted Soviet communications where this was discussed. The military and intelligence services of the Soviet Union were aware of the forced concentration of people and they believed, just as the Americans did, that these people were going to be killed on purpose. This was reported up the chain-of-command and onwards to Moscow. American interpretation of what they heard was that the Soviets were saying it was happening, not speculating on this. It was a matter brought to the Kremlin and the Defence Council in the end where warnings were made that Tirado López was going too far with this but the Americans didn’t know of that. All they knew was that the Soviets were saying this was true. It was brought to Glenn. Still, the president wanted more. There was only one response which could be made in his eyes and that of the rest of the very top of the US Government and to do that required more proof. Tirado López’s regime was making use of the diplomatic services offered by the Swiss to several countries at war who had no official contact with the other. Switzerland had a Mexican Interest Section with its own Permanent Mission to the United Nations’ offices in Geneva (the UN was making much use of Geneva plus Vienna alongside the HQ in New York due to the position of the latter in the American’s de facto capital) and contact was made by the Americans with them there. Answers were demanded and accusations called upon to be denied. The response was rather undiplomatic: included within the swearing was refusal to respond. One member of the diplomatic party for Revolutionary Mexico there in Geneva spoke to the Americans aside. He knew he was risking his life but he did so because he retained his humanity. He unintentionally put the lives of millions of his countrymen in his own hands too. The Americans were told that this was the intention. It wasn’t a lie from the man involved, he was just as mistaken as the Soviets were. Tirado López was considered by many of his countrymen to be the epitome of evil. When telling the Americans, the diplomat believed that his actions would see that stopped. He was ever-so tragically correct.
With agreement from his Cabinet, the National Security Council and the very top of the Congressional leadership, Glenn ordered that planned action to be taken. America would stop the killing of millions of its own civilians by killing millions of civilians of Revolutionary Mexico. It didn’t have to make sense to everyone: it made sense to those in New York. They were thinking beyond the response from what was left of that country they were about to drench in nuclear warheads and to their already nervous Soviet allies. There was more to this that just stopping the genocide against trapped American civilians.
This was about eventually bringing the war to an end.
Seven Minutemen ICBMs flew southwards from the Malmstrom AFB missile fields spread across central Montana. Each carried a trio W78 thermonuclear warheads with a blast yield of 350 kilotons.
Guadalajara was the target of one of those missiles. The six others struck the cities of Chihuahua, Hermosillo, Leon, Morelia, Puebla and Saltillo. Two warheads didn’t reach their targets to explode above them but the other nineteen did as advertised. All seven targeted cities were obliterated with no warning coming ahead of that. The Mexico Massacre counted among its many victims Tirado López himself when he was caught in one of the three Guadalajara blasts.
Three more cities had each been initially selected for likewise destruction. Monterrey, Torreon and Veracruz all escaped when at the last-minute, Glenn opted to not fire upon each. This wasn’t for a humanitarian reason concerning Mexican civilians. The Soviets had major military activity around Monterrey and Veracruz while recent intelligence showed the presence of many American military captives in Torreon. Last September had seen the United States kill their own people when Americans were caught up in Mexico City – illegal volunteers for the civil war taken prisoner & brought to Mexico City plus many misguided people who’d chosen to visit the then-heart of the Mexican Revolution for political reasons – and they didn’t want to repeat this. Torreon’s people were spared due to POWs in their thousands bring transported through there. Not blowing apart Monterrey and Veracruz meant not killing thousands of Soviets using weapons of mass destruction.
These nuclear detonations across Mexico devastated the country. The death toll from immediate and after-affects would be estimated afterwards to be between five and eight million but the true figures would never be known. Condemnation came worldwide yet also from inside the United States too: in the latter, no matter what was going on, this was all too much for many when they were told. The KGB had the Peace Committee in El Paso make much out of this too. It was too late for any effect on that issue though. Governments worldwide had already protested at nuclear attacks, chemical warfare strikes, invasions of neutral nations and all of the conventional fighting ongoing. This was something different… but even then, the Mexico Massacre was still put into context among many other events such as the China War and the now ongoing Euro-Soviet War, those two separate conflicts from the American/Allied vs. Soviet conflict. All of that attention worldwide missed what happened in Torreon. No one there knew they had been on and then taken off that target list for a nuclear strike. Revolutionary Mexico started to collapse all around them yet dedicated officers on the ground, enraged and eager for revenge, conducted a forced march of the captives in their hands. American POWs numbered twenty-eight hundred: a number far lower than NISS had told the president there were there. Outside of the city, another massacre took place. Each and every prisoner – taken in battles won and lost by several armies yet all in Revolutionary Mexican hands – was shot and dumped in a mass grave. Elsewhere through the country, similar but smaller events took place where retribution came.
The regime of the now vaporised Tirado López was falling though and that was what was of greatest importance in regards to the war.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:23:55 GMT
Chapter Twenty–Two – Capture & Collapse
March 1985: The Eastern Caribbean and the North Atlantic
Western Europe was too at war with the Soviet Union and those countries aligned with it. The EDA, eight countries of which seven were former NATO members, was fighting the same nations as the Allies – many of them once with NATO pre-war too – also were. There were talks underway for a formal, meaningful alliance between the two blocs but there were difficulties involved with that. This made the EDA and the Allies co-belligerents in legal terms. Physical separation meant that the politics aside, there was only some immediate cooperation in the war between the majority of the two blocs apart from on mainland Europe with the arrival of troops from several Allied countries to fight there alongside the EDA. However, between each bloc, there was the North Atlantic where the two were both fighting the Soviets. Early cooperation and joint efforts at sea fell back upon NATO understandings in many instances through there had been some quiet agreements made before the EDA entered the war where both Britain and Spain had (with American knowledge) discussed some things with France in the final stages of that country’s collision course with the Soviets.
In the eastern Caribbean, the French acted there generally alone though. Their defence attaché in New York was busy in helping to smooth over many issues before afterwards the military heads of France and the United States used their own people to establish better liaisons. An absence of any form of friendly fire was something that each wanted to achieve. French aircraft made attacks against Barbados and St. Lucia. They used Mirage-IIIs for fighter cover to protect several nights of bomb runs made by Mirage F-1s against Soviet military bases on those two islands. A strong French military commitment to the Caribbean had been made late last year when Cuba gobbled up all of those defenceless independent island nations and this included troops and naval vessels too. There was a need across in Europe for the military assets deployed here but over on this side of the ocean they were for now. Soviet Naval Aviation aircraft had already been attacked before when on land and faced increasing losses when flying out over the ocean all at Allied hands. Now, instead of as was the case earlier when the island’s air facilities were attacked from distant American bases, the French had the aircraft in-theatre to attack them from close-range. Repeated strikes were made. The French took losses but these weren’t crippling. What the Soviets lost in terms of aircraft were though. Naval air operations out over the North Atlantic came to a close. Orders came for there to be a dispersion of the remaining Backfires, Badgers, Bears and Blinders to save them. They moved to Grenada and St. Vincent away to the south as well as up to Antigua in the north. These kept them from being destroyed on the ground yet the dispersion meant that they would be ineffective in their role for some time due to all of the disruption to their ground support. Then Antigua was hit by the Americans not long after many of these aircraft arrived. F-111s flying from Puerto Rico hit Coolidge Airport in a heavy strike. French air cover hadn’t been provided yet at the same time, the French were active above St. Lucia were the Cubans had fighters and thus secured the flank for the US Air Force when it hit Antigua, leaving them only have to deal with what fewer Soviet fighters there were. Invasion fears spread through the eastern Caribbean in response. Cuba held all of those islands with few of their own troops. Local forces were present with their ‘gunpoint governments’ supplying them for security duty around all of the little people’s republics in the region. Apart from Grenada, none of those regimes were friends of Cuba. They were all forced collaborators: Allied propaganda did tell a different story yet that was the fact on the ground. With none of their own men available, the Soviets demanded that Cuba sent more men to the islands to protect them from a French invasion, maybe even a joint French-US amphibious assault, to take all of those harbours and airports which allowed the war in North America to go on. Cuba had the troops free – only reservists though – yet wavered over sending them. Meanwhile, the French began to make their own moves. They didn’t have enough forces in the region to launch a major assault but had the ships, aircraft and commando units to conduct raiding operations. St. Lucia was where they focused, the closest island to Martinique. The activity there was small yet effective. Local troops from the island did poorly in combat – only when the French targeted them and that was only by accident – before starting to desert. Moscow raged at Havana and the Castros bowed to the pressure. They sent extra troops to the island as well as a squadron of fighters. The numbers weren’t that large yet it only added to the massive overextension on the part of Cuba to this war. Meanwhile, the French kept up the pressure as they threatened capture of St. Lucia. American eyes were elsewhere in the region. Unable to strike at the current time yet with a significant introduction of forces to the region, they were getting ready to do so when they were finally ready. Cooperation agreements on that matter remained difficult though. Months of the Americans and the Allies fighting ‘alone’ weren’t going to be forgotten in an instant.
French and EDA naval activity was concentrated in both the Baltic Exits as well as the Mediterranean too. There was some EDA maritime activity through the North Atlantic though. Some French, Belgian and Dutch ships and submarines were active out in the open ocean. There were no major trans-Atlantic convoys to protect as would have been the case had this been a NATO-Soviet conflict yet the Allied nations on both sides of the North Atlantic were still sending ships each way. The Soviets had spent the war trying to interfere with that using aircraft and submarines. In addition, they themselves were trying to send ships across the ocean. Allied military activity through the past several months especially had put an end to the majority of that. Regardless, where possible, EDA military activity supported the Allies and that was done the other way too in acting against the common enemy. Information on ships, submarines and aircraft in Soviet service if located by either the Allies or the EDA was fast shared with the other. There were a few joint attacks made too. All of those years spent training together when in NATO might have been forgotten in political drama, yet officers and seamen with each new bloc worked together as if they were part of that former lone bloc. Each side saved the other’s bacon at times as well. Fuel and consumable supplies were exchanged when at sea and then in port too: Bermuda saw a Dutch frigate make a stop there and Spanish naval vessels transited through the French naval station at Brest. British-EDA naval cooperation closer to the mainland of Europe put all of that to shame though where they worked together extensively. Opposition to this came from many quarters in both blocs. Voices in the United States and Norway were the loudest against aspects of this cooperation yet there were some in Western Europe who were also extremely opposed to what was going on. Common sense wasn’t always followed in such criticism yet there remained many legitimate issues on this as well.
Elsewhere over the ocean, the Allied continued their ongoing air campaigns against both Iceland and the Azores. The US Navy focused upon that large island at the top of the North Atlantic. These were far larger than the French activity around Barbados and St. Lucia. The Soviets couldn’t get a track on the carriers involved and had what aircraft weren’t destroyed on the ground whittled down when trying to find them. A successful submarine attack hit several large escorts, but the USS Nimitz and the USS Saratoga eluded efforts to put holes in them. Losses on Iceland to naval aircraft and also the fighters there were many. Furthermore, the Soviets were temporarily unable to fly transport aircraft through Iceland. This was a major stop on the air route across to North America. The danger to defenceless air-freighters and airliners – carrying stores and men – going both ways was immense and so Iceland’s ability as a stopover and also as a safe travel lane was greatly limited. Lajes Field in the Azores was another part of that air-route. The RAF returned to bomb this airbase in March like they had done in February too. Their attacks were less significant yet nothing to be scoffed at. Soviet aircraft on the ground were targeted and the Tornados even managed to get a pair of air-to-air kills where the RAF shot down helpless transports using Sidewinders at close-range. The RAF wanted those Tornados over mainland Europe yet while flying from Portugal – using Madeira for divert purposes – they were influencing the overall war effort more in doing this. There remained Allied plan to retake the Azores and the Portuguese were eager to get on with it capturing their sovereign soil. Ongoing military activity over Western Europe put that on hold for the time being though. The Portuguese were displeased yet not fuming and acting out. They needed the British to do much of the heavy-lifting in getting their liberating troops into the Azores and to help collapse Soviet control with air & naval support and would have to wait. That was because, alongside both Ireland and Spain, Britain was fighting alongside the EDA on mainland Europe in one hell of an ongoing war taking place there.
Early March 1985: Europe
Strong condemnation in Ireland came when the comment was made that the ‘West Brits were off to fight for their English housemasters’. Irish opposition politicians and also non-parliamentary figures were criticised for their characterisation of Defence Force elements joining the British Army and heading off to war on Continental Europe in such terms. Those were the Republic’s soldiers, the response came, and patriotic Irishmen going off to fight to defend the threat to Europe and thus Ireland too. Those against the deployment were the same who had objected in the strongest of terms beforehand when the Defence Forces sent the same men to England last year for training. The argument put forth was that Ireland should send its men to the United States to fight there or, if not, then to Canada, Norway, Portugal or Spain: anywhere but mainland Britain. Now, the 6th Infantry Brigade was being sent off to war in West Germany while an integral part of the British deployment to the Continent. This reignited all that anger which stretched back to Ireland’s decision to join the war and then how tied the country, let alone its small military forces, was with Britain at the moment. The British were the enemy to such people; the Soviets were just some foreigners which their sell-out government was supporting the British in fighting for no good reason. The Irish soldiers who moved from Salisbury Plain first to Southampton and then across the Channel to Cherbourg were meant to be isolated from such things for the good of morale. That was impossible to do though. They knew what was being said at home by the loudest critics and knew too that there was much unsaid unease throughout their nation at not just what they had been doing but also the wider war. These men had a job to do though and a war to fight. All told, there were almost seven thousand of them attached directly to the 6th Brigade as well as independent supporting units. Ships from Ireland, Britain and France transported them across to Cherbourg and then they moved across the width of France and into West Germany. Ireland was sending its fighting men to war and, arguments at home aside about subservience to former/current colonial masters, it was a war which many people back home feared that they wouldn’t be coming home alive from.
Spanish troops moved into France too, aiming to link up with the British and the Irish going into West Germany. There had been other fights which Spain had sent its soldiers to take place in during this war. There remined some of them up in Norway and there had been those engagements both on Tenerife and at Ceuta. The majority of the Spanish Army had not seen action though. When the British had considered going to North America in-strength, so too had the Spanish. Madrid was keen to see the Soviets fought. Now that time had come. Their 1st Armoured & 3rd Infantry Divisions crossed through France via highways and rail-lines held open for their use while at the same time there was much air and sea movements too in support. As the Irish were, the Spanish were part of the British Second Army. This was a multi-corps command formed of six British divisions as well as many attachments. It entered the Continent through the Low Countries and France, avoiding entry ports direct into either West Germany and Denmark due to the ongoing situation in both latter countries. The deployment had been long-planned yet putting all that into practise was no easy feat. There was much help from the EDA in this though. These Allied troops would be fighting as a co-belligerent with the armies of Western Europe and were needed to assist them. There were logistical hiccups yet generally it went as planned. Thankfully, the movement of the large numbers of men, plus everything they brought with them to fight, was little-contested. There was a Soviet cruise missile attack on Calais during the deployment and also a submarine active off Ostend. Overall though, there was so much more that the Soviet could have done – were expected to have done too – to interfere. Defensive measures were in-place with the EDA and the Allies working together to cover this from Soviet action. However, the Soviets were busy elsewhere. They’d regret not interfering either on the Continental side of the deployment or elsewhere back in Britain. In recent months, since the they had gone into Sweden and combined with the losses inflicted elsewhere in the world with their many wars, the Soviet Union had been unable to strike against Britain with anywhere near as much fury as they had done previously. Their available strike forces were committed elsewhere. Many more British troops armed and in uniform were staying at home on internal security duties yet the last Soviet commando attack against Britain was on January 28th. Throughout the Low Countries and France, EDA security forces were everywhere and while they too fought than once the shooting war with the Soviets started at the end of February, there were very few attacks made against the rear areas here as well.
Scandinavia and Central Europe were where the fighting was taking place and where the Soviets were putting what available forces they had into. As March began, the war which started with EDA attacks against the Soviets had spread fast and continued to do so. Everyone in Western Europe was waiting for the Soviet Army to start pouring over the Inner-German Border either with or without an accompanying attack using weapons of mass destruction.
Up in the very southern reaches of Sweden, the Soviet lodgement there refused to be overcome. On land, in the air and in the nearby sea, Soviet and EDA forces continued to clash. The EDA wanted to eliminate that lodgement had had believed that they could with haste yet the Soviets held on. They were dug-in and wouldn’t be budged. French and Swedish troops continued their attacks though the West Germans weren’t involved in that. They had good troops there, elite Fallschirmjager and Gebirgsjager (paratroopers and mountain infantry), yet orders from Bonn kept them on defensive duties around the supply lines. That wouldn’t last forever though. The Danes had realised by now that the silence from their island of Bornholm – located out in the middle of the Baltic – wasn’t a communications issue but the Soviets had taken it and ended all resistance. Elsewhere across their country, they and the Italians (light troops of brigade-strength) engaged Soviet raiders through larger islands of the country who came in by air and sea. The main fighting wasn’t on land though but with engagements in the sky and on the water. Denmark was strongly attacked and the government feared that the Soviets would once again use nuclear weapons like they had previously done. An invasion was prepared for yet considered unlikely given the available forces that the Soviets had to hand. There were French troops in Demark, sent here beforehand. However, at the beginning of the month yet they moved down into Schleswig-Holstein, across into West Germany soon enough and towards the East German frontier. That was where any invasion of Denmark was going to come from and they joined more Danish soldiers there as well.
As most of West Germany was, Schleswig-Holstein was a battlefield of war. Soviet tanks had yet to begin pouring westwards yet throughout the country, there were armed military engagements taking place. The first few Soviet air strikes following the EDA attack elsewhere only led to counterstrikes against both East Germany and Czechoslovakia were they came from and then counter-counterstrikes. Bombs and missiles hit West Germany. Along the Iron Curtain there were clashes between light units were patrols ran into infiltration attempts; cross-frontier shelling and then counter-shelling was ongoing as well. Deeper inside the country, away from the direct military actions, Soviet attempts to cause chaos were ongoing. There had been murders and kidnappings of public figures as well as bombings and shooting incidents. The West Germans were meant to be prepared for this. They were still caught by the intensity of it and some remarkable failures occurred. The French believed that previous efforts to detain traitors and expel Soviet nationals before the war hadn’t been as effective as Bonn had claimed due to the influence that the KGB and the Stasi had over certain sections of the country’s security forces. The Inner-German Border was still more important than everything else though. It was behind there that the EDA lined-up its forces ready to oppose an invasion. Belgium and the Netherlands had deployed their armies into the country, following behind the last of the French. Where there was that low-level ground combat, the massed EDA armies stood back from this and let specialist forces take part in that. In the skies above, aircraft from the Low Countries – deployed ahead of their troops – joined with those of France in making those air attacks going eastwards. Bonn was refusing to allow the Luftwaffe to fly offensive missions, only defensive ones. Arguments back and forth between the West Germans and their EDA partners were ongoing on this matter. They would be resolved soon enough though.
Down in Austria, the country struggled immensely to maintain its neutrality and stay out of the Euro-Soviet War. This wasn’t something that was going to be decided in Vienna though. Soviet intelligence operations watched the activities of the EDA – France and Italy were doing this – as the two of them sought to, in the eyes of the KGB, ‘capture’ Austria and add it to their military bloc. There were EDA troops on Austria’s borders and their intelligence operatives inside the country. Austria’s military was mobilised but from the east and the west, there were other armies poised to move in to fight on their soil too. A similar situation in the eyes of the Soviet Union was going on with Yugoslavia as well. A war which the country was playing no active role in was soon to bring the country to its knees and maybe even cause its collapse. Yugoslavia’s international trade was at a standstill and there was no more money from the West. The Soviets watched as the Italians sent a diplomatic team to Belgrade to talk with the Yugoslavian Government. A bomb went off before that meeting could take place, killing the majority of the senior Italian diplomats. Yugoslavia reacted angrily to this violation of its sovereignty. Relations with the Soviets had gone sour since the wider war had started and there had come all that use of Yugoslavia as a proxy for Soviet disguised shipping. Some elements of the Yugoslavian regime had enriched themselves; others hadn’t and had had no idea what was happening until Allied naval activity put a stop to the majority of this. When the money stopped coming from Western Europe to keep the economy afloat, job losses were made and prices for basic necessities were raised. Like Austria, Yugoslavia wanted no part of the war between the Soviets and the EDA like it had stayed out of the conflict between the Soviets and the Allies too. They were soon to be in this whether they wanted to or not.
During the last two days of February and the first six days of March, this quasi-war went on… until it became a real war.
Bulgaria, Czechoslovakia, East Germany and Hungary all mobilised their armed forces fully in response to the beginning of the Euro-Soviet War. This was a process held back through all the many months that they had been engaged in warfare against the Allies due to the economic and domestic problems which would come by doing so. Now things were different though. Hungary was the only one of the four which hadn’t sent troops abroad to North America nor had any outside of their borders; the other three already had sent regular forces to the Western Hemisphere (lone divisions or divisional-sized equivalents) and there were too Czechoslovak and East German forces both on the ground in Poland (each with two more pre-war divisions). Such military commitments – which came with combat aircraft and also many elite units for those foreign deployments when it come to ground forces – meant that reserves returned to uniform with full mobilisation was needed. The Bulgarians and Hungarians managed well with their mobilisations; the Czechoslovaks and East Germans had difficulties. Those involved men not turning up and also protests made. With the Soviets more than a little interested in these events, Prague and East Berlin cracked down hard themselves. The two regimes had those troops in Poland due to the last time a Warsaw Pact member had seen ‘troubles’ and had no wish for their allies in Moscow to take the decision to do the same to them. In normal circumstances such a fear might have been irrational when the protests were as small as they were yet these weren’t normal times at all. The strong responses were only met with a strong reaction. Protests weren’t nipped in the bud. The regimes of Husak and Honecker hadn’t expected that. They knew that propaganda broadcasts from Western Europe for many long months had been heard across the nation and they had believed that those wouldn’t set off opposition. That was partially true: such things where news from outside which contradicted the official government line wouldn’t have set off what occurred. It was a wider issue though. The hardships of war with restrictions on the supply of basic goods had built up anger. Now that the war really had come home, that combined with everything else to bring these about. Neither country was on the verge of revolt or collapse yet the situation wasn’t good at all.
This all occurred while the Soviet Army reinforced their forward-deployed forces in the Warsaw Pact countries. On paper, they doubled their strength by the scale of the deployment. Field armies and air armies moved forward, some of them those withdrawn back during the Kennedy-Andropov agreements on force reductions. The then American president’s critics had said that the Soviets would do this with ease and that the American pull-out he started couldn’t easily be reversed. Those had been prophetic warnings indeed. Streaming across Poland and into the three other Warsaw Pact nations at the top end of Eastern Europe came convoys of Soviet forces. Freight trains and trucks rolled westwards, all to link-up with those already based in forward roles. The Soviets moved their troops into attack positions, not defensive ones. However, many of the reinforcing units were significantly understrength. The Soviets had had their own mobilisation issues. These hadn’t been protests but absenteeism where the call to uniform hadn’t been answered. Earlier mobilisations had seen only small numbers of missing soldiers. With those who refused to turn out, they suffered from reprisals. The numbers this time were far greater. The Soviet state had the ability to still arrest and punish all of those who effectively deserted their army and betrayed their country by not showing up when they were meant to, yet in Moscow there wasn’t the will to do so.
It was one of many ongoing problems that the Soviet regime had and one not currently being addressed when it really should have been.
Across the Soviet Government, there was utter determination to finish this war that France and the EDA had started with them. The country had been attacked without warning on the orders of Mitterrand. This was a real first strike too, not one made up as had been the case with how the war was supposed to have started with the Allies. The Defence Council, the Politburo, the intelligence services and the military were all keen on hitting back and emerging victorious. Of that there was no dissent. It was the how that was the problem on that though, one which was causing delays in Moscow when it came to getting on with it all, as well as why this had all happened.
Vorotnikov and the Defence Council were the ones who were making all of the important decisions when it came to the many wars which the nation was fighting. Nonetheless, that didn’t mean that the other organs of the state were powerless and would just rubber-stamp this. The Politburo were the ones who gave authorisation to all that the Defence Council did while below them everyone else carried out instructions. The layers of government went sideways as well as downwards. There were all sorts of complicated alliances between different parts of the government. Personalities mattered and relationships changed. Historical difficulties between separate organisations were important too. It was all a maze when looked at from outside, yet also increasingly from within especially since last October when Vorotnikov had replaced the deceased Ustinov. Vorotnikov had enemies since the moment he was appointed leader. He was an outsider, brought in fast to take over. There were those who were passed over and others who didn’t get what they wanted from him once he was in power. The Politburo was headed by him but he was spending little time with his comrades. The war was important, no one would disagree with that, yet so too was everything else that was going on. He made more enemies. The orders for all those deaths to occur among military personnel and then spooks too for dubious war-related issues upset those also within each. Complaints were made to the Politburo on this. They had signed-off on that but they hadn’t understood how widespread this would be. None liked what they discovered.
The Politburo was even more displeased when they discovered why exactly the country was at war with Western Europe. In the words of one of them, they were fighting a continent which the plan had been to capture via diplomatic means instead of have to conquer in war all because of ‘a bastard child of an amorous Frenchman!’ Far worse things that that one particular kidnapping had been approved by the Politburo – other children had been taken for political purposes; babies murdered in bombings and nuclear attacks – but this was something different. They hadn’t been told about this. Some of them actually understood Mitterrand’s motivation now where their thought train ran that he had the EDA fight this war over that child. Where was the missing girl? The KGB chief told them the grim news on that matter. She was dead after accidentally dying during her kidnap and the body buried secretly & securely to avoid her being discovered. This maddened members of the nation’s ruling committee. They saw it all as an avoidable chain of events and – catching on fast to the mood – the KGB chief blamed Vorotnikov himself for this all: it was actually his fault but he wasn’t about to admit that, was he? The thinking on the part of the Politburo remained that their war with the United States and the Allies was still a legitimate one. The China War was now being seen as a major mistake and all the fault of Ustinov. Now Vorotnikov had given them this foolish war with Western Europe.
Gromyko emerged to lead what was beginning to be an opposition to Vorotnikov. Nothing to act openly against him was yet being spoken of and the opposition wasn’t plotting and scheming. That was only yet it must be said. There was for now just an alignment of thinking. It was the foreign minister who was moving things along now though when it came to how the Politburo coerced Vorotnikov and the Defence Council to act when it came to the Euro-Soviet War. They voted on this and the Defence Council followed. It wouldn’t be stopped but it would be a limited conflict in terms of goals and conduct. Nuclear weapons wouldn’t be used. West Germany was full of French nuclear weapons pointed eastwards, the French had several strategic missile submarines at sea and the KGB was saying that the Italians either was already or nearly on its way to having a viable (but very small) nuclear weapons capability. Chemical weapons were on the table though: where they had failed to work in North America, it was decided that they would be effective in Western Europe. This brought up the issue of troops from the Allies soon to be fought alongside EDA forces and – in a compromise which was nothing but an utter shambles when it came down to it – the Soviets decided to not use them against Allied troops no matter what yet attack the Western Europeans with them. The war would be fought on foreign territory in West Germany, Austria and Yugoslavia with the latter two countries used as a springboard to attack Italy and their armies forces to stand aside by direct threats made to their governments to fight them too otherwise.
That ‘real’ war, when the troops and tanks went forward, would begin at first light on March 7th. Everything was supposed to go to plan with this and the Euro-Soviet War would be won by a limited conflict too. Soviet forces were only going so far west, not all the way. They would defeat the EDA, and any Allied forces engaged too, close to the Iron Curtain and therefore a diplomatic solution was supposed to fast come. No one in power within the Soviet (fracturing) leadership considered the fact that they were making the same mistakes made in North America and China all over again.
Mid-March 1985: West Germany
To win a war in Western Europe, the Soviets would have had to throw everything at the fight and not fight a limited conflict. Furthermore, the best time to have done so would have been if not last year then before the EDA was fully able to get its defensive forces into place this Spring. It wasn’t a case of them finding themselves in a less ideal situation by attacking how and when they did. Instead, it was only going to bring them failure. That attack in West Germany opened with a wide-ranging use of chemical weapons, a good old-fashioned artillery barrage and targeted air strikes. Then came a full-on combined arms assault by Soviet and Warsaw Pact armies. They hit EDA military forces in the field who were supposed to be ready for what came their way.
The first ten days of the Euro-Soviet War in West Germany was all about how far Soviet-led forces could go. They reached their high-water mark at the end of that. Afterwards, the conflict would take on a far different character.
In the northern reaches of the country, the Soviets aimed to overrun West Germany from the Kiel Canal, through Hamburg and across to Bremen. Their tanks were to get their treads wet by reaching the North Sea. In their way stood Danish, Dutch, French and West Germany forces. East Germans and Soviets fought against an opponent which outnumbered them only slightly yet the belief was that the Second Guards Tank Army had the advantage with firepower and a much stronger armoured component. Conquering territory was secondary to overcoming and crushing those EDA forces, whose manpower numbers were higher by those in fixed defensive positions. Very quickly the wheels came off the Soviet assault. They faced an uncooperative enemy who didn’t respond in the manner which was anticipated. The gassing of so many of them didn’t have the desired effective either: the Danes and the Dutch took high losses yet the French and West Germans didn’t. Cutting down the numbers of opponents had to be done using bullets and shells rather than at range with gas.
Initially, going northwards across the Inner-German Border into Holstein, the East Germans there were stuck but the Soviets pushed in their second echelon to support them. The West Germans and the Danes refused to be split apart into two as desired and withdrew. They fell backwards exposing Lubeck to the east and Hamburg to the west but stuck together. Invading forces chased after them rather than pushing into either city: both defended by lighter forces dug-in and not fighting a mobile battle. As anticipated, the French pushed their 6th Light Armored Division into the fight. They came against the East Germans on the flank just as the Danes attempted a counterattack. Soviet reconnaissance units were meant to be watching to give warning. It was very, very late when they did: the French had lanced forward at high speed and under air cover which shot down many Soviet reconnaissance aircraft. The East Germans held their ground while the Soviets detached part of their own divisional force which was engaging the West Germans to not directly assist that fight but instead slip into a gap behind the French. The French were lucky to not get cut off by this and held the Soviets off long enough to properly engage them. The Soviets had failed to do all that they wanted yet denied the French the ability to fully beat those East Germans. They held and the Danes were ordered to make another withdrawal to see another fight on new ground. The East Germans followed after them, reconnecting with the Soviets beside them. The further forward that the invaders now went, far past the highway linking Hamburg to Lubeck, the more open ground that there was. This was the base of the Jutland Peninsula and it widened further back from the Inner-German Border. The countryside had fewer towns dotted around too. It was perfect tank country all the way to the Kiel Canal far behind. That was somewhere that the invaders found impossible to get to. They couldn’t beat their opponents and therefore the right-wing of the Second Guards Army was unable to fulfil its objectives. Both the East German 8th Motorised Rifle and the Soviet 94th Guards Motorised Rifle Divisions failed to break their opponents in any serious form. The cities on either side, and Kiel far off, were left alone as there was no desire to get into grinding fights for each while the EDA maintained mobile forces outside of them. Through the many days and nights, fighting occurred over and over again through Holstein. Huge amounts of destruction occurred and many deaths were recorded, especially among civilians. Battles near Neumunster on March 10th and outside of Itzehoe on the 13th – each for control of transport links around them – recorded no winners. For the beaten-up but still standing EDA units, this was an overall victory though. They had denied the Soviets their objectives. Waiting was done for the Soviets to throw in a third wave, a tank division or two, to try to finish them off and in response the plan was to fall back to the Kiel Canal but no such enemy reinforcement came… there weren’t those forces back in East Germany. The Danish II Corps (a third of the men being Danes) emerged from that first week and a half able to keep on fighting.
The rest of the Second Guards Tank Army – with four divisions plus attachments – went across the Luneburg Heath. The Dutch were their opponents though there was significant West German support for the Netherlands I Corps. Gas attacks hurt the Dutch greatly. Their protective equipment couldn’t stop deaths as well as terrible injuries coming from some of the ‘exotic’ chemical weapons employed against them. Then the Soviets and East Germans marched across the Elbe and through the open plain going for the North Sea coast, Bremen and the lower reaches of the Weser River. The Dutch fell backwards, fighting a defensive battle and aiming to bring the invaders to a halt soon enough. Soviet air power was a significant factor in stopping the Dutch from being able to do this as planned, especially the closer they were to the Inner-German Border in the first few days of the war. Dutch and West German aircraft were supported by some RAF fighters flying from further back but local control of the air remained in Soviet hands. They made use of that in excellent cooperation between ground and air units. The Dutch were forced to give up more ground earlier than planned to survive being crushed. The Soviet motor rifle division on the southern side of the attack was a first-rate unit but they were lucky to be facing an East German reserve division to the north. If they hadn’t, the Dutch I Corps would have been fully overcome. First an independent tank regiment and then two full Soviet tank divisions were eventually unleashed with their second wave. Those came forward with hundreds of tanks shooting up everyone in their sight… including what the Dutch were certain were incidents of friendly-fire against East German units where there were cases of mistaken identity rather than any intentional acts. That immense force coming at them forced the Dutch to withdraw to the western edges of Luneburg Heath. Because the pressure on them had been weaker when fighting East German reservists, they held more ground to the north and conducted a fighting retreated in a north-western direction. That was impossible to do forever. Whilst doing so, they covered Autobahn-1 which linked Bremen with Hamburg yet there was little military value in that road soon enough for them, the EDA as a whole nor West German civilians on the move where they fled in their many thousands along that highway. Soviet air attacks blocked that highway. The Dutch were unable to do anything to assist with the resulting casualties from that, but, of more-importance, was that they’d end up on the shores of the North Sea if they kept going backwards. The Dutch Government back home was rather alarmed. The EDA wasn’t NATO despite all talk of Western European unity. They didn’t want to see their army cut off and pinned against the sea far from home leaving the way free for the Soviets to move against the Netherlands at their leisure. Command for the Dutch I Corps was with the West German Northern Army (a replacement for NATO’s Northern Army Group) and they were the ones issuing the orders. For the Dutch to run and try and slip back westwards and out of the fight they were in would doom everyone else and permission was denied before it officially was asked. Into all of this came the Soviet 145th Independent Tank Regiment. It broke the worn-down Dutch 1st Mechanised Division eight days into the fight and tore open a gap through the scattered remains. The two tank divisions behind rolled onwards. If the Dutch had wanted to cut and run home, that was only an if, it wasn’t happening now. That regiment and what was left of the East Germans screened the movement of the rampaging tanks as they concentrated together to push through what was later called the Geest Gap: passable terrain between the Weser and Wumme Rivers, where there were road and rail links directly towards Bremen. The furthest Dutch forces were at Rottenburg; the West Germans held onto Verden. Between them the way was clear for the Soviets. Victory was in their grasp should they get through and then turn on the trapped Dutch behind them, wiping out their remaining 4th Mechanised and 5th Armoured Divisions caught behind. Soviet aircraft were everywhere and the tanks raced forward below them. They then slammed into the British Army before the Geest Gap could be exploited and the breakout beyond could occur. British screening units met them first, then heavier units behind. The way ahead was firmly shut.
North-central parts of West Germany were where the Soviets sent two more field armies forward into. The Twentieth Guards and Third Shock Armies – nine Soviet divisions plus three from East Germany (two of those reserve formations) – attacked side by side from the southern parts of the Luneburg Heath all the way down to the Gottingen-Kassel area. The Weser River was as far as they were supposed to go. Through the eastern side of that waterway, there were EDA forces in the form of the Belgians, the French and West Germans. All were to be crushed and not allowed to get over that river in retreat to fight again. Soviet war plans had long intended to use parachute and airmobile units aplenty in a fight here where they would have fought the Americans and the British instead of the French. There were no Soviet Airborne forces available though and the Soviet Army only had a lone brigade of airmobile troops plus two separate battalions of further helicopter-deployable assault troops as well. All those rear-area attacks to hold certain points for either exploitation or to distract what would then have been NATO units were no longer possible. What little the two armies were left with, they had to use wisely and in a limited fashion. Once the offensive came to a stop, it was understood just how missed those units – fighting in Sweden or dead in North America – had been. Air power was also something they were short on too: once again, what was left behind after other worldwide deployments was a shadow of the past massed strength.
The West Germans fought the Twentieth Guards Army. They were outnumbered though not to a significant degree. There was an East German reserve division meant to be assigned to support the Soviets yet it remained on the other side of the frontier throughout. The West Germans believed that those men were kept back due to Soviets fears that they would do terrible in a fight with West German forces and maybe even defect en masse. The Soviets had thought just the same in light of recent troubles across East Germany yet also the poor turn out of men. Regardless, the Twentieth Guards Army’s Soviet-only forces were more than enough for the West Germans. Those men poured over the border on the back of the opening horror of their gas attack and struck forward. The defensive line struck down the western side of the Elbe-Lateral Canal was somewhere the West Germans didn’t expect to hold for long but it fell very fast indeed. The Soviets used an airmobile battalion along part of it and those men, supported by specialist engineers, overcome demolition measures to turn the ground nearby into an impassable swamp. The Soviets pushed onwards. They engaged West German screening efforts and sought battle with them. It had been believed by the EDA that taking West German cities for hostage purposes would be a Soviet goal and so the West German I Corps’ commander was aiming to blunt an attack to take Wolfsburg first and the Hannover afterwards. It was his combat forces that the Soviets sought to take on though. None of the three motor rifle divisions with the Twentieth Guards Army (a command which had spent several years out of East Germany now) were first-rate formations but they did well in establishing contact with the West Germans despite those screening efforts to bring the heavy forces into the fight. It was a fight that the Soviets wanted and it was one that they got. The West Germans won a series of tactical engagements across a wide area for several days on the trot. The 26th Guards Motorised Rifle Division was left broken and the other pair (the 3rd Guards and 50th Guards) were on course to suffer the same fate. However, on came the second echelon Soviet forces. They pushed their two tank divisions forward – pushing onwards through waves of Luftwaffe aircraft striking at low-level on anti-tank missions despite all of the anti-air defences fired upon them – and out onto the Luneburg Heath. The West Germans fell back, shaking off combat with the motor rifle troops and going as far as the Aller River to run a defensive line where reservists from West Germany’s Landwehr had an impressive defensive position arrayed down that river. Through gaps held open, the West Germans rolled backwards and to the other side with three-quarters of their corps but left the rest, the 7th Panzer Division, free to fall back northwards to keep contact with where the Dutch were. The Soviets unleashed hell down the course of the Aller. Gas was used again along with thermobarics and napalm. Huge casualties came among the Landwehr men dug in and in the face of that. The Soviet’s 50th Guards then moved forward on the back of that attack towards Celle but the tank divisions didn’t follow them. Instead they moved west instead of directly southwest. At Engehausen and Winsen, past Celle, one tank division crossed the river to get at the rear areas of the West Germans. The other tank division chased after the 7th Panzer as they carried on seeking that fight. The 20th Tank Division got that tank-on-tank fight. The two of them duked it out for several days without a clear winner yet it was a West German victory overall because they had failed to be beaten. As to the Aller River, the 90th Guards Tank Division got in the West German rear among supporting forces and caused chaos between there and Hannover. There were three more West German divisions though. Three-to-one were not good odds at all, especially when the Soviet plan had been for at least two of them to be busy around Celle fighting the 50th Guards. Caught on the wrong side of the river and trapped, the Soviets fought onwards until they ran out of fuel and ammunition. No escape could be made and their surrender occurred on March 14th. Before then, two of those West German divisions then did as the Soviets expected all along, but only later, and went to Celle and then back over the Aller to engage the Soviets troops who had failed to get across despite all that they had done to the defenders. The Twentieth Guards Army fell backwards. It remained deep inside West Germany yet severely short of geographic and operational objectives. Further offensive capability in any major sense was now gone. The West Germans were looking to push them right back to where they came too.
The French and Belgians faced the Third Shock Army. Pre-war EDA intelligence believed, as NATO intelligence summaries always had, that in wartime this field army would act as a tank-heavy exploitation force – a tank army in effect – to go all the way to the Rhine once combined arms armies had done the main fighting. When it went into West Germany in March 1985, it consisted of three tank divisions and three motor rifle divisions (two of them being East German: one regular, one reserve) and fought in a combined arms role instead of as an exploitation force. The Belgians were in their NATO-assigned area whereas the French III Corps fought where the British would have been under former NATO command. The two sides were relatively-evenly matched in strength despite Soviet beliefs that they had the upper hand going into the fight. Attacking the Belgians, in difficult ground to the south where the Harz Mountains were, was a sideshow for the Soviets: they focused in the main on the French and believed that gas attacks on the Belgians would also keep them out of the fight to be addressed later. That was a mistake. Holding off East German reservists, half of the Belgians fought with the French against the main Third Shock Army advance over the border. The famous Helmstedt crossing and then the Elm Hills were early fights at the beginning of the invasion before the Soviets really got going. They made two big attacks on the ground with one motor rifle division apiece and used that airmobile brigade to seize a bridgehead around Wolfenbüttel right in the middle of the French III Corps rear areas to distract them. The French fought very far forward, further eastwards than the British would have fought in a NATO conflict, and just where the Soviets wanted them to. This cost the French dear and they came rather closing to suffering defeat. Only EDA air attacks over into East Germany – now the Luftwaffe was sending aircraft that way – saved the day when they slowed down the oncoming follow-up tank divisions. Realising just in time what was coming, the French pulled back. No one likes giving up ground which they had fought over and seen their fellow soldiers die to hold, yet the mass of Soviet armour (delays aside) was coming forward. Moreover, that Soviet airhead at Wolfenbüttel became an issue several days after landing. The West Germans with heavy Landwehr units had had them in-hand at first but the rest of the 37th Landing-assault Brigade was lifted in when EDA air power was shifted away from the area. Quickly, these men were on the move using their light armoured vehicles and linked up with the forwardmost ground penetrations. Now was the time, right now, for the French to pull back into new positions. Braunschweig and Wolfsburg were left for other West German reservists to defend in static fights while the French concentrated on dealing with Soviet and what they discovered were East German tanks. Each had a division of them – meaning another Soviet one was missing – showed up and went head-on into battle. The French divisions which they had here were small in peacetime yet full now in wartime of reserve units which included some light armour but mostly a lot of infantry armed with many anti-tank weapons. Without these, the Soviets would have run rings around and pounded the French into complete defeat. Extra men couldn’t save the 8th Infantry Division from being overcome though. A communications mix-up saw its links with the 109th Reserve Infantry Brigade (an independent force meant to cover gaps) opened up and the East Germans getting their 9th Tank Division through that opening. The 8th Infantry was crushed and obliterated by East German regulars doing very well indeed. The Belgians brought up their 16th Armoured Division to join in and nearly saved that French division which got caught and destroyed yet ‘nearly’ wasn’t enough. The Belgians were then in the way of that missing Soviet tank force. If they hadn’t have been there, the French could have faced the possibly of yet another defeat due to the Soviets getting forward fast and undetected. Caught east of the Leine River south of Hannover, the Belgians withdrew rapidly when the 7th Guards Tank Division lanced forward. This only opened up yet another gap, now between the rest of the Belgians to the south and the 16th Armoured which had come north. That gap was plugged by the entry of the Northern Army’s immediate reserve in the form of West German Fallschirmjager who weren’t going to be overcome in anything but a full attack considering the high ground west of the Leine which they arrived at and dug-into with haste. Inserting them here was necessary but still a waste of offensive capability. Meanwhile, the Third Shock Army ignored that (there were no assigned light units on-hand to engage them) and focused upon completing what they had come to do: trapping the French. If they stood, they were finished. If they withdrew, they would be caught and run down. Such was the intention yet that relied on the Soviet tanks looping around behind keeping up their advance. The Belgians fought them and had a torrid time in doing so. They did what they had to though, bringing the Soviets to a stop and allowing for incoming EDA aircraft and armed helicopters to attack them from above and giving the Belgians breathing room to reorganise. French artillery firing nerve gas shells were remarkably helpful in doing this, smashing those shells into Soviet rear areas away from the frontlines and having success there including hitting the divisional HQ. Nonetheless, despite their victory, half of their division was left combat ineffective and thousands of Belgian families would in the following weeks be left grieving when losses were revealed but for now they had saved the French III Corps from complete destruction. Without them, no matter what the French believed it their overall victory all being down to them when finally stropping the other two tank divisions, it was those Belgians who had saved their bacon in the end with their sacrifice.
Mid-March 1985: West Germany
Through Hessen in central West Germany, there were more French troops in forward positions. They were where the US Army Europe once was deployed to defend the Fulda Gap. North of them were West Germans also lined up facing eastwards and towards Thüringen. The Soviets had their Eighth Guards Army over there, reinforced from its peacetime rather strong strength now with East German reinforcements. The EDA troops were assigned to keep the Soviets and East Germans back from either making a rush for the distant Rhine across between Cologne and Bonn (a real West German concern) or going southwest towards the wider Frankfurt area, also next to the Rhine but closer. The EDA believed that the invaders could only do one of the two. They weren’t mistaken in this. There weren’t enough men available to both so the Soviets made the decision to only undertake one achievable goal rather than make two failures. They had their men march on Frankfurt going via the Fulda Gap. Fighting together, the French and West Germans aimed to stop them from reaching there. Doing that was just what the Soviets wanted them to do: beating the massed forces of both in battle was far more important than any city itself. The fighting in Hessen would be the decisive fight of the invasion, one which would draw in all available EDA and Soviet & Warsaw Pact reserves too.
The Eighth Guards Army attacked across northern Hessen with a trio of full-strength motor rifle divisions out front. Each sought to open gaps with the ‘winners’ getting support and the ‘losers’ being left to their own devices afterwards. Once across the Inner-German Border, they went for the Fulda River. The terrain here was reasonably good for an advance with heavy forces – better than anywhere else nearby – though not perfect. The Eighth Guards Army had long studied their forward route whereas the French hadn’t been here that long. Both West Germans on the right and French on the left engaged the three forward penetrations and when they reached the Fulda, the French unleashed chemical attacks in response to the earlier ones made when back near the East German frontier. Many bridging engineering units were caught by these with heavy losses yet not enough of them were killed or injured to cause any major delay. France didn’t have unlimited stocks of such weapons and the belief had been that this was the perfect moment to use them. It wasn’t enough. The 27th Guards Motorised Rifle Division fought the first of the West Germans and couldn’t get through them: they turned out to be those ‘losers’. Beside them, and then further southwards, both the 57th & 39th Guards each had more luck with the former getting between the West Germans and the French and the latter pushing the French back where they met them. That gap in the middle which the 57th Guards opened became the main attack. East German tanks followed first and turned northwards to get behind their fellow West Germans. Elsewhere, Soviet fears over Germans fighting Germans had seen this avoided where possible but here it was done. These were regulars, not reservists after all and thought the most reliable. They started their fight well and began getting deeper behind them while supported by Soviet forces. The other opened gap, forced by the 39th Guards, was then followed by a Soviet tank division which smashed into French units on the counterattack. The 3rd & 5th Armored Division conducted a perfect assault to break-up the penetration of Fulda Gap when moving forward yet couldn’t quite finish what they started. Much of the 39th Guards, plus independent screen units of riflemen and anti-tank units, held them off to allow for the tank division to escape the incoming storm. It then broke free and set off for the dash forward. Through the Fliede Valley they went first, when under extremely heavy air attack, before they reached the entrance to the Kinzig Valley. This was the way to Frankfurt with the heights of the Vogelsberg on their right and the Spessart on the left. Parachute insertions in the hills either side had been made of Spetsnaz units to engage what defences were below on the flanks but meanwhile the 79th Guards Tank Division pushed forward. The Eighth Guards Army knew that at this moment the EDA would have to throw in its emergency reserves.
This was perfectly correct. A West German panzer division (the 12th) raced around the Vogelsberg counter-clockwise to meet the Soviets at the bottom end while from each side French light Foreign Legion troops and West German Fallschirmjager converged inwards. Luftwaffe Alpha-Jets and Tornados streamed in alongside French aircraft, battling their way through Soviet air defences on the ground and a strong showing of their fighters above too. They were trying to stop the Soviets in the valley or, if not, then weaken them significantly for when they reached the flat plains around the Main River before Frankfurt. Once the EDA had made their commitment of their reserves here, the Soviets unleashed their own. Hidden behind the Eighth Guards Army back in East Germany was the Thirteenth Guards Army Corps: a mixture of several Soviet and East German units kept back ready for this. There was the 2nd Guards Motorised Rifle Division – the famous Taman Guards – along with the Soviet motor rifle brigade from East Berlin (with a big tank complement) and a pair of East German tank regiments released from their parent motor rifle divisions over in Poland. Between Bad Hersfeld and Hunfeld, the Thirteenth Corps tore forward. They went around the Vogelsberg following those West German panzers which had gone ahead of them and waited for the EDA response. This came pretty quick. The West German III Corps pushed forward hard against the Soviets and East Germans who were attacking them in a major counterattack. The East German 7th Tank Division fared better than the Soviet’s 57th Guards – everyone thought it would have been the other way around – yet still had to fall back too in the face of what came at them as they sought defensive ground to soak up the West Germans. The Eighth Guards Army held their flank position here despite this strong effort. All that the EDA had left was a partial division of Italians; one attached brigade had been dispatched the other month to Denmark. They were put in the way of the Soviet breakthrough and ended up facing the Taman Guards. The Italians put up a strong resistance but it was never going to be enough. They were crushed in a terribly destructive and deadly fight. They held out for longer than everyone else thought they would though and this gave their opponents the time to have one brigade of the 12th Panzer turn back around. The West Germans had hoped to get to the Italians in time. That didn’t occur but upon their arrival then went at once into the attack and ripped into the Taman Guards in the midst of their recovery from their fight with the Italians. Those other Thirteenth Corps units, the independent brigade and the tank regiments, were free of this fight though and still racing southwards. French Foreign Legion troops – an organisation strongly reinforced during the period of tension leading up to the war and a whole division being formed – tried to ease themselves out of their ongoing fight to get in the way but there were a lot of tanks, too many of them to do any damage to from the flanks when dropped off by helicopter runs. Only a lone brigade of West German Landwehr was available. This was of their tank heavy units which consisted of up-gunned M-48s. Forced to split up to face three attacking units attacking on separate axis’, the West Germans couldn’t stop all of them. They held both the two East German tank regiments – each with old T-55s – but not the Soviet brigade with its T-64 heavy tanks and all of those infantry carriers full of battle-hardened troops. The 6th Guards Motorised Rifle Brigade reached the Main at Hanau on March 13th. The supply lines running back were cut for them and this would doom them unless the 79th Guards Division would get out of the Kinzig Valley and reach them. That tank division had kept on moving, despite everything thrown at it and while behind schedule, emerged at Gelnhausen the next morning. It was just a short trip to Hanau for them. Linking up meant going through the rest of the 12th Panzer and this would trap all of those French troops still higher up in the Fulda Gap.
The 12th Panzer couldn’t do it. They were forced to retreat less be destroyed in-place. A link up then occurred and the Soviets were secure with their lodgement on the Main. They were now just upstream from Frankfurt and had seemingly won their fight. All they needed to do now was to crush the trapped forces caught in between, an opponent split into two. Doing so relied upon the Taman Guards holding where they were though and also the 12th Panzer not being allowed to get away. At this moment of victory, failure to do anything more came. French forces and those West Germans not at the very top of Hessen and held where they were there, all began to fall back. It was fast and sloppy with some men left behind, but the main body of the EDA forces escaped the trap. They went right through where the Taman Guards were. That elite Soviet Army unit had taken too many losses and was shredded when held firm as its position was passed by either side. It seemed like everyone wanted to take a shot at them too. Neither the Eighth Guards Army nor the Thirteenth Corps had any idea of what was happening unit it was too late. The French had lost their 12th Light Armored and 15th Infantry Divisions in the Fulda Gap but got the 3rd & 5th Armored Divisions out of there. The West Germans pulled out their worn-down 12th Panzer plus the majority of the deployed paratroopers; one cut-off battalion made a last stand around town of Bad Orb in the Spessart and a last stand it really was for them. Bad Orb was full of West German civilian internal refugees and there was no way out for them and the men who died trying to stop the Soviets from getting in there in the end. Tired and battle-weakened Soviet and East German forces couldn’t give chase against the rest of those more numerous EDA forces who fled once it was realised what was happening. Once the EDA had got the last of its men out that it would, while they couldn’t immediately go back into the fight again, neither could the Soviets give chase. This ‘great escape’ of their near-beaten opponents was certainly the greatest Soviet loss of their war objectives here in West Germany.
Bavaria was attacked from Czechoslovakia, not out of East Germany. There was an East German reserve division attached to the Eighth Guards Army which acted along the Inner-German Border but only in a defensive role alongside border guards. Across the frontier in Czechoslovakia was where the offensive came from. The Soviets had their Thirteenth Army and the Czechoslovak First Army was with them. Again, it was French and West Germans to fight, those dug-in in defensive positions. Part of the French were facing East Germany and were hoped to be distracted fearing an attack coming from that direction. The main assault was tasked to get into Bavaria, before encircling and crushing the rest of the EDA’s troops close to the Czechoslovakia frontier. Nurnberg and especially Munich were too far away to matter for the attacker’s objectives.
Very quickly, the plan fell apart. The French I Corps in north-eastern Bavaria (the historic Franconia region; where the Americans would have been in a NATO-led defensive mission) paid little attention to the East Germans – West German Landwehr screening units secured defensive positions back from the Inner-German Border – and they concentrated on the Czechoslovaks. They kept them from forcing open a gap with the motor rifle divisions they pushed forward and then then, once those were worn down, smashed forward in counterattacks. Requests for nerve gas use to finish this off was denied as the higher command believed that the French I Corps had this in-hand and the stocks of such weapons remained limited. To save their army, the Czechoslovaks moved forward one of their tank divisions. There was no gap for it to lance through but it was hoped that it could turn the tables on the French when they were coming forward. Opportunity came the way of the French to finish off the Czechoslovaks only a couple of days into the invasion. It wasn’t an opportunity passed up. A full-on eastwards assault was made and this went right after the Czechoslovak’s 1st Tank Division. They were caught exposed and smashed to pieces. Another tank division, the lower-grade 14th, was present in the First Army’s order of battle. It didn’t come forward but instead was urgently tasked to defend the approaches to the border and cover the Chep Gap alongside border troops. The French moved right up the frontier and engaged them at distance while dealing with smashed pockets caught in the rear. For longer than anticipated, several held out and the French had a harder time than expected yet in the end, they finished off all parts of the Czechoslovak Army left on West German soil. Consideration was given from above to order the French I Corps to go over the border and make inroads there. This was being discussed up until the very moment that part of the corps was urgently re-tasked to go south and assist the West Germans. The 1st & 7th Armored Divisions raced away because the Soviets had broken through the West Germans down there.
The Bohemian Forest and then the Bavarian Forest next were both between the Czechoslovak frontier and the Danube River. Czechoslovak paratroopers & airmobile troops from their 22nd Special Purpose Airborne Brigade supported smaller numbers of Soviet airmobile units in the valley of the Regen River there in Bavaria. They were meant to open the way for the Thirteenth Army to pour onwards. Initially, it took longer than planned and was thus seen to be going awry but once the successes came, they came fast. West German forces deployed this far forward as a political statement found that they had no way out. The 8th Panzergrenadier Division – reformed from its mountain mission with the Gebrigsjager units removed and forming their own large brigade – lost two thirds of its men with the rest only barely managing to escape to the northwest. Three Soviet motor rifle divisions poured forwards towards the Danube. The intention was to fight the rest of the West Germans on the eastern side of that wider river and destroy them there rather than have to chase them. However, facing a certain defeat if they stayed, the West Germans withdrew. The Soviets couldn’t stop them. They would have needed to have put strong forces on the Danube crossings via air insertions first to block a retreat yet didn’t have the men available due to them long having been sent elsewhere in the world. The 4th Panzergrenadier Division got over the Danube successfully. As to the 10th Panzer Division and that remaining brigade of the 8th Panzergrenadier, they both fell back towards the outskirts of Regensburg: the Landwehr had strong fixed defences there and the regulars intended to fight a mobile battle east and north of the small city. The Soviets sent half of the Thirteenth Army that way to give them that battle and win it. The 161st Motorised Rifle Division, followed closely by the 15th Guards Tank Division, engaged the West Germans near Regensburg and won a significant series of engagements. West Germans units scattered, falling back west and split apart. Most were caught on the wrong side of the downstream reaches of the Regen River (the upstream parts had earlier been fought over and here it met the Danube) and the Soviets this time could close those crossings by getting aircraft through to bomb them repeatedly while their 15th Guards Tank battered as much of the West Germans left fighting as possible. Two days of fighting saw the 10th Panzer eliminated. The French arrived but stayed on the other side of the river. While they couldn’t literally hear the screams for help from their allies across the Regen, it seemed that way with the sounds of battle being so close by. Going over meant destruction for the two French divisions though. They engaged Soviet small-scale crossing attempts and dropped shells over there yet stayed out of the fight while the 10th Panzer died. When the Soviets started moving again several days later, now the French were in a position to stop them. They fought with other West Germans – regulars and reservists – to bring to a violent end any more Soviet progress deeper into Bavaria. The Thirteenth Army was by now spent and unable to go any further. The West Germans would rue the day they ordered their army to go so far forward ahead of an invasion and be in the position they ended up in. This not only cost their II Corps half its pre-war strength but also exposed the long frontier with Austria too. While the war was being fought here, it was also being fought there as well. West German mountain troops with their 23rd Mountain Brigade ended up fighting there in a different but linked conflict.
The British Second Army entered the fighting more than a week into the invasion. Had they arrived earlier, they would have joined in sooner but going from entry points on the coast to the border fighting in one bound was impossible plus also suicide for them. The EDA requested that some of the leading elements, those who had come in first do to so. This would mean breaking up the whole force and using it to plug holes everywhere. Steadfast refusal came to do this. This was about politics but also military sense as well. Together as one, the British Second Army was a counterattack force far greater than the Soviets and the Warsaw Pact had in mainland Europe. Broken up, they would be whittled away and also have to go under EDA tactical command for those fights. There would be a time to go into battle and the first few days weren’t it. The Allies would use their troops at a time of their choosing: this too meant most of the supporting air power as well.
Forming up in Lower Saxony, on the western side of the Weser, the British, Irish and Spanish troops were organised ahead of battle. Three separate corps were formed. One consisted of heavier British forces, the second contained the Spanish and the third was made up of light British units plus the Irish. Efforts at concealment were made though only on an operational level. There was no strategic surprise which could come from the entry of Allied troops into the war in West Germany due to the Soviets not being completely stupid but the aim was to not let them understand how and where the use would come. When ready, only then, did the British Second Army go into battle. This was after there came an agreement with the EDA where the Dutch would join them as a fourth corps command – needed for operational geographic reasons – and the EDA let them generally do their own thing in how they fought. London and Madrid got serious concessions from Paris and Bonn on this. There was an unspoken undercurrent of ‘you need us or you are finished’ with the movement forward and at that time, this was very true. The Dutch had been pushed aside and neither the French nor the West Germans had the forces to plug the gap that the Soviets had opened up near Bremen. The Allies wanted to make their entrance here too because it would give them a clear shot at going over on the counteroffensive. They weren’t going to plug a gap but drive on the Inner-German Border… and bounce it too aiming for the Baltic Sea on the other side.
Late on March 15th saw the first British engagements take place to stop the Soviets in the Geest Gap. The next morning, they went forward on the attack. The Soviets hit them with gas and casualties came despite all defensive preparations. RAF Jaguars and Tornados appeared above Soviet formations and dropped bombs. These didn’t contain high-explosives but the products of Britain’s emergency wartime nerve gas programme (they had the knowledge and the technical base; now there was the political will) of several different agents. Britain, and therefore by extension the Allies, were back in the business of using chemical weapons in this war once again: the Soviets had used them first despite earlier decisions not to against any Allied forces encountered. Someone had ordered that from Moscow, someone who didn’t have the support of his comrades on that matter. As to the British, they would use them all the way on their ‘trip’ to Wismar, Rostock and Stralsund if need be. The political will on that was firm with no disputes at home on it. Meanwhile, British tanks and infantry advanced with the Spanish and Irish following them. Everything with the war in West Germany would now be very different.
Mid-March 1985: Central & South-East Europe
On the afternoon of March 6th, there was an attempted change of government in Belgrade. This wasn’t a violent coup d’état but rather a matter of votes and changing allegiances. It failed. Moscow’s man – someone tied to them greatly – didn’t succeed in his attempt. There would be no strong federal government imposed, ruled over by the Serb nationalist who tried to gain power, but instead Yugoslavia would remain its loose federal structure instead with equal representation among the ethnic-led republics which formed the state. Moreover, the Serb who’d failed to get his hands on the leadership was therefore unable to fulfil his promises made to Moscow. Yugoslavia’s borders weren’t about to be opened the next morning to ‘a friendly army passing through’. Recriminations would come for him personally later down the line when the KGB got rid of him though it really wasn’t his fault that he had lost that vote. All the pieces had been in-place. He had done his job. Disruption in the internal workings of the highest-levels of the Yugoslav state had come from aboard though and changed the minds of those about to vote. This wasn’t from the Soviet Union but another country far closer. In the absence of a friendly new leader who’d do their bidding, the Soviets quickly made an official request that Yugoslavia open its borders to allow that access of that ‘friendly army’ to traverse the northern reaches of their country. This was to be done near immediately: early the next morning. Guarantees of not violating Yugoslavian sovereignty, paying costs incurred due to disruption and so on were made. Nonetheless, the whole way in which was it phrased upset Belgrade. The request was very much a demand. The requirement for immediate reply was impossible to fulfil too. There was another vote of the country’s leadership. With this, they voted to refuse Soviet access. Opening their borders would drag the country into a war which Yugoslavia wanted no part of. The fear was that once the Soviets were in, they would never leave. Moscow had said that it wouldn’t violate Yugoslavian sovereignty with the passage of its army but Belgrade considered the presence of any foreign military forces on its soil to be a violation. In saying no, Belgrade understood that the Soviets would be displeased and would try to force the issue. They only had to look at how many of their European neighbours had said no to Moscow in recent months and suffered invasion. Full mobilisation (the country had been partially mobilised for some time now with horrible costs coming from that) was ordered to occur nationwide. Contact was made with several governments abroad. Yugoslavia curled up ready to defend itself though with only very little warning.
The Soviets entered Yugoslavia on the morning of the 7th just as they (joined by their Warsaw Pact allies) too crossed Austria’s borders. No diplomatic exchanges had been made with Vienna: Austria’s capital was hit with a missile attack on government buildings to announce that foreign armies were just ‘passing through’. In the following days, both countries would join with the EDA. They were each being invaded as part of a war which they had wished to remain neutral in. Alone, the Yugoslavs would fare better than Austria would yet the two countries joined with Western Europe in their coalition against the Soviet Union and Eastern European countries.
Austria and Yugoslavia were invaded by Soviet-led forces so as to better get at West Germany and also attack Italy. The fight in Austria was planned from the outset to be one opposed because the Soviets noted EDA forces on Austria’s borders ready to move in and had long caught wind of secret contacts between Vienna with Paris and Rome. Everything was thrown at overcoming Austrian resistance. With Yugoslavia it was different. Entry was made with the belief that at the last minute, Belgrade would still back down rather than face what was coming their way. Soviet delusion here was quite something. Part of that was a necessary effort at self-deception too though… if that could be said to make sense. They hadn’t lined up enough of their forces to take on Yugoslavia as a whole, just to cross its Slovene constituent republic and part of Croatia as well to reach Italy. If the Yugoslavs were going to fight, that made that far more difficult.
In a pincer movement, Czechoslovak and Hungarian forces closed in upon Vienna. Austria had many of its troops around its capital and they were engaged by this twin attack. Other Czechoslovaks (with their Fourth Army) crossed into the regions of Lower & Upper Austria and engaged defending forces while lining up a follow-up advance afterwards westwards across Salzburg and towards Tyrol. It took longer than expected to both gobble up Vienna and move forwards across regions of the country bordering West Germany. The Czechoslovaks had a difficult time. Vienna fell though and within a week their tanks were in Salzburg – the city after which the region around it was named – where they met with EDA troops. Tyrol wouldn’t be somewhere that any of them saw apart from as prisoners. This was because within hours of the invasion by the Warsaw Pact, the EDA moved too into Austria. Striking up from their deployment area in the northernmost reaches of Austria, French Alpine troops with their 27th Mountain Division secured the Bremmer Pass to link West Germany to Italy. That initial move was of vital importance for the EDA war effort allowing the shifting of troops and supplies through the Alps rather that going all the way around neutral Switzerland. Moreover, the geo-politics of a physical link was of significant importance. Italian mechanised forces joined them later in moving through Tyrol and linking up with the West Germans along their border with Austria. It took some time to meet the Czechoslovaks head-on but when they did, the smaller EDA forces held their ground at first and then made an attack to free Salzburg. The Czechoslovaks put on a poor show and suffered a serious defeat there. Their Fourth Army wasn’t beaten and remained on Austrian soil but they had no offensive capability left at the end of this. Fights with Austrian forces all the way westwards – including having to eliminate cut-off pockets – had worn them down yet when it came to it, they should have put up a better fight than they did. On paper they were stronger. On the ground, they were just a paper tiger. Only bad terrain and no major reinforcements stopped the EDA from following this up and chasing the Czechoslovaks all the way back to the Danube. The Soviets brought forward a heavy division of their own after the Salzburg fight. This was a conflict not over with their arrival though one which stalled in the meantime while each side moved into place.
Italian forces had gone into Austria the moment that they could do so. A specialised company of Alpine paratroopers jumped to seize crossing points on the Drava River ahead of incoming tanks meant to follow overland. They went expecting to find Soviet airborne forces there and jumped ready for that. Exchanges of fire did come, though with Austrian defenders. Not everyone in Austria had got the message in time that Italy was with them. Through an eventual turn of local good fortune after such bad initial luck, the firing between allies stopped. Many were dead – Austrians and Italians – with no Soviets in sight. Where were their paratroopers who surely should have been here? Anywhere but in the Drava valley, Italy’s first line of defence on Austrian soil. The tanks from Italy arrived soon enough. Mountain troops moved into Austria as well as heavy units and the Drava Line was established. Italy had defensive belts back on its own soil but this was their forward position. Austrian troops joined them in the coming days, all ahead of the incoming arrival of the Soviets who came only by land. There was a full Soviet combined arms army, the Thirty–Eighth, which moved through Hungary and towards southern Austria opposite Italy. It turned up in stages, held up due to both local Austrian obstruction and EDA air attacks yet also due to a mass of transport ad logistical delays. Rather than an iron fist as planned, it was nothing more than a trickle. The Italians would have loved to have done more than they did in the end yet the situation in Yugoslavia made things more difficult for them in terms of what forces they could fight with on Austrian soil. What they managed to do was to hold the Soviets back. The Drava valley was somewhere long-planned to be where to meet Warsaw Pact forces. The Italians had high-grade troops here and faced generally second-rate opposition. There was a severe lack of Soviet air power to challenge them too. When met and contained – at a high cost in terms of casualties – the question was asked was whether this was all that the Soviets had. Where was the follow up? Where was their war-winning force? The answers to those questions asked in terms of where was across in Yugoslavia.
Ljubljana Airport was an airhead where Soviet airmobile forces made use of as their opening move into Yugoslavia. They only had the one brigade – the 21st, from out of Transcaucasia – who were only told hours beforehand that they would be meeting an opposed landing on the ground. Earlier preparations had been for a ‘friendly’ landing with only Italian air strikes posing a danger. Yugoslavian resistance at Ljubljana was strong from both regulars and reservists who came to the fight, following the sound of gunfire like a battle of old. The 21st Landing-assault Brigade held onto the airport for two days before it was overcome and a surrender made. The defeat was quite something for the Soviet Army to take on the chin. Coming across through Slovenia and bits of Croatia were two field armies to meet those light units before they were lost. The Hungarians fielded one; the Soviets another. Neither of those were with the very best troops available. Such forces were elsewhere in the world such as in West Germany, China and North America. The Yugoslavians made short work of the Hungarian Fifth Army across Croatia and in a few places stopped them cold on the border itself. Other aspects of that fighting saw the Hungarians get some way into Yugoslavia and then be brought to a stop where they faced a mass of defensive fire and couldn’t go no further: Zagreb was a million miles away from the furthest penetration. As to the Soviet Fourteenth Guards Army, they went through Slovenia and towards Ljubljana. The airmobile troops there were meant to fight Italian troops entering Yugoslavia – that was always expected – and hold them back before the heavy divisions would then beat them inside Slovenia before rolling victorious into Italy. It was a good plan… and one the Yugoslavians and Italians, first independently, then together, messed up. The Italians put significant forces into Yugoslavia early. Some fighting between Italians and Yugoslavians occurred early on with mix-ups ahead of a formal alliance and the fighting spirit of Yugoslavian forces to defend their soil against anyone. Nonetheless, once they were working together, the now linked EDA forces held off the Soviets. Ljubljana was somewhere the Soviets couldn’t get anywhere near. They struck southwards instead, breaking for the Adriatic from their forward position at Celje. The terrain wasn’t favourable in any way for this and there were local defence forces everywhere on the flanks to join with regular Yugoslavian forces in front. In fixed battles where the Soviets got things their own way, those Yugoslavians irregulars were dead meat in the way of the Soviet Army. However, they had many advantages on home ground and their opponent wasn’t at their best. The many horrible defeats were joined by many fantastic victories. Italian heavy forces held the Soviets off too very far away from their own soil – there was still panic behind them in Trieste from the civilian population who fled expecting a defeat of their army – but the Fourteenth Guards Army would never see Italy. The Soviets were brought to a bloody halt. Italy and Yugoslavia paid dearly in terms of casualties, but the Soviets weren’t going nowhere. They were stuck in Slovenia and in Croatia. All around them, they were under fire. Was everyone in Yugoslavia armed and in their militia!?
Invading Yugoslavia had consequences for the Soviet Union beyond the humiliation which came with their armies being brought to a halt. Bulgaria, one of the strongest allies of the Soviet Union, was unhappy at the turn of events. Belgrade had done nothing wrong in the eyes of Sofia. It didn’t deserve what it got, especially when that city was bombed five days into the war by Soviet aircraft which caused thousands of casualties. Yugoslavian deaths meant nothing to the Bulgarian leadership yet they worried over that happening to them should they refuse to do exactly as instructed. Those instructions were for Bulgaria to launch an invasion of Yugoslavia. Bulgaria had some troops in North America but the vast majority of its men were at home: many lined up ready to move into Greece at some later point. Now, the Bulgarian Army was forced to move against Yugoslavia. Sofia bent to Moscow’s will and made an attack. It wasn’t an invasion which was going to succeed and there was a lot of half-heartedness in this. Bulgaria had to keep other men back. This wasn’t due to any threats from Greece nor Turkey – long neutralised by Soviet diplomacy – but because of Romania.
In Bucharest, Ceaușescu raged both publicly and privately against the Soviet attack on Yugoslavia, one joined by first Hungary and then Bulgaria. This was an outrageous act of aggression, he declared, against fellow socialists. Romania mobilised its army and into defensive positions. Bulgaria took that as an excuse to be wary of any offensive action – very unlikely indeed – and the Soviets themselves had to reorganise low-grade forces spread across the Ukrainian & Moldovan SSRs just in case the Romanians got any ideas about intervening in Yugoslavia. This put those mobilised Soviet forces in the Romanian rear and (in theory) capable of invading Romania direct. However, the newly-formed Forty–First Army consisted of men who should have been sent against either Yugoslavia directly (straight at Belgrade from out of Hungary) or to plug gaps across in Slovenia. They weren’t meant to be sitting on Romania’s borders. This series of events all happened very fast. The whole region as ignited in war with some countries and readiness for war among others. Romania would in the end do nothing and Ceaușescu would just talk but it threw all Soviet plans awry because that wasn’t known.
The Soviets didn’t have a single soldier on Italian soil and neither was Austria fully subdued. Italy’s army had won a victory despite Soviet denials of that fact: they too had their reserves behind them all uncommitted while Moscow’s cupboard was bare. Their war with Yugoslavia was looking as it would turn into a mini version of the China War. Bulgaria’s relations with the Soviet Union were suddenly strained and Romania was hostile. The long-secure geo-political position in the Balkans had gone wrong and looked doomed to collapse. Western Europe had too ‘captured’ Yugoslavia as they effectively brought it into their camp. This wasn’t the end of things here either, not by a long shot.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:26:05 GMT
Mid-March 1985: The Mediterranean
The joint French-Italian invasion of Malta had been delayed for several days due to a combination of factors. Soviet and Libyan air interference ahead of the landing had been stronger than expected, there had been last minute concerns over the defensive measures enacted on the ground and there had too be a successful Soviet submarine attack upon one of the Italian Navy’s biggest ships. With the latter, the helicopter cruiser Vittorio Vento – the Italian’s flagship – had to be taken under tow back to Sicily. If she’d been sunk, the invasion still would have gone ahead yet the attack upon it delayed things regardless of her managing to stay afloat or not. Helicopters flying from there had to move to other ships and fleet dispositions changed. Regardless, once that was done and overflights confirmed what exactly were enemy positions, plus some extra fighter sweeps too, the EDA launched their assault upon the island. They went in the very morning that Soviet forces crossed the Iron Curtain but that was only a coincidence.
Super Étendards from the aircraft carrier Clemenceau and Tornados from mainland Italy appeared above Malta. The French Navy jets attacked Soviet and Libyan ships in Maltese waters – some of those wounded from earlier attacks and taking shelter – while the Italian Air Force bombed the airport used by military aircraft. That airport was once RAF Luqa and the sight of the Italians bombing it would have brought back many memories for others. There was no time for historical remembrances now though. There was only the business of evicting the unwanted foreign occupiers. The Super Étendard attack-fighters flying close-in used rockets and bombs to attack ships yet out at sea, during a later strike against a flotilla of incoming Libyan warships racing towards Malta, there as the firing of missiles. These were air-launched versions of the Exocet. Very similar to the ship- & submarine-launched version, the air-launched Exocet had a better range though and was far more deadly in how it could be used when fired from fast aircraft on the attack. The Libyan Navy had a bad morning: six ships were blown apart in one volley. The French Navy was waiting for what was left of the Soviet’s Mediterranean Fleet to make an appearance but there was no sign of those big ships. They did send fighters though. Flying from Libya and over the water, these attempted to come to the rescue of the embattled air defenders of Malta. Two thirds of the fighters which had been on the island when the first EDA air attacks began back at the end of February were already destroyed and the rest were in trouble. Italian fighters joined in the air battles around the island. What the EDA was waiting for were Soviet missile-bombers to show up and interfere. They had many ships here with the amphibious fleet and also a battle fleet away to the southwest. The Soviets were expected to come at one and then the other. Fears of Backfires and what they could do were very real. The French knew exactly what such aircraft had done to US Navy carriers and didn’t want to see the Clemenceau suffer the same fate. To stop the Soviets, the French Air Force had recently dispatched a squadron of Mirage-2000 fighters – they didn’t have many of those to spare either – to Tunisia in the past week. Like Morocco had done first, then Algeria following them, Tunisia had joined the war on the EDA side. The trio of North African nations couldn’t provide that much to the war effort overall but basing rights was something important. While the wait was for those enemy aircraft, the fighting on the ground was underway.
Landing around Marsaxlokk, to the south of Valetta and its famous Grand Harbour, came Italian marines with their San Marco Battalion. They made a hard landing, an opposed assault where they came under fire. French and Italian naval commandos on the ground had done much to weaken the defences ahead of them but there were a lot of Libyans on Malta and they were heavily-armed. Thankfully, many of them couldn’t straight shoot though. The Italians were lucky. Their own naval gunfire support wasn’t the most-accurate either and left several defensive positions meant to be destroyed in fact unmolested. Italian landing craft emerged on the shoreline and deposited marines while firing their own weapons. Two companies of marines fought their way inland while the landing craft went back and got a third plus many vehicles to join them. Malta was full of Libyans, most of them Gaddafi loyalists. Gaddafi was dead but that wasn’t something known to the majority of them. Back in Tripoli, Haftar had transferred certain men there and moved others out. That was all supposedly administrative, nothing more… The followers of a dead man, led by some officers who knew the truth but kept that to themselves, didn’t do a very good job when it came to defending Malta. There was a brigade of them and they had a defended position which they should have held. The Italians were joined on the main island by the rest of their battalion and then French troops as well: the latter being men coming all the way from Reunion in the Indian Ocean via North Africa and then Sicily. While strong, the EDA here was outnumbered in terms of men. They also had fewer tanks – the Libyans had fifty T-62s; the Italians brought half as many M-60s – than their opponents who should have used their armour better. Yet the Libyans had dug their tanks into defensive positions to act as pillbox defences. EDA helicopters didn’t just deliver attacking infantry but also acted as gunships too, focusing upon those T-62s especially once they were met in contact. From first offshore – there were the ships Andrea Doria, Jeanne d’Arc and Orage with all of them capable of operating several helicopters – but then from soon enough on the ground, these were influential in the fighting. The Libyans fought as dismounted infantry against their opponents. They were overcome in four days of fighting, pushed back to the sea at the northern end of the island before a last-minute surrender. An attempt to make a siege of Valetta failed when not enough Libyans could get there ahead of those Italian tanks and infantry carriers (the latter whose machine guns joined the tanks in firing on infantry) who arrived first to bar the way. The French took up the fight pushing the Libyans until there was nowhere else to retreat to but the sea while the Italians entered Valetta.
The main island of Malta was now fully in EDA hands. What few Soviet aircraft were left on the ground were captured along with ground personnel – those directly tied to the aircraft operations yet also others in supporting roles – making a change from the many Libyans taken prisoner. More Italian troops from Sicily came across when light transport aircraft with rough-field capabilities made use of the beat-up airport and these lower-grade Italian reserves were soon busy with all of those POWs. They had been first planned to be sent here to fight what was expected to be gruelling fight for Valetta itself but now they had that far easier mission. There was still gunfire in Valetta though. Italian marines engaged select Libyan hold-outs and also some locals. There were Maltese who had actively cooperated with the Libyan occupation and been the face of the ‘fraternal assistance’ from Tripoli which had come last September. Libyan prisoners were taken alive in the capital; very few Maltese ended up joining them. In the meantime, on other incoming flights to the airport – which engineers were all over, trying to repair all that recent damage – there came a new government. Maltese nationals abroad at the time when the island fell into Libyan hands had formed an unofficial government-in-exile during the time of Western European neutrality. Now that was long over with, the Maltese were official. There was the legal necessity done to have them invite the EDA in. They established themselves in Valetta and now Malta joined the EDA directly rather than as a wartime partner like those in North Africa had done.
Neither the amphibious fleet nor the battle fleet of EDA ships near Malta ended up facing those Backfires or other long-range bombers such as Badgers or Blinders. Some were flying from Libya and the ships were in-range yet the aircraft were busy with another task. They were engaged in a stand-by mission ready to strike at the carrier Foch when it opened attacks on Crete and the Soviet presence there on that Greek island.
But the French Navy wasn’t approaching Crete with their other carrier.
The Foch was in the Ionian Sea – covering the air routes between Greece and Italy – along with the cruiser Colbert and other escorts on a defensive mission. They were waiting in ambush because the EDA believed that the Soviets would soon either strike hard at the southern parts of Italy or move forces up into the Adriatic. Why were the Soviets convinced that the Foch was near to Crete and soon to attack? Part of that was that they had convinced themselves that the French would do that (as the French believed that the Soviets would be active in the Ionian Sea; each side getting the other’s intentions wrong), though also there was a deception effort underway. West of Crete, the French had a civilian cargo ship used as a decoy carrier. It had a skeleton crew and was emitting low-level electronic signals marking it out as the Foch. Kill me, was the message: kill me, if you can catch me. That ship was doing a dance across the sea while emitting false radar returns making it out to be escorted as a carrier would be. For over a week, Bears and submarines hunted for this elusive carrier. They ran themselves in circles, chasing it as far south as Egypt and all the way east to off Cyprus. Finally, the deception was uncovered by a visual sighting made and this was confirmed that this was the ship which had given them the run-around. The cargo ship was torpedoed with haste. There was more than that which came in response though. Several admirals were removed from command and another shot. The stupidity of falling for this trick was a humiliation for the Soviets.
All of that effort spent chasing after a fool’s errand cost them dear. The EDA naval forces in the Central Med. were joined by Allied ships – Spaniards mainly but also a couple of Royal Navy warships – who came across to join them. The Soviets still had to worry about Crete and they too had to keep an eye on the situation with Libya. With the latter, it wasn’t the issue with their enemies making a move that way but what Haftar was up to. Libya was doing what other Arab allies of Moscow were doing in turning their backs on the war… and also the Soviet Union too. The Soviet Navy and Air Force were being ordered to prepare for offensive action against such nations should they act direct rather than doing what they were in the shadows. Whether they could any longer do anything like what was being drawn up, and whether they could do that if the EDA & the Allies moved to intervene, was open to interpretation. Being unable to though would mean further ‘captures’ by the Soviet Union’s enemies and a collapse of its whole Middle East position.
Late March 1985: Europe
Soviet forces on the ground in Sweden remained remarkably small. There were less than eighteen thousand men all told with a third of those being non-combat troops. If they hadn’t held onto such a small area of land with water on two sides, the Swedes would have long pushed them out into the Baltic. Fully mobilised, the Swedish Army was huge. The position which Sweden was in though had helped the Soviet’s survival by keeping many of those assigned to other tasks. There were many Swedish forces in the north of the country, waiting for the Soviets to push their armies through Finland and onwards; the Swedes intended to fight them – and any Finns who wanted to join in – over on Finnish soil. Other large Swedish forces were tied up on coastal defence missions ready to stop another invasion coming by sea and air. The wider Stockholm area, the long Baltic coastline stretching south from there and islands such as Gotland & Oland were full of more Swedish troops. However, no further invasion was looking likely. With the fight that their EDA partners were in down in West Germany with the Soviets, plus all their wars abroad too, there were no more troops to conduct a further invasion. The Swedes had the same intelligence on Soviet forces in North America and China like the EDA had and the Allies (who maintained independent contacts with Sweden through Norway) had told them the same. Still, the Swedes kept many troops back. They’d been invaded with a bolt from the red strike before and weren’t willing to see that happen again. However, some of their internal reserves kept back to push another landing back out were released from that mission. These were those in the south of the country and they converged upon the Soviets already in their nation. Joining with their French and West German allies – both who wanted to soon enough send their troops down to West Germany once this was all done with – a big, hopefully final attack was made.
The French and West Germans fought at the northern end of the Soviet lodgement, near to Helsingborg; the Swedes struck near to Malmo and Ystad. Everything was thrown at the fight. There were civilians in the way and this was taken into consideration during the air strikes and artillery barrages made but it was understood that there would still be many casualties incurred among them. There was nothing that could be done to avoid that though. The actual cities of Helsingborg and Malmo weren’t directly hit by the mass of firepower. The Swedes were still hoping for a magic solution with both in the end. Return fire came to oppose the ground assaults which followed that mass use of fire support. The West Germans had a particularly tough time around Angelholm where the Soviets fought like crazed devils against them. There was the suspicion on the part of them that because they were ‘German’, their opponents did that. However, while there was some of that, the strong resistance met was down to local factors on the ground with a fearsome KGB officer on the back of the local commander of the Soviet troops there. The Swedes had a fierce fight with Soviet Naval Infantry when moving towards the port of Ystad and again this was down to who was in-charge. Later, it was discovered that several Soviet tactical commanders had been influenced by messages from home where they were told that reinforcements were imminent through Angelholm (there was an airbase there) and Ystad. Those were lies. There were no reinforcements coming. There was no resupply of ammunition either for the Soviets. The men who fought gave all that they had in terms of return fire because there was meant to be more coming. However, EDA air and naval forces had shut off all routes in. The West Germans had several potent submarines off Ystad and the port of Trelleborg too. They’d already sunk several ships and no more were coming into each. In the skies, EDA fighters had won local control of the air. Faced with Soviet fighters, they were challenged in that yet they made absolutely certain that no transports laden with men nor air-freighters with cargoes inbound could make it through.
The Soviets were soon down to emergency stocks of ammunition: enough to make a last stand. Urgent requests were made for support from home. This time they were told the truth. No more lies came, just honesty: you are on your own. The Swedes found that soon enough the commander of the Naval Infantry brigade (who too led a tank regiment from the Soviet Army in support of them) sent men forward to negotiate a ceasefire. Soviet terms offered weren’t acceptable and were refused at the first attempt. A second offer was made after another day of fighting, one where the Swedes had taken Ystad and were halfway to Malmo. Those offered terms had changed yet still the Swedes rejected them on the basis that they would only accept a surrender. This counteroffer was then accepted. Things came to an end with the fighting soon enough after that due to worries over a violent reaction from the KGB behind the lines if more time was wasted. Sweden got its miracle and Malmo wasn’t going to be fought over. There was no miracle for Helsingborg. Some Swedish troops from the south came north to aid the French-led EDA effort to fight for the territory held inland from there and this did much good. However, the Soviets fell back into the city. They were airmobile and motor rifle troops who were mainly on foot. What ammunition was left for that last stand was made. Propaganda efforts were made to get the Soviets to give in. One French officer who went forward to talk to the Soviets was shot down; a Swedish officer was left seriously wounded trying to do so too. All that came out of Helsingborg was gunfire. The Soviets had surrounded themselves by civilians and were holding out. There was a KGB colonel in-charge – a political officer who’d personally executed half a dozen senior Soviet Army men and promised that the families of other men who might want to step in would suffer should they – and he wasn’t giving in. A fanatic, a fool… call him what you might. He led the last resistance to a restoration of Swedish control over the last occupied parts of their country. In the final battle which came, half of the French troops and the West Germans both stayed out of it. The French 9th Division went into Helsingborg alongside the Swedes. March 29th saw the last of the Soviets overcome with a destroyed city and thousands of casualties – soldiers of both sides and many civilians – taken. The 9th Division was in no shape afterwards to leave Sweden to go straight into another fight. The paratroopers with the French 11th Division – plus that mixed brigade of West Germans – weren’t at full-strength, but they left nonetheless and transited through Denmark to enter West Germany afterwards. The Kattegat which they crossed plus the Oresund and increasingly the very western edges of the Baltic Sea proper were waters by now relatively secure for the EDA. Danish, Dutch and West German warships & submarines, supported by land-based air power, had cleared the last of the Soviets out. They were still active off the coasts of East Germany and Poland yet that was it. Months ago the big ships of the Soviet Baltic Fleet had got out and into the open ocean (other ships going down in the attempt) and what was left had been no match for these EDA naval forces when combined. They took losses and spent every moment worrying about further underwater – or even above-water – nuclear use, but the Soviets were beaten back. Once Helsingborg was finished with, eyes turned to Bornholm and the Danes’ wish for that island to be liberated some time soon.
British military lore would for many long years afterwards celebrate the famous ‘left hook’ manoeuvre made in late March through northern West Germany. It was argued that this won the Battle for West Germany. The British Second Army did all that they did, beat who they beat and advanced as far as they did all in a very short space of time. That was true. Their actions did force a strategic defeat of a major portion of Soviet forces on West German soil. However, the attack was made after the EDA had fought the Soviets and East Germans to the bloodiest standstill imaginable. Casualties across West Germany among military personnel from several countries and local civilians were immense. The physical destruction in some places was unimaginable where intense battles had taken place. The land was poisoned in other areas and there was general war damage in many more sites away from the parts of the country fought over. The armies of Western Europe had faced down the Soviet’s attack and stopped it. British entry into the fight had cut off the most dangerous penetration – that was certainly true – yet others were stopped by EDA forces and those were away from the north of the country where the British Second Army went on its destructive rampage. The EDA was in no position to counterattack after the Soviets had come to a stop. They had used reserves all over the place to plug holes. The British came in at the right moment for them to do so. That arrival into battle and the British intentions were a cause of contention between the UK and the EDA too. Back in London, the War Cabinet had approved a projected operation which wouldn’t have seen that ‘left hook’ as it occurred on the map take place. The clockwise sweep east then south which occurred wasn’t what was initially foreseen. London had wanted to see the British Second Army drive across the top of Luneburg Heath, cross the Elbe on the other side and drive along the East German coast as far as possible. This would put them deep into East Germany in an undefended area where there were military bases aplenty and civilian infrastructure useful for military purposes. From there, Berlin could be threatened from behind and there were plans to base Tornado strike-bombers on East German soil which put Poland – even the Soviet homeland – in range of RAF bombs. The British Second Army was moving while disputes over this took place. In Paris, urging was made for instead a fight to be made to liberate West German soil instead. The same aim was sought by certain members of the War Cabinet and a change of mind at the top came in the face of this pressure. This was in the end about military matters rather than politics (Britain’s generals wanted the left hook) despite the later arguments over the sudden change in direction. New orders were sent to the fighting men in the field. London’s about-turn angered many in uniform at the front yet politicians and the political generals at home, plus those on both sides of the Channel, were eventually satisfied with what came. More than satisfied: elated in fact.
Using the Dutch (now under operational command of the British Second Army; no longer assigned to the EDA’s West German Northern Army) to cover their inner & left flank, the British I Corps raced in the direction of Hamburg and first engaged the fighting units of the Soviet Second Guards Tank Army. The Dutch had already softened them up and the rate of advance – under strong RAF air cover – was fantastic. The Elbe was reached between Winsen and Lauenburg. The very top of the Elbe-Lateral Canal was crossed over during this with the British now far inside Soviet occupied areas. Here the I Corps turned south (the left hook) while the Spanish I Corps moved into Holstein with the eventual goal being the Baltic Sea but just the West German shore instead of anywhere in East Germany. Once going south, the four British armoured divisions tore forward. They operated both sides of the canal as they went across the Luneburg Heath and even further inside the Soviet’s rear. Where the Inner-German Border jutted forward in the Altmark region, that too was crossed. There were voices in London, Paris, Bonn and Rome about the dangers of doing so, but it was a line on a map and right in the way of the advance. That territory was too full of enemy forces. It was those that the British were here to fight. They avoided the frontline combat units that the EDA had brought to a standstill and instead engaged rear-area forces. There were supply dumps, SAM sites, POW holding points, signals stations, helicopter parks, field hospitals, KGB temporary facilities and administrative sites. The Second Guards Tank Army and the Twentieth Guards Army next in-line had these established behind the lines on West German soil. What ‘fun’ the British had going through them! They shot up everything in-sight. Any enemy soldier who stood in their way was run down in a furry of violence. Soviet anti-tank units and security troops, KGB blocking units, and East German border guards all witnessed Chieftain & Challenger tanks come crashing towards them as well as FV432 & Saxon armoured vehicles who brought with them plenty of infantry. The British didn’t have it all their own way. They did run into trouble. Sometimes this was down to their own hurry to keep going, other times they were just plain unlucky. Soviet gas attacks came and they tried to bring aircraft too in effectively to stop the terribly destructive advance. Those failed to have any effect upon the advance yet the gas did cause many casualties among British TA and Irish soldiers with the British Second Army’s III Corps as they held onto the rear areas and were positioned facing inwards towards East Germany behind the forward advance. More British III Corps elements – the 6th Airborne Division – went into action at a late stage. They landed near Gifhorn, a West German town on the Aller River in Soviet hands. This opened the way for the I Corps to bounce over that river and then slide between the urban areas of Wolfsburg and Braunschweig without stopping. There were East Germans tasked to fight against the defenders of each and they had the British flowing all around them and taking pot-shots at them from behind. Many East German units were ripped to shreds; others surrendered rather than face that.
Past Braunschweig (historically known as Brunswick) the advance slowed. The West German I & French III Corps had the majority of the Soviets stuck at the frontlines but there were some heavy units in the rear who had been ordered to reverse course. East of Salzgitter – where under NATO the British I Corps would have fought – there were some significant engagements with Soviet Third Shock Army units turned back around. Both the 3rd & 4th Armoured Divisions broke off their cavalry charges forward to deal with this, yet the 1st & 7th Armoured Divisions carried on despite opposition and challenging terrain. They started turning southwest and began linking up with Belgian units in the following days: first contact was made with their paratroopers before the Belgians’ 1st Infantry Division and West German Fallschirmjager alongside them was firmly established. The trap was closed on March 26th, eleven days after the British starting moving. One Soviet field army had been blown through – the Dutch had given everything in support of tying down the rest of the Second Guards Tank Army – while two more were trapped. The Soviets had their Twentieth Guards & Third Shock Armies now caught in a trap. EDA forces were at their front, still fighting to keep them between Wolfsburg-Braunschweig and Hannover while behind them the British held their ground while edging forward inwards now.
The trap was shut and those caught inside were to be squeezed. Tens of Soviet soldiers were either going to die or surrender as the British and the EDA finished off Moscow’s soldiers in the north of West Germany. Orders came from Moscow for the encircled men to fight their way out… they weren’t going to be able to do that.
Through Hessen and down across Bavaria, the last weeks of March saw far less fighting than earlier in the month. Both sides were unable to give anything more than holding their ground and making localised counterattacks. Each had no reserves left to enter the fight. The EDA continued to worry about a Soviet third wave despite intelligence reports which said there wasn’t one coming. The Soviets were distracted by the fighting to the north and also what was happening down in Austria and Yugoslavia: air support was shifted away to both fights and this stripped their armies elsewhere in West German soil of the last of any real offensive capability.
While the frontlines might not have moved much, there was tremendous ongoing fighting around them. Parts of West Germany were starting to resemble the Western Front battlefields of World War One. There was more mobility available on paper for both sides, much more, but neither could use it properly. Their opponents dug-in and held. Men were ordered to attack into those defences. This they did and died in the effort. Frankfurt remained threatened by the Soviets and the EDA wanted them removed from Hanau and driven back away. The Czechoslovaks were static on their border where they had been pushed back to and concerned themselves over a French attack on Prague. Along the Danube downstream from Regensburg and all the way to the Austrian frontier, the West Germans fought here against what was an overall weak Soviet effort to get over that river and deeper into Bavaria. Thousands died every day. Thousands more were wounded. West German civilians still streamed westwards after all the conventional fighting and the use of gas. There was a fear of both, plus the use of nuclear weapons too. No matter how far they went – into France or the Low Countries – if the war went nuclear, those running would still be in the firing line of a fight which both sides were prepared for. The French nuclear forces were miniscule in comparison to what the Soviets had but there were there and waiting. No nuclear attacks came though: just a whole lot of conventional fighting with all of those casualties and destruction caused. West Germany’s Landwehr bore much of the cost of that fighting, especially the close-in combat around towns and cities which they defended. When the war was over, so many of them would be going home only in body-bags.
In Austria, the government was established in Innsbruck. Much of their country was under occupation, other bits were being fought over. The government was pretty far back in the rear and protected by French troops though still felt under great danger. There were many of them who had only just escaped with their lives when Austria was attacked and invaded; others hadn’t been so fortunate. Unoccupied Austria was under martial law like Innsbruck was. From that city, Austria made a formal petition to join the European Defence Alliance (plus the EEC as they were considering the post-war world) but only after fulfilling French demands to rid their administration of many untrusted people. The Austrians didn’t bend easily on this but agreed in the end: they would later allow for a transfer of custody of several of these people to French control as well, something only possible politically due to the situation of the war they were in. Austrian troops were fighting alongside French, Italian and West German forces against the Soviets and their Warsaw Pact allies. Vienna was deep in the occupied zone. That fighting took place down the middle of Austria, before it narrowed to the west. The biggest of those was now outside the Drava Valley. The Italians pushed forward from their initial blocking positions, doing what they can to get the Soviet Thirty–Eighth Army as far away from Italy as possible. The Italians did well yet they could have done more than they did. It was just a matter of not having enough men. Their 3rd Corps was fighting here and this included reserve units. However, other Italian troops were back at home – in the south of their country – or over in Yugoslavia.
It was the Italian 5th Corps which was fighting in the latter. Alongside the Yugoslavs, they were fighting in Slovenia. Italy had many troops here including a lot of their armoured units. The Yugoslavs continued to fight well and the overall situation remained good when it kept to keeping the Soviets as close to Hungary as possible. Still, in Rome and Belgrade, there was a wish to push the invaders back even further. A joint offensive was made in Slovenia alongside a Yugoslav-only effort in Croatia. Progress was made yet it wasn’t fantastic. More time was needed to wear the Soviets down here. The advance petered out in the end and there was liberated territory alongside a beaten-back opponent yet it wasn’t like they had forced all the way back to the border. Italian and Yugoslavian aircraft were busy and so too were Yugoslav militia. There was a lot of fighting throughout the occupied parts of the country. In many places it was quite brutal. The Yugoslavs had a history of fighting guerrilla warfare and the Soviets had a history of combatting such actions in their own way. This worked together to make what was seen come so soon – very quickly – on Yugoslavian soil. Down in Belgrade, there was still smouldering remains of damage done after the Soviets had struck heavily at the city a few days into the war though that attack hadn’t been followed up. The government remained there. Bulgarian troops were on Yugoslav soil to the southeast but that invasion was nothing more than a border incursion. The Yugoslavs felt confident that they would win this war. It may take some time, but in the end, victory would come for them. The nation was united pretty well in the face of what had come and Yugoslavia wasn’t alone. Belgrade agreed to enter the EDA – that enemy ‘capture’ feared by Moscow pre-war was now complete – and also opened talks about possible later membership of the EEC, though with many reservations about that. Yugoslavia was broke and would need a lot of economic help once the war was won. Entry to the EEC would be on Yugoslavian terms though… Brussels would have something to say about that. Until then, there was still a war to fight.
March 1985: The Middle East
Nothing happens in a vacuum. News spreads but bad news always spreads faster. Across the world, the various warring powers sought to influence the leaders of others through information… and also a healthy dose of disinformation too. Word of defeat and disaster was heard throughout the month around the world considering the global position of the Soviet Union. Not all of that was true or properly accurate yet much of it was though. Governments used their intelligence services (or relied on the activities of other’s) to find out what was going on. Once analysed, the bad news – ahead of anything good – which came on how the war had turned against the Soviets in many places was fully understood for what that all meant: those countries had backed the wrong side. Maybe the Soviets could turn the situation around, yes, but it didn’t look likely. There were several countries who were looking for a way out of this war.
Across the Middle East, there were those seeking to leave the conflict which they had joined. That didn’t mean turning actively against the Soviet Union yet there were concerns that in Moscow, they would see things that way. This brought the hesitation and the slow easing back of the role which they were playing rather than an abrupt halt which could see Moscow turn upon them. It was Assad in Syria and Saddam in Iraq who were doing this. The two dictators – enemies but whose countries were allies of convivence – didn’t want to end up like Gaddafi. Neither would each want to find themselves in the same position that Tirado López did before the end of March. They were seeking a balancing act, one which would bring about their own personal survival. That was key for each man. They had personal control over the countries of their birth and enriched themselves from that. The two of them were still relatively young men with many years ahead that they hoped to see before later their sons succeed them. To bring this about, they wanted to get out of this war and to do so without being killed by foreign assassins or nuclear attacks.
In the two nations, there were unfortunate problems which cropped up and accidents which took place. These brought about complications for the participation of each and their territory for the wider Soviet-led war effort. The borders of Iraq and Syria weren’t seeing war on them and so they were sort-of backwaters in the global conflict. This meant that what happened in them wasn’t as significant as it could have been had there been fighting in the Persian Gulf or, say, up in Turkey. The Soviets noticed the flurry of issues yet it took time for a pattern to emerge and be identified due to how unimportant it all was. Convoys were held up and ships delayed but it was nothing that was going to change the course of the war that they were fighting elsewhere. Once it was all put together, of course it was no coincidence. All those issues just couldn’t happen at once and not be connected. There was paranoia and then there was common sense: this was a case of the latter. It was reported up the chain of command.
Assad and Saddam didn’t coordinate their activities. There was an understanding between them though – one broken through outside sources rather than any high-level direct cooperation – on the matter. Neither was going to turn against the other at this time and work to bring either down at the behest of Moscow. Such an unofficial agreement had been broken by those outsiders in the form of other Arab countries not involved in the war yet at the same time not working for Allied or EDA interests. Egypt, Jordan and Saudi Arabia were all involved in this and doing it for themselves. Saudi Arabia helped to aid Iraq in being able to do what it did by easing back with its provocative stance towards Iraq – one which it regarded as only defensive – at this time. Moreover, using contacts in Jordan, the Saudis agreed to do this at the same time as Israel eased off with its ongoing actions in Lebanon and the Golan Heights where for months now clashes had occurred with Syria. Syria wasn’t given a free hand to do what it wanted – Israel wouldn’t stand for that – but it no longer had to face so many ‘defensive and pre-emptive’ Israel air & commando strikes. Tel Aviv’s motives here complicated. They too wanted Soviet allies across the Middle East – the red wave on the map – to leave the war but theirs was so that in the future, there wouldn’t be a solid bloc of united opponents. At the same time, they didn’t want to see a united bloc of any form created as well. Israel worked to make sure that these various countries didn’t trust each other even when working together. It wasn’t easy to do.
The war between Egypt and Libya remained a frozen conflict. It and the American reaction to it had been one of the significant events on the road to the Third World War yet once that larger conflict had started, this fight had already died down to nothing more than border skirmishes. Libya had openly aligned itself with the Soviet Union and Egypt had backed off in the face of that. Meanwhile Gaddafi had gone after Malta and tried to punch above its weight as a world power. Mubarak – the replacement for Sadat after Libyan-backed Palestinians had killed him – hadn’t forgotten what Gaddafi had done. If he had had the opportunity, and thought he could get away with it, he would have seen to it that Gaddafi got his just deserts. Gaddafi was dead though, killed by the Soviets for daring to act independently. His replacement was a very different man that his predecessor. Egypt had first been under the impression that Haftar was a Soviet proxy yet that fast became something dismissed. Haftar was no such thing. He was a man out to prove himself and with an extremely strong independent streak: he also quickly showed no aversion to enriching himself. Mubarak could deal with a man like that. Armed with Saudi money and contacts that Haftar fast established with the neutral Gulf Arab Monarchies, Egypt sought to woo the new leader of Libya. This wasn’t going to be easy. It was something that needed to be done quietly as well. However, Mubarak believed that it could be done. He did so for he shared the exact same opinion as those in Tel Aviv that the Soviets had no place in the Middle East and that a united collection of Arab nations fulfilling Moscow’s wishes – even if that was only on the surface – was only bad for everyone else. Maybe Israel would get the negative attention first but then Egypt would be next. Border fighting ceased and the approaches were made to Haftar to get him to lead his country out of the war which Gaddafi had taken Libya into. Egypt had just started this when several of Libya’s other neighbours all went to war in support of Western Europe. Algeria, Chad and Tunisia were all now actively aligned with the EDA against the Soviets. Yet, none of them moved against Libya and Haftar didn’t attack any of them either. There was no conflict now on any of Libya’s borders accept the short fight where Malta was liberated. Haftar showed no sign of taking any hostile action anywhere else, near or far. He hadn’t broken with Moscow publicly though it was no longer doing the Soviet’s bidding.
What the Iraqis and Syrians did, plus also hints of this ‘axis’ between Cairo, Riyadh and Tel Aviv, came to the attention of the Soviet leadership. The Libyans unfriendliness was already noted yet now there was a region-wide theme to this. It was all complicated when it came to the details – with alliances between supposed mortal enemies – but overall it was simple: Moscow’s allies were working with allies of the United States. The Americans had little involvement in this that the KGB could find though they were sure it was there somewhere. Those who reported this all the way to those at the top expected the strongest action to be taken. Gaddafi’s earlier ‘betrayal’ had been harshly dealt with there had been strong threats made to other countries such as Panama before. All of this surely would be stopped. There was a wait for the decision-makers to start issuing orders. That wait went on…
…and on.
Nothing came of it. Moscow was distracted by even more troubling events elsewhere: the wars in North America, Western Europe and China. Their influence abroad through such a significant region was ever-so-slowly crumbling and not being stopped.
March 1985: China
Elsewhere in the world, March was a terrible month for Soviet armies. They were forced into retreat in North America while in Western Europe, others were brought to a stalemate. However, in China, they carried on with their string of victories which had led them all the way across this huge country. Finally, the last parts of the regular People’s Liberation Army were destroyed in battle. Elements of the PLA from across the southern reaches of China – all weakened heavily by desertion – had marched northwards on foot through the chaos which affected so much of their nation away from the frontlines. They had come to fight a last battle, a victorious one their commanders hoped. The Soviet Army smashed them to pieces with conventional and chemical attacks. There was also a nuclear attack upon the PLA when one artillery unit was detected as readying to fire several thermonuclear-armed shells and so was destroyed beforehand in a massive strike. Permission was granted for further attacks to be made, this time against nuclear-capable artillery units with the reasoning that they might have more hidden weapons. There was plenty of motivation for Soviet commanders to suspect that their opponents could have such weapons and using them themselves made their follow-up fights against the remains much easier. The Fifth Guards Tank Army – a tank army home-based in Belorussia which would have been mightily-useful in the fight against the EDA – took control of the coastline stretching down from Ningbo to Xiamen: the provinces of Zhejiang and Fujian all fell into their lap. This put Soviet troops on the coastline opposite Taiwan. Elsewhere, the First & Sixth Guards Tank Armies (out of the Ukraine; again who should have been in Western Europe) moved inland. First they rolled across Jiangxi before into Hunan. These larger inland provinces were full of nuclear holes, old and new. These regions of China were also full of partially-organised Chinese militia units. None of them could stand up to the mass of tanks, armoured infantry, self-propelled artillery and attack helicopters as the PLA had also failed to do. The Soviets were running perfect combined-arms warfare in China across difficult terrain where there was mountains and a lack of transportation routes. They had problems moving forward due to terrain and infrastructure, but not because of the opponents fielded against them. Once March was over, those three tank armies, along with the mixed field armies also in China, were free to keep advancing next month. The had orders to keep going in a south-western direction and through Guangdong, Guizhou and Guangxi… all the way into Yunnan as far as the borders with the Indochina countries. There was nothing that was going to stop them. Immense troubles with guerrillas in the rear were ongoing yet they couldn’t bring the Soviet Army to a halt. The terrain and the long supply lines too couldn’t stop them. It had only been politics before which had put the breaks on. Those restrictions had now been lifted.
Nanchang lay inside the now-occupied Jiangxi. That city was where the Chinese Government under Hu had been located since they’d left Beijing. Political considerations beforehand had slowed the Soviet advance on the ground towards that city like they had blocked any assault along the coastline facing Taiwan. There had been that political settlement sought by Moscow. They had wanted Hu’s government to see sense. Further efforts were made at diplomatic contact with them. These had been firmly rebuffed before Nanchang had then been abandoned by the government who went all the way to Nanning, not far from the Vietnamese frontier. Taiwan had earlier refused to work with the Soviet Union and while they were doing what they were doing along bits of the Chinese coast, they weren’t about to land their full army and take the coastal provinces. Once Hu was confirmed to have left Nanchang, Soviet tanks went that way. Officially, the political settlement sought with China was still on the table as far as Moscow was concerned. Yet, at the same time, the Soviet leadership was now considering ‘other options’ on the matter. These two approaches were being made when it came to eventually bringing an end to the China War. The ‘other options’ were around putting a new government in Beijing, one which would be under complete Soviet control yet maintain the fiction of independence. It was understood that this would be opposed within China but as part of such a scheme, Beijing-controlled forces – Chinese soldiers – would start fighting other Chinese rather than just Soviet soldiers fighting Chinese soldiers. There also remained that official policy of seeking a settlement with Hu. That was what was still wanted as a future here in China. Every day though, as Soviet forces took over even more of the country, and Hu remained moving further away and refusing to talk, those ‘other options’ were starting to look like the ‘only option’.
Following two different policies when it came to seeking a resolution to the China War was crazy. It was done though. There were two camps of thought on the matter acting in Moscow. Those at the top knew about the other and there was general agreement there to try them both so that if the officially policy failed, that supporting initiative worked. However, while the decision-makers at the top had that understanding, their underlings and those far below them, right down the bottom, didn’t have full knowledge on this matter. The little people did all that they did to impress those above them and climb upwards. The system which they served encouraged this: climbing over the bodies (warm or cold) of your comrades to reach the top was always done. The whole Soviet position on the China War was already screwed up yet now it was only going to get worse. A solution to the war favourable to Moscow, be it either Hu’s surrender or a new government in Beijing, was increasingly looking like a pipedream even before this new layer of chaos was brought in.
Taiwan hadn’t landed forces on the Chinese mainland across the Taiwanese Straits, but it had taken almost every offshore island which was part of Fujian. Moreover, the large island of Hainan plus the nearby Leizhou Peninsula were under Taiwanese control. Taiwan had even sent ships into the Gulf of Tonkin and seized some Chinese-owned islands there as well. Throughout these moves, taken slowly but steadily, the United States had been aware of what Taiwan was doing. Moscow might have had a schizophrenic approach to the China War yet so did New York too. On the one hand, the United States sought to aid China; the other hand was allowing Taiwan to do this and – at times – encouraging it. Hu’s control over what was left of his country was only weakened by what Taiwan was doing.
China had been unable to do anything about what Taiwan was doing. Having the Soviet Union use all of those nuclear weapons and their armies rolling across the nation distracted first knowledge of and then the ability to react. However, as the Taiwanese did what they did, they got bolder and this eventually drew a Chinese response. Taking the Leizhou Peninsula and then basing aircraft there was an outrage which China couldn’t ignore. This was a China which had fired nuclear weapons against the mainland Soviet Union and more against Mongolia and Vietnam as well. Taiwan was long seen as a breakaway province with the people there Chinese too yet their government had crossed the line. A pair of small but effective nuclear attacks thus took place on the Leizhou Peninsula. These hit Taiwanese military forces based there. Such attacks preceded the latest use elsewhere in China and could, in effect, be seen as having encouraged the Soviets to do what they did… if they needed much encouragement to once again do so.
Nuclear explosions against its military units – a squadron of fighters and a concentration of troops – weren’t going to bring Taiwan to its knees. Its homeland wasn’t touched and they still controlled much Chinese territory in terms off all of those islands. It forced them to leave the Leizhou Peninsula though. Back across onto Hainan they went, abandoning what they had taken to the north of there for the time being. What Taiwan didn’t do was respond with nuclear attacks of their own. They had the weapons. A few had been stolen from Chinese possession and the results of their own wartime crash-programme to build their own (other countries such as Australia, Brazil and Italy were doing the same) were bearing fruit. China still had other weapons. There were more that they hadn’t used already nor that the Soviets had managed to eliminate. Fears were abound that Taipei would suffer the fate that mainland cities in China, or Vladivostok in the Soviet Union, had suffered. Taiwan intended to return to what it had just left, but not yet.
China remained outside of the Allies. Hu had never made a formal attempt to join that worldwide alliance nor had an extension been made to his country to bring them in. The independent nuclear actions undertaken by China – including their failed missile attack on Moscow last year – were key in keeping them out of such an alliance. Taiwan’s actions were something regarded by Hu as having American approval. This couldn’t have been done without the United States knowing and if they knew, then they hadn’t stopped it: that to Hu meant that they had agreed to let Taiwan gobble up bits of China while it was on its knees. While his government was in disarray after leaving Nanchang and reaching Nanning, Hu was still able to keep outside contacts alive. He spoke with Secretary of State Stevenson though only over a satellite link rather than face-to-face. It was put direct to Stevenson that Taiwan was doing what it was supported by the Americans. Stevenson denied that. When Hu asked why the United States wasn’t stopping them then, the answer he received wasn’t one which convinced him of American fidelity. It was confused and contradictory. It was also a pack of lies. Hu told Stevenson that.
Subsequently, Hu broke with the Americans for good. Relations between them had completely collapsed due to the activities of the Taiwanese. China was now really all alone fighting against the Soviets. Moscow would celebrate because, on the face of it, this could only increase their chances of eventual victory in either of the two forms they were seeking. Still, those below them weren’t aware of that and were unintentionally working to mess everything up and make China a graveyard for the Soviet Union for many long years to come.
March 1985: Korea and the Pacific
The North Koreans just wouldn’t give in. Its armies on South Korean soil had been wiped out and the last of the occupied territory there retaken. There were two big nuclear holes in North Korea – at Kaesong and Wonsan – and the centre of Pyongyang was a pile of rubble from repeated B-52 strikes. Their Soviet allies had made promises which had only been partially delivered upon while now refusing to send any more ‘fraternal assistance’ in the form of troops. Kim Il-sung remained gravely injured from the American attempt to kill him; his son, Kim Jong-il, was struggling to maintain his position as he discovered that killing opponents just brought more to life. The South Koreans and the Allies had their armies inside the DMZ and looked ready to invade. Despite it all, North Korea kept on fighting.
Devoid of an air force, a navy and an army which could do anything offensive, North Korea fought onwards with the Second Korean War regardless. Back from the DMZ, the KPA had a huge defensive line. Nearly a million civilian soldiers – the Workers-Peasants Red Guards – manned that position out ahead. Many of them were positioned close to the Kaesong area and had no idea of the radiation coming from there. Right behind the Red Guards were lower-grade elements of the KPA with tanks (some really old ones too such as T-34s) and mobile infantry. There was a lot of artillery as well. Howitzers, mortars and rocket-launchers had been dragged from across the country to join those already in defensive positions already. This artillery launched continuous attacks southwards. In places the targeting was terrible yet elsewhere it remained good. Accuracy wasn’t important as far as the KPA was concerned though: what mattered was having those shells and rockets exploding to the south and thus keeping the enemy forces there ‘busy’. There was no telling at all where those would land and thus those forces massing for what Kim Jong-il was convinced was an incoming invasion were permanently kept off-balance.
There was no planned invasion of North Korea.
Clearing the KPA out of the last of their trapped pockets and then moving into the DMZ was all that could be done. Six long months of war had seen the South Koreans being able to do no more than that in the end. They’d fought both the KPA and then a detachment of the Soviet Army to a standstill on their soil before reaching the DMZ. No more could be done. Allied forces with them included those who had played a significant supporting role in that yet it was the South Koreans who – numerically – had done the bulk of the fighting. Recent arrivals of more troops from the Allies had come but there had been departures too: in the case of the latter, three quarters of the Americans. Men from Australia, Malaysia, New Zealand and the Philippines were welcome yet they only replaced the departing pair of US Army divisions (a third stayed behind) and the division of US Marines who were all going home. The South Korean, along with the Allies, weren’t able to go any further north than the DMZ.
Yet that didn’t stop them from imitating that they were going to at some point soon. Counter-shelling took place and there was much air activity against all of that North Korean artillery as well. The mass of Red Guards weren’t feared as a force capable of making a successful second invasion for they were lightly-armed yet there was still a lot of them to take on should they be marched forward in a human wave attack. The South Koreans wanted to see them gassed and pressed the Americans to do so, pointing out after it occurred that the Soviets had just gassed the British (another member of the Allies) over in West Germany. The Allies refused permission for this to be done, especially since they had yet to move. Instead, they were attacked with high-explosives, napalm and bucketfulls of propaganda leaflets for the time being. South Korea also continued to put commando teams north of the DMZ on raiding rather than intelligence-gathering missions as had been the case beforehand. This was done to keep up the impression that they were preparing for & scouting the way for an invasion. The men who took part in those raids were under that impression too and the ones which ended up captured told their interrogators that because they knew nothing else.
Through March, the situation on the Korean Peninsula at this point in the Second Korean War resembled that at the end of the First Korean War thirty years beforehand.
The Soviets retained a ‘fleet in being’ with the remains of their Pacific Fleet. There were two dozen major warships in the Sea of Okhotsk and this included two light aircraft carriers and a battle-cruiser. They were far inside that marginal sea which stretched deep in towards Siberia and far back from the US Navy forces which were positioned outside. Beneath the waves of this cold and lonely sea, there was a force of submarines present too: diesel- & nuclear-powered attack submarines for the further defence of the strategic missile submarines. Those warships had been out on the open ocean earlier in the war and were the survivors of a larger fleet who hadn’t managed to make it back into the Sea of Okhotsk in the face of the massed strength of the US Navy. Now they were to stay here and make sure that the missile submarines were kept safe in their bastion – aircraft and land-based missiles also defended the sea – instead of going back out into the Pacific. While that was their mission now for the foreseeable future, the Americans looked at the surviving warships as just waiting to move once again to open waters. The US Navy saw the Soviet Pacific Fleet as a fleet in being because its orders could change. The Americans wanted those ships sunk and to finish what they had started.
Getting at the Soviet ships meant getting past the defences of the bastion. The geography didn’t favour an attack into the Sea of Okhotsk when faced with the defences that the Soviets had in-place. To the west there was the Soviet mainland – the Primorye region with the nuclear devastation of Khabarovsk and Vladivostok at each end – and the large island of Sakhalin. Across to the east was the Kamchatka Peninsula. And, in the middle, lay the Kuril Islands. That island chain stretched between Kamchatka and the large Japanese home island of Hokkaido. Military sites along it had been attacked throughout the war from the air and also naval bombardments had occured. There remained defences within them though as well as minefields blocking the passage. While not impassable, they still provided a formidable line of defence and blocked the only viable route for a forced passage of major US Navy forces to go into the Sea of Okhotsk unless the Americans wanted to take the indirect route through the wider La Pérouse Strait and face the many more defences over there. A rearrangement of their carrier forces following the repairs made to the USS Carl Vinson (that carrier had taken months to be patched up) gave them a force of three ready to go into that sea: the Carl Vinson would be joined by the USS Constellation and the USS Ranger.
What to do about the Kuril Islands became a source of contention between two of the strongest Allied partners in Asia: Japan and the United States. The Kuril Islands – especially some of the nearest ones to Hokkaido – had once belonged to Japan as the bottom half of Sakhalin had too. Japan had long wanted those certain portions of the Kuril Islands back and deemed them their Northern Territories unjustly stolen at the end of the Second World War; the Soviets had taken them then and regarded their continued rule as the right of the conqueror. Moreover, such islands were now sovereign Soviet soil never to be given up no matter what. The Americans knew full well both positions and believed that if Japan took the Kuril Islands, the Soviets would resort to nuclear war over them. Japan would be in the firing line of that and, as Japan had no nuclear weapons of their own to strike back with, the United States would have to do so in retaliation to a Soviet first strike less the Soviets destroy all of Japan. That wasn’t a road which they wanted to go down. The US Navy wanted to go into the Sea of Okhotsk – bringing the Japanese with them – yet by doing so would mean occupying some of the Kuril Islands and the US Government wouldn’t agree to that. While it would be Japanese troops which would go into those islands, they would have to be supported by the US Navy in doing so. American refusal from above – cancelling out the US Navy’s wishes – aggravated Japan. They had their untested army (only Japan and Paraguay were the members of the Allies whose armies hadn’t seen action; South Korea, even when on its knees, had angrily refused a Japanese offer of troops) ready to see action where their air force and navy already had. There was a desire for revenge for all of those missile attacks upon Japan with both conventional and chemical weapons which went alongside that territorial demand; Japan played down the latter but everyone knew that that was what this was all about, even more than defeating the Soviet Pacific Fleet. The Americans said no. There would be no landings made in the Kuril Islands.
The Japanese were forced to stay away from the Kurile Islands apart from activity in the skies. The Americans still went into the Sea of Okhotsk though. Due to politics, the US Navy couldn’t send their carriers but they did dispatch several submarines. These were to act independently of each other rather than as a wolf pack and were tasked to seek out that fleet in being and attack it from below now that assault from above in the form of carrier air strikes were impossible. It was made very clear to the submarine captains that they weren’t to attack Soviet missile submarines. If such boats were in open water, away from this bastion, they were fair game (and there had been sinkings in the Arctic of such submarines), but not while in here. Of the five which were tasked to the mission, one was lost going through the La Pérouse Strait: there was an unknown minefield there. Two more operated in the southern half of the sea – one each off Sakhalin and the Kurile Islands – while the final pair went northwards in the direction of Magadan.
USS Indianapolis and USS La Jolla had those specific orders to not engage the missile submarines. Their captains would put personal feelings aside and obey those commands. The Soviet Pacific Fleet wasn’t aware of such orders though.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:33:09 GMT
Chapter Twenty–Three – Betrayal
Early April 1985: North America
April 1985 saw only eleven days of full-scale, organised warfare take place. No one understood at the beginning of the month that there would only be a week and a half left of fighting. Things were started that were foreseen to take a lot longer and were thus cut abruptly short.
***
Soviet intelligence was aware that the Americans had pulled troops out of South Korea starting the end of February. Some consideration had been made to being prepared for their arrival on the western side of the Pacific: in China or even on the Soviet coast somewhere. However, the more reasonable assumption was that they would be sent across the wide expanse of the ocean over to North America. The KGB believed that those Americans would go to join the fighting in north-western Mexico; it would be to Alaska that the GRU was certain they would be sent to. The GRU was only half correct while the KGB was entirely mistaken. The US Army’s 7th and 25th Infantry Divisions (the latter with Hawaiian national guardsmen attached) went first to California before moving into Arizona to join the war there. As to the 3rd Marine Division, they arrived in Alaska yet didn’t make immediate opposed landings either in the Aleutian Islands or in the Alaskan Panhandle where the GRU was sure they would. To the Alaskan Panhandle the 3rd Marines did go, though they were part of the follow-up force for the activities of the already-engaged 5th Marine Division and were thus ‘late for the party’.
Continuing where they had left off in March, the 5th Marines moved on Juneau. The small city which was the state capital was where about half of the remaining Soviet forces in the region were located. They were trapped there: cut off from everyone else and the rest of the world too. However, rather than leaving them be behind their defensive position, the Americans moved against them. The Soviets in Juneau were surrounded by civilians as well as POWs. They had brought many up to the Juneau area. Conditions among those Americans there were clearly bad and, after seeing the same elsewhere in liberated areas, political pressure rather than military necessity drove what was in effect a rescue mission on a grand scale. Getting to Juneau was far more difficult than it was reaching Ketchikan and Sitka. It was far back from the open sea, hidden behind unfriendly terrain and Juneau couldn’t be reached by land. Only going via air and sea could that be done. That was why the 5th Marines were here rather than the US Army. April’s first few days saw the final approaches made, making good of preparations made last month. There were some fights in outlying areas away from Juneau as well as air activity against the Soviet’s own aircraft flying from Juneau’s airport. This all preceded the main attack where US Navy ships – escorts and the amphibious transports – brought the 5th Marines towards Juneau. Those vessels went through the Icy Strait, around the tip of Admiralty Island and to Auke Bay. From there the assault on Juneau began with a start at dawn on April 6th.
The landings were strongly opposed. Soviet defensive fire against landing ships and transport helicopters was fierce yet overcome. Once the Marines were put ashore, they faced an opponent which was dug-in and hadn’t been softened up enough by pre-assault action undertaken against them. Regardless, the 5th Marines pushed on. The defences were reckoned to be brittle, just needing a hard whack to crack open. That was true in the end though at certain moments such a thing might have seemed optimistic. Some of the defenders fought well, those who unleashed all of that firepower, but others caved in. The Marines exploited the gaps they found. Juneau Airport was taken – it was left a ruin – and part of the division, RLT 29, pushed onwards in a northern direction up the Mendenhall Valley. The other two regiments (RLT 21 & RLT 27) moved eastwards. Juneau itself was in that direction with the mountain after which it was named looming above it. The Soviets had lost the 11th Airmobile Brigade in fighting for the airport but they had two regiments of motor riflemen around the city. They weren’t as exposed to naval gunfire and while still having to face air attacks, at least those shells from the warships offshore wouldn’t be able to give them their full attention. However, the 5th Marines had landed their artillery ahead of the two regiments tasked for the advance inland. There were a lot of heavy guns they brought ashore. The US Marines were experts at bringing supporting firepower into play to accurately cover their assaults. Those guns were joined by Harriers and Sea-Cobra attack helicopters in raining hell down upon the Soviets outside Juneau; all of those warships assigned hadn’t too shown up in Auke Bay. A flotilla of five US Navy and two Canadian warships came up the Gastineau Channel, a waterway which the Soviets believed they had covered with mines and a missile battery at its bottom end. Force Recon Marines had seized the small town of Hoonah back on April 1st. There was a small airstrip there which the Soviets hadn’t been using due to the short length of its runway. Hoonah on Chichagof Island would have been a good outlying defensive position to block the Icy Strait yet the Soviets didn’t have the men to be everywhere. Flying from Hoonah were Harriers in US Marines service and these weren’t those which were aboard the amphibious ships. From Hoonah to the bottom of the Gastineau Channel, it was a short flight for aircraft which could make vertical take-offs & landings but could make use of a short runway as well to improve their performance. Several bomb runs were made where forward spotters guided the bombs which blasted that missile battery to utter smithereens. As to the mines, there were a pair of minesweepers available. One of the US Navy ships hit a mine and the destroyer USS Richard S. Edwards had to be beached or it would have sunk and blocked access, but the rest sailed onwards with their own air support coming from those Harriers too.
The whole defensive position of Juneau had fallen apart when the Americans had opened up the rear. Tanks supported the 5th Marines and they had all that external fire support to call upon. The Soviets were long doomed here but this only accelerated things. There was fighting on the outskirts of Juneau on April 9th and the Americans entered it the next morning. Soviet shipping of various types – their own and others they had captured to make use of – was either destroyed by American attacks or scuttled when the seacocks were pulled to deny them to the enemy. Explosions took place inside the city along with executions as well. Juneau was being abandoned. The Soviets fell backwards, either into the wilderness around the mountain behind or over onto Douglas Island. Going either way would see them doomed. The Americans were all over them and there was no way out of this mess. Meanwhile, the 5th Marines fought against hold-outs in Juneau. They had to several times call off artillery or air strikes when it was realised they were about to fire upon trapped civilians and instead dig the enemy out by close-up fighting. Juneau was a battle honour that the men who fought in it would be proud to have earned yet would have terrible memories of.
There was still fighting in and around Juneau come April 11th before that all came to a stop. The Americans had won and were mopping up the last hold-outs as well as hunting down those who had tried to make a run for it. Minds were already being turned to going elsewhere afterwards. The 3rd Marines was due to take-on the Soviets in Petersburg and Wrangell and once that was done, long term plans were already there to go to Kodiak Island and the Aleutians through May, June and July with both divisions. Yet that wasn’t to be. Instead, attention was on redirected to dealing with the mass of prisoners taken who almost all needed medical attention (wounds but other issues) alongside all of those civilians that were encountered. There were lots of them killed in the crossfire of the Battle of Juneau yet no mass massacre had taken place: this wasn’t Mexico after all. The rest needed medical care and to have something to eat. They celebrated their freedom that the 5th Marines had given them.
No one had told Tijuana that the nuclear strike on areas of their country held by Revolutionary Mexico was about to take place. The status of Democratic Mexico as a co-belligerent of the United States – not as an American ally nor a country part of the Allies – was a factor in this but so too was the whole American position towards Mexico of any stripe. In the Glenn Administration, only Howard Baker could be counted on to speak up for Democratic Mexico but even then, the Vice President still had little love for the governing council in Tijuana. He put American interests first and only sought to temper the mood of others in the US Government, as well as the vengeful Congress, to keep them in the fight. The soldiers of Democratic Mexico were fighting alongside United States forces on Mexican soil. Every casualty they took was one less American casualty. Baker had raised the issue of telling them, not consulting them, but Glenn overruled him when other National Security Council members pointed to the KGB finding out. The leadership of Democratic Mexico was rife was Soviets spies despite many American (costly) efforts to root them out. Nothing was said to Tijuana ahead of the strike on seven Mexican cities.
As could be expected, the leadership in Tijuana was absolutely furious. Those had been Mexican civilians in those cities struck on March 25th! Millions had been killed outright, millions more would join them for decades in dying due to after-effects and their nation would be poisoned forever! Mexico City’s destruction last September was something that Tijuana had never gotten over but this was even worse. They knew the feelings of the Americans towards them and concluded that this was deliberate murder of Mexican civilians just because they were Mexicans as well as a purposeful move to destroy their nation forever. Nothing that the Americans said afterwards – none of which contained apologies; what the hell did ‘an expression of regret’ even mean? – could convince them that everything about this wasn’t just an act of vengeance. It was pure evil, Tijuana decided, and there could be no justification. New York stated that it brought down the regime of Tirado López. Who cared about that when it came with the bodies of all of those innocents and the complete obliteration of Mexico’s future?
Tijuana was unable to do anything in response at what was a betrayal of everything they had thought that the Americans would do to end this war and see them put in power to lead Mexico post-war. How now could they lead their country once it was all over with that had been done? Their impotence in inaction with a response was telling and something that the Americans had known as well.
News spread across Mexico in relation to the attack on those seven cities. There was exaggeration, lies, denials, shock, anger… a whole range of emotions from those who heard about what happened. The Mexico Massacre did bring down the regime of Tirado López. He’d centralised power in Guadalajara after learning nothing from the fate of Mexico City and the destruction caused there beforehand to his regime last year. That regime couldn’t handle another shock like that when so many institutions of the state, plus key people, were killed. Guadalajara was partially supported by some state infrastructure elsewhere – all ready to move there – which was over in the city of Leon… another target for American ICBMs. Public security, communications and leadership losses came in an instant. Afterwards, the fallout came: physical and metaphorical. Central parts of Mexico were especially affected by the physical fallout due to the running line of nuclear strikes from Guadalajara to Leon to Morelia through where Mexico City once was to Pueblo. Elsewhere, the three blasts further north in Chihuahua, Hermosillo and Saltillo brought more poison to the people and the land. Panic hit those not killed by the blasts as they left cities and towns. Security forces had no higher control who gave orders what to do and then they suffered immense rates of desertion too. Revolutionary Mexico just disappeared into the night as a viable nation. The remaining parts of its army – those not long sent off to their deaths up in the United States – were spread across the country and unaffected by the nuclear attacks apart from the loss of central command. It might have held together if it hadn’t been for the desertions which came. These were far larger than anything seen before and the ‘usual’ methods of stopping this – shooting some of those caught, threatening the families of the others etc. – just didn’t work. Munities took place too where officers were killed by their men aplenty. The mission for the army was that of wartime security throughout the nation with regards to supporting the supply links and guarding key points as well as POWs rather than public security. The Soviets relied on them to do this and while there was the use of some of their own people – as well as those from other allies – the army of Revolutionary Mexico provided most of the manpower. The desertions in these places really hit the Soviet rear areas hard.
All of the POW camps were technically under the control of the Soviets, the Cubans, the Guatemalans and the Nicaraguans. Officers and key people were appointed there yet it was Revolutionary Mexico manpower at those sites which was more numerous. When the men melted away or mutinied, the situation at each site varied. Some were kept under control, others turned into scenes of massacres where the mass of unarmed POWs were killed entirely. Further sites saw a mixture of actions where the situation was left unresolved and remained on edge. Such sites were often a magnet for desperate people in Mexico before the nuclear strikes who sought to approach them seeking the food and medicines that they were told were there: all of which they deserved, not those gringos. It would be how this turned out when so many people were on the move while angry and scared rather than anything else which would decide the fate of the many, many American POWs inside Revolutionary Mexico.
Away from the all of that chaos, there was still fighting which took place inside Mexico up until the April 11th cessation of that. The nuclear attack on Hermosillo was made with low yield blasts because the Sonora region was being fought over. There were US Marines with the 1st Marine Division alongside an ever-increasing number of Chileans and also national guardsmen from the 38th & 47th Infantry Divisions fighting in Sonora. They continued to do so after Hermosillo where they fought in mountainous terrain south of the US-Mexico border. No big battles were had by each, just a lot of smaller fights which went on and on. There were enemy forces to their south which were trying to run a defensive line yet the Americans moved eastwards. Their eventual destination was due to be the Rio Grande where they would reach it on the Mexican side, opposite Texas and downstream from El Paso, and thus provide a second shutting of the door behind enemy forces to the north. Progress was made through early April though the Rio Grande was still a long way off when the fighting came to an end on an organised scale.
Arriving in the San Francisco Bay Area rather than Los Angeles which was closer because of all the war damage further south, the 7th & 25th Infantry Divisions formed up there in Central California. The men had been flown across the Pacific with ease though they had to wait for the shipping which arrived carrying everything they would need to fight with. A submarine attack had slowed one convoy coming from South Korea but this delay wasn’t seen at the time to have a serious effect. Three days later than planned, these veteran troops started moving away from San Francisco. As it would turn out, that delay did mean something.
These troops arrived in Arizona after passing through Nevada and were assigned to the US I Corps there rather than forming a separate corps command as had been expected. I Corps, under the Sixth United States Army (which controlled all fighting through Arizona and onto Mexican soil), had the mission of liberating the last bits of Arizona. In the north-eastern portion of the state, the 81st Infantry Brigade – national guardsmen from Oregon and Washington – was waiting for their arrival to finish off the last of the Guatemalans. They complained over the hold-up but once the reinforcements arrived, the 81st Brigade made sure that their US Army comrades knew where the enemy was for them to take on. First into action was the 25th Infantry. The ‘Tropic Lightning Division’ fought in the Painted Desert on the Hopi Indian Reservation and smashed through everyone who stood in their way. The last of the Guatemalans were nothing in comparison to North Korean troops in terms of tough opponents though were rather spread out. This took a lot of work to move from one group to another and keep them contained in the fight rather than letting them get away. Later, the 7th Infantry arrived. These incoming men only saw one day’s worth of action, up on Navajo land, before the fighting came to an end. To come all this way and do just that was extremely frustrating but it wasn’t down to them when it came to stopping.
The rest of the I Corps did what those newly-arriving men had come here to do eventually: move into New Mexico from out of Arizona. Penetration over the state-line had begun at the end of March and that now continued. Interstate-10 ran to Las Cruces which sat on the Rio Grande and the 32nd Infantry Division went that way and ended up just short of there by April 11th. As to the 5th Armored Brigade and the 9th Infantry Division, they fought on the right flank in the very southern reaches of New Mexico with some operations taking place on Mexican soil too. Their destination was the Pass of the North: where El Paso and Ciudad Juarez were located. Most of the troops from there – Cubans and Nicaraguans – had been send northwards to Truth or Consequences and the Soviets realised very late that the US Army was tearing forwards across the desert. They couldn’t lose El Paso like they couldn’t lose Truth or Consequences. Immediate action was taken were light and disposable units were sacrificed before they could get heavier units to block the I Corps. The ‘light’ men were a battle-weakened regiment of Soviet Airborne which included some armoured vehicles with attached anti-tank units. Those deemed ‘disposable’ were the majority of the soldiers which Noriega had sent northwards. Panama’s ragtag force was good for nothing apart from being sent to die yet the men from the Soviet Airborne were wasted.
Fifteen to a dozen miles west of El Paso and Ciudad Juarez, the Americans fought those sent to block them. The Panamanians were taken apart in one of the war’s most unequal and unfair unit-upon-unit fight. These weren’t soldiers. Noriega had sent the dregs of his country – criminals, the lame, even mental patients from emptied hospitals – all the way to the United States while keeping loyal men back home. The Soviets had demanded he send men last year and that he did. Only before the battle were these men given ammunition for rifles which they had never fired beforehand. The Americans were surprised to find out ahead of the fight that these men ahead were from Panama. They fought these were real soldiers, men who’d taken the Canal Zone alongside the Soviets away from their fellow US Army soldiers back in September. There was a deliberate effort made to utterly destroy this gathering of the enemy, not bypass them, before afterwards they would roll down into El Paso. There would be a delay in getting into that city but there was also a military need to eliminate the mass of Panamanian soldiers – almost twenty thousand of them – first rather than leaving them in the rear. As to the Soviet paratroopers nearby, they were just a bonus. What a short but deadly fight it was! The weakness of the enemy was noted first when it came to Noriega’s soldiers but there were so many of them and a lot of fighting to be done instead of head-scratching. The hard-fighting Soviet Airborne focused minds too as they took some time to beat. Only afterwards was there time to consider the opposition sent against the I Corps. Some soul-searching took place especially once POWs were questioned, but they had been an armed enemy sent in Panamanian uniform and organised as a military unit under central command. Legally and in a military sense, the Americans had been in the right… morally, that became dubious because there was some unexploited intelligence beforehand on this that was ignored in the rush to take on Noriega’s men. Once done, the Americans were due to move in to both El Paso and Ciudad Juarez come April 12th, yet that didn’t occur. They had each in their sights at the end of April 11th though had all of those prisoners – so many of them that needed something done for them – to keep their attention instead of going forward. As was the case elsewhere, not going any further ahead wasn’t the choice made of the fighting men here.
Early April 1985: North America
Further Army of the United States units had been released starting April 1st to join other ARUS elements who did so a month beforehand. Coming under operational control of the US XI Corps was the 41st Infantry Division, a formation raised in Pacific North-West. Arguably, the 41st Infantry still needed another month to prepare in terms of equipment issuing rather than the training of the men but they were sent forward despite missing some key bits of equipment. None of these were deemed wholly vital to the ability of the 41st Infantry to fight. In the eyes of the XI Corps’ commander, and that of his superior at the head of the First United States Army, all the hold-ups with the division had been bureaucratic and it was utterly stupid to keep them waiting in the rear. The XI Corps took the incoming reinforcing division to replace the 82nd Airborne Division which transferred to army command: the ‘defenders of Denver’ and those men who had retaken Colorado Springs were wanted elsewhere. The fight that the XI Corps had, along with the Canadian Corps on their left flank, was no longer anywhere near Denver, Colorado Springs or in Colorado anymore. They entered New Mexico at the beginning of April as they chased after the retreating Soviet Twenty–Second Guards Army. The Soviets kept moving fast but it was impossible for them to break free of the pursuit after them which sought to fix them in-place for their destruction. Every day and every night of fighting saw them lose more men to the advance of Allied troops who chased after them into New Mexico.
Across northern New Mexico, ABC troops (American, British and Canadian) from the Allies fought through early April. The Canadians, joined by the British, put on far better overall performance than they had done last month up around Pueblo… that being in the eyes of their American allies. This time they took a lot of ground and overrun the enemy to a degree which pleased the First Army command. Too much caution had been used at Pueblo, the Americans had said; caution was certainly what they had employed, their allies agreed, but only because it was necessary there and then against a dug-in opponent. Firstly around the town of Raton and then further down the course of Interstate-25, the Canadian Corps engaged Soviet forces on the run and were able to do much more. They used their overwhelming numbers far better in easier terrain to move across. British troops would end up going the furthest south when they reached the crossroads around Springer. They had leap-frogged ahead of the Canadians and barred the way for the Soviets caught behind. The enemy was squeezed in between a great victory won north of Springer through April 9th–10th. Once that was done with, they held in-place the next day while dealing with prisoners taken as the rest of the Canadians caught up. Planned operations were for them all to start moving onwards through the rest of the month as the Canadian Corps followed I-25 as it wound through north-central New Mexico first to Las Vegas (not the Las Vegas; this was a lesser-known but more historic town of the same name as the city over in Nevada) and then onto Santa Fe. That would hopefully then put them behind the rest of the Twenty–Second Army running from the Americans. Another battle was envisioned somewhere in the general Santa Fe area to finally finish off the Soviets before entry could then be made into Albuquerque all before the end of the month.
The XI Corps was following that same line of thinking with its advance through north-central New Mexico as it chased after other Twenty–Second Army elements. The 4th & 37th Infantry Divisions joined with the 41st Infantry, plus the former Berlin Brigade and national guardsmen in armoured cavalry regiments too (the XI Corps was rather large now), in fighting the Soviets through the mountains, forests and the wilderness of Indian lands. They managed to get hold of the 120th Guards Motorised Rifle Division one last time and give that Soviet unit a final defeat. For many months, the 120th Guards Division had been repeatedly engaged and taken losses after losses yet kept on fighting despite everything thrown at it. No more. Now it was caught, right in the valley of the very upper reaches of the Rio Grande. There was that final reckoning and a fantastic victory was won. The 41st Infantry played its role well in that and did what they had come here to do: fight and fight well. Soviet Airborne paratroopers with their 76th Guards Division slipped away though and out of what eventually because the trap for their Soviet Army comrades. They went east and west, into the mountains as their division split apart. What they didn’t do was stick together nor go south. This gave the XI Corps less urgency to make an immediate pursuit and rather recover its strength before finishing them off too. The 174th Infantry Brigade (the men from West Berlin) was assigned during that short break to urgently assist the 82nd Airborne and thus didn’t get to stop moving for a few days. The First Army, though its own higher headquarters of the Rockies Command, had been tasked to take emergency action against convoys of trucks which had escaped the main fighting and were right out over in the west near the Arizona state-line. On US Route-64 and -491, there were POWs being moved. Possibly they were going to Albuquerque the long way around; there was possibly too that they were going to be disposed of using rather unpleasant means. A good few thousand men – Americans but also some Canadians and maybe even a few Brits too – were in those convoys. Questions were asked as to why a wait of a day or two couldn’t come until the 174th Brigade and 82nd Airborne were more prepared. The reason why this couldn’t happen wasn’t given and it was understood by those lower down the chain-of-command that something was going on that demanded action be taken very soon. The Americans went after them. The 82nd Airborne made company- & battalion-sized combat parachute drops (the first time in the war that they had done this!) while the 174th Infantry went cross-country in a mad dash to link-up with those drop-zones. A lot went wrong but elsewhere things went as planned: it was all drawn up so fast and luck had to be factored in. Revolutionary Mexico guards, led by KGB officers, put up a fight but they weren’t prepared for what they faced when the Americans were able to conduct their arrivals properly and hit them with battle-hardened soldiers. The majority of the convoys were captured and the POWs within liberated. Two convoys weren’t liberated though, both near the town of Farmington on Route-64. Attacking American troops were held off after mis-drops and bad communications occurred. The prisoners were dragged from the trucks once those were stopped. The KGB had orders for what they had the Mexicans with them do despite this happening earlier than planned. Several hundred POWs were slaughtered and the KGB then made escape attempts while leaving the shooting parties behind to face the music. As expected, when the Americans caught up with them, the soldiers of Revolutionary Mexico were given ‘field justice’ in many cases. Only by the end of the day and the orders which came to stop fighting did the 174th Infantry and 82nd Airborne understand why the rush had been on to do what they did early on April 11th and not leave it a day or two more.
Other American paratroopers – though those with far less experience; men with the ARUS-formed 11th Airborne Division – were fighting with the US XVIII Corps in south-central New Mexico. They were joined too be incoming reinforcements released from the final stages of training and fitting-out in the form of the 13th Armored Cavalry Regiment and the 34th Infantry Division. These formations moved towards Truth or Consequences and the Elephant Butte Reservoir just in time to aid the 11th Airborne. While the rest of the XVII Corps was dealing with an attack by Cuban and Nicaraguan forces trying to approach the bridgehead held on the Rio Grande / Interstate-25 position coming up from the south, the men facing northwards faced an attack coming downstream towards them. These were Czechoslovaks and they did very well in battle over on this side of the North Atlantic. Sent across at the end of last year as the 2nd Motorised Rifle Division – one of the better units of the Czechoslovak People’s Army – they had seen, as the East Germans had done with their division, the Soviets take a lot of their equipment and ammunition to help form their own units following naval losses. The Czechoslovaks were reformed into a brigade with extra men put on security duties through central New Mexico. The mechanised infantry brigade was kept as a reserve unit in the Albuquerque area and dispatched following the XVIII Corps’ penetration deep into the rear to form one of the two pincers moving on the 11th Airborne. Czechoslovak artillery preformed the best. Their RM-70 multi-barrelled rocket-launchers and DANA self-propelled guns were used very effectively to cause maximum casualties among the Americans and moved about rapidly to avoid counter-battery fire plus American aircraft. The guns covered assaults by tanks and mobile infantry. The 11th Airborne fell back and back again. Retreat was the only thing to do otherwise they would have been overrun. Thankfully, before the Czechoslovaks could crush them, the 13th Cav’ showed up to save the day. Thank God for the Cav’! The Czechoslovaks were halted before the 34th Infantry came forward and retook the ground lost while pushing the enemy back to where they had come, expanding the bridgehead as they did so before orders from above caused a stop to the fighting come the end of April 11th. As to the American paratroopers, they would claim victory afterwards because they hadn’t been beaten yet their ranks were thinned greatly by the dead and injured. Their saviours too took many losses in their first time in combat, all while holding off a determined enemy assault. Pre-battle intelligence coming from Europe said that in Bavaria, the French had kicked the Czechoslovak’s behind (though things were more even when the Czechoslovaks had been encountered in Austria) yet it was the Americans here who had been on the wrong end of the fight against such opponents. Truth or Consequences held in the end though and that was what mattered overall.
The rest of the XVIII Corps was fighting downstream against those Cubans and Nicaraguans who’d come up from the wider El Paso area before the threat from out of New Mexico by the Sixth US Army fully materialised. The regiment of Soviet Airborne paratroopers who should have been with them going upstream – following I-25 too – were re-tasked to the west and they were missed; the Panamanians weren’t at all. At Hatch first and then near to Caballo Lake, the 1st Infantry & 101st Air Assault Infantry Divisions held off their opponents while making a planned withdrawal where they made use of the ground and the ‘surprises’ which they left behind for those in pursuit. The surprises were a lot of mines (the Americans noted carefully where they left these; they were aiming to go back south in the coming weeks) as well as a lot of water. From the Caballo Dam, the waters of the Rio Grande were released: this had been building up from all that melting snow once the Spring Thaw had occurred far to the north in the Rockies. The dam wasn’t blown, it was just a case of a lot of water being released from it… at a rate of pushing forty thousand cubic feet a second. There was no tidal wave of anything dramatic like that downstream but instead just a giant bog formed. The ground below through which the Cubans and Nicaraguans moved was sodden and it slowed them immensely. American aircraft and helicopters picked off tanks and infantry carriers from above to further weaken and enemy which kept on coming, just at a torturous rate of advance.
Once the enemy reached the Caballo area, it was all spread out and arrived piece-by-piece. Some of the Cubans had swung away to the east to get out of the way of all that water. They found the uneven, rocky terrain a nightmare to cross when the 101st Air Assault was up there and the Cubans wouldn’t be making an outflanking move here. The main fighting was in the valley below the dam and the 1st Infantry engaged the rest of the Cubans and the Nicaraguans there in a fight lasting almost a whole week. It was a one-sided affair and the attackers knew that. Requests were made for it to be called off from the officers involved because this was just impossible. Those were refused: Truth or Consequences must be reached from behind to achieve the southern pincer in response to the Czechoslovak’s northern pincer. Therefore, it continued right up until the very end of the fighting. The Americans had to keep their divisions here to maintain that fight, all the while wondering what idiot would keep ordering these men to go forward into the free-fire zone which they firmly had set up.
Over in Central Texas, early April saw the Battle for Austin: ‘for’, not ‘of’. The city which was the Texan state capital wasn’t fought over directly. Instead there was a lot of fighting nearly with the intention of winning control of it and its transportation links before eventually taking it. The fight was mainly between American national guardsmen facing soldiers of Revolutionary Mexico though there were many Cubans engaged as well because Austin sat within their operational area up and along the Interstate-35 corridor. The once proud Cuban Second Army – which had ripped apart the US Army III Corps in the war’s first few weeks – was a shadow of its former self yet there remained thousands of Cubans left and they had the capability to fight. As the Third United States Army used moved in from the north and east, while maintaining a static blocking position to the south, intelligence said that that Cubans would cut and run away to the west. Analysis by NISS’s military intelligence operatives stated that due to events down in Cuba – an outline, let alone any specifics, all unrevealed to the Third Army – the Cubans would be looking to save their army. That was correct… but incorrect as well. The Castro Brothers in Havana had that intention but their men in the field weren’t under their direct command. The Soviets gave the orders and the Cubans stood their ground. Between Belton at the top end and San Marcos to the bottom, with Austin the middle, the fight for the I-35 Corridor went on through early April. The Cubans were far better opponents than the Mexicans yet the latter were no pushover when on the defence. They had to pounded down where they were dug-in and completely overcome. The Cubans sought battles of manoeuvre instead. The different actions of these two allies doing what they did caused the Americans all sorts of issues. If it was done on a bigger scale over a far greater area, the Third Army would have taken a lot longer to do what they did. However, there weren’t enough Cubans and the area of operations was small enough to manage this situation once the Americans were able to understand what was going on. In fight after fight, they dealt with the Cubans first and then surrounded the Mexicans. Over to the west was the rise of the Balcones Escarpment with the Edwards Plateau up above. That formed an effective barrier behind the I-35 Corridor and a natural obstacle which to pound the Cubans against before turning back on the Mexicans.
Late on April 10th, the 26th Infantry Division – American national guardsmen from New England – took Bergstrom AFB outside Austin from the dug-in defenders as they completed a partial envelopment of the city. They were going to start moving inwards the next morning and weren’t looking forward to an urban fight. Orders came to hurry that up, again unexplained. That was attempted but it couldn’t be done at the speed that orders originating all the way from New York wanted. A flurry of messages came promising full support in terms of extra firepower and aircraft all to take the city by the end of April 11th. Regardless, it just couldn’t be done. No one on the ground knew why there was this urgency. Troops from Revolutionary Mexico were making their last stand there and taking Austin just wasn’t going to happen with the speed desired. To say New York was disappointed was an understatement but political desires and military reality don’t always mix.
North of that fight, in parts of Texas opposite the Red River and also west of the Dallas–Fort Worth area, the Soviet Seventh Tank & Twenty–Eighth Armies (what was left of each anyway after the disasters of March) fought against a major counteroffensive by the Seventh US Army. The Americans were on the advance now after stopping what had come their way last month. The Soviets fell back away to the west and southwest; their southern escape route was cut by what the Third US Army was doing. The retreat was pretty organised and not a mad dash to escape. There was space to fall back into and it was a fighting retreat done well. An attempt to cut it off, where the US II Corps came over the Red River and tried to turn the rear of the Seventh Tank Army, failed when a lot of Soviet tanks showed up there and held the Americans off. However, despite that and other instances of the Soviets doing well while falling back, they were still falling back. They went deeper into Texas away from its outskirts yet they couldn’t keep this up forever. The Americans broadened their frontage as the days went by and across the rear they dropped Green Berets and Rangers aplenty at key points. These men scouted the way rather than trying to stop the Soviets from going backwards and sought to provide the Seventh US Army with a victory at some point by identifying where they could catch the Soviets in a real fight. The thinking was that it would be around Abilene – the general area, not exactly that town – in the end where that would occur, sometime later in the month. As was the case everywhere else though, at the end of the eleventh day of April, the fighting came to a close. Final victory on the battlefield would eventually elude the Seventh US Army when they’d done so much hard work ready to see it come.
Early April 1985: North America
Not that far away from San Antonio, the city’s mayor, Henry Cisneros spent the beginning of April waiting for the city to be liberated. Back from where Stormin’ Norman had his US V Corps fighting Revolutionary Mexico troops there, there was a gathering of FEMA forces along with those from several aid NGOs as well. Both had been involved in the efforts undertaken in Houston following that city’s liberation last month and would be moving into San Antonio once it was taken by the US Army as well. Lessons had been learnt from the reoccupation of Los Angeles when it came to the immediate response made to liberated cities. FEMA – semi-militarised due to its wartime role; conscripts not sent to the Army of the United States had been assigned to FEMA – had many security personnel alongside all those tasked for medical aid, getting the electricity on & drinking water running and engineering missions. The American Red Cross and other independent aid groups would be joining them going in. Cisneros was planning to enter his city along with them, hot on the heels of American troops. This was his home city, the one which he had left in October right before the Cubans arrived. He regretted leaving yet he knew full well that if he stayed then he would have long ago been killed. Moreover, this Hispanic-American politician from Texas wouldn’t have ended up in the office of the presidency twelve years down the line had he stayed either… but that was something for the future.
General Schwarzkopf’s men fought to take San Antonio away from its occupiers. He personally wanted the city but he was also being told from above that it must be retaken with haste. Following events over in Mexico, a massacre of civilians inside was feared. There were also many enemy forces there – not just men from Revolutionary Mexico – who all sat between the V Corps and the Rio Grande. Should they get away, they would join those down in the Lower Valley along the border and bolster the defences there. These factors all combined to see the V Corps drive forward into a strong position where there were fixed defensive lines. The 14th Armored Cavalry Regiment along with the 6th Armored Division secured the corps’ southern flank against the Soviets there while the 5th Infantry was fighting scattered Cubans to the north around San Marcos. Out in front were the 24th & 29th Infantry Divisions, the latter being the last of the second wave of ARUS units made available for April operations. They drove onwards through the opposition outside of the city and pushed right up against it in a semi-circular fashion. Strong air and artillery support was given to them though many times, last-minute wave-offs were made of incoming bombs and shells due to the presence of civilians escaping from the city during the fighting. Inside San Antonio there was a lot of shooting where men who should have been fighting on the outskirts were killing others inside. News from back home – confusing but horrible events – had come to the commander in the city and he had been instructed by his political officer that vengeance must be taken. Mexican civilians had been killed therefore American civilians must be too. Orders were given for firing squads to start doing that. However, while it is easy to order such a thing, to have masses of civilians killed by soldiers in an organised fashion is never easy. To shoot unarmed innocents after a guerrilla attack or in the heat of the moment is one thing but trying to do this over and over again to groups of the helpless lined up for that is not easy. It isn’t easy on the junior officers nor is it easy on the men in the firing squads. Maybe the first group will be shot, then the second… yet after a while it takes its toll and soldiers (no matter which army they serve) struggle to do it. In cases, officers and men shot at each other in munities which came from refusals to undertake their orders. Elsewhere, officers would declare to their superiors that they had killed all that they could find and had now run out of bullets too. Any mass slaughter needs strong-disciplined men driven by pure hatred which needs to be indoctrinated into them. Officers needed to be the sadistic and bloodthirsty type who aren’t afraid of the later consequences which would come. There were few men in San Antonio who fitted that bill, especially once the initial killing had stared and more were brought before them. Male prisoners begged for their lives, women screamed and children cried. Killing them all just was too much to be done in any meaningful fashion beyond initial fusillades of bullets. While all this was going on, the Americans outside forced their way into San Antonio.
Rather than killing civilians, if not on the frontlines trying to defend the city, then those Mexicans inside should have been destroying everything that was inside which would be useful for the Americans to later use. San Antonio was one of the most important rear area sites for the war effort, comparable to places such as Albuquerque, Brownsville, Corpus Christi and El Paso. It was full of the ‘unsexy’ stuff that armies need to keep fighting in the field with logistical infrastructure, vehicle maintenance sites and big communications set-ups: there was also a lot of ammunition in the city, all of which delays had seen it not sent onwards. Explosives and fire would have made a mess of all of this. It was all left alone, ready for the Americans to take. That they did. The 24th Infantry entered San Antonio first followed by the 29th Infantry not long afterwards. Starting April 8th, they began to clear the city. The military bases were the objectives set for them: to reach the pre-war existing American ones and the new post-invasion sites established by the Cubans and the Soviets. In between them lay much of the city and so the two divisions were tasked to secure them as well. During their fighting, prisoners were taken. Neither the 24th nor 29th Infantry Divisions were full of those who would kill everyone they came across who threw down their weapons and up their arms. However, many potential POWs were gunned down, especially those who weren’t quick enough to surrender or who had blood on their hands. There were sights that the American soldiers saw that they couldn’t forgive every enemy soldier they got their hands on for. Through the second and third days, much more of the city fell under American control. Fires started on April 10th and these were a big deal. By that point, those FEMA elements outside the city were already inside and there were firefighters among them in number. This had been another issue learnt from Los Angeles though this time it wasn’t criminals looting and committing arson but instead accidents and the results of a lot of heavy fighting. There were groups of Revolutionary Mexico soldiers caught and pinned down who were blasted with heavy weapons which caused several fires to rage. So much of San Antonio was already destroyed but it wasn’t going to burn down fully as it might otherwise have done.
On the fourth day of fighting in the city, Schwarzkopf received word to hurry up and finish this off. He wasn’t told why though his commander at the head of the Third US Army made it clear that there would no longer be much time to continue with this. A final push was ordered where the inner parts of the city as well as north-western portions (with fewer military sites and less opposition) were overrun. Third Army flew in a media team to record the scenes of the last bit of the liberation; this ABC News crew had been held back from everything else going on the city, missing what other camera teams witnessed with the horror seen, to be present for a staged event where San Antonio was announced as captured by the Third Army’s commander on the ground there. Schwarzkopf missed that event. He was busy moving the 24th Infantry to the southern side of San Antonio ready to move onwards. V Corps would leave the 29th Infantry here but everyone else was going south into the Rio Grande’s Lower Valley and all the way to Brownsville. There were Soviet forces there along with Cubans and more Mexicans. He thought he had more time but he didn’t. That stop order came and the V Corps was going nowhere… for now anyway.
Raúl Castro was assassinated at the beginning of April.
Fidel’s loyal brother had seen the writing on the wall last month when the Soviets suffered all of those battlefield reverses in New Mexico and Texas. Cuba was building new armies to replace those lost in California and Texas and Raúl had believed that with them, plus fresh Soviet forces, the war in North America could be won. But then the Americans stopped the Soviet’s attack into Oklahoma and then began their multiple attacks across the entire front. Before the end of 1985, he could imagine the Americans having by then liberated their own soil, occupying large parts of Mexico and ready to invade Cuba. It would have been best for Cuba to no longer be involved in the war by that point. Fidel still believed what Moscow said and told his younger sibling that they could still win this yet Raúl wouldn’t accept that. Quietly, he started trying to open contacts with the Americans. His aim wasn’t to turn on his brother but instead save them both and everything that they had rather than pay the ultimate price for making the mistake that they had. The plan had been to make a trade with the Americans in the end. Raúl expected a whole lot of drama to play out but he had bargaining chips to play with. There were tens of thousands of American POWs in Cuba – more than there were over in Mexico – and Cuba still held onto the Florida Keys as well. Raúl thought he knew what he was doing and his play was being made in secret. It wasn’t though as one of his closest aides was on the KGB payroll.
The KGB put a bullet in his head, dropping him with a sniper in public. Cuba wasn’t walking away like that. The Soviets wouldn’t stand for that betrayal. However, if they’d found out a few days later, or waited to act a little longer, things might have turned out differently for Raúl. Alas, that wasn’t to be. Fidel lost his brother and he was made to understand that no it wasn’t the Americans, it was the allies of his regime that he was bound to who had done this. They’d do it to anyone else who acted against them too.
Because the cessation of fighting wasn’t foreseen by the United States, at the time that it happened there was a major amphibious operation underway down in the Caribbean where US Marines were going into action. This started three days beforehand and once it became clear that major offensive operations would come to a halt, this disrupted Operation Caribbean Pirate. This consisted of assaults underway in the Virgin Islands, both the American and British possession there, against the Cubans. There was a battalion from the Coldstream Guards that the British Army sent down from Bermuda (where it was on security duties) to take part in the post-assault missions because there were islands there which were Crown possessions yet it was in the main an American-only affair. The Virgin Islands were next to Puerto Rico and in Cuban hands since the war started. They’d been taken when undefended to be used for their airports and naval anchorages. In February, Soviet hospital ships not sunk had run aground there and the Americans had afterwards taken a good look at what was here including the defences. Those weren’t much. It was decided that they could be retaken and used not just to keep Puerto Rico firmly secure but, of greater-importance, the Americans themselves would make use of the Virgin Islands’ bases established by the Cubans to exert control over the Caribbean to stop Soviet air and naval traffic. Recent French activities in the Caribbean too helped make this possible as well.
The 2nd Marine Division made the landings. They hit the beaches on St. Croix and St. Thomas plus also the British-owned Tortola. Cuban defenders were encountered on these islands but the US Marines came here for a fight which they knew they could win. These Marines had fought previously in Florida against raiders – replaced there by the recently-raised 6th Marine Division, who were rather disappointed to be left behind rather than coming south – and the Cubans they encountered were of lower-calibre than Cuban commandos and Soviet Spetsnaz. Much of Caribbean Pirate was conducted from Puerto Rico with US Air National Guard aircraft supporting US Marines aircraft flying out of there. There were amphibious ships, just not that many of them due to the proximity of Puerto Rico to the landing sites. St. Thomas and Tortola were fights won very quickly though St. Croix was harder than expected. There were a lot of Cubans on that island and their local commander had long-planned for a defence of this island in case of a day like the one which came when the US Marines showed up. Caribbean Pirate envisioned a quick victory there, one which didn’t come. Later on, St. John and Virgin Gorda – two more islands in the chain – were due to be assaulted next but the St. Croix delay slowed everything down.
When the fighting stopped on April 11th, there were still Cubans holding out on St. Croix while the British Army was having a parade in Tortola’s Road Town. Caribbean Pirate was on its way to being a hugely-successful mission, more than it already was, but it was cut off mid-flow due to events elsewhere in the world far beyond the control or knowledge of the men fighting for these idyllic tropical islands.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:35:13 GMT
Early April 1985: Europe
As was the case over in North America, full-scale and organised fighting came to a close across Europe. Time differences meant that while it stopped on the other side of the North Atlantic at midnight on April 11th (Eastern Standard Time; earlier in the night further west), the stoppage in Europe came on the morning of April 12th 1985. That would mean something for the history books. For now though, the fighting was over… most of it anyway because not every gun fell silent.
***
On the North German Plain, what was left of the Soviet armies there, trapped inside a vice formed by EDA forces ahead and the British behind them, were squeezed like a ripe grapefruit until they gave in. They’d been cut off and ran out of ammunition. From all sides, and from above too, their many opponents pilled on the pressure until there was no longer any fight left in them. Dramatic events occurred inside where KGB political officers argued with Soviet Army officers and at times there were shots exchanged to follow the threats made. Nonetheless, in the end, there was contact made with those outside by either radio messages or the waving of white flags by dispatched emissaries. East and south of Hannover, the remains of the Third Shock and Twentieth Guards Armies gave in. None of this was authorised from higher command posts at neither Wunsdorf nor Legnica and certainly not from Moscow either. This occurred regardless of that with surrenders – not a ceasefire but complete surrender – made through April 3rd to the 9th. EDA and Allied POWs were handed over while tens of thousands of Soviet and East German soldiers went into custody the other way. Large amounts of their weaponry also fell into the hands of their captors too. In addition, the EDA and the Allies received a huge intelligence boon when they got their hands on some very important people, pieces of equipment and even a large amount of documentation: the latter really should have been destroyed. This was a fantastic victory won for the defenders of West Germany. For their opponents, it was a defeat that was completely unacceptable and the ‘betrayals’ made by surrendering generals were promised to be punished.
Away to the north, Soviet and East German troops fighting in Holstein sought to withdraw back into East Germany. They had Spanish troops (under temporary EDA operational command) trying to cut off their line of escape by reaching the Baltic and a lot of EDA forces ahead of them including many French troops moving down from Scandinavia to finish them off. There was permission given for the right wing of the now-destroyed Soviet Second Guards Tank Army – the left wing had been lost last month out on the North German Plain – to pull back. This was a ‘retrograde operational manoeuvre’: it certainly wasn’t a retreat or a withdrawal in any official manner from the Soviet’s point of view. They could call it what they wanted to but they still ran back to East Germany. The Spanish put their tanks between the Soviet 94th Guards Motorised Rifle Division and its way out. They were punished for this on the ground but held on until the West Germans could get their panzers to aid them in keeping the Soviets on the northern side of the border to be destroyed there before a final surrender was made. The East Germans managed to get away, pulling what was left of their 8th Motorised Rifle Division out. They fought their way through other Spanish troops and some Danes too. Once back across the border, they had the twin water barriers of the Elbe-Lubeck Canal and the Schaale River between them and those who’d failed to stop them from getting away. However, the East Germans were never going to be able to defend that line against the mass of the enemy on the other side once those there reorganised themselves. An end to the fighting worldwide stopped them from facing what the Soviet’s 94th Guards Division had done: utter destruction.
Down in Hessen, French and West German efforts to keep the Soviet Eighth Guards Army fixed in-place by launching attacks against their frontage saw further French troops, those moving up from Bavaria, start breaking into their rear. The French 1st & 4th Armored Divisions pushed forward East German penetrations into the top of Bavaria back out and then chased them back into their own territory. Entry was made into the Werra Valley. Following that river downstream would take the French through difficult terrain where a defender would be in a good position to make them bleed, maybe even stop them eventually, but before then, the French had their tanks moving because there was no one who could do that. French Foreign Legion light troops inserted by helicopter engaged the East Germans inside Thüringen on the western side of the Thüringenwald: a range of forested mountains which was a far-better defensive position than the Werra Valley. That kept the East Germans busy as they worried that the French were going eastwards and deep into their country. The French moved northwards though. Eventually, the morning of April 12th saw them come to a stop. They had yet to cut off the Soviets over on West German soil and past the Fulda Gap but were well on their way to doing that when the stop order came. Neither the Soviets nor the East Germans had any significant forces available to plug the French advance down the Werra and with only a few days more, the Eighth Guards Army would have been fully cut off while on the wrong side of the Inner-German Border.
Through eastern parts of Bavaria, driving the invaders off West German soil and back into Czechoslovakia was something that the EDA was incapable of doing. However, at the same time, those invaders were in no position to do anything more going forward. The Czechoslovak First Army had been driven all the way back to their home country while the Soviet Thirteenth Army remained stuck behind the Danube. French forces which could have pushed into Czechoslovakia – the regime in Prague feared a drive on Plzen then Prague afterwards – were instead split with half holding the frontlines and the other half sent north into Thüringen instead. As to the West Germans facing the Thirteenth Army, they had taken those heavy losses in retreat last month and could only hold their position. Furthermore, the situation across in Austria, where Warsaw Pact forces had driven as far west as they had, even when stopped, meant that they led to an extremely long right flank which they had to worry about and the West Germans thus couldn’t ignore that. The end of the fighting only brought an end to exchanges of fire rather than a cessation of any major advances.
Last month, both the French and the West Germans had disputed with the British – representing the Allies – the notion of crossing the Inner-German Border and fighting on East German soil. The Soviets would use nuclear weapons, Paris and Bonn said; not unless we are driving eastwards on a Berlin-Warsaw-Minsk-Moscow axis had come the reply from London. British forces had crossed over the border during their advance to get behind the Soviets on the North German Plain. They had gone north-to-south, rolling down along that border on both sides when on their rampage through the Soviet’s rear areas and thus dooming their armies at the front. No use of nuclear weapons had occurred. April then saw that French incursion of their own down in Thüringen where this time they went south-to-north across East German soil, again not far from the border and not driving on Berlin with an ultimate destination which could be construed as Moscow. For Allied and then EDA troops to be even stepping on foot inside East German alarmed many people in both camps – politicians and military officers – over the danger of this. It was the stupidest game of chicken that was being played, they said: seeing if the Soviets would blink when the fate of Europe was at stake in terms of a nuclear apocalypse. No matter what the naysayers said, that border was in many cases nothing more than an interesting line on a map.
That fighting along the Inner-German Border that the British had got themselves into away to the east of Hannover got bigger in early April. The British Second Army had used its I Corps to drive far ahead and link up with the EDA’s forces to trap all those Soviets in that massive pocket before it was squeezed into submission. The Spanish were detached to EDA commend with the Dutch transferred the other way: the Dutch were under British command and were fighting too as part of the squeeze. This left the British III Corps to be deployed to cover the east-facing flank along the Inner-German Border and just over it. There was a division of TA troops – well-trained men – along with the brigade sent from the Republic of Ireland. There had been British airborne & airmobile troops with them yet their fight at Gifhorn to open the way across the Aller River so the I Corps’ armoured divisions could drive forward had seen them detached away. The 6th Airborne Division was transferred back to the III Corps come April 1st when those TA units and the Irish found themselves in serious trouble. The Soviets had used gas before against them though hadn’t followed that up with a ground attack as expected. Instead, a different opponent engaged those Allied troops there.
East German’s border guards – the Grenztruppen der DDR – were often seen by those in the West as those at the border crossings into their country and also those high up in watchtowers above the Berlin Wall. The passport inspectors at the crossings over the Inner-German Border and around West Berlin were Stasi agents in Grenztruppen uniform though. As to those seen at the Berlin Wall, they formed only a portion of the Grenztruppen. This was strongly-militarized and heavily-indoctrinated armed force which was part of the East German military. In peacetime, its strength was close to forty thousand which included duties along the Inner-German Border, surrounding west Berlin and along the Baltic coastline; barely a few hundred men guarded border crossings with Czechoslovakia and Poland. The numbers had dramatically increased with East Germany at war and the Grenztruppen had seventy thousand men in service once reservists were mobilised. Like the rest of East German’s armed forces, they were stretched everywhere – including many men inside West Berlin along with the Stasi’s own military force: its Felix Dzerzhinsky Regiment – and that everywhere included their fight with those invading troops in Thüringen and too up in the North German Plain. They’d been sent to fight to defend East Germany’s borders and that didn’t include a static sentry role either.
The Irish 6th Infantry Brigade was the furthest east of any Allied or EDA unit not in Bavaria. They were inside the Wendland, a rural area next to the Elbe which jutted forward. There had been some tough fights here with retreating Soviets rear-area units last month where they had been lucky not to encounter anything stronger. Gas attacks had hurt them but the Irish had a lot of protection and mass casualties didn’t come. The Wendland was West German soil which was reoccupied and through here the Irish were instructed to hold the flank. It wasn’t meant to be an easy mission and it certainly wasn’t. Moving on foot, two regiments of Grenztruppen fought the Irish. Those East Germans had man-portable weapons including heavy machine guns, mortars, SAM-launchers and RPGs. The latter were especially effective at striking against Irish light armoured vehicles. SAMs were used against helicopters while the other weapons targeted Irish infantry. They fought across the Wendland and the Irish held back what was an advance to drive them out of here and far back from near to East German soil. Further support from above was requested but denied. The British believed that the Irish could hold their ground there and, if not, a retreat would be authorised as the Wendland wasn’t that important overall to hold. The Irish fought on, raging against the British Army for their perceived betrayal on leaving them out here on their own, but giving everything they had at the same time. They would be very glad when the end to the fighting eventually came. This fight was one which the Irish Defence Forces would long regret ever getting involved in.
Fighting on East German soil, over the border in the Altmark region, the British 8th Infantry Division was joined by the 6th Airborne Division in engaging far larger numbers of Grenztruppen. The East Germans had artillery support – towed 122mm guns – to back up their other lighter units of half a dozen regiments of dismounted men. Those men were sent on the attack. Led by specialist border reconnaissance detachments, the East Germans pushed and pushed again. They were quite the opponent. However, ultimately, not matter how hard they tried, they weren’t forcing the British out of their bridgehead into East Germany. The British had tanks with them and control of their air. Grenztruppen heavy guns and their man-portable weapons just weren’t going to win the day against them plus the larger numbers of British soldiers. What they could do was make this a bloody fight for the British like they did to the Irish on the flank. The fighting raged through little villages where crossroads were, inside wooded areas and across farmland with multiple fights over and over again. Each side lost men dead and injured for no appreciable gain overall in any strategic or political sense. They fought on because that was what higher orders demanded. As was the case with the Irish nearby, when the fighting came to an end, those here in Altmark were very glad it was over and done with. Anything would be better than this unnecessary bloodshed.
Early April 1985: Europe
The majority of Britain’s Royal Marines had been assigned to 6th Airborne Division as part of the 3rd Commando Brigade yet they didn’t end up in that fight on the North German Plain. Ahead of the deployment made by the British Second Army to the Continent, the brigade had been removed from the order of battle and stayed where they were on the southern coast of Norway when the 5th Airborne & 39th Air-portable Brigades (the rest of that division) crossed over into West Germany. They could have fought far inland, there was no restriction for just coastal operations, but they were kept back for what was deemed ‘Baltic contingencies’. None of those had cropped up during March. EDA forces overcame Soviet forces on Swedish soil and there was no invasion of Denmark. Moreover, there was no British-led Allied drive along the Baltic coast of East Germany as had been first planned either meaning that the Royal Marines wouldn’t be making any assault into Wismar, Rostock or Rugen Island. They waited but no contingency came in the Baltic. Instead, once April came, they were reassigned to the British II Corps up in central Norway. Frustratingly, they would arrive there too late.
Soviet forces had taken Trondheim last year yet not managed to get any further before the worst of the winter weather had come. They’d dug-in and held on. Throughout, a series of attacks against them by the Allies had come with air strikes and raiding operations on the ground all ready for what came starting the end of March. The British, Norwegians and Spanish advanced into the Trondheim area where multiple attacks were made. There were Swedish troops over the border who while not directly involved, conducted border operations down the Norwegian-Swedish frontier against the Soviets and kept their reserves tied up. The Norwegians broke into Trondheim on April 6th. Either side of them, the Spanish reached the important Vaernes Airbase (fighting through a place called Hell on the way) while the British got almost all the way to Orland Airbase. These two military sites were of great importance to the Soviet war effort and would be too for the Allies once they were taken back. Orland held out all the way until the very end though on the morning of April 12th. The British had elements of their 2nd Infantry Division’s 24th Brigade all around it and were shelling Soviet forces there to make it unusable yet they just failed to take Orland before the end. The Norwegians were busy at that point at getting ready to push further onwards, heading northwards while doing so. Intentions were to reach Mo i Rana before the end of April and get as far as Bodo in May. Advantage was to be taken of greater Swedish involvement and the geography of Soviet occupied areas where their held territory narrowed as it did. But, the fighting was over with.
Swedish military activity along the Norwegian border and into occupied Norwegian soil there was coordinated with the Allies. It included shelling, advances in key areas to secure possible later invasion routes and also air activity. There was quite a lot that Sweden did and over a wide area too yet they were unable to do much more than that. On the map, it looked easy for the Swedes to roll forward and take Mo i Rana, Bodo and even Narvik long before the Allies could do any of that. Another simple option looked to be for the Allies themselves to take the ‘Swedish shortcut’ and advance on those key points in the Soviets rear from behind rather than going directly towards them head-on. Alas, if only things were that simple.
Sweden had been invaded and thrown in a significant military commitment to rid their southern coastline of the Soviets. They’d needed French and West German help to do that too. There was also the risk of other invasions coming through Finland or across the Baltic into Stockholm for them to worry about. What forces they had on the Norwegian border were stretched and did all that they could: in later months, victorious forces from the south could come north but that would be then and not now. As to the Allies taking that shortcut across Sweden – moving out of Norway, through Sweden and then back into Norway –, there were the transport links to do this but not necessarily the troops to exploit those. There weren’t the extra men to spare due to the British and the Spanish having their armies fighting in West Germany and the Norwegians having taken so many serious losses early in the war. The Soviets too were able to read a map. They adjusted their defensive positions ahead of several of the Swedish border incursions and when at others the Swedish bashed them about unexpectedly, they pulled what men they could away from those fights into new positions. They weren’t going to be overcome with ease, especially in such terrain where they were defending. None of this mattered in the end though because it was all a fight which never came.
Czechoslovak, Hungarian and Soviet troops were all inside Austria. As was the case at the end of March, through early April, they continued to go nowhere even while moving. The Czechoslovak Fourth Army – with an attached Soviet division – engaged EDA forces north and east of Salzburg and near to the West German border. When they took ground, they were generally driven back soon enough from their gains. This put them not that far away from Munich over in Bavaria and this caused many West German concerns but in military terms, that city was very far away. There were strong and capable EDA forces on the Austrian side of the border – plus the defendable Inn River too – who counterattacked and launched attacks of their own. Fighting here went all the way up to the very last minute of active combat operations (eight in the morning local time on April 12th) with neither side beaten. Elsewhere in Austria, the route through the Bremmer Pass where Austria’s Tyrol region was located was held as a link connecting West Germany to Italy. This was vital to the fight in Austria but also the general EDA war effort. They transferred men and supplies both ways near unhindered. Soviet air interference was minimal and the presence of their Spetsnaz in an area ripe for them to make attacks on convoys going over the Alps was absent. Such commandos were elsewhere in the world and not here where they really could have caused a lot of problems.
Austrian troops were in the centre of the line which ran north-south through the middle of Austria where the frontlines ran. In their sector, they held back the Hungarians in the mountains above and the valleys below. The Austrians wanted to do more, to drive the Hungarians all the way home and to free Vienna on the way, but they had lost too much of their army right at the beginning of the invasion when they were too far forward. All they could do was hold. On their right flank, the Italians began advancing in early April. They were fighting north of were Slovenia was and engaging the Soviets a long way from Italian soil. Their offensive had the goal of reaching the city of Graz and taking the crossroads there. In doing so, that would allow the Italians to crack open the rear not just of the Soviet position on Austrian soil but put their forces in Yugoslavia in grave danger of being cut off from behind too. The fighting would be over long before the Italian 3rd Corps could get anywhere near enough to Graz to threaten it though. They were heading that way through difficult terrain and a capable opponent who, while stopped in their own attack last month, were still effective as a fighting force in defence. The Italians would still be able to celebrate a great victory in war through all their activities on Austrian soil – instead of inside Italy itself – but weren’t able to reach that ultimate prize of destroying the Soviets and their Thirty–Eighth Army.
It was in Yugoslavia where there remaining ongoing fighting past the morning of April 12th. This wasn’t just low-level guerrilla activity in rear areas as seen elsewhere in the many worldwide theatres of war but full-scale and organised combat. Yugoslavia’s relationship with the EDA was still new and Belgrade considered the war it was fighting for its own territory to be more important than anything else. The government there wanted the Soviets, plus the Bulgarians too down in the southwest, off their soil. Moreover, in addition, they would also make sure that Rome was made to understand that while the whole of Yugoslavia was very grateful for the assistance given to repulsing the Soviets and their Warsaw Pact allies, Italians forces would soon enough have to leave Yugoslavia too once the liberation was done with. Yugoslavia would like to be friends and allies with Italy and the rest of Europe but their sovereignty was paramount. Italian forces in Slovenia were there under nominal Yugoslavian invitation and command. In reality, their 5th Corps had come over the border ahead of Belgrade’s say-so and fought alongside the Yugoslavs as an independent force. Politics mattered though and so the pretence over Yugoslav command was there just like it had been in the re-writing of the entry made back last month.
In both Slovenia and Croatia, the Italians and Yugoslavs had long brought the Soviets to a stop. They were trying to drive them back into Hungary with more success in that occurring over in Croatia than in Slovenia. It was taking time but there was only going to be one clear winner eventually. Soviet reinforcements for this fight were all tied up elsewhere as there remained Romanian intransigence to face down. More than that though, as there had never been the intention of fully fighting Yugoslavia once it ‘acquiesced’ to having its borders crossed, what extra men the Soviets had were second- & third-grade forces anyway. Yugoslavia had been able to parry the semi-serious Bulgarian invasion and concentrate their forces northwards. While they had men of their own fighting in the northwest of their country, they sent more men striking northwards through early April. Those troops went out of the Vojvodina region and entered Hungary. Borders can be crossed both ways! Most of the Hungarian People’s Army was in Austria with only smaller forces left behind. Marching on Budapest wasn’t the Yugoslavian intention but they wanted to get their enemies attention. That they did when the Soviets rushed their 60th Tank Division – what could be described as third-grade; only with half of its manpower too due to mobilisation issues – from where it was at Debrecen and poised to drive into Romania now down to the Hungarian- Yugoslavian frontier. That checked the Yugoslavians but they were holding onto bits of Hungarian soil now. An immediate knock-on effect was felt over in Croatia where there were far fewer aircraft in the skies and attention elsewhere. The Yugoslavians made a series of localised attacks here all in the direction of the Hungarian border too. Success after success was coming. Then everyone wanted to stop fighting.
No, that wasn’t happening. Belgrade wouldn’t accept that, not while there were hostile foreign troops on its soil. Yugoslavian forces fought on. This drew lots of attention to Yugoslavia from every direction with the EDA especially getting involved to stop them. Things were working out where Yugoslavia was going to get a bigger role in post-conflict events than previously decided upon. Twenty-eight hours after the cessation elsewhere, in the afternoon of April 13th, and only once Yugoslavia was ready to, did its men stop fighting. In Belgrade, the government reminded its allies that they would fight all by themselves once again if those promises weren’t kept. Yugoslavia wouldn’t accept any betrayal. Meanwhile, while its regular forces were no longer shooting at the enemy, Yugoslavia irregulars carried on fighting while in occupied areas though.
Greece had left NATO several years before that organisation became irrelevant when the moment came to put NATO to the test. Greece didn’t consider that it had betrayed any of its allies when they needed it the most. In Athens, Prime Minister Papandreou was convinced that the wider world war would eventually end in nuclear holocaust. How could it not when so may countries fighting had nuclear weapons and had already used them on several occasions? His determination to keep Greece out of that war hadn’t stopped him from taking his country into the disaster which was the Greek-Turkish War of 1984. The only winners from that were Turkey and, while not directly involved, the Soviet Union too. Greece was able to exit that conflict claiming it was undefeated but it most-certainly wasn’t. The country was already bankrupt and the war only made that worse. There was no replacement of expended weapons afterwards and Papandreou agreed to Soviet use of military facilities on Crete in exchange for financial aid… aid which only tied Athens to Moscow and, if it carried on forever, would have seen Greece come completely under the thumb of the Soviet Union.
The war had now turned gravely against the Soviets. Papandreou accepted that whereas some members of his government said that it could still swing back in their favour. This only made things worse. They broke the terms of the agreement on how much use they could make of the military sites on Crete and there was the belief that Greece’s leader had that eventually there would come that nuclear war. Crete would be a target in any strategic exchange, he believed, and then after that island was hit it would be mainland Greece next. However, Greece was unable to do anything about this. Papandreou ‘left the room’ when his cabinet discussed making quiet approaches to both the Allies and the EDA to express Greek neutrality. This would give their prime minister plausible deniability if everything blew up in Athens’ face. That was already on the cards though. Internal Greek discussions on how they could get their country the best deal, which meant playing the Allies and the EDA off against each other to win the favour of Greece – the delusion was quite something here –, were still taking place long before any approach was made and when events beyond their control intervened to decide Greece’s fate.
The former NATO anchorage at Souda Bay (though its history as a naval base stretched back to Ottoman rule of Greece) was where damaged ships of the Soviet Mediterranean Fleet had retired to following defeats in previous months. Firstly there had been the navies of the Allies which had struck and then afterwards the EDA had got involved too. There were a lot of ships lost, some others still at-sea and then those here in Crete. Among the latter was the missile-cruiser Slava. For the second time in this war, she had come to Souda Bay after taking battle damage. Repairs of the scale needed this second time weren’t going to be made in Crete and the ship needed to go to Sevastopol or one of the shipyards in the Sea of Azov. Patch-ups were being made ahead of that voyage. In the meantime, the Slava was in Greek waters when anchored in Souda Bay. French Mirage-2000s (those which had been in Tunisia and then transferred to retaken Malta once Libyan inaction was noted as only going to continue) rolled as fighters escorted Italian Tornado strike-bombers flying from Sicily for the opening strike of a raid against Crete. Those Tornados put bombs into the Slava and several other battered Soviet warships; the French fighters downed Soviet fighters which came out of Souda Bay’s military airfield. Following this attack came more aircraft, this time naval ones. The French and Italian navies had raced forward during an overnight high-speed run out of the Ionian Sea to reach the bottom of the Peloponnese. They were much closer to Crete and thus gave the aircraft flying from the pair of French carriers more capability in terms of fuel and weapons carried. The Super Étendards undertook bomb runs and missile attacks: the stationary and burning Slava got hit with a trio of Exocets when at-sea targets run out and she was sitting there seemingly begging for such attention. The missile-cruiser capsized soon enough, going over to starboard and making quite the splash. In the midst of all of this EDA military activity against the Soviets, they struck Greek military targets as well.
There were Greek aircraft at Souda Bay and the nearby Kasteli facility too. EDA bombing of Greek aircraft on the ground at the former could be excused as accidental considering the Super Étendards struck Soviet aircraft flying from there; the same couldn’t be said of Kasteli. In addition, Greek radar sites at Kissamos and Ziros were also hit by Martel anti-radar missiles. Neither of them were anywhere near where the Soviet activity on Crete was located and it couldn’t be in anyway excused as an accident to hit either. There was no accident: the French did all this on purpose. They had intelligence that showed Soviet activity at such places and acted on it. Greece had made its bed and would lie in it. The betrayal from Athens in siding with the Soviet Union was to be repaid. While that wasn’t necessarily true because the French acted on faulty information, information supplied by the Turks who were double-dealing here quite spectacularly, that was the way things turned out. Only Crete was designated a war zone to attack Greek forces deemed ‘belligerent’ alongside the Soviets before the fighting came to a close and no more air attacks came. That didn’t mean that this would have been confined to Crete though: Greece escaped likely further military attacks. Their position in EDA eyes at the end of the conflict was that they were on the side of Moscow and thus their treatment in the future would reflect that.
Early April 1985: Asia
The Arab allies of the Soviet Union continued in their gentle but firm approach of walking away from the war. Iraq, Libya and Syria were no longer playing any active role. Neither had contributed much before; now they gave nothing. A reaction from Moscow was feared in response yet the gamble taken by Saddam, Haftar and Assad had been one measured beforehand. They believed that they could get away with doing what they did because they weren’t acting against Moscow directly. Across on the other side of the world, Raúl Castro had made the same gamble and paid for that with his life. These three men in the Middle East got away with what they did though and would live through it. Neither was planning to lead their nation in a defection to either the Allies nor the EDA. They also didn’t move directly against the Soviet Union with immediate consequences which would hurt the Soviet cause should it work out. Moscow was made aware of what they were doing despite all the cleverness employed in Baghdad, Tripoli and Damascus in trying to disguise that. However, these actions didn’t put the Soviet Union in a position where action was needed to be taken right away. There were ongoing distractions which meant that reacting to this behaviour was pushed down the list of priorities. The brother of Cuba’s leader had forced himself to the top of that list: with this trio, they remained lower down. Whether long term they would have gotten away with this had the war dragged on past early April 1985, who could say? As to further Soviet allies in the region, neither Afghanistan, Iran and South Yemen weren’t moving to turn their backs on the Soviet Union. These trio of countries would remain committed until the end.
Egypt started the month preparing to go to war. Free of the continued need to guard against renewed Libyan attention, which Mubarak had been certain that the Soviets would have joined, the changes in the world situation in the past couple of months meant that Egypt could reassert itself. The Suez Canal was going to be opened to both military traffic of the Allies and the EDA as well as commercial shipping engaged in the trading of oil with the West. That oil, what the West breathed like it was pure oxygen, would flow from other countries in the Middle East allied with Egypt – Saudi Arabia and the Gulf Arab Monarchies – with Egyptian military protection. It was anticipated that the Soviets would try to stop this from happening. In response, Mubarak would see the Egyptian military defend that transit. While he didn’t trust the Israelis in the long-term, in the short-term there was an understanding between Cairo and Tel Aviv that Israel wouldn’t take military advantage while Egypt was making such a military commitment. Israel wanted what Egypt wanted: the Soviets out of the Middle East. The West were the devil that they knew while the Soviets were those who would destroy every Middle Eastern nation and take down every leader like Mubarak if given the chance. Egypt wouldn’t get to see that war it was ready for though.
The China War would rage onwards through April and beyond. The fighting wouldn’t stop there. Soviet forces fought in Tibet and down through the south of China. The whole of the huge nation – complete with nuclear holes in it and civilian chaos on an unimaginable scale – was being swallowed up by the Soviet Union. Defeats elsewhere in the world for the Soviet Union on the battlefield in either an operational or strategic sense hadn’t occurred here. The PLA had nothing more to give in response apart from fighting a rear-guard battle as it fell back towards China’s southern borders. The South China Mountains provided a formidable defensive position for that fight and could have provided more had China not lost all that it had in terms of heavy forces and air cover. More than that though, this last great barrier behind which the last of the People’s Republic of China was located was a position thrown away. The Soviets fought their way into them and through the PLA units there with general ease. Hu and his government were no longer being approached by the Soviets seeking to reach an agreement with them. Instead, the Soviets were trying to finish them off after chasing them all the way down here. Nanning was hit by a nuclear weapon right before the fighting came to a close elsewhere in the world. This nuclear strike in China was the first since October where the Soviets had struck first with such a weapon not in retaliation. That strike on Nanning was timed perfectly: the majority of the Chinese government, Hu Yaobang included, died in the nuclear obliteration of that small city.
Soviet entry into southern China became a concern for the British. Hong Kong was right at the bottom of China and for many long months, the terrible situation with refugees heading to Hong Kong had nearly destroyed that colonial holding. The situation had only recently been stabilised with help from Brunei and Singapore. All of a sudden, the Soviets were heading towards Hong Kong. This was a problem unforeseen until it was rather late. Should the Soviets send their tanks into Hong Kong, it would fall and very quickly too. The British were in no position to make a fight out of Hong Kong if their opponent was the Soviet’s victorious army. When fighting ceased between the Allied and the Soviets, as it did between the EDA and the Soviets, but not in the China War, this situation here became something rather contentious. The Soviets did stop a direct approach towards Hong Kong but were elsewhere in Guangdong. Into the dustbin of history the People’s Republic of China went and in what would rise to replace it, that China would have a Soviet presence within and thus close enough to Hong Kong to cause many sleepless nights for the British authorities.
The fighting on the Korean Peninsula didn’t cease in April either. South Korea was part of the Allies and was prepared to do as others were worldwide. Yet, North Korea didn’t follow the lead set by Moscow. Kim Jong-il was doing what he was doing regardless of the betrayal of ‘the cause’ which he declared had happened. North Korea kept defending its territory north of the Allied-occupied DMZ against an advance north by the Allies. It was his father’s wishes, he told everyone. ‘His father’s wishes’ also meant that once the younger Kim saw the way that the wind had turned, he moved to secure himself properly. The health of Kim Il-sung was getting worse and he would never recover. Kim Jong-il got rid of the people in the regime which had tried to hold him back and did so violently. Them and their families, their friends even, were all disposed of. Secure, North Korea’s leader would keep the fight going no matter what everyone else was doing and wanted his nation to do. Should North Korea cease fighting, it would be on his terms and no one else’s.
The USS Indianapolis and the USS La Jolla were sent into the Sea of Okhotsk to attack the big ships of the Soviet Pacific Fleet which were in there as part of that fleet in being that the Soviets had left. There were the light carriers Minsk and Novorossiysk as well as the battle-cruiser Frunze there among dozens of other warships. The Americans knew why they were present and understood why the Soviets would park all of those warships atop their strategic missile submarines underneath. While that was not how the US Navy operated, for the Soviets to be doing it made sense in how their navy was structured. The Americans sent their Polaris- & Trident-armed submarines out individually into the open oceans where they could hide them; the Soviets grouped theirs together and protected them like this with those warships, attack submarines and land-based air cover all while in restricted waters.
The orders were for that pair of US Navy submarines to just aim for the big ships and sink them. While they were there atop the submarines below, they could at some point in the future do what they had done before and go back out into open water once again. They were valid military targets. Any Soviet missile submarine they stumbled across was not to be attacked. That wasn’t conditional, it was a firm order. It was obeyed too.
The La Jolla had a late-model Project-667 submarine (which had the NATO designation of a Delta III) in its sights at one point. Carrying sixteen missiles, each with as many as seven MIRV warheads, that submarine could slaughter a hundred million Americans in one volley if ordered to. The La Jolla left it alone. If that Delta had been attacked, the other submarines in the Sea of Okhotsk, more in the Kara Sea, then land-based missiles too, all would have started launching on the United States. Every single American, not just those hundred million or so, would have been killed if La Jolla had taken what would have been a very easy shot.
The Indianapolis didn’t see a missile submarine. It had its sights on the Frunze. Sister-ships to this warship had been lost elsewhere – the Kirov out in the Atlantic battling the US Navy’s Atlantic Fleet and the Royal Navy had killed the Krasny Oktyabr off Gibraltar – and the American’s Pacific Fleet wanted this battle-cruiser more than the two ‘baby carriers’ (as they dismissed them) were sought. The Indianapolis was stalking its prey and ready to hit it with a combined torpedo and Harpoon strike when ready. One of the Frunze’s escorts, an anti-submarine destroyer, picked up a track on the American submarine. Not only was the submarine near the Frunze, it was close to where the destroyer’s captain believed there was another submarine: that being a strategic missile submarine. He was wrong in that. He wasn’t wrong in doing what he did though. He followed his orders and struck against the Los Angeles-class submarine with immediate effect and to make sure it was sunk.
Anti-submarine missiles were fired from the destroyer and when above where the Indianapolis was below, the missiles dropped nuclear-tipped torpedoes into the water. Four underwater explosions occurred, all of a tactical nature where the blasts were in the low-kiloton range. The Indianapolis was caught in these and completely destroyed with all one hundred & twenty-eight men aboard killed.
As had been the case on September 17th last year, now on April 9th, Soviet nuclear weapons had been used against the Americans. There would be a response, though not one here in the Sea of Okhotsk, and it would be appropriate in the terms of an eye-for-an-eye as was the case before.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:36:28 GMT
Early April 1985: The Caribbean and Moscow
Within hours of the Soviets using their nuclear weapons against American submarines across over on the other side of the world, the United States responded. They struck against Soviet maritime assets in the Caribbean. Conventional warfare was already taking place here but this was suddenly given a nuclear dimension. A ‘limited’ attack was made near to the island of St. Kitts. The US Navy was authorised to use such weapons against the submarine that they were hunting there that had been eluding them for several days now. The frigates on the surface and the aircraft above were all given that permission to make attacks with such weapons. This came as a surprise to those American forces yet they were quick to take advantage. The enemy which they were hunting – a Victor class attack submarine – had led them on a dance for several days when it had been pursued for some distance away from near Puerto Rico and towards the Cuban-occupied St. Kitts. Anti-submarine work was never easy and required a lot of patience. Nuclear weapons though changed things as far more destructive power could be brought to bear to speed everything up and make killing a submarine a lot easier.
One of the P-3 Orion maritime patrol aircraft got the kill. It dropped several nuclear depth bombs into the water right where one of the helicopters from a frigate had a track on the submarine. The helicopter made a mad dash to escape despite assurances that the underwater explosions would have no effect upon the crew of the SH-2 Seasprite above: they weren’t about to take the chance of glowing in the dark in the future! In the hours afterwards, with that submarine destroyed and the threat from it thus gone, the US Navy made several attacks against St. Kitts with the frigates and their helicopters striking enemy shipping in the area. While doing so, they were focused upon that and had no idea of the fallout from the nuclear attack they took part in. It wasn’t just here in the Caribbean where both the Dutch and French were rather upset at the use of such weapons near their colonial island possessions but far away in Moscow.
Messages went back-and-forth over the Hot-Line. There was the nuclear attack made in the Sea of Okhotsk and then the retaliation in the Caribbean which formed the basis of exchanges made through the link between the leaders of the Soviet Union and the United States. Accusations were made, answers demanded and promises of further action issued.
The Defence Council met to discuss what to do. General Secretary Vorotnikov and Defence Minister Romanov took the approach that the situation had come to a head here with the Americans who were now out of control. They had won ‘some victories’ of their own in North America and were emboldened by EDA ‘partial successes’ in Europe. They had chosen to make an attack against the strategic missile submarines in the Sea of Okhotsk to frighten the Soviet Union into doing nothing in response and then struck with a nuclear attack in the Caribbean. What was coming next? Nuclear strikes against further Soviet allies following on from their attack on Mexico? Nuclear attacks on the Soviet mainland to follow those in Soviet waters? There was no reasoning with this maniac John Glenn!
Grigory Vasilyevich Romanov – the Soviet Union’s fourth defence minister since the war had started – put forward a course of action for the Defence Council to consider. This was something that Vorotnikov told them all that he favoured too. This course of action was for the Soviet Union to use nuclear weapons once again as ‘pre-emptive self-defence’. There would be strikes made in both North America and Western Europe and done in the correct manner, Romanov assured his comrades that the Soviet Union would ‘suffer little’ in any response. Due to the late hour when the discussion took place, Vorotnikov asked the Defence Council members to sleep on it and they would meet again in the morning to vote on whether to follow this suggested course of action. He was anticipating that despite some objections, it would be voted through.
The reaction from his comrades, and those on the Politburo who met afterwards without the knowledge of him and Romanov, could be best summed up as ‘hell, no!’.
They all recalled what had happened to Leningrad… Tashkent, Chita, Khabarovsk and Vladivostok too. They remembered when that lone Chinese ICBM had been shot down at the last minute above Moscow. These people weren’t going to see any more incoming nuclear missiles against their country if they had any power to stop that. It wasn’t the supposed maniac Glenn out of control, it was Vorotnikov and Romanov who were. It was they who had consistently gone against the will of both the Defence Council and the Politburo in what they had recently done in the form of the war launched against Yugoslavia, the return to the use of chemical weapons and so much more. Now they wanted to do this? That wasn’t happening.
The Politburo took a vote and once that was done with, action was taken during the early hours. The KGB was responsible for the security of Vorotnikov and with their chairman in the form of Kryuchkov as being the nation’s new leader’s right-hand in this matter, the now-deposed former general secretary was quietly taken into custody after being awoken from his sleep. Once bound, gagged and hooded, he was bundled on an aircraft and flown out of Moscow long before the sun came up. The KGB had a holding site for him down in the Crimea and from there he would never be heard from again. Vorotnikov had taken ill unexpectedly, the story would later be, and he would need much rest and recuperation. Romanov wasn’t so lucky as to get a free vacation to the sunny Crimea. The KGB wasn’t fully responsible for his personal security and shared that duty with the Soviet Army, an organisation which was currently fractionised. While the General Staff was fully-on board with what the Politburo did, not all of the lower-levels were and one of those included the part loyal to Romanov. The KGB was forced to let the military clean their own house and that included dealing with Romanov. Gunshots were exchanged at his official residence between soldiers wearing the same uniform. The attackers won out quickly though it still wasn’t easy and gave Romanov the time to attempt to make a run for it. He had no chance though. He was shot down dead long before he would get a few feet from the war zone in the heart of Moscow which was his residence. There were other arrests and killings during the night though no one else of any real noteworthy significance joined Vorotnikov and Romanov. Talking people around had been the order of the day either by appealing to their common sense and patriotism or by the KGB making them understand that their futures and that of their families lay with following the new order being established.
The coup d’état was complete. It was far less bloodier than it could have been and afterwards no one would call it that. Vorotnikov’s health was their concern and as to Romanov… well… there had been traitors there trying to kill him and when aid had been sent to him, he’d been accidently caught up in the gunfire: such things happen.
Gromyko chaired the Politburo the next morning, taking Vorotnikov’s seat at the head of the table. He was supported by his closest supporters in the form of Kryuchkov, Aliyev and Tikhonov. While retaining the foreign minister’s brief for the time being, Gromyko was now also the general secretary and that was what mattered. The Communist Party’s higher ranks, the KGB and the Soviet Army were all behind him. With that, he was unchallengeable.
A plan of action was put to the Politburo – the Defence Council remained active yet powers had returned to the wider Politburo – by Gromyko. They voted unanimously to follow this once input came from many corners. This was collective decision undertaken, the first of those on such an important thing for a long time now. Following the show of hands, Gromyko then set about having the agreed message sent down the Hot-Line to the Americans as well as an identical one sent via other links to Paris.
The Soviet Union was asking that the Allies and the EDA both agree to a ceasefire pending armistice talks.
Gromyko stated when Soviet forces would cease firing and requested that the military forces of all of those countries within each alliance do so. He assured those reading the messages that there would be no betrayal of this ceasefire from the Soviet Union nor its allies too. He was in complete control here. The timing of the ceasefire was to be that of eight a.m. Moscow time on April 12th: nearly twenty-four hours ahead of when the messages were sent.
Gromyko waited for the Allies and the EDA to respond.
Mid-April 1985:
Mossad still had their man inside the highest ranks of the KGB. The spy for Israel – codenamed Hazelnut – didn’t have the access to Kryuchkov to give forewarning of what was coming with the change in leadership at the top in Moscow. Even if he had, his handlers didn’t have real-time access to him where they could just drop by for a chat at any moment. Furthermore, everything happened so fast too. Once it became clear that Gromyko was in-charge, Hazelnut was able to point to the direct hand that the KGB had in everything and was able to reveal the fate of Romanov too. As to Vorotnikov… he wouldn’t discover that information for many weeks. Immense pressure came upon him to provide his handlers with further information. They were under pressure from back home as Israel was being harried by the Americans. To ask too many questions and to look at too many documents would cost him his life though. Oh, in addition, it would also mean a complete loss of the information which he was supplying as well.
Still the agent was pushed. Israel itself wanted him to find out more because they would use what he could provide to leverage their relationship with the United States in both the immediate term and the future too. Hazelnut couldn’t find out what exactly was wanted in terms of the precise reason why the Soviets were pulling out of the war and how they were going to go about negotiating their position. He did manage to uncover other things while risking everything digging – such as discovering the double bluff that the KGB was playing with the Americans over a supposed defector who they called Peppermint – though not what was sought from those from abroad. Israel and the Americans both wanted a window into the inner thinking of the Soviet leadership as it sought to end the war. Neither would get that and thus the Americans played the game that they did without being able to read the other guy’s cards.
Sometimes, life was just fair like that.
Once the ceasefire offer was made, and ahead of the outcome of that, instructions came from Moscow for a lot of ‘housecleaning’ to be made worldwide. The Soviet Union needed to protect its interests in all the many forms that those were. This would result in the deaths of many people as well as certain acts of destruction and the physical burying of things so that they wouldn’t be found.
In the mountains of north-central Mexico, up in the Sierra Madre Oriental range, the Soviet’s Strategic Rocket Forces had their SS-20 Sabre missiles there. The road-mobile launchers and assorted support vehicles were not going to be heading home. Nuclear warheads were removed first before every single vehicle was sent tumbling over several steep cliffs from long winding roads above. The destruction caused was complete and to many of those watching, such sights were extremely satisfying to see. Who wouldn’t enjoy smashing complicated pieces of equipment in such a way? Helicopters had first flown away the warheads before they would later be taken by aircraft first south deeper into Central America and then, hopefully, eventually home. Elsewhere across the Western Hemisphere, other stocks of weapons of mass destruction were on the move. Nuclear, chemical and biological (the latter not used in this war but available to be) warheads and dispensers were taken away to hidden places in the rear areas all to be later taken back to the Soviet Union too. As was the case with those missiles destroyed in Mexico, the associated weaponry which went with these actual warheads themselves was destroyed in-place. Removing it was too difficult and there was no way that it was going to be left behind. Explosives were used where there were no step cliffs; elsewhere, bits and pieces were dumped in river estuaries or even the sea.
Firing squads were busy. Those involved in the waves of killing were all unaware of what was going on and had no idea of the bigger picture. Orders came for the urgent shootings to take place of all sorts of people throughout the Western Hemisphere but also at selected places elsewhere in the world too. These were people whom the Soviet Union didn’t want to see survive the outcome of the war for a variety of reasons. Taking them away was considered but that process was difficult and fraught with the danger of things going wrong. It was easier to shoot people because the dead can tell no tales. Where possible, the bodies of the dead were disposed of by burning them or burying them. The dead included (but wasn’t limited to) the entire group of the KGB-controlled Peace Committee in El Paso – all of those Americans there either after being kidnapped, tricked or just stupid where they had been fulfilling Soviet propaganda – and others such as Mexican nationals with close ties to the Soviets, operatives of friendly intelligence services co-opted to do Soviet bidding (this was in the main on occupied bits of West German and Austrian soil) and high-value POWs held who could reveal what they’d been forced to talk about while in captivity. Documents were burnt and destruction was done to audio & video recordings of GRU and KGB activities during the war. Things were missed during this all and mistakes were made. Nonetheless, the people aspects of this housecleaning was pretty damn effective.
As the shootings occurred, the frame-up began too. There was to be evidence left behind in some cases to point to these things being done at earlier times and also by others too: namely the Cubans, the Guatemalans, the Nicaraguans, the Mexicans and the East Germans (the latter in Europe). Where some Soviet personnel were supposedly identified in other actions, these people were all conveniently dead. Overall, this seemed like a good idea from the Soviets point of view. ‘It wasn’t us, it was them’ could have worked if it hadn’t been so thorough and complete. Anyone looking at all of the deaths and disappearances would have to be stupid to fall for what was presented before them. It was almost as if the GRU and the KGB were staffed by good people all concerned with not violating any of the rules of law while in comparison, those other organisations manned by their allies, all of which followed the Soviet lead on every other matter, decided to do such things all by themselves just in the manner that their big brothers would have. Only a fool would fall for all of this baloney…
Evacuations were made from certain places of key people who were far from Soviet shores. Not everyone could be pulled away to safety from possible captivity though. Shooting such people was an option considered yet not chosen. Instead, long-established procedures were followed to disguise the identities of such people. At other points in the war the Soviets had suffered reverses and lost people they didn’t want to: this time they were prepared for that. Identification papers and cover stories pre-issued were ordered to be used. All of a sudden, GRU and KGB officers, plus many military officers & technical personnel in specialist fields, vanished into the wind; there were suddenly a lot more ‘boring’ logistical staffers, artillerymen and admin personnel.
***
The new Soviet leadership sent it’s ceasefire offers to both the Americans and the French with the intention of having each negotiate those on behalf of their respective alliances. There had been some thinking, suggested by others on the Politburo, that there be further offers made to countries such as Britain, Japan and West Germany as well to break open both the Allies and the EDA. This was rejected. Maybe it would work out yet there was the concern that it could backfire too. The problem of dealing with the wishes of many other nations would thus be put on the United States and France to attend to rather than the Soviet Union. Let them deal with the petty worries of such countries, the Politburo decided, while we concentrate on the big picture.
That big picture was for the Soviet Union to bring two of the three the wars it was fighting to a close. The China War was nearly won and would continue, but the conflicts with the Allies and the EDA were lost. Vorotnikov and Romanov had refused to accept that and spoke only of ‘reverses’ suffered, all which they had intended to correct by the use of a massive strategic nuclear attack. The rest of the Politburo had realised the truth though in the fact that those supposed reverses were real defeats.
The Americans were on their way to liberating the last bits of their own nation and were also already inside Mexico after destroying much of the rest of that country in that massive nuclear strike last month.
The Allies had won effective control of the North Atlantic.
The EDA had eliminated the Soviet presence in Sweden, stopped the invasions of West Germany & Austria cold and joined with the Yugoslavians to provide Moscow with what could only become a far-bigger war in the Balkans.
Into that fight in Western Europe had come the British, returning to the Continent in strength after politics had forced them out beforehand; the Americans would arrive before the year was out too once they were done in the Western Hemisphere.
The Mediterranean was a graveyard for Soviet warships; nearby, the dictators of the Middle East were turning their backs on Moscow.
South Korea had been ridden of both North Korean and Soviet forces; Japan had defended itself and the Pacific was an Allied lake.
All of that had occurred already and things were only going to get worse everywhere the Soviet Union was fighting both alliances. At home the economy was on the brink of collapse now and there were absences at a huge scale among the country’s military forces were reservists openly defied their mobilisation orders. Protests, mutinies and rebellions were surely next. To add to all of this, nuclear exchanges had taken place with the Americans. The British and the French had their own nuclear arsenals cocked and loaded, all with Soviet targets locked-in.
If it wasn’t nuclear war that would bring them all down, then it would be troubles at home soon enough and a loss of their ‘core Empire’ cough fraternal allies cough in the form of Eastern Europe and Iran & Afghanistan along with losing everything they had just won in China. If that meant the loss of disposable allies elsewhere in the world, then so be in. The humiliation would have to be suffered for the loss of such foreign wars yet the case would be made domestically and across the alliances which they would retain that they might not have won but they hadn’t lost either. That all could only be achieved if these conflicts with the Allies and the EDA were brought to a close now.
A ceasefire followed by an armistice was therefore what the Politburo had decided to see done. They told the Americans and the French when Soviet and Soviet-led forces would stop fighting and invited them to have their forces stand down as well. Following the ceasefire, there would be a retention of the right for self-defence yet no more conflict was sought. What was asked for beyond that was for talks to take place to turn the ceasefire into something secure in terms of no more fighting, that being an armistice. Mention was made of seeing to it that prisoners would be exchanged, the civilians would be given aid and there could be a stand down from the ‘dangers’ of further nuclear conflict.
This was all put on the table in two identical messages to both New York and Paris. There was no talk though of any form of surrender or any upcoming peace agreements in those. However, the Politburo was thinking of such things for the future. Many of their military forces aboard, along with those of their allies which they would have to force into it, would eventually have to surrender: hence those killings and suchlike. Moscow understood that the two alliances in the West would try to impose their will on the Soviet Union in response to domestic politics yet believed that these would be abandoned eventually. A strategy had been agreed where supposed red lines would be drawn in talks with the Allies and the EDA and then those would be backed away from in the form of concessions made: in return, reasonable things would be asked for across the table. Soviet diplomats would negotiate with the Allies and the EDA from a position of strength, turning each bloc – not the individual parts of each – against each other if necessary. They could always play upon wartime divisions between the two of them should the situation call for that.
Responses came to the ceasefire offers made.
The Americans provided the Soviets with far more difficulties than the French did. The Allies spoke of immediate Soviet withdrawals from occupied territories and surrenders in others after any ceasefire would take place. All parts of occupied American soil, Belize, Caribbean islands belonging to Britain & the United States, the Azores, Iceland and northern Norway were all at once to be handed over to them with Soviet and Soviet-allied forces inside surrendering along with all of their equipment too. Soviet forces were also to leave Mexico, Central America, the Caribbean, South Yemen, Vietnam and North Korea as well as to retreat from the world’s oceans. Demands were made for POWs held to be at once handed over included those that the Allies said were held on other territory: i.e. on Cuba, inside Eastern Europe and within the Soviet Union too. This was the first response which came. Moscow replied asking for confirmation that the Allies were going to respect the ceasefire which they had called without commenting on these demands which came. The Americans simply repeated themselves. Such an impasse was broken by Gromyko having an address to Glenn made over the Hot-Line where he asked him whether keeping fighting when the nuclear situation was so tense was worthwhile for either of them? Couldn’t they just stop fighting? He said that these matters which the Allies demanded could and would be addressed but only once the ceasefire had come into place. Armistice talks could begin straight away afterwards, at a time and venue of the American’s choosing… but the ceasefire had to come first. There was a pause in communications coming back. Several hours passed. The Americans were clearly talking to their allies. Finally, there came a message confirming that the Allies would follow the Soviets into a ceasefire agreement. Glenn signed off that message by stating that there was going to be no withdrawal from those conditions – and they were far from exclusive too – when it came to armistice talks though.
Paris did the same as the United States did in at once responding to Soviet entrees with a long list of demands. They wanted surrenders of forces and withdrawals of others. This covered Bornholm, bits of West Germany, Austria and Yugoslavia as priorities in addition to Crete, Finland and the Caribbean as well. Furthermore, the Western Europeans spoke of handing over named people, paying financial reparations and their vision of a future for Eastern Europe: with the latter, there was quite the demand for the future of the two Germanies that they made there. The EDA put the Allies to shame in having a larger list of immediate, on-hand demands ready to go with urgent expediency! Along with all of this, the French stated that yes, they were open to armistice talks. They would decide when & where and they would inform the Soviet Union of the details of those once the ceasefire was shown to be working.
The ceasefire was firmly agreed and there was general agreement on opening armistice talks afterwards. Messages from both sides went out to their respective forces in the field that a cessation of fighting would commence. Caveats to those were sent where self-defence was authorised and how to approach blatant violations of a ceasefire. Then the moment came, at different times around the world, yet all at the same time too.
The fighting was over.
Now came the hard part: each side making sure that it wasn’t going to restart while also getting everything that they wanted from the fallout of the wars which they had taken part in.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 5, 2019 18:38:42 GMT
Chapter Twenty–Four – It’s over!
Mid-April 1985:
The ceasefire brought about celebrations around the world, in the main through the countries of the West.
It was over!
No one else had to die and there would be no nuclear apocalypse. Who wouldn’t want to celebrate such a thing? Across the frontlines, men in uniform understood what was coming as the slowdown in the fighting occurred. They were then informed that there was a ceasefire and the war was officially still ongoing… but they heard what they wanted to hear and saw what they did with their own eyes.
It was over!
Away from the frontlines, word got out everywhere else. Some governments tried to keep a lid on things but others did no such thing. The war was over! There was drinking, dancing and horizontal romance aplenty.
It was over!
Yet it really wasn’t. A ceasefire meant just that: there was a cessation in fighting. Nothing beyond that had been agreed, nothing at all.
The outpouring of relief when the ceasefire occurred and as word spread as fast and as far as it did was something that many people afterwards would regret. Politicians and military officers alike hadn’t wanted to see the scenes which occurred, especially with some of the more outrageous things which took place. Discipline in some military units went right out of the window where men at once wanted to go home: this was almost exclusively among wartime conscripts though where it was among others, pre-war serving soldiers, that was rather troubling. The civilian scenes were something else too. The celebrations got a bit out of hand in places. There was an immediate feeling afterwards that everything had been sacrificed for the war effort on the home front had to come to an end too: i.e. right now. Official positions were that at any moment the ceasefire could breakdown or that pending armistice talks could fail to achieve the necessary results leading to a return to fighting. That wasn’t going to be easy to do – not impossible; just hard to redo – with the general mood of so many once they heard about the ceasefire.
None of this had been foreseen in terms of major occurrence and the scale of that.
It was more than a day late before the ceasefire came into effect in Yugoslavia and it didn’t affect neither the fighting on the Korean Peninsula nor that in China at all. The Yugoslavian issue was resolved by Paris making concessions to Belgrade as to how involved Yugoslavia would be in the joint EDA negotiations to reach a final settlement to the war which they had taken part in. This displeased other Western European nations – the Low Countries and West Germany in particular –, yet Yugoslavia got away with it. As to North Korea, Kim Jong-il paid no attention to what Gromyko said. North Korea kept on shelling Allied forces inside & beyond the DMZ and so they returned fire: the situation on the ground there was already a stalemate in terms of movement of the frontlines and overall this didn’t necessarily effect the general Allied position on how it would deal with the Soviets post-ceasefire considering it was only the North Koreans, not anyone else, involved in that. As to the China War… that was an entirely separate matter considering the government of the People’s Republic of China was no more.
Other fighting took place post-ceasefire though. In South Texas, US Army forces there clashed with troops no longer representing to the fallen regime of Revolutionary Mexico and not listening to the Soviets either. Messages over the Hot-Line from Moscow said that the Soviet Union was ‘struggling’ with the issue of Revolutionary Mexico. That ambiguity was something that the United States responded to by telling the Soviets that they would act to ‘correct’ matters there. Stormin’ Norman and his US V Corps, joined by elements of the US Sixteenth Air Force, received specific orders to make that correction. In a smaller action to the north of San Antonio in the high ground there and then in a far larger series of engagements west and especially south of that recently-liberated city, they undertook an offensive. From Del Rio all the way downstream to Brownsville, the Rio Grande was reached and everything in between taken. Cuban and Soviet forces stepped aside and ended up surrounded though not disarmed; Mexican forces in the way faced the full might of the United States here and were whipped out. This put everyone involved in a difficult situation but it was resolved in under twenty-four hours. Not many prisoners were taken in this and post-war accusations would be made at the level of American brutality shown when on the attack against such a weak opponent. Questions would be asked as to whether what was done was justified from a military point of view from others who cared not for the Mexican lives lost but in what was done here. All such comments were ignored in the rush to liberate that region and smash apart such an opponent. Schwarzkopf got his wish as his men reached the Rio Grande and he would firmly secure his place in history as ‘liberator of Texas’.
Over the Rio Grande, where the Americans were fighting in north-western Mexico, the US Marines there also engaged Revolutionary Mexico troops when the 1st Marine Division declared it had come under attack. This did happen: there was no central command for their opponents to listen to so they fought on. The retaliation for ‘breaking the ceasefire’ was quite something and allowed for the Americans to take over an extremely large portion of territory there too. Up in the far north of Norway, several instances of ceasefire violations took place where Norwegian irregulars took the opportunity to attack isolated Soviet garrisons and there came retaliations to these. News of the ceasefire had been broadcast but there were standing orders for Norwegians long-trained to fight a guerrilla war to ignore such things, especially if they considered such things to be enemy lies. Their country was occupied, the armed invaders were in front of them and this was a fight which they would continue to keep having. There was no easy solution to this issue. Oslo reacted strongly to what they saw as hesitancy from London and New York in how they responded where they were more focused on arrangements underway to start armistice talks. Norwegian innocents were caught up in the exchanges of gunfire where Oslo considered that the Soviets were breaking the ceasefire. More broadcasts were made into occupied territory from Allied sources – the Soviets lifted electronic jamming and also allowed unarmed aircraft to make leaflet drops too – but it carried on. Such messages and news were all treated, as it was supposed to be, as lies from the occupier. This put pressure on the whole Allied negotiating approach to hurry up. Moreover, waves of defections and desertions occurred across the world among Soviet-aligned forces in the field yet too behind the lines. Instances of shooting took place which oftentimes occurred right near the frozen frontlines. None of this was an act of breaking the ceasefire yet it occurred right within the faces of the Allies and the EDA and they had to hold back from doing anything about it.
Other occurrences saw close instances of near-shooting following the ceasefire coming into effect. There were Soviet transport aircraft flying from out of occupied parts of the United States – quite the shrunken area – and also from Mexico, central America and Cuba. It was the same in Austria with aircraft while elsewhere on parts of EDA soil under their control they made helicopter flights or ran convoys of trucks back eastwards. There were many people in Western governments and in uniform who wanted to shoot those aircraft down and bomb those trucks. The ceasefire was only about stopping fighting though: it didn’t demand that no one was allowed to do anything in their rear areas. The Allies and the EDA were busy doing the same thing where they shunted military forces around without the immediate danger of air & missile strikes. In addition to all of this, there came surrenders made from cut-off forces caught behind the lines and on the verge of collapse when the ceasefire had come into effect. Many Guatemalans caught in Arizona, Soviet naval crews on damaged ships within the eastern Med. and East Germans surrounded while inside Thüringen gave themselves up. These were groups of military personnel in desperate states who had heard the ceasefire orders sent and were told to stay in-place. They found this impossible to do for a variety of reasons (the Guatemalans were being killed by guerrillas, the seamen were on sinking ships and the East German Grenztruppen were being chased by a raging series of wildfires) and so they surrendered. Allied and EDA forces on the ground accepted those surrenders though not in an official capacity in response to higher instructions that meant that legally, while in the state of a ceasefire, that couldn’t be accepted. This mess was a further distraction for those involved in the preparations for armistice talks.
Before the ceasefire came into effect, Mitterrand sent to Glenn a message on behalf of the EDA and to all members of the Allies an assurance that there would be no betrayal. Western Europe wouldn’t sell the Allies down the river and seek a settlement with the Soviets behind their backs. London forced a pause in a return message where the British Government – recalling what had happened back in September during misunderstandings made in haste – intervened to have what the Americans tell the French in response. Input was given to the reply from the British but also the Canadians and the Spanish too. This put noses out of joint in New York but there remained the unofficial position that Britain had that Glenn had really f***ed-up last year when talking to the French. When the reply was made, it was a response from the Allies. The same assurance was given: there would be no sell-out of the EDA from the Allies. Each had their own interests, the message continued, and those would be respected. It was anticipated that the Soviets would try to divide them and thus this was sought to be pre-emptied by such assurances given both ways.
Each alliance had previously agreed within on that war aims and what they would have liked to see once the conflict came to an end. Drawing those up was a matter of politics and diplomacy. It was done during times when they were engaged in warfare and with no idea of how or when the wars which they were fighting would come to an end. This meant the Allies and the EDA had changing positions due to ongoing events. A major element of complication came with regard to the direct British-EDA military cooperation on the battlefields of northern West Germany following the arrival of the British-Spanish-Irish force there which had arrived late but made quite the impact when doing so. When the Soviets suddenly called for a ceasefire, the French at once sent to them their standing position on how they saw an end to the war coming with what the EDA had at that point as its post-war aims. The Allies took their time in this, seeking to have theirs more up to date. The Soviets had replied to each with calls for armistice talks to take place and refused to discuss these ahead of any ceasefire.
Both the Allies and the EDA were each waiting for the Soviets to make demands of their own and they were going to shoot those down. They had won this war and the winners of a war decide how it will all end, not the losers. While it was considered that the Soviets might not see themselves as losers by some of those within each Western alliance, the general feeling was that the Soviets had lost and thus would receive victor’s justice. The Soviets weren’t on their knees and they retained their nuclear arsenals, so there was a limit on how far they could be pushed, but they had lost this war and admitted that by requesting that ceasefire and armistice talks. They would be pushed as far as possible. To the armistice talks, the Allies and the EDA would bring their full list of demands for the post-war world. They had opening positions which they were willing to step back from but red lines too…
…just as the Soviets did.
Arrangements for armistice talks took place while messages were exchanged due to ceasefire violations. The Soviets made it clear during those that they would speak for all members of their alliance apart from Revolutionary Mexico and North Korea. Gromyko told the two alliances he was engaged in distant communication with that neither of them were ‘under control’ yet everyone else was. His representatives would speak for their country and twenty-two more too. As to face-to-face talks between his representatives and those of the West, Gromyko requested that just one set of armistice talks occur where both the Allies and the EDA were present.
This was something shot down. Neither would go for that. They refused to do so and from New York and Paris there also came replies to the Soviets that it was they, not Moscow, who would decide when and where armistice talks would occur.
Agreeing between themselves first before presenting this to Moscow, the two alliances informed Gromyko of the specifics of those talks. There would be simultaneous meetings in both New York (for the Allies) and Luxembourg (for the EDA) starting April 16th to take place with those whom Gromyko wished to send to each. There would be no talks on neutral territory – Geneva, Helsinki, Jamaica or San Jose (the capital of neutral Costa Rica) – as the Soviets had made requests to see done. Instead, the Soviets would come to the territory of the victorious West to talk.
Gromyko – for so long known as Mister Nyet – said ‘da’ instead.
Mid- & Late April 1985:
The Soviet Union sent representatives to both New York and Luxembourg to talk to the Allies and the EDA respectively. While doing so, those diplomatic teams spoke not just for their country but all the other countries through which there was that Soviet domination of them in terms of foreign and military affairs. The twenty-two further nations ranged from Central America & the Caribbean to Eastern Europe to various parts of Asia. There were countries which had strongman dictators as their leaders and there were others with weak frontmen for dubious committees. Some nations had taken a near-independent course of action throughout the war while others were nothing but puppets for the Soviet Union. Back in Moscow, the interests of all of those countries and, if it came to it, the survival of every single one of them, came secondary to their own. The Politburo had agreed to this. The act of throwing to the wolves their allies in this war was something they, naturally, kept secret. There was a strong wish to retain Eastern Europe – plus Afghanistan, Iran and Mongolia; neither of these were likely to be lost anyway – though and it wasn’t thought likely to that to reach a settlement with the two Western alliances would see those forced to be detached from Soviet control. That was especially true with Eastern Europe. Gromyko and the Politburo weren’t about to throw away what they had there unless they really had to.
Being able to use the fates of these many countries as bargaining chips when dealing with the West meant keeping them under control before they were disposed of. This wasn’t an easy process though, conversely, not as difficult as it might have seemed either.
Cuba had tried to break with the Soviet Union before the ceasefire and, once made aware by Kryuchkov, Vorotnikov had ordered the death of Raúl Castro. As was the case with many things that the former general secretary had ordered done before he was deposed, this was only something that could have been carried out by the KGB. Kryuchkov had been double-dealing as he had been close to Vorotnikov but also to the growing Gromyko tendency. When the time had come to make a choice, he had been at the forefront of supporting Gromyko rather than following a lead set by anyone else. The KGB’s chairman was a survivor and intended to remain where he was with all of his power and privilege. Now, as to the younger Castro, his death kept Fidel in-check for the time being. In the long-run, the elder Castro would seek vengeance but that was a long time away as far as Moscow was concerned. Cuba was cowed for the time being. In eliminating Raúl, the Soviets put a wave of concern into the various personalities across the regimes which were tied to them throughout the Western Hemisphere. The Ortega Brothers in Nicaragua, Daniel and Humberto, had long been close to Fidel and Raúl but they were left worrying for themselves after the death of the younger Castro and wouldn’t move against the Soviets for fear of a repeat of such a killing. Guatemala’s ruling committee, Noriega down in Panama and the blood-thirsty madmen over in Grenada were fearful of angering Moscow yet also convinced that the Soviet Union wouldn’t throw them under the bus. Noriega was the weakest link in that chain of self-delusion but he remained the most-frightened: he thus took centre-stage in calling for unity among the fellow nations of the alliance which stretched through Central America and the Caribbean in supporting the Soviets… anything to avoid a KGB hit squad. Manuel Antonio Noriega Moreno, the Fool.
East Germany, Czechoslovakia, Hungary and Bulgaria were all on the frontlines of the war in Europe. These regimes were all displeased at how the war had turned out with the EDA and were not upset at the ceasefire coming into effect. None had pushed for an invasion to take place into Western Europe and Yugoslavia, all with the concern that it would come down to nuclear weapons being used in the end. As they were at the forefront of the war in conventional terms, they believed that they would be first in the firing line for nuclear attacks made too. Protests in Czechoslovakia and East Germany had been put down by those regimes ahead of a feared Soviet intervention too, one along the lines of what had occurred last year and ahead of the war against Poland. In Warsaw, there was a puppet regime installed by Moscow and none wanted that in theirs. However, against this backdrop of doing what the Kremlin said because it was all in their best interests, East Germany’s leader Erich Honecker sought to use the period following the ceasefire to shore-up his position. He enacted a cull amongst the lower ranks of his ruling regime due to how terribly the war which East Germany had fought had turned out. There were dismissals made of military officers – mostly political generals – and he urged the Soviets to allow for East German military forces inside Poland to return home. Should the ceasefire break down, or the armistice talks fail, East Germany would face a full-on invasion he believed where Allied and EDA forces operating side-by-side would march on West Berlin to liberate that city. Moscow said no to the troop movements and at home, Honecker’s comrades were unhappy at what was done with the dismissals and arrests made. The general secretary ‘lost the confidence’ of his Politburo. The KGB was well aware of what was going on and when the Soviet Politburo was briefed on developments, they feared that this situation could get out of hand. Both the Allies and the EDA had broadcast much propaganda into East Germany during the war (more than anywhere else in Eastern Europe) and their read on the situation there with the stalled protest movement was different than that in East Berlin. The fear was that the country could collapse into civil war… which would put everything they were seeking to retain in danger. Honecker’s comrades were supported, not him, and they were aided in forcing his retirement. Erich Mielke, the head of the Stasi, aimed to play the role in East Berlin that Kryuchkov had done in Moscow. Alas, that wasn’t to be. He was detained and spirited out of the country to be held by the KGB over on Polish soil for the time being: the thinking being that his fate might either be an unmarked grave somewhere or handed over to the West if need be. This whole murky series of events in East Germany saw the regime now lead by a four-man steering committee. A leader among them would eventually emerge, the Soviets knew that, but before then, they were mightily useful while they focused internally and jockeyed for that position rather than concerning themselves with outside events. Moscow now had re-established its needed control over East Germany while maintaining what it had elsewhere throughout Eastern Europe. None of those regimes were going to turn on them.
South Yemen hadn’t followed the lead of the other Arab countries which had been with the Soviet Union earlier in the war – Iraq, Libya and Syria – in walking away before the end came. The leadership there would later regret not doing so. The fate of such a country mattered nought to Moscow and any betrayal of them wouldn’t be thought of as anything of significance. However, that wasn’t something realised in Aden at all. Vietnam was another which the Soviets no longer really had any future concern for. Since the Chinese nuclear attack late last year against Hanoi, and then American-led action from Allied countries in South East Asia, the usefulness of the country in any real form was long gone. Sticking one thumb in the eye of Beijing and another in the eye of Washington had long been the unsaid reason for the Soviet presence there beyond any military benefits. Vietnam was a drain on the Soviet Union in the past and would only be more so in the future. There was a government down in Haiphong who weren’t as gullible as those in Aden were in fully believing everything that the Soviets told them yet still took their word for it that Vietnam was important to Moscow. The previous leadership, the dead men who’d been in Hanoi, wouldn’t had let anyone else speak on behalf of their nation yet these fools in Haiphong did. They were immersed in the internal matters of a country which had had its heart ripped out like it had with that nuclear attack in October and that was what mattered to them. North Korea cut all ties with the Soviet Union following the ceasefires it sought with the West. The Soviet leadership had at first considered strong action in response but, after considering things here, decided to let that slight go. It would be Pyongyang which suffered in the end from such an action. It helped too that North Korea wanted to paint itself a bad guy just as the Soviets had already done with the remains of Revolutionary Mexico.
The city of Luxembourg had been chosen by the EDA as where they would meet the Soviets for armistice talks in. The capital of the small country which shared the same name was chosen over others such as Paris, Bonn, Rome, The Hague, Brussels, Strasbourg and Maastricht after all of those had been considered. The capitals of those five other core & founding nations of the EDA as well as Strasbourg (scene of a failed earlier summit) and Maastricht (where the treaty establishing the European Defence Alliance had been signed) had been rejected over Luxembourg. Meeting here was down to security concerns – Luxembourg was relatively isolated – and the centralised location for EDA delegations to base themselves in while not that far from governments back home. There was no need to project any form of strength as might be the case by demanding that the Soviets come to somewhere like Paris either. The EDA considered that they had won the war which the Soviet Union had brought to them and Moscow knew that. A different place would be considered for a future peace treaty – Vienna, maybe Stockholm, even Brussels or Strasbourg were all possibilities – but for now it was Luxembourg. The Americans, and thus the Allies who followed their lead, chose New York to demand that the Soviets come to but that was up to them. Western Europe wanted to do things differently.
The founding six countries of the EDA had been joined in wartime by two more ahead of the Soviet invasion and then two more in direct response: Denmark and Sweden followed by Austria and Yugoslavia. African countries allied to France (and Italy in relation to Tunisia) had declared war in support of the EDA and then there had been Malta which had come onside once liberated. This large collection of countries – twenty in total – agreed to speak as one voice in talking with the Soviets. France graciously accepted the offer to do so when backroom deals were struck to give them that leading role in the talks. The founding EDA nations plus Yugoslavia all would have major input in this too but the French were out ahead. It was thus the French foreign minister who met with the Soviets when they arrived and he faced Moscow’s lead negotiator ‘across the table’.
Five days of talks commenced in Luxembourg.
These were at times tense though still maintained quite the expected diplomatic flavour. Outside the meetings, there would be many who would have been hopping mad to see the treatment that the Soviets received. Public rage and diplomacy were two different matters though. There were serious matters to discuss. Sticking points came up and there were rejections made of positions put forward. The EDA wouldn’t listen to any Soviet demand on anything because they were here as the victors. Soviet concessions came yet the Western Europeans didn’t see them as concessions but rather as what rightly should be done in such circumstances where the Soviet Union had launched a war of aggression against them. This wasn’t a deal which they were trashing out but rather a one-sided arrangement to formalise what occurred with the ceasefire and thus a permanent end to the fighting. There was a firmness in the EDA position where they didn’t back down on anything which they came to Luxembourg with. It was the Soviets who backed down in the end, giving away things which the EDA were convinced that they hadn’t come to Luxembourg to agree to fold on.
An agreement was reached but there was a wait on afterwards because there was that understanding made with the Allies on not moving forward without them. The Soviets pushed hard to get this all over with but the EDA held out until the talks in New York were over with two days later. Only once they were finished there across the ocean did there come a signing of documents here in Luxembourg.
What was called the ‘Luxembourg Agreement’ came into effect starting the very beginning of April 23rd.
All Soviet and Warsaw Pact forces on EDA soil would surrender. Those on the island of Bornholm, inside West Germany, within Austria and on Yugoslavian soil would all enter into EDA custody. Western Europe would release POWs taken at a later date and in stages though retained the right to hold & punish war criminals; anything with them from tanks to rifles to documents would all remain with the EDA too. Occupying forces would depart from West Berlin and passage opened up to a joint French and West German military force to reach the city unhindered with no limits on numbers or activities inside. Soviet forces in Finland – which they had first denied were there but later back peddled on that and said they were civilians there at the behest of Helsinki – would leave that country fully. It was the same with Soviet forces on Crete (which the Soviets hadn’t denied they were there but again argued that the Greeks had invited them to be present) as well where they would have to depart from there and do so with utmost haste. Moreover, outside of Europe, and where the EDA acted in conjunction with the Allies on this matter, the Soviets – well… the Cubans to be specific – would surrender all military forces on those island nations (apart from Grenada and Barbados which the Allies were dealing with) there as well: the Dutch and the French would both move into each to take prisoners and establish control within them. Soviet naval forces in the Baltic would move into Soviet a-joining waters and stray no further twelve miles out; this included air and naval air forces over the Baltic too. Down in the Mediterranean, the evacuation of Soviet forces from Crete would commence via unarmed aircraft and ships while that sea, plus the Aegean Sea too, would be off-limits to Soviet warships as well. Naval issues with the North Atlantic and Caribbean were part of the armistice talks with the Allies but there would be no Soviet military presence in them either. As to military forces on the soil of the Warsaw Pact nations, Yugoslavian forces would withdraw from Hungary following the surrender of those inside Yugoslavia; the French would pull out of the small area of East Germany they were in and so would the British too (the latter covered by those talks over in New York). These withdrawals would only be done once surrenders were made of those on the western side of those borders down through the middle of Europe.
This was the immediate military-related part of the Luxembourg Agreement. The agreement covered other things as well though. A complete and thorough return of EDA prisoners of war taken was to be made with no exceptions: this included the bodies of the dead too. There were civilians in Soviet and Warsaw Pact custody ranging from diplomats to intelligence personnel to tourists & students to civilians caught behind the frontlines to those caught in acts of guerrilla warfare. Again, all of those alive and the bodies of those who weren’t were to be delivered to EDA representatives without exception: this included anyone who the Soviets claimed had volunteered to enter their custody. Furthermore, this also included details on the whereabouts of the alive and dead that the Soviets knew of inside EDA nations and neutral nations. Of particular note when this was agreed was where the body was of the missing illegitimate daughter of the French president when the Soviets revealed that she had accidently been killed post-kidnap. Exchanges of people would be reciprocated only in the form of the staged POW release by the EDA and wouldn’t include any return back east of those who charged with war crimes nor those who wished to stay in Western Europe for whatever reason that they wanted: limited civilian consular access would be provided at a later date to confirm their wishes but that would be supervised and tied to other matters. Military forces levels in on the ground in Eastern Europe – outside of Soviet borders but, crucially, not inside them – were to not exceed what they were as of December 31st 1983. This date, not pre-war with either the Allies (Sept. 17th 1984) or the EDA (Feb. 27th 1985), was the one set for that and this included Poland too… which meant that those numbers would be those present before the Polish Revolt. Full diplomatic relations were yet to resume until a full peace treaty. Those below ambassadorial level would come into place but no exchange of ambassadors would be made nor would there be any exchanges of diplomats outside of bilateral relations either in the case of international organisations which required such. All spoils of war were to be returned by both sides. This meant that everything ranging from aircraft and ships be those civilian or military to looted civilian goods to anything else taken and retained must be handed back over. In the main, this covered loot taken from west of the Iron Curtain though the EDA would be on paper returning monies and goods seized in an official capacity as well from what they deemed official and unofficial sources during the war.
Due to the Luxembourg Agreement being only a matter of an armistice, there were important matters missing that others might have expected to see agreed had this been a peace treaty. Such a thing was set for a later date – yet to be determined – and the EDA linked much of what was agreed upon within the armistice to that later peace. Soviet promises were made in Luxembourg and there were things that Western Europe agreed to as well. The thinking behind that was to make sure that a peace treaty came so as to resolve them all. The EDA wanted a settlement on the status of the divided Germanies to come at a later date where the Soviet Union wouldn’t interfere if there was a ‘democratic will’ within the two for a reunion. This was signed off on in Luxembourg though that would of course hinge on future events when it came to East Germany. This took the future of the post-WWII settlement on Germany – plus West Berlin too – right out of the hands of the Soviet Union and delivered it into the shared hands of the EDA as well as the Allies whose input was in with this. However, the facts on the ground of an outwardly stable East Germany and a Soviet military presence there weren’t changed by this. That would be become an issue for West Germany soon enough. Financial compensation was sought for losses incurred during the war. None of this was agreed in Luxembourg in terms of details – which was why the EDA held onto what they had seized as an insurance – but the EDA had made it clear that they wanted the Soviet Union to pay for all that it had done in terms of repairs and replacement of civilian structures, materials and goods. Such payments would be government-to-government, not direct to individual people and organisations. The Luxembourg Agreement tied the Soviet Union to committing to doing that now and thus not making it a negotiable part of a later peace treaty. To hurry along that future peace, the EDA refused Soviet attempts to see trade recommence in any form unless there was a peace treaty. This was regarded by Western Europe as the shrewdest move they could make on this matter of forcing a final settlement in the form of a peace treaty. They could make the Soviets pay in terms of trade costs and force them to do sign a peace to allow that trade to occur. A delay from Moscow would cost them even more and once a deal was done, it would incur using trade to open up Eastern Europe leading to an eventual non-violent collapse of Soviet domination there. On this matter, the thinking here was confined to diplomats and government rather than to the general public though.
As the Luxembourg Agreement came into place, the EDA started moving its armies forward to retake their own soil and only would withdraw from the bits of East Germany and Hungary which they held starting the beginning of May. Soviet and Warsaw Pact forces laid down their arms and they were taken into custody. Arrangements were made to point to stocks of damaged & unexploded ammunition as well as minefields and weakened buildings & bridges. Transfers of POWs heading westwards began with medical care delivered and debriefings to take place; there was also the shipment of bodies too. War crimes teams moved forward with most of those acting on pre-ceasefire intelligence firmed up in the week between that ceasefire and the armistice. Nonetheless, they weren’t prepared for all that they found when they arrived. In the liberated areas, there were civilians which the EAD armies met and those Danes, West Germans, Austrians and Yugoslavians had all remained behind the lines during the week-long ceasefire. While relieved to be freed, there was a lot of anger which came too where people had starved or died of medical complications while the EDA armies had ‘sat about waiting!’ following the ceasefire. This would be seen elsewhere in the world too when the Allies were on the move. That went on while at the same time collaborators and traitors were sought among them, often aided by those same outraged locals who now wanted to take matters into their own hands rather than let the authorities do so. As could be expected, not all of those accused of such things were guilty of those things they were said to have done.
The armistice was greeted with less of a public reaction than the ceasefire had been. Governments across Western Europe wanted to make a big show of things on this. The French and West Germans did that with West Berlin and the Austrians too when they (and the Italians alongside them) went to Vienna. The Yugoslavians were fast to get their military presence back on their borders, hold a parade in Belgrade and show their public images of captured POWs; there was international agreements on such things which they grossly violated on this matter… although it was nothing compared to what had been done by the Soviets and their allies with prisoners throughout the wars which they had fought. What came more than the public outpouring of patriotism or unruly celebrations was that continued relief that the war in Western Europe hadn’t brought the use of nuclear weapons. This was more celebrated than victory being won. Then there was what followed.
There came the questions and the allegations over how the war had been allowed to happen and how the Soviets had ‘gotten away with it’. Why wasn’t Eastern Europe being freed? Why weren’t the Soviets being made to pay for all that they had done? This weren’t the vocalised concerns of everyone but those of the loudest: some had valid reasons to do so, others not so much. There was a coming peace treaty, the response ran; the retort came in the form of when will that occur then?
Winning the peace was going to be something else entirely than winning the war.
Mid- & Late April 1985:
The Americans made things difficult for the Soviets in terms of them getting to the armistice talks. They feigned indifference to complaints from Moscow while wearing beaming smiles. Other members of the Allies were uncomfortable with what went on here and let New York know. Security concerns, the Americans said; being childish, came the retort though phased a little more diplomatic than that. Only one Soviet aircraft was allowed to bring their diplomatic party to New York and everything about that aircraft and its passage westwards was under the Americans control. They recalled what happened last September when Gromyko himself had been due in Washington and instead the D.C. area had been the target of half a dozen nuclear-tipped cruise missiles. The circumstances here weren’t the same but the United States wouldn’t be duped like it had been before. They watched on radar displays as the Ilyushin-86 airliner in Aeroflot colours approached Keflavik on Iceland and stopped there for a refuelling. After leaving, and coming further west, the US Navy put F-14s into the sky to give the aircraft an escort. There were two carriers up in the North Atlantic, with five squadrons of Tomcats between them. At all times, at least four of those interceptors flew with the Il-86: one off each wing and two tailing behind. Visual confirmation of everything about the aircraft was maintained at all times. Air-to-air tanking was done all the way too and into Canadian airspace where the US Navy Tomcats followed that aircraft until it made another refuelling stop of its own, this time at Gander on Newfoundland. Refuelling stops like this – in Iceland though not in Canada – had been a staple of the Soviet airlift flights across the North Atlantic during the war. They had taken Iceland, the Azores and many islands in the Caribbean for this reason. Their air transport fleet of airliners and air-freighters didn’t have the range to make such long-haul flights. This was especially apparent when they were carrying large cargos of men or equipment & stores. There had been loses to the aircraft used in such flights from enemy action, accidents and sometimes just bad luck.
Gander was a major wartime military base for the Allies and somewhere they used for refuelling too for far-shorter trans-Atlantic flights than the Soviets had been making. Before the war, Aeroflot airliners including the very one which came here in mid-April, used Gander frequently along with other places like Shannon in the Irish Republic. When it touched down, everyone stayed aboard while it was refuelled: Canada would be billing the Soviet Union for this fuel. The pilot then informed the Canadians that there was a problem. The Canadians sent a small team to the Il-86 including a man who went aboard. It was an issue of power supply and this wasn’t going to be easily resolved. Discussion were had about using another aircraft to fly down to New York. The Soviets didn’t have one on-hand but maybe there could be other arrangements made? When the Americans found out, they were hopping mad. It was decided that this was a matter of the Soviets now playing their own games. The Canadians confirmed it though. The problem was serious and even if it was somehow given a fix, the power issue would flare up again while in mid-air. Seeing the demise of the people aboard might not cause the shedding of any tears though it would delay the armistice talks greatly. There was an Air Canada Boeing-767 at Gander and this was one which had been in Canadian military service with wartime stops made in Britain, Norway and Spain. The Soviet diplomatic party was transferred to the 767 and onwards they went. Canadian and then US Air Force fighters escorted the aircraft southwards (despite it being flown by Canadian military officers) all the way down over the border and above New York state into the Hudson Valley. Stewart AFB outside of New York was where the next stop was made. This was a re-established facility for the US Air Force which too had seen much wartime use for transport aircraft. It had been closed in 1970 and unused until late last year when reopened. Nearby was the FEMA facility at Orangetown – they had been there at an US Army Reserve post since the war’s second day following the loss of their peacetime headquarters in Washington – and where the armistice talks were to be made. This would mean that such meetings would take place outside rather than inside New York City: the official story presented to the media and thus the public didn’t directly lie though the impression was given the Soviets had come to New York itself rather than being forty miles away. Orangetown was regarded as more secure than anywhere inside America’s acting capital. It was a place ready for the Soviets too where the whole place was bugged – there were some of the most advanced pieces of surveillance technology in-place there – and surrounded by soldiers from out of the nearby West Point garrison. The Americans put the Soviets up in comfortable though certainly not luxurious conditions (they’d bill them for this too) before meeting with them for those armistice talks at the same time as those in Luxembourg occurred.
Throughout the war, the Allies had maintained a formal position where they were all equal. Naturally though, there was the first among equals, that being the United States. They were the biggest, the strongest and were more involved in the fighting against the Soviet-led forces than anyone else in terms of theatres of global operations and that the biggest battles of the war which the Allies fought where on American soil. A core membership of the Allies was present too, again despite the position that everything was equal. Five other nations formed that core: Britain, Canada, Japan, South Korea and Spain. Those nations forced their influence forward ahead of others and jockeyed for second place among themselves too with Britain often winning out though not always. US Defence Secretary Chuck Robb would be the face of the negotiations with the Soviets. There were delegations in New York from every single Allied nation (Belize and Iceland included despite the complete loss of their home countries) and every single one of them wanted an input on the discussions talking place. Those core countries pushed the hardest though others such as Australia, Chile and Portugal all wanted a big role as well. Though Robb would remain out front, in the same position as the French foreign minister was in over in Luxembourg, he certainly wouldn’t have full responsibility for everything that occurred. While frustrating at the time and in the immediate afterwards, Robb would later be glad: the writers of the history books wouldn’t blame everything that happened subsequently solely upon him.
Once the armistice talks were underway, the opening positions by each side were put forward. The Allies repeated their demands which they had presented the Soviet Union with the moment that Gromyko had requested the ceasefire. From Moscow had come the response then that those were an issue to be discussed at armistice talks and thus they were. Soviet forces and those of their allies on American soil would surrender in-place along with those holding the Azores, Iceland, northern Norway and island possessions of Britain & the United States in the Caribbean. This would be a full surrender – men and equipment – with all aid requested during that surrender given from identifying minefields to not destroying documentation to helping with the immediate transfer of POWs out. Soviet forces elsewhere in the world in certain regions would leave and that meant every single member of their military personnel throughout the Western Hemisphere, those they had on Spitsbergen in the Arctic, others in South Yemen, more in Vietnam and any left inside North Korea. The world’s oceans were to be freed of Soviet military vessels too. As to Soviet-aligned countries which they said they spoke for, Cuba would withdraw from Guantanamo Bay plus the multiple islands in the Caribbean where there were occupations supporting illegitimate regimes, Guatemala would leave Belize, Panama would withdraw its forces from the Canal Zone, Vietnam would pull out of Cambodia and Iran would depart from those islands in the Persian Gulf which it contested with the UAE. All Allied POWs and civilians who were in custody in areas where there weren’t direct surrenders taking place following Allied occupation were to be handed over no matter what the circumstances of them ending up in detention. This covered the bodies of the dead too. There would be a return of any spoils of war in military and civilian form despite what condition all of these were in. Full cooperation would be given in the return of captives and what had been looted too with the onus being on the Soviets and its allies to see that done with haste. There was a short timeframe given for the surrenders and a little longer given for the pull-outs from other areas. This was the opening Allied position on the armistice.
The Soviets had many issues with what was presented to them and rejected several demands outright while offering what they deemed ‘solutions’ to others. Robb was told that the positions he put forward were those of an alliance which had just won a war and that hadn’t occurred. There would be no diktat imposed upon the Soviet Union. Its forces would withdraw from American soil and other places such as Caribbean islands which were colonial possessions of Allied nations, from the Azores, from Iceland and out of Norway as well as making an exchange of captives apart from those which wished not to leave. There would further discussions on naval activity on the world’s oceans, yes, but that would be two ways to with no further Allied penetrations of what the Soviets called their historic waters. As to the demands made about territory which their own allies held, those demands wouldn’t be met either. Cuba had taken what was rightfully it’s, the people’s republics in the eastern Caribbean were all legitimate, there had been a referendum in Belize for it to join with Guatemala after liberation, the Canal Zone belonged to Panama, Vietnam was establishing order following genocide in Cambodia and those Persian Gulf islands had been in Iranian hands since the early Seventies when the US-backed Shah of Iran had taken what was rightfully theirs. Furthermore, how could the Soviet Union force other countries to do such things when there were American forces on Mexican soil… to say nothing of the recent nuclear attacks there?
Consulting with the Allied delegations, though in the main getting his instructions from President Glenn – who was fighting Congress over their own demands to have real-time input into the armistice talks –, Robb doubled down and promised later increased Allied demands. There was a strategy being followed here in doing this: it wasn’t an act of striking out just for the hell of it. The Soviets could accept the terms of the armistice offered or the Allies would consider that the ceasefire had been agreed in bad faith and thus treat it now as null and void. In seeing the latter occur, the Allies would have the fight return to the battlefield rather than the negotiating table. When the Soviets returned to talk again, as Robb told them that they would end up doing so, the Allies would have those initial demands plus further ones too which would include the surrender of additional Soviet forces elsewhere rather than allowing them to depart. Moreover, there would be the matter of the Soviet presence in China to address in a second round of armistice talks too. A retort came where the Soviets stated that victory on the battlefield was something that the Allies couldn’t win and there was also the issue of the EDA agreeing to an armistice too.
Told of this latter remark, Glenn had Robb deliver a statement from him personally:
The United States, supported at every turn by the members of the Allies, has fought alone before and will do so once again if need be. Notwithstanding that, the European Defence Alliance and the Allies are fully committed to supporting one another in war as has been shown before the ceasefire; thus no signed agreement will occur in Luxembourg without one in Orangetown, and vice versa. The Soviet Union and its allies will face further defeat on the battlefield should they wish to see the matter returned to there, rather than carry on talking at Orangetown to find a non-violent solution to firmly ending the war.
A delay came. The Soviets at Orangetown said nothing significant among themselves (the whole bugging operation was turning out to be a washout) though opened communications with home. They had brought their own links in the form of satellite phones and man-portable antenna arrays to go with them: this had all come off the Il-86 at Gander and gone into the 767 with protests made while snooping done upon it all. This was no commercial set-up but a KGB system where there was a lone satellite up over the Arctic waiting for the use of such a method of communication. The Allies were waiting too. They’d suspected that – in the words of one Americans – ‘the Russkies will want to call home to mama’ and had that confirmed on the ground at Gander. Military communications sites across the world were all ready to intercept and decode what was said, doing what the Allies had always been good at.
Everything said was in the hands of Robb when the Soviets returned to the talks.
The Soviets threw many of their allies under the bus. They had come to New York expecting worse and everything was just one big game in terms of the refusals, counteroffers and whataboutism. Each and every Allied demand was acceded to in terms of those being the basis for an armistice. There were further matters to be discussed for a final peace and this would cover many matters such as financial affairs, full restoration of diplomatic ties, trade matters and international agreements on a variety of issues, but this here was supposed to be done. What Robb was told though was that things were going to be ‘difficult’ when it came to certain countries honouring the agreement made. Robb queried these. Cuba’s position on Guantanamo Bay, Guatemala’s hold over Belize and Panama with the Canal Zone would present a problem. The Soviets also asked for clarification over the future of Mexico.
This time it was the Americans who broke off the talks. Again, Robb told them, they weren’t conducting these talks in good faith. The Soviets were saying they agreed to what the Allies wanted and then they were saying they couldn’t deliver on key aspects of those. Moreover, throwing in questions over Mexico, which were none of the Soviet Union’s concerns, was a further element of not conducting these talks in the proper manner.
The Soviets were given twenty-four hours to ‘reconsider their behaviour’.
The two sides came back to the talks after that break. The future of Mexico wasn’t mentioned by the Soviets this time. However, there remained the issue of some of their allies. Robb was told that as was the case explained beforehand where the Soviet Union had no control over the actions of North Korea and Revolutionary Mexico ahead of the ceasefire, at this time they were unable to fully speak for several Latin American nations at these armistice talks. Guantanamo Bay and the Canal Zone were issues which needed more time to solve and it was extremely unlikely that Guatemala was going to fold on the matter of Belize. Their lead negotiator held up his hands in an apparent admission of impotency on those. The Allies had intelligence to suggest otherwise though on two of the three. Robb put it direct to them that Castro and Noriega would do as they were told by Moscow; Guatemala’s ruling council was something else and the Allies would ‘deal appropriately’ with the issue of Belize if need be. The response given was that on these issues, Cuba and Panama, like Guatemala, just weren’t going to give in. A solution was proposed by the Soviet Union. On the matter of Panama, like Guatemala, this would be left for the Allies to do with as they must. Cuba’s hold over Guantanamo Bay would be something left off the armistice document. If the Soviets walked away from Cuba entirely, they expressed concern for the fates of the return of so many POWs from that island – almost all of those being Americans – when such matters were important to securing an armistice. Robb wouldn’t stand for this at all: his instructions on Cuba came from the very top.
For the third time, the talks broke down with each side stating that the other was being unreasonable.
How do you solve a problem like Cuba?
The Americans couldn’t allow for Guantanamo Bay to be retained by Cuba. The military value was not overall that important, the issue was a matter of politics more than anything else. It had to end up back in their hands. There were rumblings from other Allies on this matter yet none of this broke out into the open. If it meant a restart of the war, then problems would have cropped up among the alliance, yet while the Soviets were painted as being unreasonable and playing more of their games, the other countries stayed on-side.
The Soviets were forced to act in the face of this. A waiting game wasn’t something they were willing to do, not over an issue like this. Fidel’s brother already lay dead at their hands. Soviet stock in Havana was rather low with their withdrawal from the war – Fidel had yet to understand they were leaving the Western Hemisphere too – and Castro wouldn’t want to give in. They made him though. Gromyko spoke to Fidel himself. He promised him an American invasion if Cuba held out. Let them come, the response was made. Cuba would be all alone if that happened, Gromyko replied, with the Soviet Union washing its hands of the whole matter entirely. Where were Cuba’s armies to oppose that invasion? How could they stop it with no air nor naval cover? Where would the bullets come for Cuba’s remaining guns? Would Cuba be willing to keep a tiny patch of land if the American’s gave Cuba the ‘Mexico treatment’? The Soviet Union had intelligence to suggest that would occur, Castro was told, and Cuba would have to agree to hand back over Guantanamo Bay or face Havana and its other cities ending up like those atomised ruins of Mexico’s once thriving urban areas.
Coming back to Robb, the Soviets told him that they had forced Castro’s hand in the same manner which they aimed to deal with both Noriega and Guatemala’s council. Guantanamo Bay, like the Canal Zone and Belize, would be returned to Allied military control. The armistice agreement would have the insertion of clauses within concerning ‘all parties working post-war to finding peaceful solutions to territorial issues’. Robb discussed this with his president plus also the British foreign secretary who was down in NYC. They agreed those were meaningless words. What mattered was that such places would return to whom they belonged to. Cuba, Guatemala and Panama would all withdraw from each – not surrender in-place, so that would be a domestic issue for Britain and the United States – but they would be lost to those countries.
The New York Armistice Accords (not ‘Orangetown’) were subsequently signed.
The Allies had been preparing for the signing for some time with military forces held ready at the same time to return to combat operations if those failed. In some places, events pre-ceasefire, even post-ceasefire, put them in excellent positions to see either an uncontested or opposed advance to regain territory. Elsewhere, the challenges of moving forward if opposed were militarily impossible and where not opposed, there was the issue of available forces: the latter of particular concern to Britain who had a major troop commitment on the Continent where their forces there were held in-place waiting on armistice talks in Luxembourg to finish too.
Once the deal was struck in New York, the Americans moved to retake what was theirs. They took control of all occupied territory in Arizona, New Mexico and Texas and accepted the surrenders of opposing military forces there. General Lobov – he’d never get his marshal’s star now – surrendered a huge and beaten army from where he’d established his command post at San Angelo. Up in Alaska, the last bits of the Alaskan Panhandle were entered first before Kodiak Island off the mainland and then the Aleutian Islands were liberated. The Florida Keys were moved into, so too the last islands not recently liberated in the US Virgin Islands. American forces arrived in the Yucatán Peninsula by air to take forward staging bases for operations further south: their US-only mission into Panama as well as supporting the British with what occurred over Belize. Then there was Guantanamo Bay too where the US Marines returned to once the Cubans had left.
Portuguese forces, aided by Spain, landed in the Azores to take the surrender of the Soviets there. With movements through Swedish territory though also by air and sea, northern Norway was retaken by the British and Norwegians and so too was Jan Mayen Island when the Spanish sent their marines alongside the Norwegians to that lonely place. West Berlin was somewhere that the Allies agreed to leave to that French & West German force so no Americans nor British went there; meanwhile the British pulled out of their slice of East Germany that they were in. Canada took the Iceland mission due to British inability to field enough resources to do that amongst everything else they were committed to.
The British Armed Forces faced quite the challenge in response to what London told the Allies it would be responsible for when it came to enforcing the armistice agreement’s territorial matters. The Caribbean was full of British sovereign territory under occupation plus there was the matter of Belize too. Dutch marines and French light troops – under British command yet only on paper – landed on Antigua & Barbuda, St. Kitts, St. Lucia and St, Vincent (none of which were British) so that the UK could focus on Barbados and Grenada (again neither being a direct UK holding but with strong tied to Britain in the past). The regimes on all those islands but Grenada fell easily with no more Cuban or Soviet support to them: Grenada was a fight which the British called upon American assistance for when Bishop and Coard ignored what was agreed in New York and fought for their island regime. The Grenada War would last into May. Islands stretching from the UK Virgin Islands to Anguilla & Montserrat, over to the Turks & Caicos Islands and across to the Caymans all saw British forces arrive. Their numbers were small but, thankfully, they didn’t meet with any Cuban resistance. Belize was a big deal. Back in 1982, Britain had won the Belize War yet lost the country in a humiliating defeat in September 1984 despite the far-bigger garrison. Arriving there at the same time as the Guatemalans were leaving, and not taking their surrender, the British still faced combat. The mish-mash of British units faced apparent local armed separatists: these were Guatemalans who weren’t giving up. The Americans offered support, to match what they did in Grenada, but London refused direct US combat forces on the ground just transportation help and a lot of air power. That was given and in the midst of that, several US Air Force aircraft were shot down. Guatemala was thus attacked from the air and then there came an American ground incursion into Guatemala proper from out of Mexico. The Second Belize War grew in scale at a rapid pace, all occurring while the Americans found themselves meeting the opening stages of a guerrilla war inside Yucatán. Belize fell into British hands when they brought over Royal Marines from Europe but none of this was meant to happen. The Soviets refused to take the blame for what Guatemala did and this, while not accepted in both New York nor London, really was beyond their control. They were out of the Western Hemisphere for good leaving Guatemala and Mexico behind like they abandoned Cuba, Grenada, Nicaragua, Panama and everyone else to fend for themselves. They would be very glad to be gone because that fighting in Mexico was only going to expand.
POWs came back. There were those missing among them, neither returned alive nor in body-bags. ‘The missing’ became a big deal and held up the return of Soviet POWs which were eventually meant to go home too. Those whom the Allies didn’t get back were many and varied. There were many people who always went missing in war due to explosions and being buried beneath rubble or lost at sea, yet patterns emerged with ‘the missing’ in the form of Allied military and civilian captives. Those with certain military skills (in the fields of intelligence and such like), intelligence officers covered as diplomats and civilian political figures were not among the returnees. The Guatemalans had many natives of Belize who they never returned. From inside Mexico, US raids into ‘bandit country’ returned with bodies from there but there were others who’d been held there never to be seen again. North Korea was another place where POWs didn’t return from. The country took no part in the ceasefire nor the armistice: there would be a continuation of the Second Korean War there and that wouldn’t be fast over with nor see captives come back in the end too. All such missing returnees from distant POW camps were added to civilians who were absent from liberated areas where the surrenders took place. The United States had seen this already in retaken areas of their country but it was worse the closer to the Mexican border in areas under long-term occupation. So many people just weren’t there with no initial trace of them. Soon enough though they started to find the mass graves and there were prisoners they took who they stripped the rights from – using dubious claims which the other Allies didn’t want to know about – to interrogate them to locate more bodies or be told of what happened to such people.
The things which were uncovered when it came to ‘the missing’ would lead to the armistice which the Allies had with the Soviet Union never turning into a peace treaty. That was the official cause. Though more than that, there were what were deemed ‘America’s Wars’ down through Central America – in Mexico, through Guatemala down to Nicaragua and into Panama – to come. The Soviet domination once here was gone; the United States would have its revenge and some, possibly wild conspiracy theorists but maybe those who had their eyes fully open, would say such was the reason behind the Soviets left the region in the manner which they did.
America’s Wars would last far longer than the Soviet Union did though.
[End of Part VIII]
|
|